This reprint contains

FM 5-34 Changes 1, 2, and 3.

ENGINEER FIELD DATA

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution is authorized to US

Government agencies only to protect technical or operational
information from automatic dissemination under the International
Exchange Program or by other means. This protection applies to
publications required solely for official use and to those containing
valuable technical or operational information. This determination was
made 1 April 1999. Other requests for this document will be referred to
Commandant, US Army Engineer School, ATTN: ATSE-TD-D, Fort
Leonard Wood, MO 65473-8929.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent
disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
 C3, FM 5-34

Change 3 Headquarters
Department of the Army
Washington, DC, 10 April 2003

ENGINEER FIELD DATA

1. Change FM 5-34, 30 August 1999, as follows:

Remove Old Pages Insert New Pages

4-1 and 4-2 4-1 and 4-2

5-11 and 5-12 5-11 and 5-12
8-53 and 8-54 8-53 and 8-54

2. A bar (|) marks new or changed material.

3. File this transmittal sheet in front of the publication.

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution is authorized to

US Government agencies only to protect technical or operational
information from automatic dissemination under the
International Exchange Program or by other means. This
protection applies to publications required solely for official use
and to those containing valuable technical or operational
information. This determination was made 1 April 1999. Other
requests for this document will be referred to Commandant, US
Army Engineer School, ATTN: ATSE-DOT-DD, 320 MANSCEN
Loop, Suite 336, Fort Leonard Wood, MO 65473-8929.

DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will

prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the
document.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

ERIC K. SHINSEKI
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff

Administrative Assistant to the

Secretary of the Army
0307111

DISTRIBUTION:

Active Army, USAR, and ARNG: To be distributed in accordance

with the initial distribution number 110026, requirements for
FM 5-34.

This publication is available on the

General Dennis J. Reimer Training
And Doctrine Digital Library at
www.adtdl.army.mil
 *FM 5-34
Field Manual Headquarters
No. 5-34 Department of the Army
Washington, DC, 30 August 1999

Engineer Field Data

Table of Contents
Page

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

CHAPTER 1. Combat Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Troop-Leading Procedures (TLPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Combat Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Warning Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Operation Order (OPORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Fragmentary Order (FRAGO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Movement Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
March Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Bivouac and Assembly Aeas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Mounted/Dismounted Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Movement Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Local/Job Site Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Patrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Reconnaissance Patrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Combat Patrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Ambush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Raid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution is authorized to US

Government agencies only to protect technical or operational information from
automatic dissemination under the International Exchange Program or by
other means. This protection applies to publications required solely for official
use and to those containing valuable technical or operational information.
This determination was made 1 April 1999. Other requests for this document
will be referred to Commandant, US Army Engineer School, ATTN: ATSE-TD-D,
Fort Leonard Wood, MO 65473-8929.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent
disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.

*This publication supersedes FM 5-34, 14 September 1987.

i
FM 5-34

Page
Fire-Support Procedures and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Call-for-Fire Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Observer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Warning Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Target Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Target Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Method of Engagement (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Method of Fire and Control (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Three Transmissions in a Call for Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Message to Observer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Lateral (Right/Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Range Correction (Up/Down) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Range Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Quick Smoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Fire-Support Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Nuclear, Biological, Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Chemical Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
NBC Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Alarms, Signals, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
MOPP Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
NBC Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Unmasking Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
With Detector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Without Detector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Decontamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Medical Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
General First-Aid Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Field-Sanitation Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Water Disinfection and Quantity Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Calcium Hypochlorite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Iodine Tablets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Boiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Daily Water Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Antenna Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Expedient Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Communications Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Standard Radio-Transmission Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Single-Channel, Ground-to-Air Radio System (SINCGARS) . . . . . . . 1-60

ii
 FM 5-34

Page
Loading Frequencies—Manual (MAN), CUE, and 1-6 . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Clearing Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
Loading Frequency Hop Data (Local Fill) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
Loading Communications-Security (COMSEC) Keys (Local Fill) 1-63
Cold-Start Net Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
CUE Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Late Net Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
CUE/ERF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Operator’s Troubleshooting Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Visual Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Rehearsals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Rehearsal Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
Participant Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71

CHAPTER 2. Threat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Stability Operations and Support Operations Threat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Terrorism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Harassment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Protective Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Mid- to High-Intensity Threat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Threat Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Military Districts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Motorized Infantry Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Infantry and Mechanized Infantry Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Motorized Infantry and Infantry Brigade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Mechanized Infantry and Tank Brigade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Armor and Mechanized – Based Threat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Maneuver Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Maneuver Brigades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Major Threat Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Threat Offensive Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Crossing Capabilities and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Threat’s Offensive River Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Chapter 3. Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Route Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Critical Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Slopes and Radius Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Obstruction (OB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Report and Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Road Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Bridge Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Hasty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

iii
 FM 5-34

Page
Deliberate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Bridge Reconnaissance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Tunnel Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Water-Crossing Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Ford Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Engineer Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Chapter 4. Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Mine Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Minefield Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Detection and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Visual Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Electronic Mine Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Manual Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Obstacle-Breaching Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Obstacle-Reduction Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Standard Lane Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Initial Lane Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Intermediate Lane Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Full Lane Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
North Atlantic Treaty Organizaiton (NATO) Standard Marking . . . . . . 4-17
Combat Roads and Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Expedient Surfaces Over Mud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Chespaling Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Corduroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Tread Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Other Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Expedient Surfaces Over Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Wire Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Sand Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Forward Aviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Army Aircraft and Helicopter Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Construction of Forward Landing Zone or Airstrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Maintenance and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Chapter 5. Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration

Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Maneuver TF Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
TF Commander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Company Commander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
TF Operations and Training Officer (US Army) (S3) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Specific Engineer Coordinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
With a TF Commander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
With a Maneuver Company Commander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
With a TF S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
With a TF S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

iv
 FM 5-34

Page
With a TF Supply Officer (US Army) (S4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
With a Fire-Support Officer (FSO)/ADA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Obstacle Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Obstacle Command and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Report of Intention to Lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Report of Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Report of Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Report of Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Report of Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Report of Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Chapter 6. Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Wire Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Barbed-Wire Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Triple-Standard Concertina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Four-Strand Cattle Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Other Wire Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Antivehicular Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
AT Ditches and Road Craters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Log Cribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Log Hurdles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Log/Steel Post Obstacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Tetrahedrons, Hedgehogs, and Other Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Chapter 7. Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles . . . 7-1

Conventional Minefields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Row Mining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Standard-Pattern Minefields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Hasty Protective Row Minefields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Scatterable Minefields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Modular Pack Mine System (MOPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Volcano . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
ADAM/RAAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Gator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Special-Purpose Munitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
M86 Pursuit Deterrent Munition (PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
M18A1 Claymore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Selectable Lightweight Attack Munition (SLAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
M93 Hornet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Raptor Intelligent Combat Outpost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Minefield Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Marking sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Marking procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
US Mines and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Foreign Mines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

v
 FM 5-34

Page
Chapter 8. Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Weapons Fighting Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Individual Fighting Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Siting to Engage the Enemy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Preparing by Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Crew-Served-Weapons Fighting Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Range Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Sectors of Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Target Reference Points (TRPs)/Reference Points (RPs) . . . . . . . 8-15
Dead Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Maximum Engagement Line (MEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Weapon Reference Point (WRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Preparation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Vehicle Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Hasty Fighting Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Modified Fighting Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Deliberate Fighting Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Protective Fighting Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Artillery and Parapet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Deep-Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Trenches, Revetments, Bunkers, and Shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Trenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Revetments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Retaining Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Facing Revetments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Bunkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Shelters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Camouflage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Position Development Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Lightweight Camouflage Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Emplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Checkpoint Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Tower Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58

Chapter 9. Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators

(MDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Misfires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Nonelectric-Misfire Clearing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Electric-Misfire Clearing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Explosive Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Waterproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Priming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

vi
 FM 5-34

Page
Firing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Charge Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Steel-Cutting Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Timber-Cutting Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Abatis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Breaching Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Counterforce Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Boulder-Blasting Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Cratering Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Breaching Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Bridge Demolitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Abutment and Intermediate-Support Demolitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Demolition Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Equipment/Ammunition Destruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Ammunition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Guns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Armored Fighting Vehicles (AFVs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Wheeled Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Expedient Demolitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Cratering Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Shaped Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Platter Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Grapeshot Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Ammonium Nitrate Satchel Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Bangalore Torpedo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Detonating-Cord Wick (Borehole Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Time Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Gregory Knot (Branch-Line Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
MDI Firing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Stand-Alone System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Combination Firing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Splicing the Shock Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Safety Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
MDI Misfire Clearing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Chapter 10. Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

River-Crossing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Bridging/Rafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Boats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Improved Float Bridge (Ribbon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Long-Term Anchorage Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Approach Guys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Upstream Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Downstream Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Overhead-Cable Design Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

vii
 FM 5-34

Page
Cable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Tower data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Deadman Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Medium Girder Bridge (MGB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
MGB Design—SS, 4 Through 12 Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
MGB Design—DS, 2E + 1 Through 12 Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
MGB Design—DS, 2E + 13 Through 22 Bays (w/o LRS) . . . . . . . . . 10-33
MGB Design—DS, 2E + 13 Through 22 Bays (w/LRS) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Bailey Bridge, Type M-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Truss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Site Reconnaissance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Bridge Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Engineer Multirole Bridge Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Chapter 11. Roads and Airfields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Soils and Geology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Moisture Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Stabilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Engineering Properties of Rocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Runoff Estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Culverts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Open-Ditch Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Expedient Airfield Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Minimum Operating Strip (MOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Work Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Membrane and Mat Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Membranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
M8A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
AM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
M19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Other Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Road Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Elements of a Horizontal Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Degree of Curvature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Arc Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Chord Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Equations for the Simple, Horizontal-Curve Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Radius of Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Tangent Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
External Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26

viii
 FM 5-34

Page
Long Chord (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Middle Ordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Length of Curve (L). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Designing HorizontalCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
Horizontal-Curve Design Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28

Chapter 12. Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Knots and Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Rope Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
One-Rope Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Two-Rope Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Chains and Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Picket Holdfasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20

Chapter 13. Environmental-Risk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Legal and Regulatory Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Risk-Management Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Environmental Benefits of Risk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
The Risk-Management Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Chapter 14. Miscellaneous Field Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Weight and Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Construction Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Electrical Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Lumber Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Trigonometric Functions and Geometric Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
US Equipment and Weapons Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Vehicle Dimensions and Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Expedient Vehicle Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Wheeled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Tracked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Nonstandard Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Other-Than-Rated Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
US Weapons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Operational Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
Levels of Risk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

ix
FM 5-34

Page

List of Figures and Tables

Figures
Figure 1-1. WO format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Figure 1-2. Sample of a company OPORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-3. Halt formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Figure 1-4. Sectors of fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Figure 1-5. Traveling dismounted elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Figure 1-6. Movement formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Figure 1-7. Traveling and traveling overwatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Figure 1-8. Bounding overwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Figure 1-9. Typical organization and employment-point (linear)
ambush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Figure 1-10. Typical organization and employment-point) (vehicular)
ambush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 1-11. Multi-claymore-mine mechanical ambush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 1-12. Typical organization for a raid patrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Figure 1-13. Examples of observer identification and WO . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Figure 1-14. Sample missions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Figure 1-15. Adjusting field artillery fires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Figure 1-16. Adjusting points for quick smoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Figure 1-17. Hasty method for estimating angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Figure 1-18. NBC markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Figure 1-19. CPR in basic life support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Figure 1-20. Field latrines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Figure 1-21. Hand-washing device, using No. 10 can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Figure 1-22. Shower unit, using metal drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Figure 1-23. Jungle-expedient antenna (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Figure 1-24. Long-wire antenna (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Figure 1-25. Expedient, suspended, vertical antennas (FM) . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Figure 1-26. Improvised, center-fed, half-wave antenna (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Figure 1-27. Authentication procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Figure 1-28. RT front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
Figure 1-29. ECCM fill device connected to RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Figure 1-30. Visual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

Figure 2-1. Threat’s minefield, using track-width mines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Figure 2-2. Threat’s minefield, using full-width mines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-3. Threat’s antipersonnel (AP) minefield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

x
 FM 5-34

Page
Figure 3-1. Route-classification formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-2. Radius-of-curvature calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-3. Slope computation (road gradient) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-4. Route-classification overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-5. Sample, road-reconnaissance report (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-6. Sample, road-reconnaissance report (back) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-7. Dimensions for concrete bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-8. Dimensions for a simple stringer bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-9. Dimensions for steel-truss bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3-10. Dimensions for plate-girder bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-11. Dimensions for arch bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Figure 3-12. Dimensions for suspension bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Figure 3-13. Span types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Figure 3-14. Sample, bridge-reconnaissance report (front) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Figure 3-15. Sample, bridge-reconnaissance report (back) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Figure 3-16. Tunnel sketch with required measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Figure 3-17. River or stream measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Figure 3-18. Measuring stream width with a compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Figure 3-19. Measuring stream velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Figure 3-20. Sample, engineer-reconnaissance report (front) . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Figure 3-21. Sample, engineer-reconnaissance report (back) . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Figure 3-22. Overlay symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Figure 3-23. Material, facility equipment, and service symbols . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Figure 4-1. Squad-size sweep team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Figure 4-2. Platoon-size sweep team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-3. Sweep teams in echelon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-4. MICLIC skip zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-5. Using a MICLIC (depth is less than 100 meters) . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-6. Using a MICLIC (depth is uncertain or greater than 100 meters) 4-7
Figure 4-7. Mine-plow width compared to tracked-vehicle widths . . . . . 4-8
Figure 4-8. Mine-roller width compared to tracked-vehicle widths . . . . . 4-8
Figure 4-9. Engineer-blade skim pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Figure 4-10. Initial lane-marking pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Figure 4-11. Intermediate lane-marking pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Figure 4-12. Full lane-marking pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-13. Nonstandard marking devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-14. NATO standard marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Figure 4-15. Combat roads and trails process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4-16. Typical cross-section showing road nomenclature . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4-17. Chespaling-surface road construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Figure 4-18. Corduroy road surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4-19. Fascine corduroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Figure 4-20. Plank tread road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Figure 4-21. Army track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Figure 4-22. Component parts of a Sommerfield truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

xi
FM 5-34

Page
Figure 4-23. Other expedient surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Figure 4-24. Chain-link wire-mesh road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Figure 4-25. Sand grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-26. Geometric layout of landing zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Figure 4-27. Panel layout of landing zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Figure 4-28. Inverted Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Figure 4-29. Standard flight and landing formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Figure 5-1. Obstacle classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Figure 5-2. Obstacle-control measure graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-3. Obstacle-effect graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5-4. Example of enemy obstacle-tracking chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Figure 6-1. Schematic layout of barbed-wire obstacles (defense) . . . . . . . 6-3

Figure 6-2. Perimeter wire (defense) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Figure 6-3. Double-apron fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Figure 6-4. Triple-standard concertina fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Figure 6-5. Installing concertina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Figure 6-6. Joining concertina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Figure 6-7. Four-strand cattle fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Figure 6-8. Tanglefoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Figure 6-9. Knife rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Figure 6-10. Trestle-apron fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Figure 6-11. Eleven-row antivehicular wire obstacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Figure 6-12. AT ditches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Figure 6-13. Rectangular log-crib design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Figure 6-14. Triangular log crib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Figure 6-15. Log hurdles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Figure 6-16. Post obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Figure 6-17. Steel hedgehog and tetrahedron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Figure 6-18. Concrete tetrahedron and cubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Figure 6-19. Heavy equipment tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-20. Jersey barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-21. Concrete-obstacle placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Figure 7-1. Standard disrupt and fix row minefields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Figure 7-2. Standard turn row minefield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-3. Standard block row minefield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-4. Hasty protective row minefield record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Figure 7-5. MOPMS dispenser emplacement and safety zone . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figure 7-6. Standard MOPMS disrupt minefield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figure 7-7. Standard MOPMS fixed minefield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Figure 7-8. Ground/air Volcano disrupt and fixed minefields . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Figure 7-9. Ground/air Volcano turn and block minefields . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-10. M86 PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Figure 7-11. M18A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

xii
 FM 5-34

Page
Figure 7-12. SLAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Figure 7-13. M93 Hornet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Figure 7-14. Hornet reinforcing a conventional minefield . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-15. Hornet reinforcing a Volcano minefield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-16. Hornet area-disruption obstacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Figure 7-17. Hornet gauntlet obstacle (one cluster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Figure 7-18. Hornet gauntlet obstacle (platoon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Figure 7-19. PIP Hornet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-20. Sample DA Form 1355 (front) (standard-pattern minefield) . . 7-21
Figure 7-21. Sample DA Form 1355 (inside) (standard-pattern minefield) 7-22
Figure 7-22. Sample DA Form 1355 (front side) for a Hornet minefield/
munition field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Figure 7-23. Sample DA Form 1355 (back side) for a Hornet minefield/
munition field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Figure 7-24. Standard marking signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Figure 7-25. Minefield marking fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Figure 7-26. AP mines (Korea only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Figure 7-27. AT mines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Figure 7-28. Firing devices and trip flares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Figure 7-29. AP SCATMINEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Figure 7-30. AT SCATMINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Figure 7-31. Foreign AT mines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Figure 7-32. Foreign AP mines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Figure 8-1. Stage 1, preparing a fighting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Figure 8-2. Stage 2, preparing a fighting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Figure 8-3. Stage 3, preparing a fighting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Figure 8-4. Stage 4, preparing a fighting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Figure 8-5. Hasty prone position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Figure 8-6. Two-soldier fighting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Figure 8-7. Two-soldier fighting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Figure 8-8. Three-soldier T-position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Figure 8-9. Planning the fighting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Figure 8-10. Traverse and elevation mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Figure 8-11. Digging the fighting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Figure 8-12. Digging grenade sumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Figure 8-13. Half of a position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Figure 8-14. Two firing platforms with overhead cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figure 8-15. Ammo bearer covering front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figure 8-16. Dug-in position for an MK19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Figure 8-17. Placement of weapon symbol and left and right limits . . . . 8-16
Figure 8-18. Circle value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Figure 8-19. Terrain features for left and right limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Figure 8-20. Target reference points/reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Figure 8-21. Dead space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Figure 8-22. Maximum engagement lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

xiii
FM 5-34

Page
Figure 8-23. Weapon reference point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Figure 8-24. Example of a completed range card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Figure 8-25. Hasty fighting positions for combat vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Figure 8-26. Modified, two-tiered hiding position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Figure 8-27. Modified, two-tiered artillery position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Figure 8-28. Deliberate fighting positions for fighting vehicles . . . . . . . . 8-40
Figure 8-29. 105-mm parapet-position construction detail . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Figure 8-30. Deep-cut position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Figure 8-31. Standard trench traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Figure 8-32. Sandbag revetment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Figure 8-33. Retaining-wall anchoring method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Figure 8-34. Brushwood hurdle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Figure 8-35. Typical bunker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Figure 8-36. Log fighting bunker with overhead cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Figure 8-37. Typical cut-and-cover shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Figure 8-38. Air-transportable prefab shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Figure 8-39. Hasty module determination chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Figure 8-40. Lightweight camouflage screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Figure 8-41. Placing net over vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Figure 8-42. Typical hasty checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Figure 8-43. Typical one-way deliberate checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Figure 8-44. Typical two-way deliberate checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Figure 8-45. 11- x 11-foot guard tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Figure 8-46. 12- x 12-foot guard tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60

Figure 9-1. Priming with detonating cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Figure 9-2. Combination dual-firing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Figure 9-3. Calculation steps for explosives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Figure 9-4. Steel-cutting charge emplacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Figure 9-5. Special steel-cutting charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Figure 9-6. Timber-cutting charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Figure 9-7. Stump-blasting charge placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Figure 9-8. Abatis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Figure 9-9. Breaching-charge calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Figure 9-10. Breaching radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Figure 9-11. Counterforce charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Figure 9-12. Boulder blasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Figure 9-13. Hasty crater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Figure 9-14. Deliberate crater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Figure 9-15. Relieved-face crater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Figure 9-16. Backfilled log-wall breaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Figure 9-17. Log-crib breaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Figure 9-18. Placement of charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Figure 9-19. Explosive packs for destroying small concrete obstacles . . . 9-24
Figure 9-20. Methods of attack on simply supported bridges . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Figure 9-21. Methods of attack on continuous bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Figure 9-22. Placement of 5-5-5-40 charge (triple-nickle forty) . . . . . . . . 9-39

xiv
 FM 5-34

Page
Figure 9-23. Pier demolition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Figure 9-24. Bridge-abutment demolition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Figure 9-25. Demolition reconnaissance report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Figure 9-26. Placing charges on the AFV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Figure 9-27. Shaped charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Figure 9-28. Platter charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Figure 9-29. Grapeshot charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Figure 9-30. Detonating-cord wick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Figure 9-31. Gregory knot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Figure 9-32. MDI firing system (single-primed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Figure 9-33. MDI dual-firing system (dual-primed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Figure 9-34. M11 or M16 branch-line array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Figure 9-35. Combination (MDI and detonating cord) firing system (dual) 9-57

Figure 10-1. Measuring for an overhead-cable anchorage system . . . . . 10-11

Figure 10-2. SS MGB site layout (4 through 12 bays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Figure 10-3. Measuring AR gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Figure 10-4. Construction elements for a push launch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Figure 10-5. Construction elements for a jack launch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Figure 10-6. Calculating H to compare against N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Figure 10-7. Constructing NB and FB bearings (DS, 2E + 1 through
12 bays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Figure 10-8. Calculating H, G, and C to compare against N, T, and D . . . 10-30
Figure 10-9. Constructing NB and FB bearings, 2E + 13 through
22 bays w/o LRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Figure 10-10. Calculating H and G to compare against N and T
(2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Figure 10-11. Gap-rule obstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Figure 10-12. Constructing NB and FB bearings (DS, 2E + 13 through
22 bays w/ LRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Figure 10-13. Calculating H and G to compare against N and T
(DS, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/LRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Figure 10-14. Layout of bridging equipment (on-site) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Figure 10-15. Plan and profile views of a roller layout (triple-truss or
multistory bridge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Figure 10-16. Site profile example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Figure 10-17. Launching-nose composition for SS bridges . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Figure 10-18. Launching-nose composition for DS bridges . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Figure 10-19. Launching-nose composition for TS bridges . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Figure 10-20. Launching-nose composition for DD bridges . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Figure 10-21. Launching-nose composition for TD bridges . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Figure 10-22. Launching-nose composition for DT bridges . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Figure 10-23. Launching-nose composition for TT bridges . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Figure 10-24. Upturned skeleton launching nose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Figure 10-25. Engineer multirole bridge company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

xv
 FM 5-34

Page
Figure 11-1. Field identification of soils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Figure 11-2. Rock identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Figure 11-3. Cross-sectional area of water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Figure 11-4. Minimum fill and cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Figure 11-5. Culvert-length determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Figure 11-6. Expedient-culvert examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Figure 11-7. Open ditch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Figure 11-8. Typical mat and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Figure 11-9. Constructing an MOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Figure 11-10. Cutting an AM2 mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Figure 11-11. AM2, special repair panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Figure 11-12. Cutting an M19 mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Figure 11-13. M19, repair-panel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Figure 11-14. M19, repairing large damaged areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Figure 11-15. Precast concrete-slab-crater repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Figure 11-16. Sand-grid repair method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Figure 11-17. Other repair methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Figure 11-18. Elements of a simple, horizontal curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Figure 11-19. Arc definition for degree of curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Figure 11-20. Chord definition for degree of curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Figure 11-21 Derivation of external distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Figure 11-22. Horizontal curve with no sharpness restriction. . . . . . . . . . 11-29

Figure 12-1. Overhand knot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Figure 12-2. Figure-eight knot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Figure 12-3. Wall knot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Figure 12-4. Single sheet bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Figure 12-5. Double sheet bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-6. Carrick bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-7. Bowline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Figure 12-8. Double bowline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Figure 12-9. Running bowline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Figure 12-10. Bowline on a bight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Figure 12-11. Spanish bowline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Figure 12-12. French bowline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Figure 12-13. Speir knot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Figure 12-14. Cat’s-paw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Figure 12-15. Figure eight with an extra turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Figure 12-16. Butterfly knot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Figure 12-17. Baker bowline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Figure 12-18. Wire-rope clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Figure 12-19. One-rope bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Figure 12-20. Two-rope bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Figure 12-21. Link thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Figure 12-22. Types of hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Figure 12-23. Picket holdfasts (loamy soil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21

xvi
 FM 5-34

Page
Figure 12-24. Preparing a picket holdfast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22

Figure 13-1. Environmental hazard relationship to the risk-management

process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Figure 13-2. Sample risk-management work sheet, all blocks filled in . . 13-4
Figure 13-3. Common environmental hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Figure 13-4. Hazard probability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Figure 13-5. Hazard severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Figure 13-6. Risk-assessment matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Figure 13-7. Environmental-related controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Figure 14-1. Trigonometric functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Figure 14-2. Geometric figures and formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Figure 14-3. Single-vehicle expedient-class overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Figure 14-4. Unit size and installation indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Figure 14-5. Unit identification symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Figure 14-6. Obstacle symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Figure 14-7. Weapon symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
Figure 14-8. Risk management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
Figure 14-9. Levels of decision matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
Figure 14-10. Risk-assessment matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Figure 14-11. Steps in risk management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Figure 14-12. Risk-management work sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33

xvii
FM 5-34

Page

Tables
Table 1-1. Average march rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Table 1-2. Target bracketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Table 1-3. Artillery and mortar smoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Table 1-4. Artillery and mortar flares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Table 1-5. Fire-support munitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Table 1-6. Fire-support system capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Table 1-7. Chemical agents’ characteristics and defense . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Table 1-8. Line-item definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Table 1-9. Types of NBC reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Table 1-10. Alarms and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Table 1-11. MOPP levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Table 1-12. Natural decontaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Table 1-13. First-aid, symptoms with treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Table 1-14. First-aid, treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Table 1-15. MEDEVAC report entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Table 1-16. MEDEVAC request form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Table 1-17. Daily water requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Table 1-18. Communication equipment, tactical radio setsAN/VRC-12
series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Table 1-19. Communications equipment, auxillary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Table 1-20. Communications equipment, wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Table 1-21. SINGCARS, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Table 1-22. SINCGARS radio sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Table 1-23. Voice transmission maximum planning ranges . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Table 1-24. Data transmission maximum planning ranges . . . . . . . . . . 1-61

Table 2-1. Normal parameters for threat’s minefields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Table 2-2. Threat organization, infantry based . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Table 2-3. Principal items of equipment for infantry-based threat . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-4. Threat organization, armor and mechanized based . . . . . . . . 2-8
Table 2-5. Principal items of equipment for armor- and mechanized-based
threat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Table 2-6. Threat’s defensive engineer equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Table 2-7. Threat’s defensive ditching and digging equipment . . . . . . . 2-10
Table 2-8. Light armored vehicles—wheeled capabilties and
characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Table 2-9. Threat’s bridging and rafting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Table 2-10. Threat’s vehicle obstacle-crossing capabilities and
characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Table 2-11. Threat’s amphibious and ferry equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

xviii
 FM 5-34

Page
Table 2-12. Threat’s minefield-reduction equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Table 2-13. Sample, enemy’s obstacle report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Table 2-14. Threat’s river-crossing time line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Table 3-1. Traffic-flow capability based on route width . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Table 3-2. Road-limiting characteristics and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Table 3-3. Roadæsurface materials and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 3-4. Dimensions required on the seven basic bridges . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Table 3-5. Engineer-reconnaissance checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Table 3-6. Ford-site trafficability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Table 4-1. Personnel and equipment requirements for a sweep team . . 4-3
Table 4-2. Route-clearance team organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-3. Nonexplosive obstacle-breaching equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Table 4-4. Lane-marking levels, unit responsibilities, and trigger
events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Table 4-5. Guidelines for lane-marking devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Table 4-6. Army helicopter characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Table 4-7. Combat-area airfield requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Table 4-8. Dust-control requirements for heliports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Table 4-9. Minimum geometric requirements for landing zones in close
battle areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Table 5-1. SCATMINE emplacement authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Table 5-2. Obstacle-control measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Table 5-3. Obstacle numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Table 5-4. Obstacle-type abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Table 5-5. Report of intention to lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Table 5-6. Report of initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Table 5-7. Report of progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Table 5-8. Report of completion of minefield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Table 6-1. Wire and tape obstacle material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Table 6-2. Requirements for 300-meter sections of various wire
obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Table 6-3. Post requirements (post opposing/offset post) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Table 7-1. Standard minefield characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Table 7-2. Class IV/V haul capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Table 7-3. Platoon organization for row mining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Table 7-4. SCATMINEs’ sizes and safety zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Table 7-5. SCATMINEs’ self-destruct times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Table 7-6. Volcano minefield’s characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Table 7-7. ADAM/RAAM minefield’s density and size . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Table 7-8. ADAM/RAAM minefield’s safety zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Table 7-9. Hornet minimum emplacement distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

xix
FM 5-34

Page
Table 7-10. Scatterable minefield’s report and record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Table 7-11. SCATMINE’s warning report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Table 7-12. Scatterable minefield’s marking requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Table 7-13. Characteristics of AP SCATMINEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Table 7-14. Characteristics of AT SCATMINEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Table 8-1. Material thickness for protection against direct and indirect
fires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Table 8-2. Characteristics of individual fighting positions . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Table 8-3. Characteristics of crew-served-weapons fighting positions . . 8-9
Table 8-4. Dimensions of field artillery vehicle positions . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Table 8-5. Dozer team TDP calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Table 8-6. Dozer team HDP calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Table 8-7. ACE/ACE team TDP calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Table 8-8. ACE/ACE team HDP calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Table 8-9. Dimensions of field artillery vehicle positions . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Table 8-10. Dimensions of typical deep-cut positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Table 8-11. Recommended requirements for slope ratios in cuts and
fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Table 8-12. Center-to-center spacing for wood-supporting soil cover to
defeat various contact bursts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Table 8-13. Expedient paints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

Table 9-1. Minimum safe distances for personnel in the open . . . . . . . . 9-2
Table 9-2. Minimum safe distance from transmitter antennas . . . . . . . . 9-3
Table 9-3. Military explosive characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Table 9-4. Steel-cutting formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Table 9-5. C4 required to cut rectangular steel sections of given
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Table 9-6. Values of K for breaching charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Table 9-7. Thickness of breaching charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Table 9-8. Minimum ER values for bottom attack (percent) . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Table 9-9. Minimum Lc values for top attack (midspan) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Table 9-10. Minimum Lc values for arch and portal with pinned-footing
bridge attacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Table 9-11. Gun-destruction charge sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Table 9-12. MDI components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

Table 10-1. Assault-crossing equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Table 10-2. BEBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Table 10-3. Ribbon-bridge allocations (L-series TOE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Table 10-4. Launch restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Table 10-5. Bridge classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Table 10-6. Boat requirements for anchoring a ribbon bridge . . . . . . . . 10-5
Table 10-7. Ribbon-raft design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Table 10-8. Planning factors for rafting operations, raft’s centerline data . 10-7

xx
 FM 5-34

Page
Table 10-9. Unit rafting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Table 10-10. Design of upstream (primary) anchorage systems . . . . . . . 10-8
Table 10-11. Design of downstream (secondary) anchorage systems . . . . 10-9
Table 10-12. Procedures for installing long-term anchorage systems . . . 10-9
Table 10-13. Data for overhead-design sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Table 10-14. Size and number of master cables (C D) for float bridges . 10-12
Table 10-15. Weight and breaking strengths for common cables (cable
capacity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Table 10-16. Tower heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Table 10-17. Anchorage-cable capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Table 10-18. Required HP (lb/sq ft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Table 10-19. O2 ft factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Table 10-20. Flat bearing-plate dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Table 10-21. Flat bearing-plate dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Table 10-22. Dimensions for SS bridges, 4 through 8 bays . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Table 10-23. Dimensions for SS bridges, 9 through 12 bays . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Table 10-24. RB setup and packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Table 10-25. RB setup and packing (LNCG setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Table 10-26. SS pallet loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Table 10-27. Manpower and time requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Table 10-28. Dimensions for DS, 2E + 1 through 12 bays . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Table 10-29. Rule 1 for LNCG, 2E + 1 through 12 bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Table 10-30. Rule 2 for LNCG, 2E + 1 through 12 bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Table 10-31. Rule 3 for N and T, 2E + 1 through 12 bays . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Table 10-32. Rules 4A and 4B for N and T, 2E + 1 through 12 bays . . . 10-32
Table 10-33. DS pallet loads, 1 through 12 bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Table 10-34. Manpower and time requirements, 1 through 12 bays . . . 10-33
Table 10-35. DS dimensions, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS . . . . . . 10-34
Table 10-36. Rule 1 for LNCG, 2E + 13 through 12 bays w/o LRS . . . . 10-36
Table 10-37. Rule 2, identifying N, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS . 10-36
Table 10-38. Rule 3A and 3B for N and T, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o
LRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Table 10-39. DS pallet loads, 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Table 10-40. Manpower and time requirements, 13 through 22 bays w/o
LRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Table 10-41. Dimensions for DS, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/LRS . . . . 10-39
Table 10-42. Minimum distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Table 10-43. Rule 1 for LNCG, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/ LRS . . . . . 10-41
Table 10-44. Rule 2, identifying N, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/ LRS . . 10-42
Table 10-45. DS pallet loads, 2E + 13 through 22 bays with LRS . . . . . 10-42
Table 10-46. Manpower and time requirements, 2E + 13 through 22 bays
w/ LRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Table 10-47. Truss/story configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Table 10-48. Classification of Bailey bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Table 10-49. Safe bearing capacity for various soils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Table 10-50. Safe soil pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

xxi
 FM 5-34

Page
Table 10-51. Roller clearance and grillage height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Table 10-52. Rocking-roller requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Table 10-53. Plain-roller requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Table 10-54. Jack requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Table 10-55. Organization of an assembly party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Table 10-56. Estimated assembly times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Table 11-1. Soil characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Table 11-2. Recommended initial stabilizing agent (percent of weight) . 11-4
Table 11-3. Soil conversion factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Table 11-4. Rock characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Table 11-5. Determining pipe diameter in relation to Qp . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Table 11-6. Recommended gauges for nestable corrugated pipe . . . . . . 11-13
Table 11-7. Strut spacing using 4- by-4 inch timbers with compression
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Table 11-8. Recommended requirements for slope ratios in cuts and
fills— homogeneous soils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Table 11-9. Mat characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Table 12-1. Properties of manila and sisal rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Table 12-2. Breaking strength of 6 by 19 standard wire rope . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Table 12-3. Wire-rope FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Table 12-4. Knots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Table 12-5. Assembling wire-rope eye-loop connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Table 12-6. Properties of chains (FS 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Table 12-7. Safe loads on hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Table 12-8. SWCs for manila-rope slings (standard, three-strand,
splice in each end) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Table 12-9. SWCs for chain slings (new wrought-iron chains) . . . . . . . 12-19
Table 12-10. SWCs for wire-rope slings (new IPS wire rope) . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Table 12-11. Holding power of wooden picket holdfasts in loamy soil . . 12-21

Table 14-1. Specific weights and gravities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Table 14-2. Wire sizes for 110-volt single-phase circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Table 14-3. Wire sizes for 220-volt three-phase circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Table 14-4. Properties of southern pine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Table 14-5. Wood-screw diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Table 14-6. Nail and spike sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Table 14-7. Trigonometric functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Table 14-8. Time-distance conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Table 14-9. Vehicle dimensions and classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Table 14-10. Ranges of common weapons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Table 14-11. US tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Table 14-12. US antiarmor missiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Table 14-13. US field artillery and air-defense weapons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Table 14-14. Conversion factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30

xxii
 FM 5-34

PREFACE
Field Manual (FM) 5-34 provides engineer soldiers at all levels with a source
of reference for doctrine; technical data; and tactics, techniques, and
procedures (TTP). It also provides a source of reference for information most
commonly needed by engineers. Although this manual contains some
information that cannot be found in other manuals, most of the information is
taken from the manuals that engineers most commonly use.

FM 5-34 addresses combat operations, the threat engineer, reconnaissance

operations, mobility operations, defensive operations, demolitions, bridging,
roads and airfields, and rigging. The most pertinent information on these
topics is included in this manual; however, for more detailed information,
users of this manual should check the appropriate manuals in each subject
area.

NOTE: United States (US) policy regarding the use and employment
of antipersonnel land mines (APLs) outlined in this FM is subject to
the convention on Certain Conventional Weapons and Executive
Orders (EOs). Current US policy limits the use of non-self-destructing
APLs to (1) defending the US and its allies from armed aggression
across the Korean demilitarized zone and (2) training personnel
engaged in demining and countermine operations. The use of the
M18A1 claymore in the command-detonation mode is not restricted
under international law or EO.

All references to US employment of non-self-destructing APLs (such as row

mining) in this manual are intended to provide doctrine for use in Korea only.
Detailed doctrine on APLs is also provided to ensure that US forces recognize
how the enemy can employ these weapons.

As the US military seeks to end its reliance on APLs, commanders must

consider the increased use of other systems such as the M18A1 claymore,
nonlethal barriers (such as wire obstacles), sensors and surveillance
platforms, and direct and indirect fires.

The proponent of this publication is HQ TRADOC. To submit changes for

improving this publication use Department of the Army (DA) Form 2028
(Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) and forward to
Commandant, United States Army Engineer School (USAES), ATTN: ATSE-
TD-D, Fort Leonard Wood, Missouri 65473-6650.

The provisions of this publication are the subject of international

standarization agreements (STANAGs) 2002 NBC (Edition 7), Warning Signs

xxiii
FM 5-34

Page
for the Marking of Contaminated or Dangerous Land Areas, Complete
Equipments Supplies and Stores; 2021 ENGR (Edition 5), Computation of
Bridge, Ferry, Raft, and Vehicle Classifications; 2036 ENGR (Edition 5), Land
Mine Laying, Marking, Recording, and Reporting Procedures; and 2047 NBC
(Edition 6), Emergency Alarms of Hazard or Attack (NBC and Air Attack
Only).

Unless otherwise stated, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer

exclusively to men.

xxiv
 Chapter 1
Combat Operations
TROOP-LEADING PROCEDURES (TLPs)
The eight steps of troop leading are—
• Receive the mission.
• Issue a warning order (WO).
• Make a tentative plan that will accomplish the mission.
• Start the necessary movement.
• Reconnoiter.
• Complete the plan.
• Issue orders.
• Supervise and refine the plan.

COMBAT ORDERS
Combat orders are written or oral communications used to transmit
information pertaining to combat operations.

Warning Order
A WO is a preliminary notice of an order or action that is to follow
(see Figure 1-1, page 1-2). WOs help subordinate units and their
staffs prepare for new missions.

Operation Order (OPORD)

An OPORD is a directive a commander issues to subordinate
commanders to coordinate the execution of an operation. An OPORD
always specifies an execution time and date. Figure 1-2, pages 1-4
through 1-11, shows the format for a company OPORD.

Fragmentary Order (FRAGO)

A FRAGO provides timely changes to existing orders to subordinate
and supportive commanders while providing notification to higher
and adjacent commands.

Combat Operations 1-1

FM 5-34

________________
Classification
(Change from oral orders, if any {optional})
A WARNING ORDER DOES NOT AUTHORIZE EXECUTION UNLESS SPECIFICALLY STATED

Copy___of___copies
Issuing headquarters
Place of issue
Date-time group of
signature
Message reference number

WARNING ORDER ________

References: Refer to higher headquarters OPLAN/OPORD, and identify map sheet for
operation.

Optional

Time Zone Used Throughout the Order: (Optional)

Task Organization: (Optional) (See paragraph 1c.)

1. SITUATION.

a. Enemy Forces. Include significant changes in enemy composition dispositions and

courses of action. Information not available for inclusion in the initial WO can be included in
subsequent WOs.

b. Friendly Forces. (Optional) Only address if essential to the WO.

(1) Higher commander’s mission.

(2) Higher commander’s intent.

c. Attachments and Detachments. Initial task organization, only address major unit
changes.

2. MISSION. Issue headquarters’ mission at the time of the WO. This is nothing more than
higher headquarters’ restated mission or commander’s decisions during MDMP.

3. EXECUTION.

Intent:

a. Concept of Operations. Provide as much information as available; there may be none

during the initial WO.

b. Tasks to Maneuver Units. Any information on tasks to units for execution, movement to
initiate, reconnaissance to initiate, or security to emplace.

c. Tasks to Combat-Support Units. See paragraph 3b.

Figure 1-1. WO format

1-2 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

d. Coordinating Instructions. Include any information available when the WO is

issued. It may include the following:

• CCIR.
• Risk guidance.
• Deception guidance.
• Specific priorities, in order of completion.
• Time line.
• Guidance on orders and rehearsals.
• Orders group meeting (attendees, location, and time).
• Earliest movement time and degree of notice.

4. SERVICE SUPPORT. (Optional) Include any known logistics preparation for the
operation.

a. Special Equipment. Identify requirements and coordinate transfer to using unit.

b. Transportation. Identify requirements and coordinate for pre-position of assets.

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL (Optional)

a. Command. State the chain of command if different for the unit SOP.

b. Signal. Identify current SOI edition, and pre-position signal assets to support
operation.

ACKNOWLEDGE: (Mandatory)

NAME (Commander’s last name)

RANK (Commander’s rank)

OFFICIAL: (Optional)

____________________
Classification

Figure 1-1. WO format (continued)

Combat Operations 1-3

FM 5-34

Classification
(Place the classification at the top and bottom of every page of the OPORD).

Copy___of___copies
Issuing headquarters
Place of issue (coordinates)
Date-time group of signature

OPERATION ORDER NUMBER ____ (code name, if used)

Reference(s): Map(s) or other references required.

Time Zone Used Throughout the Order:

Task Organization. By phase, accounts for all platoons and special equipment. Includes the
command or support relationship.

Example:
Phases I - III
Team Alpha Team Bravo Company Control
1/A/45th Engr (OPCON) 2/A/45th Engr (OPCON) A&O/A/45th Engr
(-)
Volcano/A&O/A/45th Engr AVLM/A&O/A/45th Engr

Phase IV
1/A/45th Engr 2/A/45th Engr Company Control
AVLB/A&O/A/45th Engr Volcano/A&O/A/45th Engr A&O/A/45th Engr
(-)
Volcano/A&O/A/45th Engr

1. SITUATION.

a. Enemy Forces.

(1) Terrain and weather. Include—

• Important terrain characteristics and their significance (OCOKA).

• Advantages and disadvantages to enemy/friendly maneuver and

engineer operations.

• Light data and expected weather and their impact on a mission.

(2) Enemy composition, disposition, and strength.

• Ensure that the focus is on the enemy that a supported unit expects
to fight in a sector (or from a BP or strong point) or in a zone. Also
identify adjacent enemy units—those that can reinforce an enemy's
attack or defense.

• List the type of enemy unit; how it is equipped; and its designation,
location, size, and strength.

• List current enemy activities that are pertinent.

• Distinguish known and templated locations of enemy forces/activities.

(3) Capability. List the—

•Combat capability (range and orientation of direct/indirect fires,

CATK forces, reserves, NBC, and ability to reposition).

Figure 1-2. Sample of a company OPORD

1-4 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

• Mobility, countermobility, and survivability capability. This includes

the amount, type, location, and expected employment of breaching
equipment; the amount, type, location, and expected employment of
tactical and protective obstacles; the amount, type, and expected
use of scatterable mines; and the level of expected fortification for
vehicles and infantry.

(4) Intentions. Include—

• The most probable and most dangerous enemy COA.

• How an enemy will probably react to a friendly attack or defense

(especially the expected employment of mobility, countermobility,
and survivability assets).

• The critical enemy events that platoon leaders should look for
during a battle.

NOTE: When briefing an OPORD, use a sketch or sand table to explain the
enemy’s situation or use a map with overlay for very small groups.

b. Friendly Forces.

(1) Higher. Include the—

• TF mission, TF commander's intent, and TF scheme of maneuver/

concept of the operation. This must be complete enough that the
platoon leaders understand the fire (to include the indirect-fire
plan) and maneuver plans of the supported unit.

• SOEO to support the TF’s scheme of maneuver (same as in a TF

OPORD and a TF engineer annex).

(2) Adjacent.

• Include the maneuver missions/events/forces of adjacent units as

they affect a supported unit and an engineer company's mission, to
include specifics of adjacent engineer units, if appropriate.

• Identify the units at the flanks, to the front, and possibly to the
rear.

c. Attachments and Detachments.

• Do not include this subparagraph if the attached/detached units are

clear in the task organization briefed at the beginning of an
OPORD.

• Include the attachments and detachments to/from the engineer

company's TOE for a mission and the effective time period.

Example:

Attachments: Maintenance contact team and medic team are attached to the company effective
______.

Detachments: 1/A/45th is OPCON to Tm Alpha during Phases I-III effective ________.

2/A/45th is OPCON to Tm Bravo during Phases I-III effective ________.

Figure 1-2. Sample of a company OPORD (continued)

Combat Operations 1-5

FM 5-34

NOTES:

1. When briefing an OPORD, use a sketch or sand table to explain the friendly situa-
tion, or use a map with an overlay for very small groups. This may be combined with
the enemy-situation sketch.

2. When briefing an OPORD, use a sketch or sand table to explain the SOEO, or use a
map with an overlay for very small groups. This may be combined with the friendly-
situation sketch.

2. MISSION.

• A clear, concise statement of the who, what, where, when, and why of the engineer company's
mission. The who is the engineer company. The engineer company commander decides what,
when, where, and why based on his mission analysis. The essential tasks the engineer company
commander identifies for the engineer company form the basis for a mission statement.

• An engineer company commander should be as specific as possible. Task organization, command

or support relationships, or other factors may limit the specificity of a mission statement.

The following are examples of typical engineer company mission statements:

Offense: D/51st Engr Bn creates two lanes on Axis Red and at Obj Zulu and emplaces situational
obstacles vic PL Green, 030500 DEC 199_ to support TF 5-21 attack and allow FPOL of follow-on
forces.

Defense: D/51st Engr Bn constructs obstacles and prepares fighting positions to support the TF
2-51 defense in sector 030500 DEC 199_ to allow TF 2-51 to defeat an MRR attack.

3. EXECUTION.

Intent:

• Include a clear, concise statement of what the force must do to succeed with respect to the
enemy and the terrain and to the desired end state.

• Provide a link between the mission and the concept of operation by stating the key tasks that,
with the mission, are the basis for subordinates to exercise an initiative when unanticipated
opportunities arise or when the original concept of operation no longer applies.

• Express intent in four or five sentences. This is mandatory for all orders.

Example:

The purpose of our operation is to overcome the effects of the enemy’s tactical obstacles, by breaching
or bypassing, to get the combat forces of TF 5-79 onto Obj Frank. The end state, from my perspective,
will be two bypasses or breaching lanes cleared and marked for the TF’s assault force, Tm Charlie.
We will be consolidated forward of the enemy’s obstacles, but to the rear of the objective. Be prepared
to move forward to support the TF in establishing a hasty defense.

a. Concept of Operations. Ensure the concept of operations—

• Is a single paragraph. It may be divided into two or more subparagraphs.

• Is concise and understandable.

• Describes—

— The employment of subordinate elements.

Figure 1-2. Sample of a company OPORD (continued)

1-6 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

— The integration of other elements or systems within the operation.

— Any other aspects of the operation that a commander considers

appropriate to clarify the concept and to ensure unity of effort.

NOTE: Depending on the operation, the following subparagraphs may be required

within the concept of operations.

(1) Maneuver.

(2) Fires.

(3) Engineer. Focus on how the forces under company control will
accomplish their assigned tasks.

(4) Air defense.

NOTE: A sketch or sand table should be used to explain the concept of operation
when briefing the OPORD, or a map with an overlay should be used for very small
groups.

b. Tasks to Subordinate Units.

• List specific tasks to subunits retained under company control (platoons, the
TOC, combat trains, company field trains, and others, as the commander
determines).

• List subunits in the same order as in the task organization.

• Include O/O and B/P tasks, and list them in the subunit's paragraph in the
order that they will likely be performed.

• Put missions/tasks common to two or more subunits in coordinating

instructions.

Example:

(1) 1st Plt

a) Construct directed-obstacle groups A1A and A1D.
b) ...
c) ...
(2) 2d Plt...
(3) A&O Plt
a) Construct fighting positions (see survivability matrix).
b) ...

c. Coordinating Instructions.

• List tasks, reporting requirements, and instructions for coordination that

apply to two or more subunits within the company.

• Do not include SOP items unless they are required for emphasis or are a
change from the normal SOP.

• Include, as a minimum, the—

— References to obstacle-execution or survivability matrixes.

— CCIR.

— OEG.

Figure 1-2. Sample of a company OPORD (continued)

Combat Operations 1-7

FM 5-34

— MOPP status (level and effective time period) and any changes in
MOPP level.

— Air-defense warning and weapons-control status.

— Directed coordination between subunits or with adjacent units.

— Sleep plan.

— Priorities of work.

— Lane-marking system.

— Obstacle restrictions, belts, or zones that affect a TF.

— Rehearsals.

— ROE.

— Environmental considerations.

— Instructions about consolidation or reorganization.

NOTES:

1. The sum of all subunit tasks and coordinating instructions balances with the specified
and implied tasks that the commander identified during the planning process.

2. The OPORD should refer to the appropriate obstacle or the other execution
matrixes, survivability matrixes, time lines, and so forth instead of listing the same
information in paragraph 3.b. or 3.c. These items are annexes to the OPORD.

Example:

(1) Coordinating Instructions.

(a) Details for directed-obstacle groups are in the directed-obstacle matrix.

(b) ...
(2) ...

4. SERVICE SUPPORT.

a. Support Concept.

NOTE: Include items only if different from the SOP. Much of the information in
paragraph 4 can easily be included in SOPs. SOPs must be understood and rehearsed.

• Include the concept for providing subunits with CSS before, during, and immediately
after an operation.

• Designate primary and back-up channels for logistical support for each platoon.
(For example, through the company's organic CSS assets, through the supported
unit's CSS system, or through a combination of company and supported unit.)

• Ensure that the support concept is consistent with the company’s task organization
for the mission and command or support relationships.

Figure 1-2. Sample of a company OPORD (continued)

1-8 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

• State what method of company resupply/LOGPAC will be used (service-station

or tailgate) and give the location of resupply points and times, when appropriate.

• Use the supported unit's CSS graphics to help integrate the company’s CSS
plan into the supported unit's plan.

• Give the location, movement, and subsequent locations of critical CSS nodes
before, during, and after a battle. These include the—

— Engineer company trains.

— Engineer battalion trains.
— TF combat and field trains.
— TF main and jump aid stations, patient-collection points, and AXPs.
— TF and engineer UMCP.
— TF and engineer CCPs and EPW collection points.
— TF logistics release points.
— Class IV/V supply points.
— Decontamination sites.
— Location of parent engineer CSS assets pushed forward.
— Collocation of engineer and supported unit CSS assets/nodes.
— Hazardous material/waste collection points.

NOTE: When briefing the OPORD, do not brief the CSS node locations if providing a
CSS overlay or hard copy that would give the same information. Tell the platoon leaders
that they have the information on an overlay or a hard copy.

b. Materiel and Services.

• Outline the platoon allocations of command-regulated materials.

• State what services are available to the platoons through the company and the
supported unit.

• Include the special allowances/plans made for sustaining the special engineer
equipment or forces (for example, fuel tanker dedicated to fueling dozers/ACEs
located at the Class IV/V supply point).

(1) Supply. List the—

• Basic loads that the unit maintains.

• Method of obtaining supplies if different from the support con-

cept.

(a) Class I.

• Ration cycle.

• Basic load that the platoons (days of supply) and the

company trains or field trains maintain.

(b) Class III.

• Top-off times and locations.

• Location of emergency Class III at the company and the

TF.

(c) Classes IV and V.

• Platoon allocation/basic-load small arms.

• Platoon allocation/basic-load demolitions.

Figure 1-2. Sample of a company OPORD (continued)

Combat Operations 1-9

FM 5-34

• Platoon allocation/basic-load mines/Class IV supplies.

• Class IV/V stockages at Class IV/V supply point (on-hand

and allocation from higher) and the planned platoon
allocations by obstacle group.

• Type of mine resupply to be used.

• Location, type, and amount of emergency Class V at the

company and the TF.

• Volcano/MICLIC/MOPMS reload plan.

(d) Other classes of supply. As necessary.

(2) Transportation. Include—

• TF and engineer company haul assets allocated to the platoons

and their priority by subunit.

• Primary, alternate, and dirty MSRs.

• Designated routes from the Class IV/V supply points to the obstacle
groups.

(3) Maintenance.

• Include the maintenance/recovery support from the engineer

company, the parent engineer battalion, or the supported
maneuver unit.

• State the maintenance priorities by vehicle, unit, or a combination

of both.

• Include the authority for controlled substitution.

c. Medical Evacuation and Hospitalization. Include the—

• Wounded-in-action evacuation plan (primary and alternate)—through the

supported unit or through the engineer company.

• Routine sick call location and time.

• Class VIII resupply location, time, and allocation.

d. Personnel Support. Include the—

• Method of handling EPWs—through the supported unit or the engineer company.

• Mail.

• Religious services.

• Graves registration.

e. Civil-Military. Identify engineer supplies, services, or equipment provided by the

HN.

Figure 1-2. Sample of a company OPORD (continued)

1-10 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL.

a. Command. Include the—

• Key leader locations during each phase of the battle (company and TF levels).

• C2 node locations during each phase of the battle (company and TF levels).

• Succession of command that supports the continuity of command during battle.

Example:

(1) Command
(a) I will be with 2d Plt during Phases I and II. During Phase III, I will be
vic CP 43. During Phase IV, I will be vic CP 46. The TF commander...
(b) The company CP will be with the TF main CP. Initial location is...
(c) The succession of command is A&O Plt leader, 2d Plt leader...
(2) ....

b. Signal. Include the—

• Communications/signal peculiarities for an operation (specific code words).

• Visual/audio signals critical to the battle or for use in emergencies.

• SOI index and times when radio listening silence in is effect.

• Method for communications and priority. FM nets that the commander wants
the subunits on to simplify C2.

• Reports that the engineer company commander wants from the subunits.

Acknowledge:

Commander’s signature
Commander’s rank

OFFICIAL:
(Authentication)

ANNEXES: Possible annexes include—

• OPORD-execution matrix
• Directed-obstacle-execution matrix
• Situational-obstacle-execution matrix
• Reserve-obstacle-execution matrix
• Company time line
• Survivability-execution matrix )
• Overlays (TF maneuver, fire-support, SITEMP, engineer company operations graphics,
scheme-of-obstacle overlay, and CSS)
• Environmental considerations

Distribution:

CLASSIFICATION

Figure 1-2. Sample of a company OPORD (continued)

Combat Operations 1-11

FM 5-34

MOVEMENT ORDER
A movement order or briefing should include, as a minimum, the
following:
• Enemy and friendly situation.
• Destination.
• Start, critical, release, and rally points.
• Rate of march and catch up speed (see Figure 1-3 for halt
formations).
• Support (indirect, direct, and medical) and communications.
• Actions on contact.
• Order of march.
• Route/alternate route.
• Distance between vehicles (50 meters, daytime; 25 meters,
nighttime).
• Departure time.
• Location of commander.
• Lead vehicle (security/reconnaissance, see Figure 1-4).

12 o’clock
Coil

9 o’clock 3 o’clock

Herringbone
6 o’clock
12 o’clock is direction of travel

Figure 1-3. Halt formation

Lead vehicle
security/recon
element

Figure 1-4. Sectors of fire

1-12 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

MARCH RATES

Table 1-1. Average march rates

Average Rates (kmph)

Days
Unit On Roads Cross-Country March
(kmph)
Day Night Day Night
Foot troops 4 3.2 2.4 1.6 20-32
Trucks, 40 40 w/lights 12 8 280
general 16 w/bo
Tracked 24 24 w/lights 16 8 240
vehicles 16 w/bo
Truck-drawn 40 40 w/lights 16 8 280
artillery 16 w/bo
Tractor- 32 32 w/lights 16 8 240
drawn 16 w/bo
artillery

NOTE: This table is for general planning and comparison purposes. All the rates are variable
according to the movement conditions as determined by reconnaissance. The average rates
include periodic rest halts.

BIVOUAC AND ASSEMBLY AREAS

An area must be organized to provide a continuous 360o perimeter
security. When any element leaves the perimeter, either shrink the
perimeter or redistribute the perimeter responsibilities. Crew-served
weapons are the basis for a unit’s defense. Individual weapons
provide security for the crew-served weapons and must have
overlapping sectors of fire.
Site selection characteristics are—
• Concealment.
• Cover from direct and indirect fire.
• Defendable terrain.
• Drainage and a surface that will support vehicles.
• Exits and entrances and adequate internal roads or trails.
• Space for dispersing vehicles, personnel, and equipment.
• Suitable landing site nearby for supporting helicopters.
NOTE: Do not include environmentally sensitive areas, such
as designated wetlands, archeological areas, or spawning and
breeding areas for endangered species of flora and fauna, in a
training site.

Combat Operations 1-13

FM 5-34

Quartering party responsibilities are to—

• Reconnoiter the area.
• Check the area for nuclear, biological, chemical (NBC) hazards.
• Check the area for obstacles and mines and then mark or remove
them.
• Check for and cordon off environmentally sensitive areas.
• Designate maintenance areas that are not in or along natural
groundwater runoff routes.
• Choose routes and locations that prevent vehicles from crossing
streams/rivers or bottom land at other-than-designated crossing
points.
• Mark platoon and squad sectors.
• Select a command post (CP) location.
• Select a company trains location.
• Provide guides for the incoming unit(s) to accomplish immediate
occupation.
Recommended priority of work is to—
• Post local security (listening post [LP]/observation post [OP]).
• Position crew-served weapons (vehicle-mounted weapons,
antitank (AT) weapons, and machine guns) and chemical alarms.
• Assign individual fighting positions.
• Clear fields of fire, prepare range cards, and camouflage vehicles.
• Prepare hasty fighting positions.
• Install/change to land-line communication.
• Emplace obstacles and mines.
• Construct primary fighting positions.
• Prepare alternate and supplementary fighting positions.
• Stockpile ammunition, food, and water.
Recommended actions at the bivouac and assembly area are to—
• Reorganize.
• Check weapons.
• Maintain vehicles and supplies.
• Distribute supplies.
• Rest and attend to personal hygiene.

1-14 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

• Consume rations.
• Rehearse.
• Perform precombat checks/inspections.
• Check communications.

MOUNTED/DISMOUNTED OPERATIONS
MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES
Regardless of the means of transportation, units could eventually
move on foot to accomplish their mission. Since a unit is vulnerable
while moving on foot, it must use proper movement techniques and
constant security to avoid unplanned enemy contact. A dismounted
squad moves with one fire team following the other fire teams in the
wedge formation (see Figure 1-5). Larger elements move in a column,
wedge, V-line or echelon left or right (see Figure 1-6, page 1-16). The
enemy’s situation determines which of the following three techniques
will be used: when enemy contact is not likely, TRAVELING (see
Figure 1-7, page 1-16); when enemy contact is possible, TRAVELING
OVERWATCH (see Figure 1-7); when enemy contact is expected,
BOUNDING OVERWATCH (see Figure 1-8, page 1-16). Leaders,
except fire-team leaders, move within a formation where they can
best control the situation and do their job.

ASL

SL

ASL SL ASL
SL m
20
10 m
20 m

Figure 1-5. Traveling dismounted elements

Combat Operations 1-15

FM 5-34

Column Wedge Echelon right

Line

Figure 1-6. Movement formations

Traveling Traveling overwatch

50 m
50 - 400 m

50 - 100 m

100 m
Note: All distances between
elements vary with visibility.

Figure 1-7. Traveling and traveling overwatch

Step 2. Bounding squad secures position.

Step 1. One squad bounds. Platoon moves forward.
Platoon (-) overwatches.

Step 3. Platoon occupies

Bounding squad position (process repeated
as needed).

Platoon (-) in overwatch

position (stationary)

Figure 1-8. Bounding overwatch

1-16 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

LOCAL/JOB SITE SECURITY

Before moving to a job site or a new position, leaders should inform
everyone of warning signals, code words, and pyrotechnics. Upon
arrival at the new location, the unit should—
• Occupy an overwatching position.
• Dispatch a reconnaissance/mine sweeping/NBC team and establish
a hasty perimeter.
• Establish the escape routes and identify the avenues of approach
(AAs), LP/OPs, and crew-served weapons positions.
• Place the LP/OP and NBC alarms.
• Position the crew-served, AT, and automatic weapons and prepare
the range cards.
• Divide the job site/position into defensive sectors and assign sectors
of responsibility.
• Maintain communications with the parent unit.

PATROLLING
The two types of patrols are reconnaissance (zone, area, or route) and
combat (ambush, raid, or tracking). The five key principles of a
successful patrol are security, surprise, coordinated fire, violence, and
control. To prepare for a patrol—
• Issue a WO.
• Conduct the required coordination.
• Issue an OPORD.
• Inspect and rehearse.

RECONNAISSANCE PATROL
Reconnaissance patrols provide the commander with timely, accurate
information of the enemy and the terrain he controls. The
information should be collected following the size, activity, location,
unit, time, and equipment (SALUTE) report format. The gathered
information must be shared with all patrol members. For more
information, see FM 5-170.

COMBAT PATROL
There are many missions a combat patrol can perform. This section
discusses an ambush and a raid, as the techniques for these patrols
apply in general to other combat patrols.

Combat Operations 1-17

FM 5-34

Ambush
An ambush is a surprise attack from a concealed position on a
moving or temporarily halted target. See Figures 1-9 through 1-11.
Key planning points for a successful ambush are—
• Covering the entire kill zone by fire.
• Using existing or reinforcing obstacles (claymores and other
mines) to keep the enemy in the kill zone.
• Protecting the assault and support elements with claymores,
other mines, or explosives.
• Using security elements or teams to isolate the kill zone.
• Assaulting into the kill zone to search dead or wounded,
assembling prisoners, and collecting equipment.
• Timing the actions of all elements to preclude loss of surprise.
• Using only one squad to conduct the entire ambush and rotating
squads over time from the objective release point (ORP) (this
technique is useful when the ambush must be manned for a long
time).

HQ*

Security Element Assault Element

Security Support Search

Team Team Team

Flank restricted by terrain,

mines, man traps, or
combination

Kill-zone target

Security team Assault element

ORP
Security team

*Normally the HQ element will accompany

the assault element.

Figure 1-9. Typical organization and employment-point (linear) ambush

1-18 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

HQ

Assault Security Support

Element Element Element

Demo Search Security Support

Mortar AT
Team Team Team Team
Team Team

Flank restricted by obstacles

Security Support
team team A Assault element

ORP security Support

team team B
Security
team

Figure 1-10. Typical organization and employment-point (vehicular) ambush

Power sources
Claymore wire

Nonelectrical
Nonelectrical blasting cap
blasting cap Electrical Electrical
Detonating blasting cap blasting cap Detonating
cord cord

Claymore mine
Enemy route of Trail
movement

Trip wire

Figure 1-11. Multi-claymore-mine mechanical ambush

Combat Operations 1-19

FM 5-34

Raid
A raid (see Figure 1-12) is an attack on a position or an installation
followed by a preplanned withdrawal. (Squads do not execute
raids.) The sequence of actions for a raid is similar to those of an
ambush. The assault element may have to conduct a breach of an
obstacle. It may have additional tasks to perform on the objective;
for example, demolition of fixed facilities.

Platoon/Patrol
HQ

Squad/Assault Support Security

Element Element Element

Security Security Security

* * * Team Team Team

Machine-Gun Machine-Gun Crew-Served

Team Team Weapon
*Special teams as
needed

Figure 1-12. Typical organization for a raid patrol

FIRE-SUPPORT PROCEDURES AND CHARACTERISTICS

(For more information, see FM 6-30.)

CALL-FOR-FIRE ELEMENTS
Observer Identification
Call sign.

Warning Order
• Type of mission (adjust fire, fire for effect, suppression,
immediate suppression, and immediate smoke).
• Size of element to fire for effect (battery, battalion).
• Method of target location (polar plot, laser polar plot, shift from a
known point, grid).
• Figure 1-13 shows examples of an observer identification and a
WO.

1-20 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

Adjust Fire Mission

Grid method: A57, this is A71, adjust fire, over.

Fire-For-Effect Mission
Polar-plot method: A57, this is A71, fire for effects (battalion call sign is B6S13),
polar, over.
Shift-from-a-known-point method: A57, this is A71, fire for effect, shift known point 3,
over.

Suppression Mission
F28, this is F72, suppress AA7749, over

Immediate Suppression Mission

F28, this is F72, immediate suppression, grid NK453215, over.

Figure 1-13. Examples of observer identification and WO

Target Location
• Grid (six-digit grid).
• Shift from a known point (lateral shift “left or right,” range shift
“add or drop,” vertical shift “up or down”).
• Polar plot (direction and distance from the observer). NOTE: The
fire-direction center (FDC) must know the observer’s
location.

Target Description
• What it is (troops, equipment, supply dump, trucks).
• What it is doing (digging in, in an assembly area).
• How many elements it has (squad, platoon, three trucks, six tanks).
• What the degree of protection is (in open, in foxholes, in bunkers
with overhead cover).
• What the size and shape are, if significant.

Method of Engagement (Optional)

• Type of adjustment (precision or area).
• Danger close.
• Mark.
• Trajectory.
• Ammunition (projectile, high explosive [HE], illumination,
improved capability missile [ICM], smoke; fuze; volume of fire).
• Distribution.

Combat Operations 1-21

FM 5-34

Method of Fire and Control (Optional)

At my command, cannot observe, time on target, continuous
illumination, cease loading, check firing, continuous fire, repeat.

Three Transmissions in a Call for Fire

• Observer identification and WO (see Figure 1-13, page 1-21).
• Target location.
• Description of target, method of engagement, and method of fire
and control.

Message to Observer
After the FDC receives the call for fire, it determines how the
target will be attacked. That decision is announced to the observer
in the form of a message to observer (MTO) (see Figure 1-14). The
MTO consists of the following items:
• Unit(s) to fire.
• Changes to the call for fire.
• Number of rounds.
• Target number.
• Authentication.
When nonsecure communications (except unique fire support such
as suppressive fires posture) are used, challenge and reply
authentication is considered a normal element of initial requests
for indirect fire. The FDC challenges the observer after the last
read back of the fire request.

ADJUSTMENTS
The adjustments that may be required to obtain a round on target
are spotting, lateral, and range.

Spotting
Spotting refers to where a round lands in relation to a target, such
as short or long and how many mils right or left of a target.
Spotting examples are short 40 right or long 50 left.

1-22 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

EXAMPLES
Fire Mission (Grid)
Initial Fire Request
Observer FDC
Z57, this is Z71, adjust fire, over.
This is Z57, adjust fire, out.
Grid NK180513, over.
Grid NK 180513, out.
Infantry platoon in the open, ICM in effect, over.

I authenticate Charlie, over. Infantry platoon in the open, ICM in effect,

authenticate Papa Bravo, over.
Message to Observer
Z, 2 rounds, target AF1027, over.
Z, 2 rounds, target AF1027, out direction 1680,
over. Direction 1680, out.
NOTE: Direction is sent before or with the first subsequent correction.
Fire Mission (Shift)
Intial Fire Request
Observer FDC
H66, this is H44, adjust fire, shift AA7733, over.
This is H66, adjust fire, shift AA7733, over
Direction 5210, left 380, add 400, down 35,
over. Direction 5210, left 380, add 400, down 35, out.
Combat OP in open, ICM in effect, over.
Combat OP in open, ICM in effect, authenticate
Lima Foxtrot, over.
I authenticate Papa, out.
Message to Observer
H, 1 round, target AA7742, over.
H, 1 round, target AA7742, out.
Fire Mission (Polar)
Initial Fire Request
Observer FDC
Z56, this is Z31, fire for effect, polar, over.
This is Z56, fire for effect, polar, out.
Direction 4520, distance 2300, down 35, over.
Direction 4520, distance 2300, down 35, out.
Infantry company in open, ICM, over.
Infantry company in open, ICM, authenticate
Tango Foxtrot, over.
I authenticate Echo, out.
Message to observer
Y, VT, 3 rounds, target AF2036, over.
Y, VT, 3 rounds, target AF2036, out.
Figure 1-14. Sample missions

Lateral (Right/Left)
Adjustment for the lateral shift is from impact to observer target (OT)
line in meters. Corrections of 20 meters or less will be ignored until
firing for effect.
W = Rm
where—
W = lateral shift correction, in meters
target range (to nearest 1,000 meters)
R = OT factor = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1, 000
m = distance between burst and target, in mils

Combat Operations 1-23

FM 5-34

NOTE: If target range is less than 1,000 meters, round to

nearest 100 meters.
Range Correction (Up/Down)
Mechanical time fuze only. Initial range shift correction is used to
bracket target (see Table 1-2).

Table 1-2. Target bracketing

Distance to Target Change

Less than 1,000 +/- 100 meters
1,000 to 1,999 +/- 200 meters
2,000 or greater +/- 400 meters

Range Deviation

Burst
Target W = Rm
3, 500
W = --------------- × 40
1, 000
W = 4 × 40
W = 160 m
(mil relation formula)

OBS

Example Deviation Corrections

OT
Deviation
Example Distance OT Factor Spotting
Correction
(Meters)

1 4,000 4 40R Left 160

2 2,500 2 100L Right 200
3 3,400 3 50L Right 150
4 1,500 2 20R Left 40
5 800 8 40L Right 30
Degrees to mils 1 degree = 178 mils

Figure 1-15. Adjusting field artillery fires

1-24 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

QUICK SMOKE
When using quick smoke, consider the wind speed and direction, the
required smoke duration, and other friendly units in the area (see
Figure 1-16).
EXAMPLE:
QUICK SMOKE
“M6J41, this is B5T36, adjust fire/fire for effect, over.”
“Grid BS612327, direction 1600, over.”
“Enemy OP, HC smoke in effect, over.”

Combat Operations 1-25

FM 5-34

Adjusting Points for Quick Smoke

Wind Direction Adjusting Point with

Delivery Technique
Cross Head Tail Respect to—
Quick WP 200S-150UW 100S 200S
Area to be obscured or screened
(small area/
Smk 200S-200UW 100S 400S on MT line
suppression)

S=short UW=upwind Data in meters 105-mm and 155-mm howitze

Adjusting Smoke in a Crosswind

Known Data
Wind direction - cross
Area to be smoked - 400 m
Type smoke -smk Crosswind Adjusting point
Weapon - 155-mm howitzer

200 m
Maneuver - target line
400 m

Maneuver element 200 m Target

Placing Smoke in a Crosswind

FO 100 m
Maneuver - target line

100 m
Maneuver element Crosswind Target

Point at which smoke is placed

Placing Smoke in a Tailwind

Wind Direction Adjusting Point with

Delivery Technique
Cross Head Tail Respect to—
Quick WP 200S-150UW 100S 200S
Area to be obscured or screened
(small-area/
Smk 200S-200UW 100S 400S on MT line
suppression)
S=short UW=upwind Data in meters 105-mm and 155-mm howitzer

Maneuver - target line

Tailwind
Maneuver element 200 m Target
Point at which smoke
is placed
FO
Figure 1-16. Adjusting points for quick smoke

1-26 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

Table 1-3. Artillery and mortar smoke

Time Average Obscuration Length,
Needed to Average Wind Direction
Delivery Type of Build Burning (m per round)
System Round Effective Time
Smoke (min) Head/
Cross Quartering
(min) Tail

155 mm WP 0.5 1-1.5 100 75 50

HC 1-1.5 4 350 250 75
105 mm WP 0.5 1-1.5 75 60 50
HC 1-1.5 3 250 175 50
107 mm WP 0.5 1 200 80 40
81 mm WP 0.5 1 100 60 40

Angle Estimation

A B

300 180 125

Numbers represent mils

100 70 30

Figure 1-17. Hasty method for estimating angle

Table 1-4. Artillery and mortar flares

Illum Continuous Diameter of
Type Range Candle-
Time Illum Illum Area
Weapon/Round (m) power
(sec) (rounds per min) (m)

81 mm/M301A3 3,300 75 2 1,100 500,000

107 mm/M355A2 5,500 90 2 1,500 850,000

105 mm/M314 8,500 60 2 1,000 600,000

155 mm/M118 11,600 60 2 1,000 500,000

155 mm/M485 14,000 120+ 1 2,000 1,000,000

Combat Operations 1-27

FM 5-34

FIRE-SUPPORT EQUIPMENT

Table 1-5. Fire-support munitions

Ammunition Fuzes

Type Typical Targets Type Typical Targets

HE Personnel, light Impact (quick) Surface targets

armor, crew
weapons

HEAT/HEP-T (105 Light armor, light Delay Cratering, heavily wooded

only) skin vehicles

DPICM All targets Mechanical time Dug-in, defilade positions

APERS (105 only) Personnel Proximity (VT) Dug-in, defilade positions

WP Vehicles, fuel/ Concrete piercing Bunkers

ammo stores (also
used as quick
smoke)

Smoke Screening

Illum Night/darkness

Copperhead Armor, point

targets

RAP Long-range area

targets

Scatterable mines Mines, area denial

(ADAM/RAAM) (long and short
duration)

Nuclear

Chemical

1-28 Combat Operations

 Table 1-6. Fire-support system capabilities

155-mm
105-mm 105-mm 105-mm 144-mm 155-mm 203-mm
Howitzer, MLRS M70
Howitzer, Howitzer, Howitzer, Howitzer, Howitzer, Howitzer,
M109A6 ATACMS
M119A1 M101A1 M102 M198 M109A2-5 M110A2
Paladin

20,100 15,100 15,300 30,100 23,500 30,000 30,000 32,000+

Max range (A2-4) (rockets)
w/ RAP (m) 30,000 164,000
(A5) (ATACMS)

Max range 14,000 11,000 11,400 24,000 18,000 22,000 22,900 NA

w/o RAP
(m)

Max FPF 210 210 210 200 200 150 NA NA

width (m) 6 tubes 6 tubes 6 tubes 4 tubes 4 tubes 3 tubes

Max rate of 6 10 10 4 4 4 1.5 NA

fire
(rd/min)
(first 3 min)

3 3 3 2 1 1 0.5 12
Sustained (rockets)
rate of fire 1 or 2
(rd/min) (10 sec
(ATACMS)
FM 5-34

Combat Operations 1-29

 FM 5-34

Table 1-7. Chemical agents’ characteristics and defense

Individual US Agents Equivalent
Dissemi- Effects Protection
Type of Means of Symptoms Action
CHEMICAL AGENTS

nation on Require- Field

Agent Detection in Soldiers Rate Decontami- Symbol/
Method Soldiers First Aid ment Character-
nation Name
istics

1-30 Combat Operations

Nerve Aerosol or Chemical- Difficult Incapaci- Very rapid Give Nonpersis- GA/Tabun Colorless
vapor agent breathing, tates; kills by inhala- nerve tent—none Protective GB/Sarin
detection kits drooling, if high tion; slow agent needed mask GD/Soman
and paper to nausea, concen- through antidote and
detect vomiting, tration is skin injection. Persistent— clothing
liquids convulsions, inhaled Flush eyes
and Artificial with water.
Liquid Incapaci- Delayed VX
sometimes respira- Decontami-
droplet tates; kills through Thickened
dim vision tion may nate skin
if conta- skin, more G-agent
be using
minated rapid
neces- M258A1 kit
skin is not through
sary. or M291 skin
deconta- eyes
NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, CHEMICAL

decontami-
minated
taion kit
rapidly
(SDK).
 Table 1-7. Chemical agents’ characteristics and defense (continued)
Individual US Agents Equivalent
Dissemi- Effects Protection
Type of Means of Symptoms Action
nation on Require- Field
Agent Detection in Soldiers Rate Decontami- Symbol/
Method Soldiers First Aid ment Character-
nation Name
istics

Blister Liquid Chemical- Mustard, Blisters Blistering None Flush eyes Protective Mustard Pale yellow
droplet or agent nitrogen skin; is delayed with water. mask and (HD) droplets
vapors detector kits mustard— destruc- hours to Decontami- clothing Nitrogen- Dark
to detect no early tive to days, eye nate skin mustard droplets
vapors and symptoms. respira- effects with M258A1 (HN)
aerosols; Lewisite, tory tract; more kit or M291
chemical- mustard can cause rapid SDK or wash
agent lewisite— tempo- mustard with soap Lewisite (L) Dark, oily
detector searing of rary blind- lewisite and water. Mustard- droplets
paper to eyes and ness. and phos- lewisite (HL)
detect liquids stinging of Some gene
skin. agents oxime Phosgene
Phosgene sting and very rapid oxime (CX) Colorless
oxime— form droplets
irritation of wheals on
eyes and skin.
nose.
FM 5-34

Combat Operations 1-31

 FM 5-34

Table 1-7. Chemical agents’ characteristics and defense (continued)

Individual US Agents Equivalent
Dissemi- Effects Protection
Type of Means of Symptoms Action
nation on Require- Field
Agent Detection in Soldiers Rate Decontami- Symbol/
Method Soldiers First Aid ment Character-
nation Name
istics

1-32 Combat Operations

Blood Vapor Chemical- Convul- Incapaci- Rapid Mask, None Protective Hydrogen
(gas) agent sions and tates; artificial mask cyanide
detector kits coma kills if respiration (AC) Colorless
to detect high con- may be Cyanogen
vapors and centra- necessary chloride
aerosols; tion is (CK)
chemical- inhaled
agent
detector
Choking Vapor Coughing, Damag- Immedi- For se- None
paper to Protective Phosgene Colorless
(gas) choking, es and ate to 3 vere
detect liquids mask (CG)
nausea, floods hours symp-
and lungs toms,
headache avoid
move-
ment and
keep
warm.
 FM 5-34

NBC REPORTS
Table 1-8. Line-item definitions
Line Nuclear Chemical & Biological Remarks

A Strike serial number Strike serial number Assigned by div NBC center
B Position of observer Position of observer Use grid coordinates (UTM) or
place.
C Direction of attack from Direction of attack from Nuc: DMN or MMN, DTN or
observer; include unit of observer MTN,DGN or MGN
measure Chem: Direction measured
clockwise from GN or MN
(state which) in degrees or mils
(state which)
D DTG of detonation DTG for start of attack Nuc: Use Zulu time.
Chem: State time zone used.
E NA DTG for end of attack State time zone used.
F Location of area attacked Location of area attacked Use grid coordinates (or
place). State whether location
is actual or estimated.
G Suspected or observed Kind of attack State whether attack was by
event and means of artillery, mortars, rockets, mis-
delivery or kind of attack siles, bombs, or spray.
H Type of burst Type of agent/ type of Nuc: Specify air, surface, or
burst: P or NP subsurface.
Chem: State if ground, air, or
spray attack.
I NA Number of munitions or If known
aircraft
J Flash-to-bang time NA Use seconds.
K Crater present or absent Description of terrain and Nuc: Send in meters.
and diameter vegetation Chem: Send in NBC 6.
L Cloud width at H+5 min NA State if measure is deg or mils.
M Stabilized cloud top or NA Nuc: State whether angle is
bottom angle or cloud cloud top or bottom.
top or bottom height at Chem: State if height is cloud
H+10 min. top or bottom and if measured
in m or ft.
N Est yield NA Send as kt.
O Reference date-time for NA Use when contours are plotted
estimated at H+1.
contour line when not
H+1.
P Radar NA
purposes only
PA NA Predicted HA (coordi- If wind speed is 10 kmph or
nates) less, item is 010 (radius of the
HA in km)
PAR Coordinates of external NA Six-digit coordinates; letter R
contours of radioactive for radar set
cloud
PB NA Duration of hazard in In days, hours, minutes, and so
attack area and HA on.

Combat Operations 1-33

FM 5-34

Table 1-8. Line-item definitions (continued)

Line Nuclear Chemical & Biological Remarks

PBR Downwind direction of NA DGM or MMN, DTN or MTN,

radioactive cloud and DGN or MGN; letter R for radar
unit of measure set
Q Location of reading Location of sampling and Nuc: UTM or place
type of sample Chem: UTM or place; state if
test was air or liquid.
R Dose rate or actual value NA State dose rate in cGyph. See
of decay exponent sample NBC 4 for terms asso-
ciated with this line.
S DTG of reading DTG contamination State time initial ID test sample
detected or reading was taken.
T H+1 DTG DTG of latest contamina- NBC 5 and 6 reports only
tion survey of the area
U 1,000-cGyph contour line NA Plot in red.
V 300-cGyph contour line NA Plot in green.
W 100-cGyph contour line NA Plot in blue.
X 20-cGyph contour line Area of actual contami- Nuc: Plot in black.
(30 cGyph contour line nation Chem: Plot in yellow.
used by other NATO
forces)
Y Direction of left and right Downwind direction of Nuc: Direction measured
radical lines hazard and wind speed clockwise from GN to the left
and then to the right radial
lines (deg or mils, state which)
4 digits each.
Chem: Direction, 4
digits (deg or mils) and wind
speed, 3 digits (kmph)
Z Effective wind speed. NA 3 digits: Effective wind speed
(kmph
Downwind distance of 3 digits: Downwind distance of
Zone I zone 1 (km or NM)
Cloud radius 2 digits: Cloud radius (km or
(Include unit of measure NM)
for each category.) If wind speed is less than 8
kmph, this line contains only 3-
digit radius of zone 1 (km)
ZA NA Significant weather phe- Air stability (2 digits), tempera-
nomena ture in centigrade (2 digits),
humidity (1 digit), significant
weather phenomena (1 digit),
and cloud cover (1 digit).
ZB Used to transmit correla- Remarks Include any additional informa-
tion or transmission fac- tion.
tors

1-34 Combat Operations

 Table 1-9. Types of NBC reports

Line Nuclear Chemical Biological

NBC 1 Report (Observer’s Report)

B NB062634 LB200300 LB206300
C 90o Grid
D 201405ZMAR96 201405ZMAR96 200410ZMAR96
E 201412ZMAR96 200414ZMAR96
F LB206300Est LB206300 Est LB206300 Act
G Aircraft Bomblets Aerial spray
H Surface Nerve, V, air burst Unknown
J 60 sec
L
15o
M
NOTE: Line items B, D, H, and either C or F should always be reported; other line items may be used if the information is known.

NBC 2 Report (Evaluated Data)

A A024 B002 C001
D 201405ZMAR96 200945ZMAR96 201395ZMAR96
F LB187486 Act LB126456 Act LB206300 Act
G Aircraft Bomblets Unknown
H Surface Nerve, V, air burst Unknown
N 50
Y 0270o 015 kmph
ZA 518640
NOTES:
1. This report is normally based on two or more NBC 1 reports. It includes an attack location and, in the case of a nuclear detona-
tion, an evaluated yield.
2. Refer to the chemical downwind message to determine cloud cover, significant weather phenomena, and air stability.
FM 5-34

Combat Operations 1-35

 Table 1-9. Types of NBC reports (continued)

Line Nuclear Chemical Biological

FM 5-34

NBC 3 Report (Immediate Warning of Expected Contamination)

A A024 B002 C003
D 201405ZMAR96 201415ZMAR96 200530ZMAR96
F WQ360540 Est WQ350560 Act WQ360540 to WQ368548
H Unknown
N 50 Nerve, V, air burst
PA WQ555046
WQ555046 WQ554050
WQ554050 WQ635045

1-36 Combat Operations

WQ635045 WQ645044
WQ645044 WQ060040
PB WQ060040 0270o, 015 kmph
In attack area, 2-4 days
Y In hazardous area, 1-2 days
Z 027720312 0270o, 015 kmph
ZA 01902505
518640
NOTES:
1. If the effective windspeed is less than 8 kmph, line Z of the NBC 3 (nuclear) consists of three digits for the radius of zone 1.
2. If the windspeed is less than 10 kmph, line PA of the NBC 3 (chemical) is 010, which is the radius of the hazardous area.

NBC 4 Report (Reconnaissance, Monitoring, and Survey Results)

H Nerve, V Unk, susp, bio

Q WQ354456 WQ354678, Liquid WQ555046
R 35
S 201535ZMAR96 170610ZMAR96 200630ZMAR96
NOTES:
1. Line items H, Q, R, and S may be repeated as often as necessary.
2. Radiation dose rates are measured in the open, with the instrument 1 meter above the ground.
3. In line R, descriptive words such as initial, peak increasing, decreasing, special, series, verification, or summary may be added.
4. If readings are taken inside a vehicle or shelter, also give the transmission factor.
 Table 1-9. Types of NBC reports (continued)

Line Nuclear Chemical Biological

NBC 5 Report (Areas of Actual Contamination)

A A0012 B005
D 200700ZMAR96
H Nerve, V, air burst
S 201005ZMAR96
T 201505ZMAR96 201110ZMAR96
U
V ND651455
ND810510
ND821459
ND651455
W ND604718
ND991686
ND114420
ND595007
X ND206991
ND201576
ND200787
ND206991
NOTE: This report is best sent as an overlay, if time and the tactical situation permits.
FM 5-34

Combat Operations 1-37

 Table 1- 9. Types of NBC reports (continued)
FM 5-34

Line Chemical or Biological

NBC 6 Report (Detailed Information on Chemical or Biological Attacks)

A B001
D 200945ZMAY96
E 200950ZMAY96

1-38 Combat Operations

F WQ450350, Act
G Artillery
H Nerve, V, air burst
I 20 rounds
K Mostly small houses and barns, elevation 600 meters
M Attack received as counterfire, enemy bypassed on right flank of attack area
Q Liquid ground sample taken by detection team in attack area
S 201005ZMAY96
T 201110ZMAY96
X As per overlay
Y Downwind direction is 0090o; windspeed is 010 kmph.
ZB This is the only chemical attack in our area.

NOTES:
1. This report is submitted only when requested.
2. This report is completed by battalion and higher NBC personnel. It is in narrative form, giving as much
detailed information as possible for each line item.
 FM 5-34

ALARMS, SIGNALS, AND WARNINGS

Table 1-10. Alarms and signals

Type Chemical/Biological Nuclear

Vocal Gas or Spray Fallout

Sound Succession of short signals

• Metal to metal
• Short horn blasts
• Interrupted warbling siren

Visual Fists over shoulder or posted signs

Audio/visual M8A1, CAM, VDR2, M22 (CAA)

MOPP LEVELS

Table 1-11. MOPP levels

MOPP MOPP MOPP 0 MOPP 1 MOPP 2 MOPP 3 MOPP 4 Mask

Equipment Ready Only

Mask Carried Carried Carried Carried Worn1 Worn Worn

Overgarment Ready3 Available4 Worn1 Worn1 Worn1 Worn

Vinyl overboot Ready3 Available4 Available4 Worn Worn Worn

Gloves Ready3 Available4 Available4 Available4 Available4 Worn

Helmet pro- Ready3 Available4 Available4 Worn Worn Worn

tective cover

CPU2 Ready3 Available4 Worn2 Worn2 Worn2 Worn2

1
In hot weather, coat or hood can be left open for ventilation.
2 The CPU is worn under the BDU (primarily applies to SOF, armor vehicle crewmen).
3 Must be available to the soldier within two hours; second set available in 6 hours.
4 Must be within arm’s reach of soldier.

Combat Operations 1-39

FM 5-34

This paragraph implements

STANAGs 2002 and 2047

NBC MARKERS

Foreign Material

Background red
Lettering black
Side contains
contamination symbols:
N - PB
B-b
C - OB

An arrow (dotted line on sign) indicates direction of contamination area. A set of

lines indicates a decontaminated path through the area. A number to the right
of the lines indicates width of this path. At the bottom, “4EPE3” (across, over, or
through) followed by a number indicates the distance across the contaminated
area. If “4EPE3” is crossed out and replaced by “OBbE3A” (detour), then the
area cannot be decontaminated.

NATO MARKERS
28 cm

GAS Chemical ATOM Radiological

cm
20

Yellow White
20
cm

background with background with

red lettering black lettering

Biological GAS MINES Chemical minefield

BIO
Blue background (Unexploded mines)
with red lettering red background with
yellow lettering and
stripe

Figure 1-18. NBC markers

UNMASKING PROCEDURES
With Detector Kit
Use a chemical-agent detector kit (M256 series) to test for the
presence or absence of chemical agents. After determining the
absence of agents, use the following steps to check for chemical-
agent symptoms:

1-40 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34
• Disarm the soldiers.
• Unmask one to two soldiers for 5 minutes and then remask them.
• Examine the soldiers in a shady area for chemical-agent symptoms
for 10 minutes.
• Unmask the remainder of troops if no symptoms appear in the test
soldiers. Continue to watch the soldiers for possible delayed
symptoms.
• Have first-aid treatment immediately available, in case it is needed.
NOTE: Bright light will cause the pupils to contract, which
could be misinterpreted as a nerve-agent symptom.
Without Detector Kit
Use the following steps for field-expedient unmasking:
• Use M8 paper to check for liquid contamination.
• Select one or two soldiers to take a deep breath, hold it, exhale, take
a deep breath, and hold it.
• Breach the seal on their mask. Tell the soldiers to keep their eyes
wide open for 15 seconds. Clear their masks and reestablish the
seal.
• Wait for 10 minutes and watch for symptoms.
• Tell the selected soldiers to unmask for five minutes, if no
symptoms appear. After 5 minutes, tell them to remask.
• Observe them for another 10 minutes for possible symptoms. If no
symptoms develop, the rest of the soldiers can unmask. Keep
watching for any chemical-agent symptoms.
• Have first-aid treatment immediately available, in case it is needed.

DECONTAMINATION
Equipment
Use issued items, whenever available, for expedient
decontamination. Table 1-12 shows some natural decontaminants
that are readily available and frequently occur in nature. While
training on issue equipment (such as the DS-11 device) or
concentrated bleaches (super tropical bleach [STB]), ensure that
runoff does not lead directly to nearby streams or lakes. During
combat operations, try to site or prepare deliberate decontamination
areas to prevent runoff into drinking-water sources. Engineers
typically assist chemical platoons which perform deliberate
equipment decons by constructing sump pits or evaporation areas for
containing contaminated runoff water.

Combat Operations 1-41

FM 5-34

Table 1-12. Natural decontaminants

Decontaminates Use Remarks Cautions

Water NBC Flush contamination from Effective in physically

surface with large removing contamination;
amounts of water. however, contamination is
not neutralized.

Steam NBC Using steam and then Effective in physically

scrubbing is more removing contamination;
effective than using only however, contamination
steam. may not be neutralized.

Absorbents (earth, Chemical Use to physically remove The contamination is

ashes, sawdust, rags, gross contamination from transferred from the sur-
and similar materials) surfaces. face to the absorbent.
The absorbent becomes
contaminated and must
be disposed of accord-
ingly. Sufficient contami-
nation to produce
casualties may well
remain on surfaces.

Personnel
Decontaminate personnel using the buddy system and the
following procedure:
Step 1. Remove and decontaminate the gear. Cover it with STB
dry mix, and brush or rub it into the material. Shake off the
excess. Set the gear aside on an uncontaminated surface.
S te p 2 . De co n t am i n a t e t h e ho od . U s e a n M 25 8A 1 s k i n
decontamination kit or M295 individual equipment
decontamination kit (IEDK). Decontaminate any exposed areas of
the protective mask. Use the instructions and directions in each
IEDK for the decontamination steps and procedures. Lift the hood
up off your buddy’s shoulder by grasping the straps and pulling the
hood over his head until the back of his head is exposed. Roll the
hood tightly around the mask.
NOTE: Control contamination from spreading by putting
all contaminated overgarments and towelettes in one
pile.

Step 3. Remove the overgarment. Remove your buddy’s jacket,

placing it on the ground, black side up. Remove the trousers one
leg at a time. Discard the trousers in a centralized pile to avoid
spreading contamination.

1-42 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

Step 4. Remove the overboots and gloves. Cut the strips off your
buddy’s boots and pull them off. Have your buddy step on the jacket
as you pull off the boots. Remove the gloves. Discard the boots and
gloves into a centralized pile.
Step 5. Put on the overgarments. Open a package of new
overgarments; do not touch them. Have your buddy dress while still
standing on the old overgarments (Step 3).
Step 6. Put on the overboots and gloves. Open a package of new
boots and gloves; do not touch them. Have your buddy put on new
boots and gloves. He can step off the overgarments once his boots and
gloves are on.
Step 7. Secure the hood. Decontaminate your gloves using an
M258A1 skin decontamination kit. Unroll your buddy’s hood and
attach the straps. He should check all zippers and ties on the hood
and overgarment to ensure that they are closed.
Step 8. Reverse roles. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 with your buddy
helping you through the steps.
Step 9. Dig a large hole. Place all the contaminated clothing and
discarded towelettes in the hole and cover them. Mark it as a
contaminated area. You can burn all the contaminated clothing if
you use a slow-burning fuel (kerosene or diesel fuel). DO NOT USE
GASOLlNE; it burns too quickly. Commanders must warn downwind
units of possible downwind vapor hazards, if burning is
accomplished.
Step 10. Secure the gear. Move to an assembly area, time and
situation permitting. The unit can now perform unmasking
procedures to get relief from the protective mask.

Combat Operations 1-43

FM 5-34

MEDICAL PROCEDURES
GENERAL FIRST-AID PROCEDURES
Table 1-13. First aid, symptoms with treatment

Common Wounds and Injuries

Problem Symptom First Aid

Head wound Possible scalp wound, headaches, Leave any brain tissue as is and cover
recent unconsciousness, blood or fluid with a sterile dressing. Secure the
from ears or nose, slow breathing, vom- dressing, and make sure that the vic-
iting, nausea, convulsions tim’s head is higher than his body.
Jaw wound Elevate the head slightly, clear the air-
way, control the bleeding, and
protect the wound. Position the
victim’s head to allow for drainage from
his mouth. Do not give morphine.
Treat for shock, as needed.
Belly wound Leave all organs as they are, and
loosely place a sterile dressing over
them. Do not give any food or liquid to
the victim. Leave him on his back with
his head turned to one side.
Chest wound Have the victim breathe out and hold
(sucking) his breath, if possible. Seal the wound,
airtight, with plastic or foil. Cover the
wound with a dry, sterile dressing.
Secure it with bandages around the vic-
tim’s body. Ensure that the wound is
airtight and fully covered.
Burns and Heat Injuries
Burns 1st degree—red skin Do not remove the clothes around the
2nd degree—blistered skin burn area. Do not apply grease or oint-
3d degree—destroyed tissue ment. Cover the burn with a sterile
dressing. Give the victim cool salt/soda
water.
Heat cramps Muscle cramps of the abdomen, legs, Move the victim to a shady area and
or arms loosen his clothing. Give him large
amounts of cold salt water. (Dissolve
two salt tablets or 1/4 teaspoon of table
salt in a canteen of cool water.)
Heat exhaustion Headache, excessive sweating, weak- Lay the victim in a shady area and
ness, dizziness, nausea, and muscle loosen his clothing. If he is
cramps; pale, cool, and moist clammy conscious, ensure that he drinks three
skin to five canteens of cool salt water in a
12-hour period. Prepare salt water as
for heat cramps.
Heatstroke (sun- No sweating (hot, dry skin); collapse Promptly immerse the victim in the
stroke) and unconsciousness may come sud- coldest water possible. Add ice, if avail-
denly or may be preceded by head- able. If you cannot immerse the victim,
ache, dizziness, fast pulse, nausea, move him to a shady area, remove his
vomiting, and mental confusion. clothing, and keep him wet by pouring
water over his entire body. Fan his
body continuously. Transport him to the
nearest medical facility at once, keep-
ing him cool during transport. If he
becomes conscious, give him cool salt
water, prepared as for heat cramps.

1-44 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

Table 1-13. First aid, symptoms with treatment (continued)

Wet- or Cold-Weather Injuries

Problem Symptom First Aid

Frostbite Skin is white, stiff, and numb. Face—cover the frostbitten area with
your warm hands until the victim feels
pain in that area.
Hands—place the frostbitten bare
hands next to the skin in the victim’s
opposite armpits.
Feet—seek a sheltered area. Place the
victim’s bare feet under the
clothing or against the abdomen of
another person.
Deep frostbite—protect the part from
additional injury and get the victim to a
medical treatment facility
immediately. Do not attempt to thaw
deep frostbite. It is dangerous for a vic-
tim to walk on his frostbitten or thawed
feet.
Immersion foot Soles of the feet are wrinkled. Stand- Dry the victim’s feet thoroughly, and get
ing or walking is extremely painful. him to a medical treatment facility
immediately. Try not to let him walk.
Trench foot Numbness, possible tingling or aching Treat as for immersion foot.
sensation, cramping pain, and swelling
Snow blindness Scratchy feeling in eyes Cover the victim’s eyes with a dark
cloth. Transport him to a medical treat-
ment facility at once.

Table 1-14. First aid, treatments

Basic Problems

Problem First Aid

Blocked airway Extend the neck, turn the head to the side, and clear all refuse from the
mouth. Open the airway; restore the breathing and heartbeat.

Bleeding Apply direct pressure on the wound with a sterile dressing. Elevate the victim
so that the wound is above the heart. Use a tourniquet as a last resort.

Wounds Expose the wound, control the bleeding, apply a sterile dressing, and treat for
shock. Do not clean the wound.

Fractures Splint the break where and how it lies. Do not move the patient, if possible.
Immobilize the joint above and below the fracture. Cover any exposed bones
or open wounds.

Shock Lay the patient on his back, elevate his feet, loosen his clothing, and keep him
warm. Feed him hot liquids, if he is conscious. Turn his head to the side if he
is unconscious.

Combat Operations 1-45

FM 5-34

Table 1-14. First aid, treatments (continued)

Stings and Bites

Problem First Aid

Black widow or Keep the victim quiet. Place an ice or a freeze pack, if available, around the
brown recluse area of the bite (helps stop the venom from spreading). Transport the victim to
bite a medical treatment facility immediately.

Scorpion sting or Apply an ice or a freeze pack, if available, for an ordinary scorpion sting or
tarantula bite tarantula bite. (A baking-soda paste applied to the wound may relieve the
pain.) If the sting or bite is on the face, neck, or genital organs or if the sting is
from a South American scorpion, keep the victim as quiet as possible, and
transport him to a medical treatment facility immediately.

Snake bite Keep the victim quiet and reassure him. Place an ice or a freeze pack, if
available, around the area of the bite. Immobilize the affected part in a position
below the heart level, if possible. If the bite is on an arm or a leg, place a
lightly constricting band (boot lace or strip of cloth) between the bite area and
the heart, about 2 to 4 inches above the bite area. Tighten the band so as to
stop blood flow near the skin but not so tight as to stop arterial flow or the
pulse. Transport the victim to a medical treatment facility immediately. Kill the
snake, if possible, without damaging the head; take it to the treatment facility.

Bee or wasp Watch the victim. Treatment is usually not needed. Treat for shock if abnormal
sting reactions occur.

Other Conditions

Blisters Do not open blisters unnecessarily; they are sterile until opened. If you must,
be careful. Wash the area thoroughly with soap and water; apply an antiseptic
to the skin. Sterilize a needle, in the open flame of a match, and puncture the
blister at the edge. Use a sterile gauze pad and apply pressure along the margin
of the blister to remove the fluid. Place a sterile dressing over the area. Do
not attempt self-help for blisters that are in the center palm area.

Boils Do not squeeze a boil; doing so may drive bacteria into the blood stream and
cause internal abscesses or bone infection. This action is dangerous if the
boil is around the nostrils, upper lip, or eyes, as the blood stream in these
areas leads to the brain area. Relieve discomfort from small boils by applying
warm compresses moistened in an Epsom salt solution (1 teaspoon salt to 1
pint of warm water) at 15-minute intervals. Do not apply compresses to facial
boils unless you are under medical direction. If a boil breaks, wipe the pus
away with a sterile pad that is moistened with rubbing alcohol. Work from
healthy skin toward the boil and pus area. Apply a sterile dressing over the
boil.

Unconscious- Apply lifesaving measures as appropriate. If the victim remains unconscious,

ness place him on his abdomen or side with his head turned to one side to prevent
choking on vomit, blood, or other fluid. If he has an abdominal wound, place
him on his back with his head turned to one side. Transport him to a medical
treatment facility immediately. Do not give an unconscious victim any fluids by
mouth. If a victim has fainted, he should regain consciousness within a few
minutes. If you have an ammonia inhalant capsule, break it and place it under
his nose several times for a few seconds. If the victim is sitting up, gently lay
him down, loosen his clothing, and apply a cool, wet cloth to his face. Ensure
that he lies quietly. When a victim is in a sitting position and is about to faint,
lower his head between his knees. Hold him so he doesn’t fall.

1-46 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

CARDIOPULMONARY RESUSCITATION (CPR) PROCEDURES

Place victim flat on back on a hard

surface.
Elevate feet 6 inches.

If he is unconscious, open the airway:

Lift up neck.
Push forehead back.
Clear out mouth if necessary.
Observe for breathing.

If he is not breathing, begin artificial

breathing. Four quick full breaths

If the pulse is absent, begin artificial Check pulse

circulation.

Hands one over the other, two fingers

above rib cage and breastbone junction

Depress sternum 1.5” to 2”

One rescuer— Two rescuers—

15 compressions Five compressions
Rate 80 per minute Rate 60 per minute
Two quick breaths One breath

Continue uninterrupted until life support is available.

Figure 1-19. CPR in basic life support

Combat Operations 1-47

FM 5-34

MEDICAL EVACUATION (MEDEVAC)

Table 1-15 lists the precedence and types of MEDEVAC report
entries. Table 1-16 lists line entries for the MEDEVAC request
form.

Table 1-15. MEDEVAC report entries

Precedence Type

Urgent—evacuation is required as soon Peacetime—actual patient/report may

as possible but NLT 2 hours to save life, be transmitted in plain text.
limb, or eyesight.

Priority—evacuation is required within 4 Wartime—during wartime or training

hours or the patient’s medical condition exercises, report must be transmitted,
could deteriorate to Urgent. secured or encrypted.

Routine—evacuation is required within

24 hours.

Tactical Immediate—a patient’s

medical condition is not Urgent or
Priority, but evacuation is required
ASAP so as not to endanger the unit’s
tactical mission.

1-48 Combat Operations

 Table 1-16. MEDEVAC request form

Where/How
Line Item Explanation Provided By Reason
Obtained

1 Location of Encrypt the grid coordinates of the Map Unit leader(s) Required for the unit that is
pickup site pickup site. When using a numerical or coordinating for the evacuation
digital cipher, use the same set line to vehicle so that the vehicle is
encrypt the grid-zone letters and the dispatched to location(s) of the
coordinates. To avoid a misunderstand- casualty/patient
ing, include a statement that grid-zone
1 letters are included in the message
(unless the unit SOP specifies its use at
all times).

2 Radio Encrypt the frequency of the radio at SOI RTO Required so that the driver of the
frequency, call the pickup site, not a relay frequency. evacuation vehicle, while enroute,
sign and suffix Transmit the call sign in the clear (and can contact the requesting unit for
suffix, if used) of the contact person at more information, such as change
the pickup site. in the situation or directions

3 Number of Includes only applicable information. Evaluation of Medic or Required by the unit that controls
patients by The appropriate amount(s) and brevity patient(s) senior person the evacuation vehicles to assist in
precedence numbers are encrypted: present prioritizing missions when more
(#) - 1 - URGENT than one is received
(#) - 2 - PRIORITY
(#) - 3 - ROUTINE
If you report two or more categories in
the same request, insert “BREAK”
between each category.

4 Special Encrypt the appropriate brevity Evaluation of Medic or Required so that the equipment can
equipment number(s): patient(s) senior person be placed on board the evacuation
required 5 - None present vehicle before the start of the
6 - Hoist mission (The semirigid litter is not
7 - Stokes litter part of a unit’s TOE equipment and
8 - Forest/jungle penetrator is not normally carried aboard the
aircraft.)
FM 5-34

Combat Operations 1-49

 Table 1-16. MEDEVAC request form (continued)

Where/How
Line Item Explanation Provided By Reason
Obtained
FM 5-34

5 Number of Includes only applicable information. Evaluation of Medic or Required so that the appropriate
patients by type Appropriate amount(s) and brevity num- patient(s) senior person number of vehicles will be
bers are encrypted: present dispatched to the pickup site and
(#) - 9 - Litter configured to carry the patients
(#) - 0 - Ambulatory (sitting) requiring evacuation
If requesting MEDEVAC for both types,
insert “BREAK” between each entry.

1-50 Combat Operations

6 Security of 1 - No enemy troops in the area. Evaluation of Unit leader(s) Required to assist the evacuation
Wartime pickup site 2 - Enemy troops possibly in the area, situation crew in determining if assistance is
approach with cautiosn. required to accomplish the mission;
3 - Enemy troops in the area, approach crews must be updated while
with caution. enroute.
4 - Enemy troops in the area, armed
escort required

6 Number and Specific information regarding patient’s Evaluation of Medic or Required to assist evacuation
Peace- type of wound, wounds by type, such as gunshot and patient(s) senior person personnel in determining
time injury, or illness shrapnel; for serious bleeding patients, present treatment and special equipment
report blood type, if known. needed

7 Method of Appropriate brevity number(s) must be Situation and Unit leader(s) Required to assist the evacuation
marking pickup encrypted: available crew in identifying the specific
site 0 - Tree branches, pieces of wood, or materials location of the pickup; note that the
stones place together color of the panels and smoke
1 - Signal lamp or flashlight should not be transmitted until the
2 - Vehicle lights vehicle contacts the unit (just before
3 - Open flame its arrival). For security, the crew
5 - Panels should identify the color, and the
6 - Pyrotechnic signal unit should verify it.
7 - Smoke signal
8 - Signal person
9 - Strips of fabric or parachute
 Table 1-16. MEDEVAC request form (continued)

Where/How
Line Item Explanation Provided By Reason
Obtained

8 Patient’s The number of patients in each Evaluation of Medic or Required to assist in planning for
nationality and category need not be transmitted. The patient(s) senior person destination the facilities and the
status appropriate brevity number(s) is present need for guards; the unit requesting
encrypted: support should ensure that there is
4 - US military an English-speaking representative
5 - US civilian at the pickup site.
6 - Non-US military
7 - Non-US civilian
8 - EPW

9 NBC Used only when applicable. The Evaluation of Medic or Required to assist in planning for
Wartime contamination appropriate brevity number(s) is situation senior person the mission; which evacuation
encrypted: present vehicle will accomplish the mission
9 - Nuclear and when it will be used is
0 - Biological determined.
1 - Chemical

9 Terrain Details of terrain features in and around Area survey Personnel at Required to allow evacuation
Peace- description the proposed landing site are included. pickup site personnel to assess the route/AA
time If possible, the relationship of the site to into the area; of particular impor-
prominent terrain features, such as a tance if hoist operation is required
lake, mountain, or tower, should be
described.
FM 5-34

Combat Operations 1-51

FM 5-34

FIELD-SANITATION FACILITIES
Figure 1-20 shows field latrines. Keep all latrines at least 100
meters away from food operation, downhill, and at least 30 meters
from groundwater sources. Keep latrines clean, and use residual
insecticides to control insects. Once the latrine is full to 1 foot
below the surface, or is to be abandoned, remove the box and spray
2 feet around the pit area. Fill the pit with successive 3-inch layers
of compacted soil. Mound the pit with at least 1 foot of dirt and
spray it with insecticide. Place a sign on top of the mound
indicating the type, date closed, and unit. When high-water tables
preclude the use of pit latrines, you may use burn-out latrines.
Install half of a 55-gallon drum or barrel under each hole in the
latrine box. Remove the drum daily, add fuel oil, and burn the
contents to a dry ash. Add 1 inch of diesel fuel for insect control
before replacing the drum in the latrine box. Construct the hand-
washing facilities and the shower unit (see Figures 1-21 and 1-22).
For more information, see FM 21-10.

Figure 1-20. Field latrines

1-52 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

Figure 1-21. Hand-washing device, using No. 10 can

Figure 1-22. Shower unit, using metal drums

WATER DISINFECTION AND QUANTITY REQUIREMENTS

Calcium Hypochlorite
Use the following procedure to purify water in a 1-quart canteen with
calcium hypochlorite ampules:
• Fill the canteen with the cleanest, clearest water available, leaving
an air space of 1 inch or more below the neck of the canteen.
• Fill a canteen cup half full of water, and add the calcium
hypochlorite from one ampule. Stir until dissolved.
• Fill the cap of a plastic canteen half full of the solution in the cup,
and add it to the water in the canteen. Then place the cap on the
canteen and shake it thoroughly.

Combat Operations 1-53

FM 5-34

• Loosen the cap slightly, and invert the canteen, letting the
treated water leak onto the threads around the neck of the
canteen.
• Tighten the cap on the canteen, and wait at least 30 minutes
before using the water for any purpose.
Iodine Tablets
Use one tablet per quart canteen for clear water and two tablets
per quart canteen for cloudy water. Let the water stand for 5
minutes, shake well, allowing spill over to rinse canteen neck, and
let stand another 20 minutes before using for any purpose.
Boiling
Bring the water to a rolling boil for 15 seconds.
Daily Water Requirements

Table 1-17. Daily water requirements

Gallons per Day

Element Conditions of Use Remarks
Desert/
Mild/Cold
Jungle

Soldier In combat—
Minimum 0.5 - 1 2 -31 Eating and drinking (3 days)
2 When field rations are used
3 - 41
Normal 3 Drinking plus cooking and
62 personal hygiene
March— 2
Temporary camp 5 52 Minimum for (all purposes
does not include bathing)
Temporary camp 15 Waterborne sewage system
and bathing
Semipermanent camp 30-80
Permanent camp 60-100

Vehicle Level and rolling 0.125 - 0.5

0.25 - 1
Mountainous

Hospital Drinking and cooking 10/bed Does not include bathing;

Water, waterborne 50/bed includes medical personnel
sewage

1For unclimatized personnel or for all personnel when the dry-bulb reading exceeds 105° in the
jungle
2Maximum consumption factor depends on the work performed, solar radiation, and other
environmental stresses.

COMMUNICATIONS
Tactical communication responsibilities are—
• Senior to subordinates.
• Supporting to supported.

1-54 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

• Reinforcing to reinforced.
• Lateral left to right if the standing operating procedures (SOP) or
orders do not specify.

ANTENNA LOCATIONS
For maximum reception, place an antenna as high as possible and
avoid any valleys. Locate an antenna away from built-up areas,
metal obstructions, or electrical power lines.

EXPEDIENT ANTENNAS
Figure 1-23 and Figures 1-24 through 1-26, pages 1-56 and 1-57,
show various antennas. To determine the antenna length (meters),
use the following formula:
1/ wave
4 = 234/freq; 0.5 wave = 468/freq; full wave = 936/freq
where—
freq = frequency, in megahertz

Tape Vertical element

Auxillary antenna wire
must connect to vertical
element.
Ground plane elements
45° angle

Guy wires
Auxillary
antenna

Stakes

Figure 1-23. Jungle-expedient antenna (FM)

Combat Operations 1-55

FM 5-34

Vertical polarization 20 to 80 mc

Field wire 31/2 to 41/2

meters above ground
Insulator

Direction of desired
transmission

Radio set

600 resistor
(1 watt)

Figure 1-24. Long-wire antenna (FM)

Insulator
Insulator

Antenna Antenna
wire wire

Radio set Radio set

Ground stake Ground stake

A B

Figure 1-25. Expedient, suspended, vertical antennas (FM)

1-56 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

Insulators

1 1/
/4 4

Wave Wave
length length

Transmission line

Radio set

Figure 1-26. Improvised, center-fed, half-wave antenna (AM)

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Table 1-18 and Tables 1-19 and 1-20, page 1-58, list information on
pieces of communication equipment.

Table 1-18. Communication equipment, tactical radio sets AN/VRC-12 series

Frequency Range
Nomenclature Range (km)
(MHz)

AN/PRC-77 series 30-75-95 8

AN/VRC-46 30-75-95 32
AN/VRC-47 30-75-96 32
AN/VRC-106 2.0-29.999 80
AN/VCR-142 2.0-29.999 80
AN/PRC-119A 30-87.975 10
AN/VRC-87A/C 30-87.975 10
AN/VRC-88A/C 30-87.975 10
AN/VRC-89A 30-87.975 10
AN/VRC-90A 30-87.975 40
AN/VRC-91A 30-87.975 10
AN/VRC-92A 30-87.975 40
Note: The AN/PRC-77 series includes the AN/VRC-
64
(vehicular) and AN/GRC-160 (vehicular and man-
pack).

Combat Operations 1-57

FM 5-34

Table 1-19. Communications equipment, auxillary

Nomenclature Description Range Remarks

AN/GRA-39 Remoting set Up to Increases flexibility of radio sets; increases
used with FM 3.2 km security. Radio and antenna can be
radio sets exposed while operation is not.
RC-292 General purpose, See Extends the range of tactical FM radio
OE-254 stationary ground, remarks sets. Increases range of radio sets to
plane antenna about twice the stated planning range of
the radio set. Radiating and ground plane
elements must be of the proper length for a
particular operating frequency.
AT-964 Long-wire, end- See Used with tactical FM radio sets. Good for
fed directional remarks reducing the enemy’s ability to conduct
antenna interception and jamming. Can extend the
planning range of radio sets by double or
more, depending on the antenna used to
receive/transmit at the distant site.

Table 1-20. Communications equipment, wire

Nomenclature Description Range Remarks

TA-1/PT Sound-powered 16 km Planning range depends on the condition
telephone in of the wire (WD-1/TT). No batteries are
handset form required. Incoming signal is visual and
adjustable audible. Telephone weighs
2.75 lb; case weighs 0.875 lb.
TA-312/PT Tactical field 35 km Planning range depends on the condition
telephone of the wire (WD-1/TT). Batteries are
required when operation is in LB position,
as in local circuit to SB-22/PT. Incoming
signal is adjustable audible. Has hands-
free operation capability. Telephone
weighs about 9.5 lb.
SB-22/PT Lightweight, Switchboard has 12-circuit capability and
manual may be expanded by stacking additional
(monocord) SB-22s. Each added SB-22 increases
switchboard, LB capability by 17 circuits, since only one
options operator’s pack is necessary. Signaling
may be audible and visual, or just visual.
SB-993-GT Light, portable, Switchboard has 6-circuit capability for LB
emergency telephone lines, with an additional circuit
switchboard plug for the operator’s use. Incoming
signal is visual only.

AUTHENTICATION
Authentication is mandatory in the following instances:
• Imitative deception is suspected.
• Initial enemy control and amplifying reports are made.
• Transmissions are made to order or end any radio silence.
• Plain messages are made to cancel other messages.

1-58 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

• A classified, uncoded message, such as changing frequencies and

directing movements, is received.
• Initial radio contact is made, a net is opened and closed, or a
transmission is made to a station that is under radio listening
silence.
• A challenge is made
• A station’s identity is doubted.
Figure 1-27 shows a chart to use in the authentication process.

Line
indicator (Protective Marking)
column Set 01 Period 01

KTC 140 D
0

ABC DEF GHJ KL MN PQR ST UV WX YZ

First letter in 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

challenge
A IMKY QOC PAU WH LX FSD RB VN EG JT

B MYNJ RDH OBA WP CI ETG SQ UF KV XL

C SWLN VJM HKB KO UA RYD TE FI PQ CG

Second letter D BJYM GFP LT KC SR DOV XE UA QH NW

in challenge
E WAHY CUR KMQ XO TS EIG JP FN BL DV

F VALY BQA FEX HR JN CUS DM GT PI WO

Reply
ABC DEF GHJ KL MN PQR ST UV WX YZ
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

G MYRL NEP WSC HX IF BDJ KQ OG TA VU

H UWXG CQR OMT YB HP VES FJ LN AD KI

I RILN HVB WGD PE MS ATQ CK XU YO JF

J LEGX SWY MNR DC KF VUH JO TB QI AP

K WTOD SRF VEQ LU GK HNA YJ PX BC MI

L OHXL SJI ONK GC YF TUD WE RA BV PM

Figure 1-27. Authentication procedures

Combat Operations 1-59

FM 5-34

When challenging, select two random letters, except Z, before

transmitting. Make sure you know what the reply should be.
Transmit a challenge, “AUTHENTICATE CHARLIE-HOTEL,
OVER.” The receiving station must reply, “I AUTHENTICATE
LIMA, OVER.” If authentication is incorrect or reply is not
received promptly, transmit another challenge. If the next reply is
incorrect or untimely, notify your supervisor, commander, or
communication-electronics operation (CEO)
NOTE: When a challenge is from the last line, you must
go to the first line for the reply.
STANDARD RADIO-TRANSMISSION FORMAT
CALL
MESSAGE - Indicates messages require recording
PRECEDENCE - Indicates priority of call
TIME - Followed by date-time group
FROM - Followed by call sign
TO - Followed by call sign of addressee
BREAK
TEXT - May consist of plain language, code, or cipher groups
BREAK
ENDING - Must include either OVER or OUT but never both in the
same transmission.
Example: ZULU FOUR CHARLIE ONE SIX - THIS IS DELTA
THREE X-RAY TWO NINE - MESSAGE - PRIORITY - TIME
181345Z - BREAK - FIGURES 6 STRINGERS NEEDED AT MY
LOCATION ASAP - BREAK OVER.

SINGLE-CHANNEL, GROUND-TO-AIR RADIO SYSTEM (SINCGARS)

SINCGARS is a very high frequency (VHF) frequency-hopping
tactical radio, available in manpack, vehicular, and airborne
c onf ig ur at ion s. Fi g ur e 1 -28 , pa ge 1- 62, s hows th e r a dio
transmitter’s (RT’s) front panel.

Table 1-21. SINGCARS, general information

Frequency 30 to 87.975 Mhz
Channels 2320
Presets 8 single channels
6 frequency-hopping channels/nets
Modes 2,400; 4,800; 9,600; and 16,000 bps; fixed and frequency-hopping;
plain text; cipher-text encryption
Remote fill Over-the-air rekeying

1-60 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

Table 1-22. SINCGARS radio sets

AN/PRC-119 Manpack radio

AN/VRC-87 Short-range vehicular radio

AN/VRC-88 Short-range vehicular radio w/dismount

AN/VRC-89 Short-range/long-range vehicular radio

AN/VRC-90 Long-range vehicular radio

AN/VRC-91 Short-range/long-range vehicular radio w/dismount

AN/VRC-92 Long-range/long-range vehicular radio

Table 1-23. Voice transmission maximum planning ranges

Radio Type RF Switch Position Planning Ranges

Manpack/vehicular LO (low) 200 m to 400 m

M (medium) 400 m to 5 km
HI (high) 5 km to 10 km

Vehicular only PA (power amplifier) 10 km to 40 km

Table 1-24. Data transmission maximum planning ranges

RF Switch
Radio Type Baud Rate Used Planning Ranges
Position

Manpack/vehicular 600 to 4800 bps HI 3 km to 5 km

(short range) 16,000 bps (16
kbps)

Vehicular 600 to 2400 bps PA 5 km to 25 km

(long range) 4800 bps PA 5 km to 25 km
16,000 bps (16 PA 3 km to 10 km
kbps)

Loading Frequencies—Manual (MAN), CUE, and 1-6

• Obtain authorized operating frequency from signal operation
instructions (SOI) or network control station (NCS).
• Set function (FCTN) to load (LD) (see Figure 1-28, page 1-62).
• Set MODE to single channel (SC).

Combat Operations 1-61

FM 5-34

• Set channel (CHAN) to MAN, CUE, or desired channel (1-6)

where frequency is to be stored.
• Press frequency (FREQ); display will show “00000” or the RT’s
tuned-in frequency).
• Press clear (CLR) (display will show five lines).
• Enter the numbers of the new frequency (using keyboard
buttons). (If you make a mistake while entering a frequency,
press CLR to delete the last digit entered.)
• Press store (STO) (display will blink and show the frequency you
just stored).
• Repeat steps 1 thru 8 for additional frequencies that you wish to
load.
• Set FCTN to squelch (SQ) ON (or normal operating position).

Display
RF CHAN

ANT CHAN HUB AUD/FILL

SIG LOW COMSEC
MAN
CUE
HI CT TD RV
MODE LO PT Z
M HI FH
LO PA FH-M
SC CMSC * SYNC FREQ
PWR 1 2 3 VOL HUB
RF WHSP
DATA ERF AUD/DATA
SQ 4
5 6
OFST
ON OFF RXMT
LD DIM CHG 8 LOUT ***
TST REM 7 9 TIME

STBY Z-FH BATT

RXMT CL* LOAD STO
OFF 0 CALL

FCTN

Mode Keyboard

Figure 1-28. RT front panel

Clearing Frequencies
• Set MODE to SC.
• Set CHAN to MAN, CUE, or desired channel (1-6) where
frequency is to be cleared.
• Press FREQ.
• Press CLR.
• Press LOAD; then press STO.
• Set FCTN to SQ ON (or normal operating position).

1-62 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

LOADING FREQUENCY HOP DATA (LOCAL FILL)

• Make sure that the electronic counter-countermeasure (ECCM) (see
Figure 1-29, page 1-64) fill device is loaded.
• Set the ECCM fill-device function switch to OFF.
• Connect the ECCM fill device to the RT’s connector audio (AUD)/
FILL using a fill cable. (Always use a fill-device cable to connect a
fill device to the RT. Equipment damage may result if you do not
use a fill cable.)
• Set the RT’s FCTN to LD.
• Set the RT’s MODE to frequency hopping (FH).
• Set CHAN to where you load data (National Communications
System [NCS] will direct you).
• Set the ECCM fill-device select switch to a position containing the
desired data.
• Set ECCM fill-device function switch to ON.
• Press LOAD; the display will cycle, and you will hear a beep.
• Press STO; the display will blink and show STO followed by the
first digit of the data.
• Change the ECCM fill-device select switch to a position containing
the next data you want.
• Press LOAD; the display will cycle, and you will hear a beep.
• Press STO; then press the number button of the channel where you
will store the data. The display will blink and show STO followed
by the channel number in which the data was stored.
• Set the ECCM fill-device function switch to OFF.
• Disconnect the ECCM fill device.
• Set the RT’s switches as needed for normal operation.

Loading Communications-Security (COMSEC) Keys (Local Fill)

• Turn off the fill device (KYK-13 or KYX-15); connect a fill cable to
the RT’s AUD/FILL connector.
• Set the RT’s switches: FCTN to LD, COMSEC to cipher text (CT).
The following applies to COMSEC alarms:
—If you hear a COMSEC alarm (beeping alarm), key the handset
twice for a minimum of 1/2 second each key. If a good COMSEC
key is already in the radio, the alarm will clear to no alarm. If
the radio does not have a good COMSEC key, the alarm will
clear to a steady tone.

Combat Operations 1-63

FM 5-34

Select swtich

Function swtich

RT

Fill cable

AUD/DATA
connector
ECCM fill device

Figure 1-29. ECCM fill device connected to RT

—When you hear a steady tone at the handset, you can only
load a COMSEC key. The steady tone will clear to no alarm if
you successfully complete a fill procedure.
—If the COMSEC alarm will not clear, set FCTN to standby
(STBY) and then to test (TST). If TST results in a FAIL 5
display, there is a COMSEC failure. If GOOD is displayed,
resume normal operation.
• Set the fill device controls (KYK-13, or KYX-15), set MODE to
ON, and select the COMSEC key that you must load.
• Load the COMSEC key: Press the RT’s LOAD; the display
flashes LOAD then H TEK (or H KEK). Press STO and enter the
channel number where you will store the COMSEC key. The
display will blink, and you will hear two beeps.
NOTE: When changing the COMSEC key for during-
operation updates, use the procedures as for a fill device.
Cold-Start Net Opening
After loading the necessary FH data into your RT, the NCS will
send more data to your RT in preparation for a cold-start net
opening. This is called an electronic remote fill (ERF). The NCS
will direct you through the net opening.
• Load the following elements into your RT upon NCS opening
alert:
—MAN channel frequency.
—CUE channel frequency, if designated by the commander.
—FH data from the fill device.
—COMSEC key from the fill device.

1-64 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

• Set FCTN to SQ ON and then to LD.

• Set COMSEC to CT, if required.
• Set CHAN to MAN and MODE to FH; the display will show COLD.
• Stand by on MAN channel. The NCS will call you on MAN channel
to verify communication and tell you where to store the ERF.
• Monitor the MAN channel and wait until the NCS comes back to
you if you do not receive the ERF. The NCS will transmit the ERF
to your RT. The display will show HF234, telling you that you
received the ERF
• Press STO to store the ERF.
• Enter the number 1 after the display readout asks you where you
want to store the ERF. The display will change and you will hear a
beep. Your own primary net is normally stored in CHAN 1. When
entering other nets, use CHAN 2-6, as desired.
• Set CHAN to position 1, on command. The display will show F234.
• Stand by; the NCS will contact you to confirm communication on
channel 1.
• Set, on command, the FCTN to SQ ON (or normal operating
position).

CUE Frequency
Use the CUE frequency when you need to contact a FH radio net and
are not an active member of that net. You can use CUE if you have
missed your primary net’s opening or if you need an ERF. CUE may
also be used if you need a member of an alternate net or if you are
operating a SC radio and wish to contact a FH net.
• Set COMSEC to plain text (PT).
• Set CHAN to CUE. Make sure it is loaded (if it is, do the loading
procedures discussed in Loading Frequencies).
• Set the radio frequency (RF) to HI. If you are using a long-range
RT, set the RF to power amplification (PA).
• Adjust the volume (VOL) as needed.
• Press the handset push-to-talk (PTT). Repeat this step if
necessary; wait 15 seconds between tries. The NCS or designated
member will contact you on CUE frequency.

Combat Operations 1-65

FM 5-34

Late Net Entry

You can use two methods to join a net that is already operating,
passive and CUE/ ERF.
Passive
• Set CHAN to the channel that has the proper preset.
• Set other switches for normal FH operating positions.
• Press FREQ.
• Press synchronize (SYNC) (late entry)
• Monitor the channel for a least 3 minutes. (Do not press PTT.)
• Contact the net when you hear traffic. When you receive a net
signal, late entry is canceled; L disappears from display when you
press FREQ.
• Call the net when you hear traffic.
• Perform CUE /ERF if you do not make contact.
CUE/ERF
• Load the CUE frequency of the net to be entered. Set CHAN to
CUE and FCTN to LD.
• Load the MAN frequency of the net to be entered. Set CHAN to
MAN, leaving FCTN at LD.
• Set RF power to HI for manpack and PA for vehicular radio.
• Set COMSEC to PT.
• Set CHAN to CUE. Press PTT for 4 to 5 seconds.
• Immediately set COMSEC to CT and wait for a response.
• Repeat after 15 seconds until CUE call is answered. For each try,
go to PT to send a CUE and CT to receive a reply.
NOTE: A CUE call goes through only when the net is qui-
et. Because you do not know when the net is quiet, the so-
lution is to repeat your CUE call until you get an answer.
• Wait for instructions from the NCS/Alt NCS regarding net entry
and receiving an ERF when your CUE call is answered.
• You are ready to enter the net once you store the ERF.

Operator’s Troubleshooting Checklist

If you have difficulty communicating, take the time to perform the
following check before you decide that there is something wrong
with your radio:
• Ensure that you have all the switches set properly.

1-66 Combat Operations

 FM 5-34

• Ensure that all cable connections are tight.

• Ensure that the antenna is connected and positioned properly.
• Try to verify that you have line of sight (LOS) with other stations.
• Change your position to see if communications improve.
• Perform passive, late net entry if you have not heard net traffic in
some time.
• Make sure that your radio has adequate power (especially
manpack).
• Look and see if another net station is colocated in your area (called
co-site interference).
• Determine if you are being jammed by the enemy. If so, take
appropriate action.
• Do the following if your radio gives a strange, unexplained message
that does not automatically clear: Set FCTN to STBY, then return
to SQ ON. This action may clear your problem. If this does not,
and the situation permits, set FCTN to Z-FH and wait for GOOD,
then to OFF and wait 10 seconds, then back to Z-FH and again wait
for GOOD. Now run a self-test. If GOOD results, reload and re-
e n t e r t h e n e t . I f y o u s t i l l h av e a p r o b l e m , c o nt a c t u ni t
maintenance.

Combat Operations 1-67

 FM 5-34

Raise the load Raise the load Lower the load Lower the load Raise the boom Raise the boom
VISUAL SIGNALS

slowly slowly slowly

1-68 Combat Operations

Raise the boom Raise the boom and Lower the boom Lower the boom Lower the boom and
and hold the load lower the load slowly hold the load

Lock the crawler belt

Lower the boom and Travel both crawler Right turn on side indicated by Left turn
raise the load Swing the load in belts in direction raised fist—travel
direction finger points indicated by revolving oppositie crawler belt
fists in direction indicated
by revolving fist
Figure 1-30. Visual signals
 Dog everything Stop Open clamshell pocket Close clamshell pocket I am ready

Attention I do not understand Disregard previous Enemy in sight Enemy in sight

command (red flag)

Commence firing Cease firing Mount Dismount

Figure 1-30. Visual signals (continued)

FM 5-34

Combat Operations 1-69

 FM 5-34

Traveling overwatch Traveling Move up on my left Cover our move

1-70 Combat Operations

(red flag)
Start engines Forward: move out; increase Stop engines
speed; double time

Move in reverse (if stopped) Left Right

slow down (if moving)

Figure 1-30. Visual signals (continued)

 FM 5-34

REHEARSALS
A rehearsal is the act or process of practicing an action to prepare for
an actual performance of that action. Rehearsing key combat actions
allows participants to—
• Become familiar with the operation.
• Gain a visual impression of the operation.
• Build a lasting mental picture of the sequence of key actions.
• Allow subordinate leaders to ascertain the tactical plan’s feasibility,
its common sense, and the adequacy of it C2 measures.

REHEARSAL TYPES
The five type of rehearsals are confirmation brief, back brief,
combined-arms, support, and battle drill or SOP.

PRINCIPLES
All rehearsals must adhere to the following principles:
• Support the scheme of maneuver and the commander’s intent.
• Provide clear tasks/conditions/standards.
• Include multiechelon, combined-arms rehearsals.
• Include key participants.
• Enforce standards, conducted to standard.
• Provide feedback.
• Complement the preparation phase.
• Instill confidence in the plan and the leaders.

TECHNIQUES
The six categories of rehearsal techniques are the radio, map, sketch
map, terrain model, reduced force, and full dress. Each technique
follows the crawl, walk, and run training concept and increases in
mission realism and a corresponding increase in rehearsal payoff.
For more information on each technique, see FM 101-5, Appendix D.

PARTICIPANT LEVELS
The participant level details exactly who in the unit is required to
attend the rehearsal. The enemy situation may have a significant
impact on the participant level, as security must be maintained
throughout.

Combat Operations 1-71

 Chapter 2
Threat
The threat that the Army faces has gone through a major change
since the breakup of the Warsaw Pact and the former Soviet Union.
The majority of the forces that the Army will face in mid- to high-
intensity conflicts will continue to use the Soviet model for their
operations. Regional wars will continue to challenge US vital
interests. Stability operations and support operations will continue
to require an increase in engineer support for psychological and
tactical reasons. Many nations will increase qualitatively as
technology becomes more affordable and available.

STABILITY OPERATIONS AND SUPPORT OPERATIONS

THREAT
The stability and support area of operations (AO) routinely contains
poorly developed road nets, installations, and airfields. These
support structures must typically be constructed to accomplish the
mission. Forces involved in stability operations and support
operations will require engineer support for combat and sustainment
engineering missions. To accomplish their mission, forces must
understand and plan against four types of aggressors: criminals,
protesters, terrorists, and subversives.
To accomplish their objectives, these aggressors employ a wide range
of tactics, from harassment to terrorism. They may try to sever lines
of communication (LOC) by various methods: mining roads,
waterways, and railways; locating ambush sites next to LOC; or
destroying bridges and tunnels with demolitions. Extended LOC
cannot be fully secured; however, measures can be enforced to reduce
the effect that the aggressor’s activity has on them. All operations
require US forces to maintain a high degree of force protection.

TERRORISM
Terrorism includes bombings, assassinations, kidnappings, threats,
murder, mutilations, torture, and blackmail. If terrorism is used, it
is usually to coerce or intimidate. Terrorism can also be used to
discredit a government by provoking it to overreact to a situation.
Such a reaction could alienate the people and show the government’s
inability to protect the local populace and its own installations.
Terrorists usually believe that a successful operation against US
forces involved in stability operations and support operations will
provide greater legitimacy for themselves.

Threat 2-1
FM 5-34

HARASSMENT
Harassment keeps forces on the defensive. If successful, it causes
them to react to an aggressor’s operations. As a result, a
government cannot conduct offensive operations to stop an
aggressor. Harassment also weakens a government’s resources and
disrupts its LOC. In stability operations and support operations,
the aggressors seldom attempt to seize and defend objectives.
During movements, they infiltrate. However, near a target area,
small guerrilla elements mass to conduct operations. The most
common techniques that the guerrillas use are the ambush, raid,
and small-scale attacks. Their targets are security posts, small
forces, facilities, and LOC.

PROTECTIVE MEASURES
The following is a list of measures to protect against aggressors:
• Eliminate potential hiding places near and within buildings.
• Ensure that there is an unobstructed view around all buildings.
• Place facilities within view of other occupied facilities.
• Place assets that are stored outside of the buildings within view
of the occupied rooms of the buildings.
• Use signs or other indicators of where the assets are stored
sparingly (includes exterior signs).
• Ensure that the buildings are at least 170 feet away from the
installation’s boundaries.
• Ensure that the lines of approach to the buildings are parallel.
• Minimize vehicle and personnel access points.
• Locate parking (to include public parking) areas as far from the
buildings as practical but within view of the occupied rooms or
buildings.
• Illuminate a building’s exterior and the exterior areas where
assets are located.
• Secure access to power and/or heat plants, gas mains, water
supplies, and electrical services.
• Locate construction staging areas away from the asset areas.
• Locate buildings away from natural or man-made vantage points.
• Locate a building’s critical assets within areas that do not have
exterior walls, when possible.
• Minimize window areas.
• Cover windows that are next to doors so that the aggressors
cannot unlock the doors through them.

2-2 Threat
 FM 5-34

• Secure exposed exterior ladders and fire escapes.

• Design buildings so that the areas are not hidden from the view of
control points or occupied spaces.
• Place assets in areas that are occupied 24 hours a day, when
possible.
• Ensure that activities with large visitor populations take place
away from protected assets, when possible.
• Locate protected assets in controlled areas where they are visible to
more than one person.
• Place mail rooms on the perimeter of facilities.
• Provide emergency backup power generation for critical activities/
buildings.
For information on protective obstacles, see Chapter 5.

MID- TO HIGH-INTENSITY THREAT

Figure 2-1 and Figures 2-2 and 2-3, page 2-4, show different threat
minefields. Table 2-1, page 2-5, lists the parameters for threat’s
minefields.

200 - 300 m
20 - 40 m

60 - 120 m

4-6m

Figure 2-1. Threat’s minefield, using track-width mines

Threat 2-3
FM 5-34

200 - 300 m
20 - 40 m

60 - 120 m
9 - 12 m

Figure 2-2. Threat’s minefield, using full-width mines

30 - 300 m

10 - 150 m
5 m or more

1m

Blast Mines
Types: PMN, PMD-GM
Density: 2,000 - 3,000 per kilometer

30 - 300 m
10 - 150 m

25 m

25 - 50 m
Fragmentation Mines
Types: OZM4, POMZ-2M
Density: 100 - 300 per kilometer

Figure 2-3. Threat’s antipersonnel (AP) minefield

2-4 Threat
 FM 5-34

Table 2-1. Normal parameters for threat’s minefields

AT Minefield
Front (situation dependent) 200 to 300 meters
Depth 60 to 120 meters
Distance between rows 20 to 40 meters
Number of rows 3 to 4 rows
Distance between mines 4 to 6 meters for antitrack mines
9 to 12 meters for antihull mines
Outlay, normal 550 to 750 antitrack mines/km
300 to 400 antihull mines/km
Outlay, increased effect 1,000+ antitrack mines/km
500+ antihull mines/km
Probability of destruction 0.57 for antitrack mines (750/km)
0.85 for antihull mines (400/km)
AP Minefield
Front 30 to 300 meters
Depth 10 to 150 meters
Distance between rows 5+ meters for blast mines
25 to 50 meters for fragmentation mines
Number of rows 2 to 4 rows
Distance between mines 1 meter for blast mines
50 meters to twice the lethal radius of fragmentation for
fragmentation mines
Outlay, normal 2,000 to 3,000 for HE/blast mines (2,000/km)
100 to 300 for fragmentation mines
Outlay, increased effect 2 to 3 times normal outlay
Probability of destruction 0.15 to 0.2 for HE/blast mines (2,000/km)
0.1 to 0.15 for fragmentation mines (100/km)

THREAT ORGANIZATION
MILITARY DISTRICTS
Military districts and maneuver divisions are the highest-level
tactical organizations in the ground forces (see Table 2-2, page 2-6).
Military districts are not only geographical entities but also a level of
command. Districts generally contain one or more separate brigades
(infantry, motorized infantry, or mechanized infantry) and perhaps a
tank brigade. An engineer battalion and possibly an engineer
company per each separate brigade support each military district.
MOTORIZED INFANTRY DIVISION
The basic maneuver units in this division are three motorized
infantry brigades (divisional). These divisional brigades differ
structurally from their separate counterparts normally found within
military districts. In addition to its motorized infantry brigades, this
division may or may not have a separate tank battalion. Either an
engineer company or engineer battalion supports a motorized
infantry division.

Threat 2-5
FM 5-34

Table 2-2. Threat organization, infantry based

Threat Engineer Support Size
Military district Battalion
Motorized infantry division Company/battalion*
Infantry division Company/battalion*
Mechanized infantry division Battalion/company*
Motorized infantry brigade (separate) Company
Infantry brigade (separate) Company
Infantry brigade (divisional) Company
Infantry brigade (militia) None
Mechanized infantry brigade (separate) Company
Mechanized infantry brigade (divisional) Company
Tank brigade (94-Tank) Company
Tank brigade (67-Tank) Company
*Either a company- or battalion-sized force supports the threat organizations.

INFANTRY AND MECHANIZED INFANTRY DIVISION

The majority of divisions in an infantry-based threat are either
infantry or motorized infantry. Most infantry divisions have
company-sized engineer assets; however, some better-equipped
infantry divisions may have battalion-sized units of these types.
Most mechanized infantry divisions have battalion-sized engineer
assets but could be reduced to company-size assets.
MOTORIZED INFANTRY AND INFANTRY BRIGADE
The basic maneuver unit is the brigade, consisting of maneuver
battalions and a wide array of combat support (CS) and combat
service support (CSS) elements. A motorized infantry brigade is
the most common in the infantry-based threat. Both motorized
infantry and infantry brigades are supported by company-sized
engineer assets.
MECHANIZED INFANTRY AND TANK BRIGADE
Even though motorized infantry brigades are the most common in
an infantry based threat, some mechanized infantry and tank
brigade threat is present. Since the infantry-based threat has no
tank division, all tank brigades are actually separate.
The mechanized infantry brigade has two basic types: one equipped
with armored personnel carriers (APCs) and one equipped with
infantry fighting vehicles (IFVs). Each are supported with
company-sized engineer assets.
An engineer company supports a 94-tank standard tank brigade,
where a 64-tank standard has no dedicated engineer company (see
Table 2-3).

2-6 Threat
 FM 5-34

Table 2-3. Principal items of equipment for infantry-based threat

Engineer
Engineer
Battalion Engineer
Company Engineer
Mech Inf Div Company
Mech Inf Bde Company
Engineer Equipment Mtzd Inf Div Mtzd Inf Bde
(Sep & Div) Tank Bde
Inf Div Inf Bde
Mech Inf Div (94 Tank)
Military Dist (Sep & Div)
Military Dist
Army/CDF
Minelayer, PMR/GMZ 3 3 3 3
Mineclearer, MTK/MTK-2 2
Mine detector, DIM 3 1 1 1
Engineer recon vehicle, IRM 2
Armored engineer tractor, 2 1 1
IMR
Ditching machine, PZM/BTM/ 4 4 4 3
MDK
Route-clearing vehicle, BAT/ 8 1 1 1
PKT
Dozer blade, BTU 3
Mine clearing plow 27
Mine roller-plow 9
Bridge, tank-launched 4 4 1 3
Bridge, truck-launched 8 4 4
Tracked amphibian, K-61/ 12
PTS
Trailer, amphibious, PKP 6
Tracked ferry, GSP/PMM-2 6
Bridge, PMP center 16
Bridge, PMP ramp 2
Assault boat 10
Power boat 6
Piledriver set, KMS 1
Tractor 2
Truck, sawmill 1
Trailer, saw 1
Grader 2
Concrete mixer 1
Truck, water purification 1 1

Threat 2-7
FM 5-34

ARMOR- AND MECHANIZED–BASED THREAT

Maneuver Divisions
Ground forces have two basic types of maneuver divisions, the
mechanized infantry division and the tank division (see Table 2-4).
Both types are combined arms organizations. A mechanized
infantry division has one tank brigade along with its three
mechanized infantry brigades; whereas, a tank division has one
mechanized infantry brigade along with its three tank brigades. CS
and CSS units are basically the same for all mechanized infantry
and tank divisions. Most motorized infantry divisions in an armor-
and a mechanized-based threat have battalion-size engineer units.
However, an engineer company may support some lesser-equipped
motorized infantry divisions.

Table 2-4. Threat organization, armor and mechanized based

Threat Engineer Support Size
Mechanized infantry division (IFV) Battalion
Mechanized infantry division (APC) Battalion
Tank division Battalion
Motorized infantry division Battalion/company*
Mechanized infantry brigade (IFV)(Div), MID Company
Mechanized infantry brigade (IFV)(Div), TD Company
Mechanized infantry brigade (IFV)(Sep) Battalion
Mechanized infantry brigade (APC)(Div), Company
MID
Mechanized infantry brigade (APC)(Sep) Battalion
Tank brigade (Div), MID Company
Tank brigade (Div), TD Company
Tank brigade (Sep) Battalion
*Either a company- or battalion-sized force supports the threat organizations.

Maneuver Brigades
Like the infantry-based threat, the basic maneuver unit is the
brigade. Consisting of maneuver battalions and a wide array of CS
and CSS elements. An armor- and a mechanized-based threat
consists primarily of mechanized infantry units. The mechanized
infantry brigade has two basic types: one equipped with IFVs and
one equipped with APCs. There are also tank brigades.
An engineer company supports each mechanized infantry brigade
(division), both IFV- and APC-equipped; whereas the separate
mechanized infantry brigades is supported by an engineer
battalion.

2-8 Threat
 FM 5-34

An engineer company supports each tank brigade (division), and like

the mechanized infantry brigade, an engineer battalion supports the
separate tank brigade (see Table 2-5).

Table 2-5. Principal items of equipment for armor- and mechanized-based

threat
Engineer Engineer
Engineer Engineer
Battalion Engineer Battalion
Company Company
Engineer Equipment Mech Inf Div Battalion Mech Inf
Tank Bde Mech Inf
Engr Bde Tank Div Bde
(Div) Bde (Div)
Corps (Sep)

Minelayer, PMR/GMZ 3 3 3 3 3
Minelayer, UMZ 3
Mineclearer, MTK/MTK-2 2 2 2
Mine detector, DIM 3 3 3 1 1
Engineer recon vehicle, 2 2 2
IRM
Armored engineer tractor, 2 2 2 1 1
IMR
Ditching machine, BTM/ 4 4 2 1 1
MDK
Ditching machine, PZM/ 3 3
TMK
Route-clearing vehicle, 8 8 2 1 1
BAT/PKT
Dozer blade, BTU
Mine clearing plow
Mine roller-plow 5 9 3
Bridge, tank-launched 4 4 4 3 1
Bridge, truck-launched, 8 8 4 4
TMM
Tracked amphibian, K-61/ 12 12 12
PTS
Trailer, amphibious, PKP 6 6 6
Tracked ferry, GSP/PMM-2 6 6 6
Bridge, PMP center 16 16
Bridge, PMP ramp 2 2
Assault boat 10 10 10
Power boat 6 6
Piledriver set, KMS 1 1
Tractor 2 2 1
Truck, sawmill 1 1
Trailer, saw 1 1
Grader 2 2
Concrete mixer 1 1
Truck, water purification 1 1 1

Threat 2-9
FM 5-34

MAJOR THREAT EQUIPMENT

Tables 2-6 and 2-7 list the common equipment used to prepare a
threat’s defensive position.

Table 2-6. Threat’s defensive engineer equipment

Distance
Working Speed Depth of
Nomenclature Type Between
(kmph) Mines (cm)
Mines (m)

PMR-3/4 Single-chute trailer Based on

towing vehicle (5 4 to 5.5 6 to 12
kmph if
burying mines)
GMZ (mine capac- Tracked
ity is 208 mines) minelayer 5 to 10 4 to 5.5 25
MI-4, MI-8 HIPC Helicopter with Surface laid
chutes
UMZ Tracked 10 to 40 Scattered Surface laid
minelayer

Table 2-7. Threat’s defensive ditching and digging equipment

Ditching Equipment

Maximum Digging Digging Capacity Working Speed

Nomenclature
Depth (m) Width (m) (cu m/hr) (m/hr)

MDK-2M 3.5 3.5 120 to 300 200 to 800

MDK-3 3.0 3.5 400 to 500 400 to 500

BTM-3 1.5 0.6 220 to 600 600

PZM-2 1.5 0.8 to 3.5 80 to 250 180

TMK-2 1.5 1.1 200 to 600 450

Digging Equipment

Nomenclature Digging Capacity (cu m/hr)

BAT-M 200 to 250

Self-entrenching blade on tanks Hull-down position in 20 to 60 minutes

2-10 Threat
 FM 5-34

THREAT OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

The threat emphasizes swift, efficient movement, or transfer of
combat power from one point on the battlefield to another to reinforce
success. This is accomplished by rapid column movement in march
formation and successive deployment into prebattle and attack
formations. A division is assigned either a march zone or march
routes. As many as four routes are possible. A regiment is normally
assigned one or two routes, and a battalion marches on one route.
The distance between routes is about 3 kilometers to reduce
vulnerability. The formation normally consists of reconnaissance,
advance guard (or forward security element of a battalion), flank
security elements, main force, and rear security element.
An attack formation normally is assumed about 1,000 meters from
enemy positions. A division attacking with three regiments in the
first echelon maintains an attack zone of 15 to 25 kilometers wide. A
regiment attack front can vary from 3 to 8 kilometers; however, the
most typical attack frontage of a regiment is 4 to 5 kilometers. A
normal frontage for an attacking battalion is 1 to 2 kilometers, within
a zone of 2 to 3 kilometers. A typical tank or motorized rifle
company’s attack frontage is 500 to 800 meters. Platoons normally
attack on a frontage of 100 to 200 meters, with 50 to 100 meters
between vehicles. In the attack formation, BTR’s or BMP’s normally
follow between 100 to 400 meters behind the tanks. The speed during
an attack is
• 20 to 30 kilometers per hour on roads in column.
• 15 kilometers per hour cross-country in column.
• 200 meters per minute in attack formation.

CROSSING CAPABILITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

Tables 2-8 and 2-9, page 2-12, and Tables 2-10 through 2-12, pages 2-13
and 2-14, list the characteristics and capabilities of the threat’s
vehicles and equipment. Table 2-13, page 2-15, is an example of an
enemy’s obstacle report.

Threat 2-11
FM 5-34

Table 2-8. Light armored vehicles—wheeled capabilties and

characteristics

Characteristics BRDM-2 BTR-60PB BTR-70 BTR-80

Weight (metric ton) 7.0 10.2 11.5 11.0

Speed (kmph) 100 80 80 80 to 85

Water (kmph) 10 10 10 10

Trench crossing (m) 1.25 to 1.60 2.00 2.00 2.00

Vertical Step (m) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40

Gradability (deg) 30 30 30 30

Fording (m) Amphibious Amphibious Amphibious Amphibious

Main armament (mm) 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5

Secondary 7.62 7.62 7.62 7.62

armament (mm)

Table 2-9. Threat’s bridging and rafting equipment

Assembly
Load Treadway Maximum
Time/
Nomenclature Type Carrying Width (m) Gap (m)
Meter
Capacity
(min)

PMP Heavy 60/1701 6.5 Per set, 7

pontoon 115
TMM Truck 60 3.8 Per span, 3.5
mounted 10.5
MTU-20 Tank 50 3.3 18 52
mounted
1Class 60 for bridge and up to class 70 for raft
2
Emplacement time

2-12 Threat
 FM 5-34

Table 2-10. Threat’s vehicle obstacle-crossing capabilities and characteristics

Light Armored Vehicles - Tracked

BTR-50 BMP-1 BMP-2 BMD-1 MT-LB ACRV 1V12

Weight (mt) 14.2 13.5 14.3 7.5 9.7 11
Speed (kmph) 45 65 65 80 60 60
Water (kmph) 10 6 7 10 6 6
Trench crossing 2.80 2.00 2.50 1.60 2.70 2.70
(m)
Vertical step (m) 1.10 0.80 0.77 0.80 0.70 0.70
Gradability (deg) 38 30 30 32 35 35
Fording (m) Amphibious Amphibious Amphibious Amphibious Amphibious Amphibious
Main armament 12.7 73 30 73 7.62 12.7
(mm)
Effective range 1,500 800 to 2,000 to 800 to 1,000 1,500
(50% probability 1,000 4,000 1,000
of hit)
Secondary NA 7.62 7.62 7.62 NA NA
armament (mm)
Medium Tanks
T-54/55 T-62 T-64 T-72 T-80

Weight (mt) 36.0 37.5 39.0 41.0 42.0

Speed (kmph) 50 50 85 60 85
Water (kmph) NA NA NA NA NA
Trench crossing 2.70 2.80 2.70 2.70 2.70
(m)
Vertical step (m) 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80
Gradability (deg) 30 30 30 30 30
Fording (m) 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
(5.5 w/ (5.5 w/ (5.5 w/ (5.5 w/ (5.5 w/
snorkel) snorkel) snorkel) snorkel) snorkel)
Main armament 100 115 125 125 125
(mm)
Effective range 1,500 1,600 2,100 2,100 2,400
(50% probability
of hit)
Secondary 7.62 7.62 7.62 7.62 7.62
armament (mm)

Threat 2-13
 Table 2-11. Threat’s amphibious and ferry equipment
FM 5-34

Personnel
Load Carrying Width Height Speed
Nomenclature Type Load Allocation
Capacity (kg) (m) (m) (kmph)

2-14 Threat
(soldiers)
K61 Amphibian 5,000 50 3.2 2.1 36 12 per
track
PTS-M Amphibian 15,000 50 3.5 3.4 40 MRD/TD
track
PKP Trailer 5,000 2.8 2.2 3 per MRD/
TD
GSP Ferry 50,000 21.5 3.2 7.7 6 per MRD/
TD

Table 2-12. Threat’s minefield-reduction equipment

Sweeping Clearing
Nomenclature Type Speed Width Depth
(kmph) (m) (cm)
UAZ69 Truck-mounted mine detector 10 2.2 25
DIM
KMT6M Tank-mounted mine plow 6-12 2.5 10
KMT5M Tank-mounted plow/roller com- 6-12 2.5 10
bination
MTK-2 Armored line charge 3-m pressure mines, 8-m tilt rods,
180-m depth of minefield
 FM 5-34

Table 2-13. Sample, enemy’s obstacle report

ALPHA Date and time of information collection

BRAVO Location (grid to start and end points)

CHARLIE Type of obstacle

DELTA Enemy weapons or surveillance

ECHO Depth of obstacle

FOXTROT Estimated time required to reduce obstacle

GOLF Estimated material and equipment required to reduce obstacle

HOTEL Coordinates of obstacle bypass, if any

INDIA Type of mines present, if any

JULIET Buried and/or surface laid mines, if any

KILO Antihandling devices, if any

LIMA Depth of buried mines, if any

MIKE Terrain restrictions on the use of the MICLIC or tank plow

THREAT’S OFFENSIVE RIVER CROSSING

The threat is well prepared to cross water obstacles. On the average,
it anticipates that a formation on the offense will cross one water
obstacle of average width (100 to 250 meters) and several narrower
ones each day. It considers crossing water obstacles to be a complex
combat mission but regards this as a normal part of a day’s advance.
Table 2-14 shows the time line for the threat’s river crossing.

Table 2-14. Threat’s river-crossing time line

Element Crossing Time (hours)

Forward detachment 1 to 11/2

(battalion)

First-echelon regiment 2 to 3

Division 5 to 6

NOTE: River width is from 100 to 250 meters.

Threat 2-15
FM 5-34

The threat uses two methods of assault crossing:

• Assault crossing from the line of march: A forward detachment
reaches the water obstacle as quickly as possible, bypassing
strong points and capturing existing bridges or river sections
suitable for an assault crossing. It crosses the water, seizes a line
on the opposite bank, and holds until the main force arrives.
• Prepared assault crossing: When the assault crossing from the
line of march is not feasible, the threat uses the prepared assault
crossing. The main force deploys at the water obstacle with
subunits in direct contact with the opponent. The threat then
makes more thorough preparations for the crossing. Success
depends on covertness, so the crossing usually takes place at
night.

2-16 Threat
 This Chapter implements
STANAG 2021.

Chapter 3
Reconnaissance
ROUTE CLASSIFICATION
Engineers routinely assist maneuver units in the technical portion of
a route reconnaissance. For more information on route classification,
see FM 5-170. (On all reports, record all distances in metric
dimensions.)

CRITICAL FEATURES
Consider the following features in route classification:
• Road width, slopes, and curves.
• Bridges, fords, tunnels, ferries, underpasses, swim sites, and other
traffic-restricting features.
• Slide areas.
• Drainage.
• Natural and man-made features such as wooded, built-up, and
possible dispersion areas.
Table 3-1 lists route widths; Figure 3-1, page 3-2, shows the formula
for route classification.

Table 3-1. Traffic-flow capability based on route width

Double
Limited Access Single Lane Single Flow
Flow

Wheeled At least 3.5 m 3.5 to 5.5 m 5.5 to 7.3 m Over 7.3 m

Tracked and At least 4.0 m 4.0 to 6.0 m 6.0 to 8.0 m Over 8 m

combination
vehicles

Reconnaissance 3-1
FM 5-34

SLOPES AND RADIUS COMPUTATION

Route width (minimum throughout route)

Military load classification

(maximum allowable on route)

4.5 / Y / 50 / 4 (OB) (T) Special conditions:

(T) Snow blockage
(W) Flooding
Route type:
X All weather
Y Limited all weather Obstructions to
Z Fair weather traffic flow (OB), if
applicable
Lowest overhead clearance
(use ∞ if unlimited)

NOTE: All measurements are in meters.

Figure 3-1. Route-classification formula

CL
M 90o
c

R R

2
where— R = ( C ⁄ ( 8M ) ) + ( M ⁄ 2 )
R = radius of curve
C = distance from the centerline of the road to the centerline of the road
at the outer extremities of the curve
M= perpendicular distance from the center of the tape to the centerline of
the road
NOTE: When conditions warrant, set M at 2 meters from the
centerline, then measure C 2 meters from the centerline. Use
this method when there is a time limitation or because natural or
manmade restrictions prevent proper measurements.

Figure 3-2. Radius-of-curvature calculation

3-2 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

Vd Vd
% of slope = ------- × 100
Hd
Hd
Use clinometer to obtain percent slope or find H by
scaling it off the map; find V by contour differences.

Hasty method: eyesight and pace

Example:
Your height = 1.75 m
1.75 m
1 pace = 0.75 m c es
pa
12 5
1.75 m
ac es
75 p Vd = 2 x 1.75 = 3.5 m
Hd = (75 + 125)(0.75) = 150 m
3.5
% of Slope = ---------- × 100 = 2.3%
150
NOTE: Vertical distance (Vd) and horizontal distance (Hd) must be in
the same units.

Figure 3-3. Slope computation (road gradient)

OBSTRUCTION (OB)
Obstructions are any factors which restrict type, amount, or speed of
traffic flow. Whenever (OB) appears in the route formula, the overlay
must show the exact nature of the O B. The mo st common
obstructions are
• Overhead clearance that is less than 4.3 meters.
• Width below minimum standard prescribed for the type of traffic
flow in Table 3-1, page 3-1.
• Slopes of 7 percent or greater.
• Curves with a radius of 25 meters or less. Curves with a radius of
25.1 to 45 meters are not considered to be an obstruction; however,
they must be recorded on the route overlay classification.
• Fords.
• Ferries.
REPORT AND OVERLAY
A route-classification report consists of an overlay; specific
reconnaissance features (bridge, ford, or road); and any other
supplementary overlays, reports, or sketches to support the report.
As a minimum, the following information will be included on the
route-classification overlay:

Reconnaissance 3-3
FM 5-34

• The route classification formula.

• The name, rank and social security number (SSN) of the person
in charge of performing the classification.
• The unit conducting the classification.
• The date-time group (DTG) that the classification was conducted.
• The map’s name, edition, and scale.
• Any remarks necessary to ensure complete understanding of the
information on the overlay.
Figure 3-4 shows an example of a route-classification overlay.

41

54
3)
(61

24
5
7.

11%
5

6/5 1 300
7/9
50 60
4.1
∞ 40 50
30

1/VP/1.2/x
28/8/G/1.0
8.2

5/Z/40/4.1/(OB)
1 Slide area

Name John Doe 1Lt, EN

8/9 5 SSN 123-45-6789
Org B Co 2d Engr Bn (c)
Date 051200 APN S2
Map Indianhead V773
34 Scale 1:50,000
4.2
46 Remarks:

Figure 3-4. Route-classification overlay

3-4 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

ROAD RECONNAISSANCE
CLASSIFICATION
Road classification is expressed in a standardized sequence: (1)
prefix, use A if there are no limiting characteristics and B if there are
some limiting characteristics; (2) limiting characteristics, use the
symbols in Table 3-2; (3) traveled way width/traveled way plus
shoulder width; (4) road surface material, use the symbols in Table
3-3, page 3-6; (5) road length, obstructions, and special conditions,
put each in parenthesis (see Figure 3-1, page 3-2).

Table 3-2. Road−limiting characteristics and symbols

Limiting Characteristics Symbols

Curves (radius 25 meters or less) c

Gradients (seven percent or greater) g

Drainage (inadequate ditches, culverts) d

Foundation (unstable) f

Surface condition (bumpy, rutted, or pothole) s

Camber or superelevation (excessive crown) j

Unknown characteristics (used with other above symbols enclosed

in parenthesis). Example: (c?) = unknown radius

NOTE: All reports will be submitted in metric measurements.

Example: Bcgd(f?)s 3.2/4.8nb(4.3 kilometers)(OB)(T) would

indicate that the road has limits of sharp curves, steep grades, bad
drainage, unknown foundation, and rough surface; has a traveled
way width of 3.2 meters; has combined width and shoulders of 4.8
meters; has surface material that is bituminous surface treatment on
natural earth, stabilized soil, sand-clay, or other selected material; is
4.3 kilometers long; contains obstructions; and is subject to snow
blockage.

RECORDING
Record road-reconnaissance data on DA Form 1248 (see Figures 3-5 and
3-6, pages 3-7and 3-8).
NOTE: Make note of the existing or potential environmen-
tal impacts due to heavy vehicular traffic.

Reconnaissance 3-5
FM 5-34

Table 3-3. Road−surface materials and symbols

Surface Material Symbol

Concrete k

Bituminous or asphaltic concrete (bituminous plant mix ) kb

Bituminous surface treatment on natural earth, stabilized soil, sand-clay, nb

or other select material

Used when type of bituminous construction cannot be determined b

Bituminous surface on paving brick, or stone pb

Bitumen-penetrated macadam, water-bound macadam with superficial rb

asphalt or tar cover.

Pavement, brick, or stone p

Water-bound macadam, crushed rock, or coral r

Gravel l

Natural earth, stabilized soil, sand-clay, shell, cinders, disintegrated gran- n

ite, or other select material.

Other types not mentioned (indicate length when this symbol is used) v

BRIDGE RECONNAISSANCE
HASTY
See Appendix B, FM 5-170, for hasty bridge classification.

DELIBERATE
To classify a bridge or prepare a bridge for demolition accurately,
conduct a detailed reconnaissance. Use DA Form 1249, Figures 3-7
through 3-13 (pages 3-9 through 3-15), and Table 3-4 (page 3-16) to
record the data. You can use Table 3-4 as a guide for developing a
line-number report format for voice or digital transmission of
bridge data. The information is used in conjunction with FM 5-446
for classification. The Sheffield Method for bridge destruction is
discussed in FM 5-250.

3-6 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 3-5. Sample, DA Form 1248 (front)

Reconnaissance 3-7
FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 3-6. Sample, DA Form 1248 (back)

3-8 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

3 3a

6
4

e b Cross section
c
Concrete T-beam f

a
6
4
b
Concrete slab Cross section

Figure 3-7. Dimensions for concrete bridges

Reconnaissance 3-9
 1
FM 5-34

2 2 c c

3
3a
Stringer
Stringer

3-10 Reconnaissance
Profile
4
6
b a
c Cross section

A C D E F
B

f f f f
f v f v
v
g e g
e e g e e
e
v
g

Lumber Rough-cut I-beam WF-beam Rails Channel

lumber beam

Figure 3-8. Dimensions for a simple stringer bridge

 FM 5-34

1
2

2a
Profile

3a
3

5
4

6
c

a b v
d
g
e
Cross section
f

Figure 3-9. Dimensions for steel-truss bridges

Reconnaissance 3-11
FM 5-34

1
a b
6
4

e
c

3
3a

I-beam

p
q

s r
t m
u

o
n

Figure 3-10. Dimensions for plate-girder bridges

3-12 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

3a
j
3
k

6
4

a
c

Figure 3-11. Dimensions for arch bridges

Reconnaissance 3-13
FM 5-34

1
2 2

2a 3 3a

Profile

e g 5

6
4

b a

Figure 3-12. Dimensions for suspension bridges

3-14 Reconnaissance
C1p3-15-16.fm Page 15 Wednesday, January 31, 2001 9:45 AM

C1, FM 5-34

Truss (1) Girder (2) Beam (3)

Arch Arch
Slab (4) (closed spandrel) (5) (open spandrel) (6)

Counterweight
Suspension (7) Floating (8) swing (9)

Trunnion swing (9)

Single-leaf-trunnion
bascule (10)

Double-trunnion Rolling-lift
bascule (10) bascule (10)

Vertical lift (11)

Figure 3-13. Span types

Reconnaissance 3-15
 .

Table 3-4. Dimensions required on the seven basic bridges

FM 5-34

Entries for Front of DA Form 1249 (Figure number reference is in parenthesis under bridge type)

No from Dimension Simple Stringer Slab T-Beam Truss Girder Arch Suspension
Figure Data (3-7) (3-8) (3-8) (3-9) (3-10) (3-11) (3-12)

1 Overall length X X X X X X X
2 Number of spans X X X X X X X
2 Span length X X X X X X X
2a Panel length X X

3-16 Reconnaissance
3 Height above streambed X X X X X X X
3a Height above estimated normal
water level X X X X X X X
4 Traveled-way width X X X X X X X
5 Overhead clearance X X
6 Horizontal clearance X X X X X X X

Entries for Back Side of DA Form 1249

Letter Capacity(a) Dimension Data Simple Stringer Slab T-Beam Truss Girder Arch Suspension

a Wearing-surface thickness X X X X X X X
C1p3-15-16.fm Page 16 Wednesday, January 31, 2001 8:15 AM

b Flooring and deck thickness or

depth of fill at crown X X X X X X X

Timber Steel

Rectangle Log I-Beam Channel Rail

c Distance, c-to-c, between T-
beams, stingers, or floor beams
No. of T-beams or stringers X X X X X X X X X X
d T-beam or stringer depth (ea) X X X X X
e T-beam or stringer width (ea) X (b) X X X
X X X X
f Web thickness of I-beams, WF- X (c) (c) (c) X X X X
g beams, channels, or rails X X X X

X X X
 Table 3-4. Dimensions required on the seven basic bridges (continued)
Entries for Back Side of DA Form 1249 (continued)

Letter Capacity(a) Dimension Data Simple Stringer Slab T-Beam Truss Girder Arch Suspension

h Sag of cable X
I No. of each cable size X
j Arch-ring thickness X
k Rise of arch X
l Diameter of each cable size X
m Plate girder depth X
n Width of flange plates X
o Thickness of flange plates X
p Number of flange plates X
q Flange-angle depth X
r Flange-angle width X
s Flange-angle thickness X
t Web-plate depth X
u Web-plate thickness X
v Average thickness of flange X
w Cover depth X
(a) Capacity is computed by using formulas and data in FM 5-446.
(b) Diameter
(c) Width of flange

Reconnaissance 3-17
FM 5-34
FM 5-34

BRIDGE-RECONNAISSANCE REPORTS
To send bridge-reconnaissance information, complete a DA Form
1249 (Figures 3-14 and 3-15). Use Table 3-5, page 3-20, to ensure
that you include all the necessary information.

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 3-14. Sample, DA Form 1249 (front)

TUNNEL RECONNAISSANCE
Overhead clearances less than 4.3 meters are classified as
obstructions. Complete DA Form 1250 the same as DA Form 1249.
Figure 3-16, page 3-21, shows a typical sketch of a tunnel with
minimum required dimensions. Use Table 3-1, page 3-1, for
roadway width requirements.

WATER-CROSSING RECONNAISSANCE
All water-crossing reconnaissance, such as swim, ford, raft, bridge,
and ferry, includes the following factors:
• Road network, which should support the largest vehicles and
have good drainage facilities.
• Avenues to and from the river, which should be straight for at
least 150 meters, have a 10 percent maximum grade, have two
lanes with a turnaround, and have an all-weather surface
whenever possible.

3-18 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 3-15. Sample, DA Form 1249 (back)

Reconnaissance 3-19
FM 5-34

Table 3-5. Engineer-reconnaissance checklist

Roads. Classify using symbols.
Bridges, Fords, and Ferries. Classify using symbols and include possible bypass
for existing crossings.
Obstacles to Movement. Report natural and artificial obstacles including
demolitions, mines, and booby traps.
Terrain. Report general nature, ridge system, drainage system including fordability,
forests, swamps, and areas suitable for mechanized operations.
Engineer Materials. Report road material, bridge timbers, lumber, steel, and
explosives.
Engineer Equipment. Record data on rock crushers, sawmills, garages, machine
shops, blacksmith shops, or other facilities or equipment.
Errors and Omissions on Maps Used.
Water Points. Recommend locations.
Restrictions on Enemy Movement. Describe natural or artificial obstacles and
sites for construction of improvements (work estimates).
Streams. Give a general description of width, depth, banks, approaches, character
of bottom, navigability, and possible ways to cross.
Defensive Positions.
Bivouac Areas. Give data on entrances, soil, drainage, sanitation, and
concealment.
Petroleum Storage and Equipment.
Utilities. Report water, sewage, electricity, and gas utilities available.
Ports. Show wharves, sunken obstacles, cargo handling facilities, storage facilities,
and transportation routes.
Construction Sites. Report drainage, water supply, power source, earthwork,
access, acreage, and soil conditions.
Any Other Information of Importance.

NOTE: Give work estimates as required.

• Riverbanks, which should have stability, slope, and height (see

Figure 3-17, page 3-22.)
• Widths, which you can measure by using a string or tape across
the river, scaled off the map, or as shown in Figure 3-18, page 3-23.
• Depths, which you record every 3 meters by using a measured
pole/rod or weighted ropes/strings.
• Sites, which are assembly areas and other needed areas that
should be spacious, provide good concealment, and have easy
access routes.
• Velocity, which you measure by using the procedures in Figure 3-19,
page 3-23.
• Obstructions, which can be sandbars, floating debris, and other
water obstacles or restrictions.
• Drainage, which should be adequate.
• Soil stability, which should be adequate for anchoring. Check the
banks and river bottoms for stability.

3-20 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

1a
5

4a 4

1
2

6
6a 6a

1 Portal-to-portal length of tunnel

1a Centerline distance of tunnel
2 Effective width of the traveled way, curb to curb
3 Horizontal clearance (minimum width of the bored tunnel measured
at least 4 feet above the traveled way)
4 Overhead clearance (minimum distance between the top of the
traveled way and the lower edge of the tunnel ceiling or any
obstructions below the ceiling such as trolley wires or electric light
wires)
4a Rise of tunnel arch (radius of curved portion)
5 Radius of curvature of the traveled way either measured or
estimated
6 Gradient (percentage of rise of the traveled way between portals)
6a Change in gradient within the tunnel (percentage of rise each way
from break of grade)

Figure 3-16. Tunnel sketch with required measurements

Reconnaissance 3-21
FM 5-34

1
2a
2
2b

3 3a 3b
4
4b
4a

1 The width of streambed from bank to bank

2 The actual width of the water, measured at normal
stage (maximum width 2a and minimum width 2b are
estimated, based on local observations or records of
high water and low water)
3 The actual depth of the stream at normal water level
3a Estimated maximum water depth based on local
observations or records
3b /Estimated minimum water depth based on local
observations (watermarks) or records
4 The slope of the approaches, which is the slope of
the stream banks through that the approach roads
are cut

4a
% slope = ------- × 100
4b

4a = Approach elevation
4b = Approach distance

Figure 3-17. River or stream measurements

3-22 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

1. Select prominent object B,

such as a tree on far bank.
2. Stand at point A opposite B
B, and read azimuth X°.

Az
3. Move upstream or down-

°)
45

im
stream from A to point C

Azimuth X°

ut
+

h
so that azimuth to B

(X
equals X + 45° or X - 45°.

(X
h

-4
ut
m

5°
i
Az
4. Distance AC equals gap

)
AB.
45°

C A C
EXAMPLE:
Azimuth of line AB is 315° (moving left, add 45°; moving right, subtract 45°).
Azimuth of line CB is 270°.
Difference between azimuth AB and azimuth CB is 45°.
Distance along AC equals distance along AB.

Figure 3-18. Measuring stream width with a compass

Direction of current

C A′ B′

A B

Measure distance AB.

Throw floating object into stream at C.
Determine time required for object to float distance AB.

AB (meters)
Velocity = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time to float from A′ to B′ (seconds)

Figure 3-19. Measuring stream velocity

Reconnaissance 3-23
FM 5-34

FORD RECONNAISSANCE
Use Table 3-6 to determine trafficability. When DA Form 1251 is
used for a swim site, it must specify that the site is for swimming
only.

Table 3-6. Ford-site trafficability

Maximum
Shallow, Percent of
Minimum Width
Type of Traffic Fordable Depth
(m) Slope or
(m)
Approaches1

Foot 1 1single file 100%

2columns of 2 1:1

Trucks and truck- 0.75 3.6 33%

drawn artillery 1:3

Tanks 1 4.2 50%

1:2

1
Based on hard, dry surface

ENGINEER RECONNAISSANCE
An engineer reconnaissance report consists of a completed DA
Form 1711-R and an engineer reconnaissance overlay (Figure 3-20
and Figure 3-21, page 3-26). When looking for water-point
locations, select sites with running water, if possible. To determine
the capacity of the water source, in liters per minute, use the
following formula:

Q = AV48,000

where
Q = flow, in liters per minute
A = cross section of stream flow, in square meters
V = velocity, in meters per second
48,000 is a conversion and correction factor

3-24 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 3-20. Sample, DA Form 1711-R (front)

Reconnaissance 3-25
FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 3-21. Sample, DA Form 1711-R (back)

Check the color, odor, turbidity, and taste (do not drink) of water.
Report any possible pollution such as human or industrial waste or
dead fish. Overlay symbols are shown in Figure 3-22; material,
facility equipment, and service symbols are shown in Figure 3-23,
page 3-29. A reconnaissance checklist is provided in Table 3-5,
page 3-20.

3-26 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

Turnouts
Turnout length in meters

Arrows are drawn at

4m location of turnout,
pointing to the turnout
Wheel direction.
Track
Turnout over
1 km long

Bypasses

Impossible Difficult Easy

Percent of slope

5% but less 7% but 10% but 14% and

that 7% less than less than over
10% 14%

Obstacles Road Road

Road Road

Planned State of State of Executed

readiness 1 readiness 2
(safe) (armed but
passable)

Figure 3-22. Overlay symbols

Reconnaissance 3-27
FM 5-34

Curves
Single Multiple
Number
of curves
Curve
radius
26 7/1
5
Sharp curve: any curve with a radius of 25 Sharpest
meters or less is an obstruction. All curves curve radius
with a radius less than 45 meters are
reportable.
Critical point Number, in order, and
3 describe on DA Form 1711-R

Wheel
Bridge Two-way
One-way class
Full NATO bridge
symbol xx xx Length
Overhead xx xx xx xx
clearance
x Location and
Traveled way bypass condition
width xx
Serial number
When a full NATO bridge symbol is used on an
overlay, the additional information column on the
DA Form 1249 will not contain bypass length,
traveled way width, or overhead clearance
Load classification
Bridge
xx

Location xx

Serial number
When an abbreviated symbol is used, DA Form
1249 must be attached. Bridge load class must
be underlined if traveled way width is below the
standards in FM 5-170, Table 5-1.

Figure 3-22. Overlay symbols (continued)

3-28 Reconnaissance
 Serial Type
Serial number Ferry number
Tunnel Right approach conditions
Left apporach
Tunnel length conditions
1
Maximum and minimum 800
5/6 Deadweight
overhead clearance Mil load
3.4/5.4 class capacity
All ferries are considered as
obstructions (OB) to traffic.
Traveled way width/plus sidewalk Type of ferry:
Bypass con-
(underline if narrower than approach- V - Vehicular
dition P - Pedestrian
ing road)
Approach conditions:
Difficult Easy

ns
for
ns
Ford

itio
of
s

m of
itio

Le
nd ch
Underpass

mb l

ap ft
tor g l

pe
ea ity
R
nd ch

co proa
S
V
ap ight

limeas

nueria
Ty er
streloc
fac itin ona
co proa
Traveled Maximum
way width

t
overhead

ng
and side-

dt
clearance

e
m f
Minimum traveled Minimum overhead

pth l

L
Arch

Wi h
walks

No

tto o
Direction of type clearance

de rma
way width

Na h
bo ture
flow
Left bank If traveled way width is narrower than width Symbol is drawn to show shape of struc-
of read leading into tunnel, the number ture. Show sidewalk when present. If clear-
All fords are considered as obstruction (OB) to traffic. must be underlined. ance is less than 4.3 meters, it is an
Trafficability conditions indicate conditions on both obstruction.
approaches.

Type of ford:
Constriction
NOTE: See Table 3-1, page 3-1, to
V - Vehicular P - Pedestian determine if constriction is a traffic
Right bank obstruction.
Seasonal limiting factors:
X - No seasonal limitation except for limited dura- 4 120
tion after sudden flooding. Total constricted
NOTE: See Table 3-6, Y - Significant seasonal limitations Traveled way
page 3-24. width length
Nature of bottom:
M - Mud C - Clay S - Sand Railroad crossings 4.0
G - Gravel R - Rock P - Artificial paving
4.3
Underline if
Approach conditions:
Easy Overhead less than 4.3
Difficult
crossing meters
Level grade
crossing Combination

Reconnaissance 3-29
FM 5-34

Figure 3-23. Material, facility equipment, and service symbols

FM 5-34

Railroad bridges Load class

RL RL Double-flow
Single-flow class
class
60 45 60
8 40 5 60
5 6
Overhead Bridge
clearance length
4 8
Serial
number
Traveled way width Road vehicle use
(underline if below adaptation
standard for (difficult)
specific time)

Stocks of bricks Electrical supply

and other clay equipment
products

Aggregate Civil-engineering
(including gravel, firms
slag)

Cement-concrete
Lumberyard products

Gypsum and lime

products
Glass stock

Sawmill
Industrial gases

Mobile heavy Quarrying

construction equipment
equipment

Figure 3-23. Material, facility equipment, and service symbols (continued)

3-30 Reconnaissance
 FM 5-34

Water purification Factory symbol

equipment plus plant product
(civilian)

Building Stores handling

contractors and transportation
equipment
Sand
Possible military
water point
Iron and steel
stock
Stone

Asphalt and
bituminous stock Paint

Factories Cordage, nets,

yarns

Powered
hand tools
Steel rolling mills
and foundries
Established
military water
point Forestry
equipment

Engineering Parking area

workshops

Wire stock
Building
hardware

Stocks of roof Utility (civilian)

covering
Water Gas Electric

Figure 3-23. Material, facility equipment, and service symbols (continued)

Reconnaissance 3-31
 Chapter 4
Mobility
MINE DETECTION
Conduct an analysis by reviewing the terrain, enemy capabilities,
and past performances.

MINEFIELD INDICATORS
The following could be indicators of a minefield. (The Thermal Mine
Acquisition System [TMAS] can also help you identify mines.)
• Damaged vehicles.
• Dead animals.
• Avoidance by the local populace.
• Signs of digging.
• Signs of concrete removal.
• Holes or grooves in the road.
• Boxes or parcels placed along the road or shoulder.
• Parked vehicles and bicycles without operators.
• Wires on the road surface or extending to the shoulder.
• Metallic devices on the roadway surface.
• Evidence of mine-peculiar supplies (wrenches, shipping plugs,
safety collars).
• Disturbances in previous tire tracks.
• Disturbance of road potholes or puddles.
• Disturbance in the cobblestone pattern or missing cobblestone.
• Differences in the amount of moisture or dew on road surface.
• Differences in plant growth (wilting, changing colors, or dead
foliage).
• Signs posted on trees that covertly alert the local populace to the
presence of mines.

Mobility 4-1
C3, FM 5-34

DETECTION AND REMOVAL

Mine-detection and removal methods include visual inspections,
probing, using an electronic mine detector, and clearing manually.

VISUAL INSPECTIONS
Check for ground disturbances, posted signs, tripwires, odd
features on the ground, and signs of road repairs.

PROBING
Fasten and secure all equipment to your body and remove all
metallic objects from your body. Use a slender, nonmetallic probe,
in the prone position (as a last resort only, use a bayonet, a
screwdriver, a cleaning rod, an antenna, or another sharp object)
and probe every 2.5 centimeters across a 1-meter front (gently push
the probe into the ground at a 30-degree angle while applying just
enough pressure on the probe to sink it slowly into the ground to a
depth of at least 3 inches).

ELECTRONIC MINE DETECTOR

Rotate operators at least every 20 minutes.

MANUAL CLEARING
Figures 4-1 and 4-2 and Table 4-1 show an example of a team
composition and equipment for a clearing operation. The sweep-
team composition is subject to change due to personnel availability
and the tactical situation. Figure 4-3, page 4-4, shows a sweep team in
echelon. Table 4-2, page 4-5, shows a team organization for a route
clearance.

Relief Radio NCOIC Mine-

1.5 m

Subarea to be
cleared prober/ operator detector
marker operator
7 4 2
1.5 m

1
6 5 3
Relief mine- Demolition Prober/
1.5 m

Cleared area detector man marker

operator

30 m 10 m 30 m

No. = a soldier

Figure 4-1. Squad-size sweep team

4-2 Mobility
 C2, FM 5-34

1.5 m
Subarea to be cleared

Mine-

1.5 m
detector
Subarea to be cleared operator
Relief mine- 1
Relief

1.5 m
detector Mine-
prober/ operators Radio NCOIC detector
marker operator Mine- operator
8 4 detector
6 operator

1.5 m
11 2
(-) 9 5
12 7 3
10

1.5 m
Relief Demolition Prober/
demolition man marker
man
50 m 30 m 10 m 30 m 30 m 30 m

No. = a soldier

Figure 4-2. Platoon-size sweep team

Table 4-1. Personnel and equipment requirements for a sweep team

Support
Personnel Equipment
Personnel

• NCOIC • Medics • One panel marker

• Mine-detector operator • Vehicle operator • Operational map with required
• Probers/markers maneuver graphics
• Radio operator • Four smoke grenades (minimum)
• Demolition teams • Six mine detectors (includes three
backups) and extra batteries
• Two grappling hooks with 60 meters
of rope each
• One demolition kit or bag for each
demolition man
• Six probes
• Mine-marking material

Mobility 4-3
C2, FM 5-34

1.5 m 1.5 m
Subarea to be cleared

Subarea to be cleared

7 4 2

1.5 m
6 5 3 1

1.5 m
7 2
6 5 3 1

7 4

1.5 m
2
6 5 3 1

30 m 30 m
3rd squad 2nd squad 1st squad

No. = a soldier

Figure 4-3. Sweep teams in echelon

4-4 Mobility
 Table 4-2. Route-clearance team organization

Team Support Force Assault Force Breach Force

Heavy • Mechanized infantry platoon • Mechanized infantry platoon • Engineer platoon with organic
with dismount capability • Engineer squad vehicles
• Armor platoon • Mortar section • Armor platoon with plows and
• Medical team (two ambu- rollers
lances)
• PSYOP team
• FIST
Light/heavy Two infantry platoons (light) • Bradley platoon with dismount • Engineer platoon with organic
capability vehicles
• Engineer squad • Armor platoon with plows and
• 60-mm mortar section rollers
• Medical team (two ambu-
lances)
• PSYOP team
• Forward observer
Light Two infantry platoons (light) • AT/MP section with M60/MK19 • Engineer squad (+)
mix • Infantry platoon (light)
• 60-mm mortar section • AT/MP section with M60/MK19
• Medical team (two ambu- mix
lances)
• PSYOP team
• Forward observer

Mobility 4-5
FM 5-34
FM 5-34

OBSTACLE-BREACHING THEORY
The five breaching tenets are intelligence; breaching fundamentals
(suppress, obscure, secure, reduce [SOSR]); breaching organization
(support, breach, and assault forces); mass; and synchronization.
For more information on obstacle breaching, see FM 90-13-1.

OBSTACLE-REDUCTION TECHNIQUES
The mine-clearing line charge (MICLIC) is a rocket-propelled,
explosive line charge used primarily to reduce minefields
containing single-pulse, pressure-activated AT mines and
mechanically activated AP mines. It clears a path 100 by 14
meters. All pressure-activated mines in this path will be destroyed
except the deeply buried mines along a narrow skip zone (see
Figure 4-4). Figures 4-5 and 4-6 show other uses of the MICLIC.

5m
4m
3m

1.5 m
Skip zone
.75 m

Line charge

Skip zone .75 m

1.5 m
3m

4m
5m

Figure 4-4. MICLIC skip zone

Plows lift and push mines that are surface-laid or buried up to 6

inches deep to the side of the track-width lanes (see Figure 4-7,
page 4-8). When plowing, restrict the speed to less than 10 kmph,
continue on a straight course through the minefield to prevent
damage to the plow, and make sure that the gun tube is traversed
to the side. The area you plow must be relatively flat and free of
rocks. You should begin plowing about 100 meters from the
estimated leading edge of the minefield and 100 meters beyond the
estimated far edge. A dog-bone assembly between the plows will
defeat tilt-rod fused mines. The improved dog-bone assembly (IDA)
defeats tilt-rod and magnetically fused mines.

4-6 Mobility
 FM 5-34

Known to
be <100 m

62 m 100 m

Inert

Inert
Actual charge

Figure 4-5. Using a MICLIC (depth is less than 100 meters)

100+ m

62 m 100 m
First MICLIC
100 m

25 m

62 m 100 m
Second MICLIC

First charges
Second charges
Inert

Figure 4-6. Using a MICLIC (depth is uncertain or greater than 100 meters)

Mobility 4-7
FM 5-34

180”
64”
54”

26”

M1
89”
25”
M60A3
87”
M88
79”

M2/M3
75”

72” M113

Plowed path Uncleared

area

Figure 4-7. Mine-plow width compared to tracked-vehicle widths

Mine rollers are designed to detect minefields. The roller sweeps a

44-inch path in front of each track (see Figure 4-8). You must
travel in a relatively straight path, since tight turns may cause the
rollers to deviate from the path of the tracks and miss mines.
Ensure that the main gun is traversed to the rear or side for a mine
encounter. The rollers are designed to defeat most single-pulse,
pressure-activated AT and AP mines. A dog-bone and chain
assembly between the rollers defeats tilt-rod-fused mines. The IDA
can be fitted to the mine roller.

160”
44” 72” 44”

M1
89” 25”

87” M60A3

79” M88

75” M2/M3

72” M113

Roller path Uncleared

area

Figure 4-8. Mine-roller width compared to tracked-vehicle widths

4-8 Mobility
 FM 5-34

You can use the armored combat earthmover, M9 (ACE) as a last

resort in a minefield as the blades were not designed for reducing a
minefield, thus its use is extremely dangerous to the equipment and
crew. However, the blades are ideally suited to break down and
reduce earthen gaps such as AT ditches and road craters. ACEs are
also effective against wire. Table 4-3 contains information on the
ACE and other nonexplosive obstacle breaching equipment. Figure
4-9, page 4-10, shows the blade pattern.

Table 4-3. Nonexplosive obstacle-breaching equipment

Nomen- Load Height Width Speed Arma-

Mobility Employment
clature Class (m) (m) (kmph) ment

ACE 18 2.3 3.2 48 None Fills craters and

ditches; removes road
blocks, trees, and
rubble; prepares river
and ford accesses;
prepares and main-
tains routes

D7F (dozer) 28 2.4 3.48 10 None Cuts tactical routes;

fills craters and
ditches; removes
rubble and trees

Loader 20 3.7 2.6 None Fills craters and

(2.5) ditches; removes wire
obstacles

AVLB w/bridge 57 5 4 48 None Bridges gaps 18

w/o bridge 37 meters or less; bridges
gaps 15 meters or less
for Class 70

STANDARD LANE MARKING

The three standard levels of marking breach lanes and bypasses are
initial, intermediate, and full.
Marking a breach lane or bypass is a critical subcomponent of
obstacle reduction. Effective lane marking allows leaders to project
forces through the obstacle quickly, with combat power and command
and control (C2) intact. It provides the assault force a confident, safe
lane and helps prevent unnecessary minefield casualties. There are
two critical components to any lane marking system:

Mobility 4-9
FM 5-34

m
15

Figure 4-9. Engineer-blade skim pattern

• Lane-marking pattern (the location of markers indicating the

entrance, the lane, and the exit).
• Marking device (the type of hardware emplaced to mark the
entrance, the lane, and the exit).

INITIAL LANE MARKING

The breach force emplaces the initial lane-marking pattern
immediately after the lane is reduced and proofed (see Figure 4-10).
The initial lane marking is centered around the minimum
markings needed to pass immediate assault forces through the lane
to seize the initial foothold on the objective.

INTERMEDIATE LANE MARKING

Upgrading an initial lane marking to an intermediate pattern is
triggered by either the commitment of larger combat forces or the
rearward passage of sustainment traffic (casualty evacuation
[CASEVAC] and vehicle recovery) (see Figure 4-11, page 4-12).
Intermediate lane marking has two goals. It—
• Increases the lane signature to assist in the passage of larger,
more distant combat forces.
• Provides sufficient marking for two-way, single-lane traffic.

4-10 Mobility
 FM 5-34

4.5 m
(1 m*)
Exit markers

Left handrail
markers

15 m (5 m*)

4.5 m
(1 m*)
50 m
(15 m*) Entrance markers
50 m (15 m*)

200 m (30 m*)

200 m (30 m*) Entrance

funnel
markers

Final-
approach
marker
ATTACK

*Distance for dismounted lanes

Figure 4-10. Initial lane-marking pattern

Mobility 4-11
FM 5-34

Farside final-approach marker

Exit funnel markers

200 m (30 m*)

15 m (5 m*)
Right handrail
markers

4.5 m

50 m (15 m*)
(1 m*)
200 m (30 m*)

500 m (200 m*)

ATTACK

Far-recognition
marker
*Distance for dismounted lanes
Guide (TCP)

Figure 4-11. Intermediate lane-marking pattern

FULL LANE MARKING

Upgrading to a full lane is normally assigned to follow-on engineer
forces. The full lane-marking pattern is also used when marking a
lane through friendly obstacles along a major supply route or
passage lane (see Figure 4-12). Expanding the breach lane to a full
lane involves—
• Expanding the width of the lane to accommodate two-way traffic.
• Modifying the marking pattern to give forces passing forward or
rearward the same visual signature.

4-12 Mobility
 FM 5-34

Guide or TCP

Left handrail for forward

Return traffic and return traffic

Right handrail
(return traffic)

Right handrail
(forward traffic)

10 m

Forward traffic
ATTACK

Guide or TCP

Figure 4-12. Full lane-marking pattern

Table 4-4, page 4-14, lists who is responsible for emplacing each type
of lane-marking pattern and what events trigger the emplacement.
Table 4-5, page 4-15, lists the requirements for the various
components of the lane-marking pattern. Figure 4-13, page 4-16,
shows examples of nonstandard marking devices.

Mobility 4-13
 Table 4-4. Lane-marking levels, unit responsibilities, and trigger events
FM 5-34

Breach Initial Intermediate Full

4-14 Mobility
Type Unit Responsibility

Deliberate TF breach force TF breach force Brigade

Covert TF breach force TF breach force Brigade
In stride Breach company/team TF mobility reserve Brigade
Assault Assault platoon TF assault force NA

Trigger Events

When When passing When

• Lanes are reduced • Battalion- or company-size forces • Passing brigade- or battalion-size forces
• Passing platoon- or • Forces that cannot see the lane • Situation requires uninterrupted sustainment
company-size forces • TF combat trains traffic

Lane Markers
Entrance/exit The following markers are added: Lane width is expanded to 10 meters. Existing
Left handrail • Right handrail markers are adjusted. Far-side-recognition
Entrance funnel • Exit funnel markers and guides/TCPs are added.
Final approach • Far-side final approach
• Far recognition
• Guides/TCPs
 Table 4-5. Guidelines for lane-marking devices

Marker Mounted Forces Dismounted Forces

Handrail Visible by TC and driver, buttoned up from 50 meters Visible by a dismounted soldier in a prone position from 15
and funnel Quick and easy to emplace minimizing the need to meters
expose soldiers to the outside area Lightweight, quick and easy to emplace; a dismounted soldier
should be able to carry enough markers for the lane and still
be able to fire and maneuver.

Entrance Visible by TC, buttoned up from 100 meters Visible by a dismounted soldier from 50 meters
and exit Visually different from handrail and funnel markers Visually different from the handrail and funnel markers
Quick and easy to emplace; may require soldiers to Lightweight, quick and easy to emplace
dismount to emplace; easily manportable

Final Visible by TC, not buttoned up from 500 meters Visible by a dismounted soldier on the march from 100 meters
approach Visually different from each other Visually different from each other
and far rec- Visually alterable to facilitate traffic control through Visually alterable to facilitate traffic control through multiple
ognition multiple lanes lanes
FM 5-34

Mobility 4-15
FM 5-34

Traffic cone Highway marker Tippy Tom HEMMS pole

VS-17
panel strip
NOTE: Cut 2 feet
above the base to
make a short pole.
16
c m
61 cm Stake
straps
Base
10 cm plate
26 cm
HEMMS pole Short pole
Short-pole
assembly
Exit marker
NOTE: Stack 3
short poles to
make a long Left
pole. handrail
VS-17
panel

Entrance Far-recognition marker

marker using camouflage
Long-pole support system
assembly

Figure 4-13. Nonstandard marking devices

4-16 Mobility
 FM 5-34

NORTH ATLANTIC TREATY ORGANIZATION (NATO)

STANDARD MARKING

This paragraph implements STANAG 2036

To convert intermediate and full lane marking to NATO standards,

affix NATO markers to long pickets and replace the existing
entrance, exit, funnel, and handrail markers one for one. (See Figure
4-14 for examples of NATO markers.) Since international forces may
not be accustomed to using the right lane, place directional arrows to
identify lane traffic directions. In addition, lay a barbed wire or
concertina fence (one strand minimum) 1 meter above the ground to
connect the funnel entrance and handrail markers and the exit
pickets.

Red (danger side) White (safe side)

NATO marker

White Red White

Two NATO markers modified for center handrail

Figure 4-14. NATO standard marker

NATO uses white or green lights to illuminate the markers at night.

Entrance and exit markers are marked with either two green or two
white lights, placed horizontally, so that the safe and dangerous
markings on them are clearly visible. One white or green light will be
used on each funnel and handrail marker. The commander may
decide whether the light is placed on top of the marker or placed so
that it illuminates the marker. Lights should be visible from a
minimum of 50 meters under normal conditions.

Mobility 4-17
FM 5-34

COMBAT ROADS AND TRAILS

Plan— Construct Combat Road—

Coordinate security Coordinate work-site security
Conduct reconnaissance Place stakes
Test soil Remove ground cover
Select proposed site(s) Cut and fill
Report findings Compact
Stabilize soil
Shape
Prepare—
Acquire needed assets Provide drainage
Conduct briefings Surface
Inspect/maintain systems
Organize mission forces Maintain/Repair—
Move to/toward sites Inspect
Fill
Construct Combat Trail— Compact
Reshape
Coordinate work-site security
Delineate route Check drainage
Clear pathway
Reduce limiting grades Reconstitute—
Construct expedient surfacing Determine status
Specify replacements
And/Or Acquire replacements
Repair/resupply/decontaminate

Figure 4-15. Combat roads and trails process

Width of clearing (roadway + minimum of 1.8 m on each side)

Roadbed
Roadway
Traveled way
Surface
Interceptor course Traffic
ditch lane Crown
Cut

Cut slope Fill Shoulder

Base course

Ditch Ditch slope

Fill slope

Figure 4-16. Typical cross-section showing road nomenclature

4-18 Mobility
 FM 5-34

EXPEDIENT SURFACES OVER MUD

CHESPALING MATS
Chespaling mats are made by placing small saplings, 2 meters long
and about 3.8 centimeters in diameter, side by side (see Figure 4-17).
Wire the saplings together with chicken wire mesh or strands of
heavy smooth wire. A chespaling road is constructed by laying mats
lengthwise with a 0.3 meter side overlap at the junction of the mats.
The resulting surface is 36 meters wide. Unless mats are laid on wet
ground, this type of road requires periodic wetting down to retain its
springiness and to prevent splitting. Chespaling mats also require
extensive maintenance.

Saplings - 2 m long, 4 cm diameter

Heavy smooth wire

or chicken-wire
mesh

Finished mat size 2 m by 3.7 m or larger

Figure 4-17. Chespaling-surface road construction

CORDUROY
If the road surface is standard corduroy, logs 15 to 20 centimeters in
diameter and about 4 meters long are placed adjacent to each other
(butt to tip) (see Figure 4-18, page 4-20). Curbs are made by placing
15-centimeter-diameter logs along the edges of the roadway (draft-
pinned in place). Pickets about 4 feet long are driven into the ground
at regular intervals along the outside edge of the road to hold the
road in place. For a smoother surface, the chinks between the logs
should be filled with brush, rubble, and twigs. The whole surface is
then covered with a layer of gravel or dirt. Side ditches and culverts
are constructed as for normal roads.
If the road surface is corduroy with stringers, the corduroy decking is
securely pinned to stringers, and then the surface is prepared as
standard corduroy (see Figure 4-18). A road surface that is heavy
corduroy uses sleepers (heavy logs 25- to 30-inch diameter and long

Mobility 4-19
FM 5-34

Guard rail
Picket
4m
15- to 20-cm logs

Cross section,
standard corduroy

4m
20-cm logs

9m
15- to 20-cm
log stringers

Cross section,
corduroy with stringers

4m
15- to 20-cm cross logs
and stringers

25- to 30-cm sleepers on 1.2-m centers

Length depends on ground condition.

Cross section,
heavy corduroy

Figure 4-18. Corduroy road surfaces

enough to cover the entire road) placed at right angles to the

centerline on 1.2-meter centers (see Figure 4-18). A road surface
that is fascine corduroy uses fascine instead of logs for stringers
(see Figure 4-19).

4-20 Mobility
 FM 5-34

Cross section

4m
Ground Fill in with brush
surface and earth

Binders

Pole sleepers

Tightly bound
fascines, 12 to 20 cm 15-cm round pickets
in diameter spaced at 4.5-m centers

Transverse section

Pole binders
Ground
surface

15- to 20-cm fascines

Pole sleepers
Bind fascines, sleepers,
and binders together with
tight wire ties.

Figure 4-19. Fascine corduroy

TREAD ROADS
Tread roads are made by preparing two narrow parallel treadways of
selected material using anything from palm leaves to 4-inch planks.
The most common tread road is the plank tread road (see Figure 4-20,
page 4-22).

OTHER SURFACES
Surfaces can be constructed from rubble, bricks, concrete blocks,
loose aggregate or gravel, and airfield matting. See Figures 4-21
through 4-23, pages 4-22 and 4-23, for other types of road surfaces.
For more information, see FM 5-430-00-1, Chapter 9.

Mobility 4-21
FM 5-34

Plan
Stagger joints

Flooring
8 cm x 25 cm x 3 m

Sleepers
10 cm x 25 cm x 3.5 -4.9 cm

Cross section Curbs

15 cm x 15 cm x 3 m

Figure 4-20. Plank tread road

Sand

1.5-cm wire
cable

Drill cable holes at

45° angle
10- x 10-cm or
15- x 15-cm timbers

Figure 4-21. Army track

4-22 Mobility
 FM 5-34

13 cm

Linking bar overlap 10 cm

4 cm x 1 cm x 4. 5 m 24-gauge metal (6 per joint)
wrapped around end-traverse bars

Turned-
over, head-
type picket

Center linking bar

23-cm minimum overlap of
Sommerfeld track roll, section at joints
3.23 meters (159 kg 8 cm
per roll)
Sommerfeld picket (angle iron
About 6 cm with cap) 0.6- to 0.9-m long

I-cm transverse bar with ends

turned back and welded to
form 13-cm eye
Place rope sling, draw
picket to vertical.

5- x 5- x 1-cm
angle iron 0.6- to 0.9-m long,
according to ground

Figure 4-22. Component parts of a Sommerfield truck

Stakes

Metal landing mat

Timber curb
Drainage ditch

Figure 4-23. Other expedient surfaces

Mobility 4-23
FM 5-34

EXPEDIENT SURFACES OVER SAND

WIRE MESH
Chicken wire, expanded metal lath, or chain-link wire mesh
(cyclone fence) may be used for expedient surfaces over sand.
Adding a layer of burlap or similar material underneath the wire
mesh helps confine the sand. The edges of the wire-mesh road
must be picketed at 0.9- to 1.2-meter intervals. Diagonal wires
that cross the centerline at 45o angles and are securely attached to
buried pickets fortify the lighter meshes. The more layers used,
the more durable the pad will become (Figure 4-24).

0.9 to 1.2 m

0.9 to 1.2 m

2.7 to 4.3 m, two

sections of chain-link Burlap
wire mesh

Figure 4-24. Chain-link wire-mesh road

SAND GRID
In a sand grid, each grid section expands to cover an area 2.4
meters x 6 meters x 20 centimeters (see Figure 4-25). Use pickets
or place sand on the corners and sides to maintain placement. You
may use a bucket loader to fill in the grids. Use hand shovels to fill
each grid completely. A full grid section will hold the weight of a
bucket loader. To compact the surface, you can use a rubber-tire or
steel-wheel roller. You may apply a sand asphalt surface of about
one gallon of RC-250 asphalt per square yard.
Place the initial 8-inch layer of sand grid in the crater, parallel to
the centerline of the runway or roadway. Expand and place the
sand grid, using shovels to fill the grid-edge sections to hold it in
place. Cover the entire bottom of the crater with sand grid in this
manner. Place grid so it conforms to the shape of the crater,
curving or cutting as necessary. Sections that do not fully expand
only add strength to this base.

4-24 Mobility
 FM 5-34

20 cm
Sand grid

Compacted

Figure 4-25. Sand grid

After laying the entire first layer, use a bucket loader to begin filling
the grid, working from one edge of the crater towards the center. As
the grids are filled, the loader can drive forward onto the grids to
expand their range. Use shovels and rakes to spread the material to
overfill the cells by a uniform layer of 2.5 to 5.0 centimeters. The
loader should provide sufficient compaction; however, you could use
the towed vib or plate tampers. Over compaction will damage the
sand grid; your repair will fail. After compacting the first layer,
repeat the process, starting with placing a layer of membrane.
Place the top layer of sand grid with its long dimension stretched 90
degrees to the first, which makes it perpendicular to the runway
centerline for added strength.
Overfill the grid cells by 2.4 to 5.0 centimeters. Compact the cells
level with the pavement surface. If excess material is present after
compaction, remove it.

FORWARD AVIATION
ARMY AIRCRAFT AND HELICOPTER CHARACTERISTICS
Table 4-6, page 4-26, lists information on Army helicopters; Table 4-7,
page 4-27, lists the requirements for combat airfields.

Mobility 4-25
 Table 4-6. Army helicopter characteristics
FM 5-34

Rotor Basic External Load Cargo Winch

Length Height

4-26 Mobility
Nomenclature Name Diameter Weight Capacity* Capacity
(m) (m)
(m) (kips) (1,000 kg) (1,000 kg)

OH-6A Cayuse 11.98 8.02 2.67 1.16 -- --

OH-58 A/C Kiowa 12.85 10.66 3.91 1.90 -- --

CH47B Chinook 30.14 18.28 5.76 19.59 9,072 1,361

CH-47C Chinook 30.14 18.28 5.66 20.48 9,072 1,361

CH-47D Chinook 30.14 18.28 5.68 22.50 11,794 1,361

CH-54A/B Crane 26.97 21.94 7.74 21.20 9,072/11,640 6,804/11,340

UH 1 H/V/ Iroquois 17.39 14.63 4.42 5.13 1,815 --

UH-60A Black Hawk 19.76 16.35 5.00 11.04 3,629 --

AH-64 Apache 17.75 14.63 4.67 14.66 2,722 --

AH-1S Cobra 16.15 13.41 3.53 6.60 454 --

*Maximum lifting capability

 Table 4-7. Combat-area airfield requirements

Anticipated Possible Takeoff Ground Minimum Minimum Minimum

Airfield Type Service Life Using Aircraft Run at Sea Level Runway Runway Shoulder
(months) (US type) at 51oF (m) Length (m) Width (m) Width (m)
Close battle area 0-6 C-17 914.4 1,066.8 27.43 3.05
C-130*+ 18.29

Support area 0-6 C-17 914.4 1,920.24 27.43 12.19

C-130*+ 18.29

Rear area 6-24 C-5* 3,505.20 4,389.12 45.72 15.24

C-141+ 2,712.72
C-17 2,316.48
C-130 1,219.20
KC-135 2,042.16
B-1 3,018.96
KC-135 2,042.16
F-117 2,926.08 F-111 1645.92
E-3 1,993.39 F-16 883.92
F-4/F-15 1,219.20
A-7 1,944.62

*Controlling aircraft for runway length

+Controlling aircraft for required surface depth
FM 5-34

Mobility 4-27
FM 5-34

CONSTRUCTION OF FORWARD LANDING ZONE OR AIRSTRIP

You can use membrane or available timber to construct an
expedient hardened landing-pad surface. Mark all obstacles in the
landing zone or airstrip. Sprinkling water, lime, lime solutions, or
oils will provide temporary dust control (see Table 4-8). Table 4-9
and Figures 4-26 through 4-29, pages 4-30 and 4-31, show
geometric requirements for landing zones and helipads.

Table 4-8. Dust-control requirements for heliports

Diameter of Dust Proofing Area Diameter of Dust Proofing

Helicopter
When Parked or on Taxiway (m) for Landing or Takeoff (m)

AH-64 45.72 91.44

0H-58 45.72 48.77

UH-60 45.72 80.47

CH-47 91.44 179.83

CH-54 91.44 131.67

MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

Coordinate maintenance and repair operations with tactical
operations. Try to do your work at night. Do not leave hazardous
equipment on the landing zone. Clearly mark all the areas that are
under c onst ruc t ion or rep air them. E nsur e that mud is
continuously removed. Remove all debris away from the traffic and
landing areas for repair of all mats and membrane surfaces.
Replace damaged timber and levels accordingly.

4-28 Mobility
 Table 4-9. Minimum geometric requirements for landing zones in close battle areas

Item No. Specifications OH-58 UH-60 AH-64 CH-47 CH-54

Landing Pad
1 Length, (m) 3.7 12.2 15.2 15.2 15.2
2 Width (m) 3.7 7.0 7.6 7.6 15.2
3 Landing-pad grade in direction of approach or departure (%) 3 3 3 3 3
4 Shoulder width (ft) -- -- -- -- --
5 Grade of shoulder in direction of approach or departure (%) -- -- -- -- --
6 Traverse grade of shoulder (%) -- -- -- -- --
7 Grade of clear area, maximum (%) 10 10 10 10 10
Landing Area
8 Length (m) 21.9 36.6 32.0 45.7 45.7
9 Width (m) 21.9 33.8 30.5 38.1 45.7
Approach/Departure Zone
10 Approach, departure surface ratio 10:1 10:1 10:1 10:1 10:1
11 Length (m) 457.2 457.2 457.2 457.2 457.2
12a Width at end of landing area (m) 21.9 33.8 30.5 38.1 45.7
12b Width at outer end (m) 152.4 169.2 152.4 152.4 152.4
Takeoff Safety Zone
13 Length (m) 152.4 152.4 152.4 152.4 152.4
14a Width at end of landing area (m) 21.9 33.8 30.5 38.4 45.7
14b Width at outer end (m) 65.5 73.4 71.0 76.2 81.4
FM 5-34

Mobility 4-29
FM 5-34

See detail A x

y 10 14b 14 12a y
12a
13
11 11
x
8
Plan
7 1 Landing pad

2 9
6 3
5 Isometric view
4
Landing area
Detail A
Variable 12 El 150°
2:1 Variable

Landing area El = 0 Section X - X

11 11
El 150°
10 10
13 13

Landing area El = 0

Section Y-Y

Figure 4-26. Geometric layout of landing zones

Landing area
Wind direction
1 Panels

8
2

Landing direction

Figure 4-27. Panel layout of landing zones

4-30 Mobility
 FM 5-34

Stem light

Landing direction 7m

Stem light

14 m

Left leg light Right leg light

14 m

Figure 4-28. Inverted Y

Heavy Heavy
left right
1 1
1
2 2
3 3 2 3
4 4
V
Distance beween aircraft in flight:
1 1 Day - 2 to 3 rotar disks
1
2 2 Night - 3 to 5 rotar disks
3 3 Distance between aircraft landing
2 points:
4 4
Day - 35 meters
3 Night - 50 meters
Staggered
trail right In heavy left and right formations,
4 the distance is doubled between
Staggered
trail left aircrafts 1 and 3.
Trail
1 1

2 1 2

3 3 2 3

4 4 4

Echelon left Echelon right

Figure 4-29. Standard flight and landing formations

Mobility 4-31
 Chapter 5
Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration
Framework
PLANNING
PROCEDURES
• Integrate into the intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB)
process with the Intelligence Officer (US Army) (S2), and identify
enemy engineer capabilities.
• Analyze the mission, maneuver commander’s intent, AAs,
engagement areas (EAs), battle positions (BPs), and key weapon-
system emplacement/ranges.
• Conduct a leader’s reconnaissance with the task force (TF)/company
commanders.
• Obtain the commander’s obstacle priorities.
• Determine the possible obstacle locations/types.
• Calculate the maximum squad and blade hours available.
• Determine the availability of Class IV/V items.
• Finalize the obstacle plan.
• Develop the obstacle-emplacement priorities.
• Develop a survivability-execution matrix.
• Calculate the Class III and additional operators that will be
required for sustainment.
• Coordinate with the TF/company staff.
• Initiate/process reports.
• Supervise obstacle emplacement, verify locations, report any
changes.
• Obtain the mission for engineers during the battle: battle position,
assembly area, and so forth.

Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework 5-1

FM 5-34

MANEUVER TF RESPONSIBILITIES
TF Commander
• Provides the TF engineer with specific guidance to include the
tasks, priorities, and intent; specifically, identifies where he
wants to kill the enemy.
• Conducts a leader’s reconnaissance with a TF engineer to identify
obstacle-group locations.
• Determines the survivability priorities for blades.
• Determines the Class III, IV, and V responsibilities.
• Obtains authorization from the brigade/division to emplace
minefields and scatterable mines (SCATMINEs), cut roads, and
detonate demolitions.

Company Commander
• Conducts a leader’s reconnaissance with an engineer
representative.
• Covers obstacles with fires and observation.
• Guards obstacles to ensure that the enemy does not prebreach.
• Accepts target turnover.
• Provides security for the engineer elements who are emplacing
the obstacles (at a mine dump).
• Closes passage lanes.
• Furnishes passage-lane guides.
• Provides a supervisor to direct heavy engineer equipment
emplacement of survivability positions to ensure correct
emplacement.
• Knows the construction standards of the vehicle-fighting/crew-
served positions.
• Provides infantry labor augmentation to assist engineer
emplacement of obstacles.
• Secures cache sites.
• Conducts counterreconnaissance to prevent breaching obstacles
during limited visibility.
• Coordinates with the senior engineer on emplacing obstacles to
ensure proper siting.
TF Operations and Training Officer (US Army) (S3)
• Makes enemy breaching equipment a high-priority target.
• Coordinates air-defense artillery (ADA) coverage of engineer
equipment, mine dumps, and Class IV/V supply points.

5-2 Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework

 FM 5-34

• Provides a location to hide heavy engineer equipment during a

battle.
• Provides an engineer mission during a battle (TF reserve, battle
position).
SPECIFIC ENGINEER COORDINATIONS
With a TF Commander
• Leader’s reconnaissance.
• Commander’s intent, scheme of engineer operations (SOEO).
• Survivability and countermobility priorities.
• Class III, IV, and V responsibilities.
• Intent and location of SCATMINEs.
With a Maneuver Company Commander
• Leader’s reconnaissance.
• Verifying direct/indirect-fire coverage of obstacles.
• Obstacle security, infantry squad or platoon forward at night
(counterreconnaissance).
• Final obstacle placement.
• Senior equipment representative with infantry commander in chief
(CINC) dozer.
• Target turnover.
• Security of mine dumps/Class IV and V supply points.
• Infantry security of engineers emplacing obstacles.
• Labor augmentation for obstacle emplacement.
• Passage-point guides.
• Obstacle siting.
• Passage lane closing.
With a TF S2
• IPB of threat intentions and capabilities.
• Daily/repeated intelligence updates.
With a TF S3
• Location to hide heavy engineer equipment during battle.
• Verifying reporting requirements.
• Verifying division’s/brigade’s authorization to emplace minefields,
cut roads, and detonate demolitions and scattterable mines.
• Engineer’s mission during conduct of defense.

Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework 5-3

FM 5-34

With a TF Supply Officer (US Army) (S4)

• Class III needs and distribution plan, if not provided by the
parent unit.
• Haul/distribution of engineer heavy equipment, if required.
• Additional haul assets for engineer heavy equipment, if required.
• Helicopter assets to slingload Class IV/V forward, container
delivery system (CDS).
• Maintenance priority to engineer heavy equipment.
• Location and manning of Class IV/V points.
With a Fire-Support Officer (FSO)/ADA
• Verifying airborne data and analysis system (area denial artillery
munition [ADAM])/remote, antiarmor mine system (RAAM)
employment location/trigger.
• Bringing FSO/fire-support element (FSE) out to see obstacles, if
possible.
• ADA coverage of all personnel emplacing obstacles, heavy
equipment, and supply points.
• Integrating obstacles and indirect fires according to FM 90-7.

OBSTACLES
The basic principles of obstacle employment are to support a
maneuver commander’s plan; integrate with observed fires,
existing obstacles, and other reinforcing obstacles; and employ in-
depth and for surprise.

OBSTACLE CLASSIFICATION
The two types of obstacles are existing and reinforcing (see Figure
5-1). For more information on obstacle classification, see FM 90-7.

OBSTACLE COMMAND AND CONTROL

Obstacle C2 focuses on—
• Obstacle emplacement authority. In a theater of operations (TO),
theater commanders have the authority to emplace obstacles.
This authority can be delegated to corps, and then division level.
Commanders subordinate to corps and division do not have the
authority to emplace obstacles unless the higher commander
gives them that authority for the current mission. Commanders
use control measures and other specific guidance or orders to
g r a n t o b s t a c l e - e m p l ac e me n t a u t h o r i t y t o s u b o r d i n a t e
commanders. Emplacement authority for SCATMINEs depends
on the particular system characteristics (see Table 5-1).

5-4 Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework

 FM 5-34

Obstacles

Existing Reinforcing

Natural Cultural Tactical Protective

Types
Hasty
Types Effects Deliberate
Directed, Disrupt
Situational, Turn
Reserve Fix
Block

Any individual obstacle type

Figure 5-1. Obstacle classification

Table 5-1. SCATMINE emplacement authority

System Characteristics Emplacement Authority

Ground- or artillery-delivered, with SD time The corps commander may delegate

greater than 48 hours (long-duration) emplacement authority to division level, who
may further delegate it to brigade level.
Ground- or artillery-delivered, with SD time The corps commander may delegate
of 48 hours or less (short-duration) emplacement authority to division level, who
may further delegate it to brigade level, who
may further delegate it to TF level.
Aircraft-delivered (Gator), regardless of SD Emplacement authority is normally at corps,
time theater, or Army command level, depending
on who has air-tasking authority.
Helicopter-delivered (Volcano), regardless of Emplacement authority is normally dele-
SD time gated no lower than the commander who
has command authority over the emplacing
aircraft.
MOPMS, when used strictly for a protective Emplacement authority is usually granted to
minefield the company, team, or base commander.
Commanders at higher levels restrict
MOPMS use only as necessary to support
their operations.

Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework 5-5

FM 5-34

• Obstacle control. Obstacle control is the control that commanders

exercise to ensure that obstacles support current and future
missions. Table 5-2 lists obstacle-control measures and Figure 5-2
shows the obstacle-control-measure graphics and examples of
their use.

Table 5-2. Obstacle-control measures

Specific Size of Enemy AA/MC

Obstacle-
Obstacle
Control Echelon Planning Guidance
Effects Light vs
Measure Armored
Assigned Armored

Zone Corps or Optional Division/ Brigade/ Requires anticipating

division brigade battalion belts and intents

Belt Brigade Optional Brigade/ Battalion/ Requires anticipating

but normal battalion company groups and intents

Group Corps, Mandatory Battalion/ Company/ Based on individual

brigade, TF platoon obstacle norms
division, or
battalion/
TF

Restriction All NA NA NA Used only when

necessary to support the
scheme of maneuver

• Obstacle-effect graphics. There are separate graphics for each

obstacle effect (see Figure 5-3, page 5-8). Commanders use
obstacle-effect graphics to convey the effect they want the
obstacles to have on the enemy.
• Battle tracking. The tracking of obstacles from their emplacement
or discovery to their recovery or clearance from the battlefield is
critical. A 12-character designator is given to each individual
obstacle (see Figure 5-4, page 5-9, and Tables 5-3 and 5-4, pages
5-10 and 5-11). Reporting is an essential element of battle
tracking. As a minimum, units must report the intent to lay (if
required), initiation, completion, and recovery of all obstacles in
their AO. Units must report all obstacles by the fastest secure
means available, and classify them SECRET when they are
completed. The command’s SOP should specify the exact format.

5-6 Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework

 FM 5-34

Emplacement
Obstacle- Authority
Control Obstacle Graphic Examples
Measure
From To

Zone Corps Div

Obstacle zone
Div Bde Letter
designation
A Obstacle
OBSTACLE belts
EFFECT
(Optional) A1

A3
Belt Corps Bde A2
Div TF Number
Bde designation

OBSTACLE
EFFECT
(Optional,
but normal)

Group Div Bde Obstacle groups in an

Bde TF Letter obstacle belt
TF Co/ designation
Troop A3

A3A

A3C

A3B

Restrictions Incorporated into Examples:

the emplacement No buried mines; obstacle free; No SCATMINE; SCAT-
authority MINE short duration only; reserve obstacle

Figure 5-2. Obstacle-control-measure graphics

Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework 5-7

FM 5-34

Obstacle-Effect
Application Examples Conveying Intent
Graphics

Disrupt Short arrow indicates where

enemy is attacked by obsta-
cles.
Long arrows indicate where
bypass is allowed and
attacked by fires.

Heel of arrow is anchor point.

Turn Direction of arrow indicates
desired direction of turn.

Irregular part of arrow indi-

cates where enemy advance
Fix
is slowed by obstacles.

The ends of the vertical line

Block indicate the limit of enemy
advance.
The ends of the vertical line
also indicate where obstacles
tie to NO-GO terrain.

Direction of Enemy Attack

Figure 5-3. Obstacle-effect graphics

5-8 Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework

 Obstacle- DTG of
Obstacle Grid Type of Unit to Clear
Marking Obstacle Lane/Grid Marking Remarks
No. Coordinates Mines Obstacle
Method Clearance
ENA001MN01/ NK123456- SB-MV Single-strand A/99 EN BN NK124456-NK124457 Obstacle reported by A/
NK125457 concertina on Lane marked to full- 1-23 IN (031500JAN97)
all four sides lane pattern using traf-
fic cones
ENA001MN02+ NK450200- SB-MV Single-strand NA Reported by Engineer
NK453202 concertina on Recon Team 1 (NAI
enemy side of 301) (100200JAN97)
minefield
ENA001MN03X NK189765- SB-MV NA B/99 EN BN 011200JAN97 NA
NK190768
As of: 100600JAN97
NOTE: Obstacle numbering system: ENXXXXXXXXX.
• Characters 1-2: EN meaning enemy obstacle.
• Characters 3-6: Alphanumeric description of the headquarters type and numerical designation that reported the obstacle. Char-
acter 3 designates the unit type:
— A, armor division/brigade
— I, infantry division/brigade
— C, cavalry division
— R, cavalry regiment
— Z, corps
• Characters 7-8: Letters indicating obstacle type (see FM 20-32).
• Characters 9-10: Two numbers indicating obstacle number within the obstacle type.
• Character 11: One of four characters indicating obstacle status:
— + obstacle reported, no clearance planned
— / clearance of obstacle planned
— - clearance of obstacle in progress
— X clearance of obstacle complete
Figure 5-4. Example of enemy obstacle-tracking chart

Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework 5-9

FM 5-34
FM 5-34

Table 5-3. Obstacle numbers

Obstacle type and number

Unit’s name and type Turn minefield/11th obstacle
1st Infantry Div

1001 B2D MT11 /

Obstacle zone/belt/group Obstacle status

Zone Bravo Planned
Belt 2, Group Delta

Obstacle number 1001B2DMT11/

Character Description

1 through 4 Alphanumeric description of the headquarters type and numerical designation

that established the obstacle zone; character 1 designates the unit type with a
letter:
• A = armor division or brigade
• I = infantry division or brigade
• C = cavalry division
• R = cavalry regiment
• Z = corps

5 Letter indicating the obstacle zone

6 Number indicating the belt number in the obstacle zone

7 Letter indicating the group in the obstacle belt

8 and 9 Letters indicating the obstacle type (see Table 5-4)

10 and 11 Two numbers indicating the obstacle number in the group

12 One of four characters indicating the obstacle status—

• / = planned obstacle
• — = obstacle being prepared
• + = prepared obstacle (this sign is for reserve demolition
targets and may indicate a readiness state of safe or
armed)
• X = completed obstacle

5-10 Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework

 C3, FM 5-34

Table 5-4. Obstacle type abbreviations

M—Minefield/Munition Field W—Wire Obstacle

MB Block WA Double-apron
MC Chemical WC Concertina
MD Disrupt WF Tanglefoot
MF Fix WG General-purpose, barbed tape
MH Hasty protective WN Nonstandard/unspecified
MN Nonstandard WR Roadblock
MO Point WT Triple-standard
MP Protective S—Scatterable Minefield/Munition Field
MQ Nuisance SB Gator
MS Standard-pattern SF ADAM and RAAM
MT Turn SM MOPMS
MU Dummy/decoy SV Volcano
A—Miscellaneous SW Scatterable mines (generic)

AB Abatis H—Hand-Emplaced Munitions

AC Chemical by explosives HC Claymore
AD AT ditch HH Hornet/WAM
AF Thermobaric or flame HO Other
AH Log hurdle HS SLAM
AL Log crib or log obstacle I—Improvised Explosive Devices
AM Movable obstacle (car, bus) Directional, special-purpose explosive
ID
AN Expedient nonstandard obstacle hazard
AP Post obstacle (hedgehog, tetrahedron) Omnidirectional, special-purpose
IO
AR Rubble explosive hazard

AT AT ditch with AT mines B—Bridge Demolition

Earthwork BA Abutment
AW
(berms, parapets, dunes, pits) BC Abutment and span
T—Booby Traps BS Span

TA Booby-trapped area R—Road Crater

TB Booby-trapped bodies RD Deliberate
TE Booby-trapped equipment RH Hasty
TM Booby-trapped materiel RM Mined

Booby-trapped passage/ U—Unexploded Ordnance

TP
confined space UC Chemical UXO hazard area
TS Booby-trapped structure UH UXO hazard area
TV Booby-trapped vehicle UN Nuclear hazard area

Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework 5-11

C3, FM 5-34

REPORTS
Report all minefields by the fastest secure means available, and
classify them SECRET when they are completed. The local
command’s SOP should specify the exact format.
REPORT OF INTENTION TO LAY
When planing to emplace a minefield, a unit must submit a report
of intention (see Table 5-5 for an example). The report doubles as a
request when it is initiated below emplacement-authority level.
Table 5-5. Report of intention to lay
Letter
Explanation Example
Designation
Tactical objectives (temporary ALPHA Bridge-construction-site
security road-block or other) security
Type of minefield BRAVO Hasty protective
Estimated number and types of CHARLIE 25 each M16, buried w/trip-
mines and whether surface-laid wires and no AHD
mines or ones with AHDs
Location of minefield by coordi- DELTA WQ04500359 to
nates WQ04560365
ECHO Route Blue at
Location and width of minefield WQ04550363,
lanes and gaps
16 feet wide
Start and complete DTG (esti- FOXTROT Start: 011000SAUG96
mate) Complete: 011030ZAUG96

REPORT OF INITIATION
A report of initiation is mandatory (see Table 5-6 for an example).
It informs higher HQ of an area that is no longer safe for friendly
movement.
Table 5-6. Report of initiation

Explanation Letter Designation Example

Location of minefield, by coordi- DELTA WQ03567843
nates
Start and complete DTG (esti- FOXTROT Start: 011045ZAUG96
mate) Completion:
011130ZAUG96

REPORT OF PROGRESS
During the emplacement process, a commander may require
periodic updates. Table 5-7 is an example of a progress report.
Table 5-7. Report of progress

Explanation Letter Designation Example

Location of minefield by coordi- DELTA WQ03567843: 75% com-
nates: 25%, 50%, 75% or 100% plete
completed.

5-12 Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework

 FM 5-34

REPORT OF COMPLETION
After a completion report (see Table 5-8 for an example), fill out a
completed DA Form 1355 or DA Form 1355-1-R for minefields or
munitions fields.

Table 5-8. Report of completion of minefield

Explanation Letter Designation Example

Changes in information submit- ALFA Lane width is 14 feet
ted in intention-to-lay report
Total number and type of AT BRAVO M15-299
and AP mines emplaced M21- 865
M16 -203
Date and time of completion CHARLIE 011145ZAUG96
Method of lay (buried by hand or DELTA Buried by hand
by machine, surface-laid)
Details of lanes or gaps includ- ECHO WD1 wire on centerline
ing marking azimuth of 165o; entrance
and exit marked with U-
shaped pickets and red
chemical lights
Details of perimeter marking FOXTROT Standard barbed-wire
fence
Overlay showing perimeter, GOLF NA
lanes, and gaps
Laying unit and signature of HOTEL 2d Plt, Co A, 307th Engr
individual authorizing laying of Bn
the field

REPORT OF TRANSFER
Use a transfer report when the responsibility for a minefield is
transferred between commanders. Both commanders must sign the
report. Included must be a certificate stating that the receiving
commander was shown or informed of all the mines within the zone of
responsibility and that he is responsible for all the mines within the
zone. The report is sent to a higher commander who has authority
over the relieved and relieving commanders.

REPORT OF CHANGE
A change report is submitted when any alterations are made to a
minefield form in which a completion report and record have already
been submitted.

Defensive Operations and Obstacle Integration Framework 5-13

 Chapter 6
Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles
WIRE OBSTACLES
Table 6-1 and Table 6-2, page 6-2, list materials and planning factors
for wire obstacles.

Table 6-1. Wire and tape obstacle material

Number That Approximate

Approximate Approximate
Material One Soldier Weight of Man
Weight (kg) Length (m)
can Carry Load (kg)

Barbed-wire reel 41.5 400 0.5 21

Bobbin 3.5 to 4.0 30 4-6 14.5 to 24.5

Barbed-tape 0.77 0.45 20 15.5

dispenser

Barbed-tape 14.5 300 1 14.5

carrying case

Standard barbed- 14 15.2 1 25

tape concertina

Standard barbed- 25.4 15.2 1 25

wire concertina

GPBTO
• Hand 15.8 20 1 15.8
• Vehicular 117.9 140 0.25 29.5

U-shaped
pickets
• Long 4.5 1.5 4 18.1
• Medium 2.7 0.81 6 16.3
• Short 1.8 0.61 8 14.5

NOTE: Whenever you use U-shaped pickets, make sure that the open end of
the U faces the enemy.

Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles 6-1

 Table 6-2. Requirements for 300-meter sections of various wire obstacles
Reels Man- Kg of Materials per
of Number Hours
Entanglement Pickets of
Number of
Staples Linear Meter of
Type Barbed Concertinas to
GPBTO Entanglement3
C1, FM 5-34

Wire1 Erect2

Long Medium Short

Double apron, 4 100 200 15-16 71 4.6 (3.5)5
and 2 pace (19)4
Double apron, 6 66 132 15-17 59 3.6 (2.6)5
and 3 pace (18)4
High wire 198 19-21 95 5.3 (4.0)5
(less guy wires) (24)4
Low wires, 4 and 100 200 11 59 3.6 (2.8)5
2 pace
C1p6-1-2.fm Page 2 Thursday, February 1, 2001 8:46 AM

4-strand cattle 100 27 6-7 24 2.2 (1.8)5

fence (7)4
Triple-standard 160 48 3 59 317 30 8.2 (7.3)5
concertina (4)4
GPBT0 (8)6 (1)6 2.7

6-2 Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles

1
The lower number of reels applies when you use U-shaped pickets; the higher number applies if you use wooden pickets.
If there is only one number, use it for both pickets.
2Man-hours are based on the use of driven pickets. Multiply these figures by 0.67 if experienced troops are being used,
and by 1.5 for night work.
3
Average weight when you use any issue metal pickets (1 truckload = 2,268 kg)
4
Number of barbed-tape carrying cases required if barbed tape is used in place of barbed wire
5Kilograms of material required per linear meter of entanglement if barbed tape is used in place of barbed wire and barbed-
tape concertina is used in place of standard barbed-tape wire concertina
6
Based on vehicular emplaced obstacles installed in triple belts
7
Only 2 required for one belt
8
Only 4 required for one belt
 FM 5-34

BARBED-WIRE OBSTACLES
Barbed-wire obstacles are classified according to their use. You can
estimate the quantity of concertina required following basic rules of
thumb:
• Construct barbed-wired obstacles for conventional deployment along
the forward edge of the battle area (FEBA)(see Figure 6-1):
— Tactical wire = (front) x (1.25) x (number of belts).
— Protective wire = (front) x (5) x (number of belts).
— Supplementary wire
° Forward of FEBA = (front) x (1.25) x (number of belts).
° Rear of FEBA = (2.5) x (unit depth) x (number of belts).

Company front
FP
L
F PL

Legend
Tactical wire
Protective wire
Supplementary wire

Figure 6-1. Schematic layout of barbed-wire obstacles (defense)

• Construct a base-camp defense along a perimeter (see Figure 6-2,

page 6-4):
— Tactical wire = (mean perimeter) x (1.25) x (number of belts).
— Protective wire = (perimeter) x (1.10) x (number of belts).
— Supplementary wire = (mean perimeter) x (1.25) x (number of
belts).

Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles 6-3

FM 5-34

Legend
Tactical wire
Protective wire NOTE: Angles of final
Supplementary wire protective lines have been
expanded for clarity of wire
employment.

Figure 6-2. Perimeter wire (defense)

• Ensure that the job site is secure.

• Organize a work party into three equal crews. The first two
crews lay out pickets, and the third crew installs pickets (open
end of U toward enemy).
• Reorganize the party into crews of two to four soldiers.
• Install wire in numerical order as shown in Figure 6-3.
• Avoid having any soldier cut off between the enemy and the
fence.
• Ensure that the wires are properly secured and tight.

TRIPLE-STANDARD CONCERTINA
When laying out triple-standard concertina, follow the basic rules
listed below:
• Ensure that the job site is secure.
• Organize a work party into three crews. The first crew lays
pickets (see Figure 6-4, page 6-6). The second crew lays out
concertina. It places one roll on the enemy’s side at every third
picket and two rolls on the friendly’s side at every third picket.
The third crew installs all the pickets.
• Reorganize the party into four-soldier crews.
• Install the concertina (see Figures 6-5 and 6-6, pages 6-6 and 6-7).

6-4 Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles

 *4 paces *4 paces *4 paces
4 3 2
3m 3m 3m 5
2 6
3
*2 paces 4 7
1.5 m 1 1 1 8 1
Center 8 7 6 5 10
fence 11
*2 paces 9
9 Rear 9 12 Long picket
1.5 m 10
apron 11
12
9 Anchor picket
Plan at each end of
Legend fence.
No. 1-2-3-4 indicate
order of erecting wire.
*Use 6 and 3 for
6 and 3 fences. Isometric view
70 cm
9 10 4
7 1
11 6 3
12
5 2
45 cm *2 paces *2 paces NOTE: Place the mines
1.5 m 1.5 m under the aprons.

Cross section

Figure 6-3. Double-apron fence

FM 5-34

Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles 6-5

FM 5-34

Taut horizontal support wire 90 cm

racked to upper concertina Taut horizontal
halfway between pickets support wire

Section

90 cm

5 paces 5 paces 5 paces 2 paces

3.8 m 3.8 m 3.8 m 1.5 m

Anchor
pickets
5 paces 5 paces 2 paces
3.8 m 3.8 m 1.5 m
Direction of
construction Plan showing spacing of pickets

Figure 6-4. Triple-standard concertina fence

• Ensure that the concertina is properly tied and all horizontal wire
is properly installed.

3. Install top row

1. Install front row and rack to rear
and horizontal horizontal wire.
wire. 2. Install back row
and horizontal
wire.

Figure 6-5. Installing concertina

6-6 Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles

 FM 5-34

2. Place both bottom

1. Place bottom portion and top portion of 3. Place top portion of
of first coil over picket. second coil over picket. first coil over picket.

Figure 6-6. Joining concertina

FOUR-STRAND CATTLE FENCE

When laying out four-strand cattle fence (see Figure 6-7), follow the
basic rules listed below:
• Ensure that the job site is secure.
• Organize a work party into four-soldier crews. The first crew lays
out long pickets 3 meters apart, and the second crew installs them.
• Reorganize the party into two-soldier teams; one team carries the
reel and the other team makes the ties.

3m

Figure 6-7. Four-strand cattle fence

OTHER WIRE OBSTACLES

Construct other wire obstacles from enemy to friendly side and from
bottom up (see Figures 6-8 through 6-11, pages 6-8 and 6-9).

Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles 6-7

FM 5-34

9m

1 to 4
paces

0.25 m to 0.75 m

Figure 6-8. Tanglefoot

1.2 m

m
1 .2 m 4. 5

Figure 6-9. Knife rest

6-8 Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles

 FM 5-34

NOTE: Place trestles 4 to 6 meters

apart.

1.5 m
Tension wire
70 cm

End view Side view Plan view

Figure 6-10. Trestle-apron fence

NOTE: Place three long pickets 5 paces apart per coil,

and place horizontal wire on top of coil.

10 m

Figure 6-11. Eleven-row antivehicular wire obstacle

Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles 6-9

FM 5-34

ANTIVEHICULAR OBSTACLES
AT Ditches and Road Craters
Figure 6-12 shows some AT ditches. See Chapter 9 for specific
details and construction of road craters.

Spoil
4m
Enemy

1.5 m

Revetted
Triangular cut

Revetted

1.5 m
4.5 to 6 m Spoil Enemy

Sidehill cut

Hurdle oblique to
line of ditch
Spoil
Hurdle
3.3 m
Enemy

1.8 m 4.5 m 7.5 m min

Revetted
Rectangular cut

Figure 6-12. AT ditches

Log Cribs
Figures 6-13 and 6-14 show different log-crib designs; Table 6-3,
page 6-12, lists post requirements in constructing log cribs. The
manpower requirement in constructing log cribs is 4 to 8 engineer-
platoon hours, equipped with hand tools, for a 6-meter-wide road.

6-10 Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Post opposing
design Interior of crib should
be filled with earth.

Offset post
design Interior of crib should
be filled with earth.
1.8 m

1.5 m

20 cm
diameter

Figure 6-13. Rectangular log-crib design

Interior of crib should

be filled with earth.

1.5 m

Logs 20 cm diameter minimum

Length of logs = road width
60 inches
Quantity of logs = 〈 -------------------------〉 x3
D
Quantity of 3-m posts = 4 per wall
Man hour = same as rectangular

Figure 6-14. Triangular log-crib design

Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles 6-11

FM 5-34

Table 6-3. Post requirements (post opposing/offset post)

Posts Road Width (m)

1.8 2.1 to 3.9 to 5.8 to 7.6 to 9.4 to 11.3 to 13.1 to

3.6 5.4 7.3 9.1 10.9 12.8 14.6

Long 3 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36

Short 2.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Braces 2.1 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

LOG HURDLES
Make sure that you site log hurdles at the steepest part of a slope
(see Figure 6-15).

LOG/STEEL POST OBSTACLE

Figure 6-16 shows a log-post obstacle and instructions on
constructing an obstacle.

TETRAHEDRONS, HEDGEHOGS, AND OTHER BARRIERS

Figures 6-17 through 6-21, pages 6-14 and 6-15, show other
materials used for barriers and their placements.

6-12 Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles

 FM 5-34

1.8 to 2.4
m

7.5 m

3 to 4 m B

3 to 4 m B
4.5 m

Roadway Roadway

Position of obstacle Position of obstacle

Employment of staggered Employment of 45-cm
1.8- to 2.4-m hurdles logs as hurdles
(three 25-cm logs or one 45-
cm log)
Wire lashing
Logs wired together
Ten 15-cm
stakes
60 cm

Ground level
60 cm

Securing 3 logs Securing 45-cm log hurdle

hurdle section A-A section B-B
Figure 6-15. Log hurdles

Front
No. of posts = --------------- x No. of rows (minimum 4 rows)
1.5
Spacing: irregular, 1 to 2 meters
Height: irregular, 75 to 120 cm, 1.5 m underground
Diameter: minimum 40 cm

Front
Time = 〈 ---------------〉 x work rate
75 -120 cm 6m
Front = in meters, assuming four rows
Work rate: 4 to 6 hr (2 NCOs, 16 soldiers, pile driver)
1.5 m 2 to 21/2 hr (1 NCO, 8 soldiers, power auger)
3 to 5 hr (platoon using hand tools)

Figure 6-16. Post obstacles

Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles 6-13

FM 5-34

1.2 m
long

1.2 m long

Steel hedgehog Tetrahedron

Figure 6-17. Steel hedgehog and tetrahedron

1.5 m
1.2 m

1.2 m

1.2 m 1.2 m

1.5 m

1.5 m

Figure 6-18. Concrete tetrahedron and cubes

6-14 Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles

 FM 5-34

NOTE: Tested, stopped a

3,350-lb vehicle at 50 mph

Figure 6-19. Heavy equipment tires

NOTE: Tested, stopped a

4,000-lb vehicle at 50 mph
Anchor to concrete slab

6”
14”

No. 6 bars 2’ long, 3’ OC

32”

24”

Figure 6-20. Jersey barrier

Distance Active vehicle barriers

25’

24’

10’

NOTE: The distance between barriers will vary depending on the type
of traffic expected (cars, trucks, semitrailers).

Figure 6-21. Concrete-obstacle placement

Constructed and Preconstructed Obstacles 6-15

C1p7-1-2.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 31, 2001 10:00 AM

C1

Chapter 7
Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition
Obstacles
CONVENTIONAL MINEFIELDS
ROW MINING
Table 7-1 lists the characteristics of standard row minefields.

Table 7-1. Standard minefield characteristics

Characteristics Disrupt Turn Fix Block

Frontage (m) 250 500 250 500

Depth (m) 100 300 120 320
AT, full-width (No. rows) 1 4 1 4
AT, track-width (No. rows) 2 2 2 2
AP (No. rows)* 0 0 0 2
IOE (yes/no) No No Yes Yes
Platoon hours required to 1.5 3.5 1.5 5.0
emplace
AHD No No No Yes
Total AT mines
Full width 42 336 63 378
Track width 84 168 84 168
Total AP mines*
M16 0 0 0 84
M14 0 0 0 84
Density AT 0.5 1.0 0.6 1.1
Density AP (M16/M14) 0 0 0 0.17/1.0

Symbol

NOTE: Mine spacing is 6 meters for all standard minefields.

*Korea only, units have a choice of either the M16 or M14.

Use the following procedure to calculate the number of mines and

minefield rows if you did not use the standard minefields described in
Table 7-1:

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-1

FM 5-34

Step 1. The number of mines required is equal to the desired

density times the minefield front.

density(0.5) × front(400) = 200 AT mines

Step 2. The number of AT mines per row is determined by dividing

the minefield front by the spacing interval between the AT mines
(normally 6 meters between mines).
400
---------- = 66.6 AT mines per row = 67(rounded up)
6
Step 3. The number of rows needed in the minefield is equal to the
number of AT mines required (step 1) divided by the number of AT
mines per row (step 2). (Round up your answer to the next whole
number.)
200
---------- = 3 rows (rounded up)
67
Step 4. The number of truckloads required for minefield
emplacement depends on the type and quantity of mines and
vehicular carrying capacity (see Table 7-2). Multiply the total
number of rows by the number of mines per row and round up.

67 × 3 = 201

Step 5. Multiply the total number of mines by 1.10 and round up.

201 × 1.10 = 221.1 = 222 (rounded up)

Step 6. The number of truckloads required is equal to the total

number of AT mines divided by the truck’s capacity. In this
example, 5-ton dump trucks are used to haul M15 AT mines.
222
---------- = 1.09 = 2 truckloads (rounded up)
204

7-2 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 Table 7-2. Class IV/V haul capacity

Vehicle

M15
M19
M21
M16
M14
Mine
Mine
Mine

Wire1
Hornet

Flipper
MICLIC

MOPMS
Reload2

AT Mine
AT Mine
AT Mine
Volcano

AP Mine
AP Mine

Concertina
HMMWV 2 51 34 27 55 56 15 11 1 NA 1
1,124 kg, 6 cu m
M35 2½-ton truck 4 102 69 55 111 113 30 23 2 2 2
2,250 kg, 12.5 cu m
M1078 2½-ton truck 4 102 69 55 111 113 30 23 2 2 2
2,250 kg, 13.4 cu m
M54 5-ton truck 7 204 138 109 222 227 61 46 5 3 5
4,500 kg, 13.6 cu m
M1083 5-ton truck 8 204 138 109 222 227 61 46 5 3 5
4,500 kg, 15.6 cu m
M930 5-ton dump truck 2 112 64 32 168 71 23 39 3 2 2
(without sideboards)
4,500 kg, 3.8 cu m
M930 5-ton dump truck 4 204 138 70 222 153 51 46 5 3 4
(with sideboards)
4,500 kg, 8.2 cu m
1
The number of concertina in bundles; 1 bundle = 40 rolls
2
Line charge + rocket

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-3

FM 5-34
 Table 7-2. Class IV/V haul capacity (continued)
FM 5-34

Vehicle

M15
M19
M21
M16
M14
Mine
Mine
Mine

Wire1
Hornet

Flipper
MICLIC

MOPMS
Reload2

AT Mine
AT Mine
AT Mine
Volcano

AP Mine
AP Mine

Concertina
M1090 5-ton dump truck 2 112 64 32 168 71 23 39 3 2 2
4,500 kg, 3.8 cu m
HEMTT truck 8 408 277 128 444 317 94 92 10 7 8
9,000 kg, 15 cu m
12-ton S&T 13 489 333 208 533 514 148 110 12 9 13
10,800 kg, 24.5 cu m
40-ton lowboy 27 1,46 1,03 419 1,77 1,03 308 368 30 27 27
36,000 kg, 49.3 cu m 6 5 7 5
M548 cargo 8 244 166 125 266 272 74 55 6 4 6
5,400 kg, 14.9 cu m
M1077 PLS flat rack 9 440 352 164 586 293 110 152 11 9 9
14,900 kg, 17.6 cu m
No. of mines per box NA 1 2 4 4 90 21 40 240 NA 30
Weight per box (kg) 531 22 33 41 21 20 73 97.7 833 1,19 810
5
Size of box (cu m) 1.8 0.04 0.05 0.12 0.03 0.06 0.16 0.1 1.6 1.8 1.8

7-4 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

1The number of concertina in bundles; 1 bundle = 40 rolls
2Line charge + rocket
 FM 5-34

Figure 7-1 and Figures 7-2 and 7-3, page 7-6, show standard disrupt,
fix, turn, and block minefields. See Chapter 6, FM 20-32, for more
information on row mining.

Disrupt

Row A
6m
50 m
100 m

Row B

Row C
250 m

Fix
I0E

I3 Marker I2 Marker I1 Marker 15 m

120 m

Row A
50 m

Row B

Row C
250 m

Figure 7-1. Standard disrupt and fix row minefields

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-5

FM 5-34

Row A

50 m
100 m 6m

Row B

Row C
100 m

Row D
50 m
100 m

Row E

Row F
500 m

Figure 7-2. Standard turn row minefield

IOE
15 m I6 marker I1 marker
150 m

Row A
50 m

6m

Row B

Row C
100 m

Row D
100 m

Row E
50 m

Row F
500 m
AP mine employment

Figure 7-3. Standard block row minefield

7-6 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 C2, FM 5-34

STANDARD-PATTERN MINEFIELDS
See FM 20-32, Chapter 7, for detailed information on standard-
pattern minefields. Table 7-3 lists the platoon organization for a row
minefield.

Table 7-3. Platoon organization for row mining

Personnel Officer NCO EM Equipment
Siting and recording 1 2-3 SITEMP, maneuver and fire sup-
party port graphics, obstacle overlay,
execution matrix, GPS, lensatic
compass, minefield record forms,
stakes, cones, or pickets, picket
pounder, engineer tape on reels,
and nails to peg tape (Note 1)
Marking party 1 6-8 Barbed wire or concertina, marking
signs, lane signs, wire cutters,
gloves, picket pounder, and pickets
(Note 2)
Mine dump party 1 6-8 Wire cutters, grease, rags, gloves,
NVDs, and pliers (Note 3)
Laying party (Note 4) 1 Strip-feeder reports
Carrier team 2 Vehicle
Sapper team 1 3-4 Wrenches, fuses, row markers
Digging team 1-2 Picks, shovels, sandbags
Total (Note 4) 1 4 20-27

NOTES:
1. The use of the mini-rehearsal to site an obstacle group during EA development
may initially require all of the engineer platoon vehicles to portray the enemy’s
maneuver through the EA. An alternate solution is to use the engineer platoon leader,
maneuver company team 1SG, and other maneuver team headquarters’ vehicles.

2. Minefield marking is time- and labor-intensive. Any available soldiers should be

placed on this team, especially when marking scatterable minefields.

3. If the unit uses the supply point or tailgate resupply technique, the unit must task-
organize to do the mine-dump tasks at the Class IV/V point or at the point where the
mines are transferred to the emplacing vehicle. See Table 2-2, FM 20-32, for addi-
tional mine-dump planning factors.

4. The unit may employ one or more laying parties. Each laying party emplaces one
row of mines at a time.

5. The organization may vary depending on the terrain, soldiers, and material avail-
able and proximity of the enemy. This typically requires augmentation by nonengi-
neer soldiers. Nonengineer soldiers can be integrated into any of the parties, but it is
simplest to integrate them into the marking and mine-dump parties in squad-size
units, or as individuals into the digging team.

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-7

FM 5-34

HASTY PROTECTIVE ROW MINEFIELDS

Figure 7-4 shows a hasty protective row minefield record that
illustrates a typical layout.

Figure 7-4. Sample, DA Form 1355-1R

7-8 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

SCATTERABLE MINEFIELDS

Table 7-4. SCATMINEs’ sizes and safety zones

Minefield Size
Type Area Density Safety Zone
(m)

ADAM/RAAM 0.001, 0.002, 0.004 200 x 200 1,400 x 1,400 m1

0.001, 0.002, 0.004 400 x 400
1,500 x 1,500 m1

Air Volcano 0.0067 1,115 x 140 235 m on all sides

Ground Volcano 0.01 1,110 x120 235 m on all sides

MOPMS 0.01 35 x 180o 50 m on all sides

semicircle

Gator2 0.003 650 x 200 275 m on all sides

1
Maximum size based on maximum error
2
Based on proper delivery altitude

Table 7-5. SCATMINEs’ self-destruct times

Type Arming Time Short (hours) Long
ADAM/RAAM 2 min/45 sec* 4 48 15 days
hr
Volcano 2 min 4 48 15 days
hr
MOPMS 2 min 4, can recycle up to 4
times
Gator 2 min 4 48 15 days
hr
PDM 50 sec 4
NOTE: Mines begin self-destructing at 80 percent of laid life (4 hours x 0.8 = 3
hours 12 minutes). You must recycle before 3 hours to avoid self-destruct. At
least 20 percent of mines have internal AHDs.
*Rounds with 45 seconds; PIP designated w/ ”A1”

MODULAR PACK MINE SYSTEM (MOPMS)

The MOPMS is a man-portable, 73-kilogram, suitcase-shaped mine
dispenser that can be emplaced anytime before dispensing mines.
The dispenser contains 21 mines (17 AT and 4 AP) that are
dispensed, on command, using an M71 remote-control unit or an
electronic initiating device, such as the M34 blasting machine. The

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-9

C2, FM 5-34

mines are propelled within a 35-meter distance from the container

in a 180° semicircle (see Figure 7-5). Figures 7-6 and 7-7 show other
features of the MOPMS.

Safety
zone

55 m

Area of mine coverage

MOPMS dispenser

35 m
55 m
20 m

Figure 7-5. MOPMS dispenser emplacement and safety zone

280 m
70 m

70 m

35 m

70 m 70 m 70 m

AP mine
AT mine

Figure 7-6. Standard MOPMS disrupt minefield

7-10 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

MOPMSs placement along

the horizontal plane is 35 m
variable, like an IOE.
70 m

35 m

70 m

35 m

70 m 70 m 70 m

280 m
AP mine
Five MOPMSs required
AT mine

Figure 7-7. Standard MOPMS fixed minefield

VOLCANO
The Volcano is a single-mine delivery system which can be dispensed
from the air or ground. It can be mounted on a 5-ton vehicle (heavy,
expanded, mobility tactical truck [HEMTT]), an M548 tracked cargo
carrier, or a UH-60 Blackhawk helicopter. Up to four Volcano racks
can be mounted on each vehicle. Each rack can hold up to 40
canisters, each prepackaged with five AT mines and one AP mine.
Figure 7-8 and Figure 7-9, page 7-12, show the disrupt, fix, turn, and
block minefields using the ground/air Volcano. Table 7-6, page 7-12,
lists characteristics of the Volcano.

35 m

120 m (ground)
CL 140 m (air)
5 ton 5 ton

20 m 20 m

35 m

277 m (ground)
278 m (air)

Start or end marker

Guide marker

Figure 7-8. Ground/air Volcano disrupt and fixed minefields

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-11

FM 5-34

35 m

120 m 50 m
20 m 20 m

440 m 5 ton
(ground) 320 m (minimum)
460 m (air)
5 ton

20 m 20 m

533 m (ground), 557 m (air)

Start or end marker

Guide marker

Figure 7-9. Ground/air Volcano turn and block minefields

Table 7-6. Volcano minefield’s characteristics

Minefield Depth Front (m) Number Canisters Total Minefields

Type (m) Ground/Air of Strips per Strip Canisters per Load

Disrupt 120 277/278 1 40 (20 40 4

each side)
Fix 120 277/278 1 40 (20 40 4
each side)
Turn 320 555/557 2 80 (20 160 1
each side)
Block 320 555/557 2 80 (20 160 1
each side)

ADAM/RAAM
ADAM and RAAM mines are delivered by a 155-millimeter
howitzer. (The mines are contained within the 155-millimeter
projectile.) Each ADAM projectile contains 36 mines; each RAAM
projectile contains 9 mines. ADAM/RAAM minefields have a
significant safety zone based on the method of delivery. Table 7-7
lists the minefield’s density and sizes and Table 7-8, the safety
zones for the ADAM/RAAM.

7-12 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Table 7-7. ADAM/RAAM minefield’s density and size

Minefield Densities
Obstacle Width Depth
RAAM ADAM
Effect (m) (m)
Area1 Linear2 Area1 Linear2
Disrupt 0.001 0.2 0.0005 0.1 200 200
Turn 0.002 0.8 0.001 0.4 400 400
Fix 0.002 0.4 0.0005 0.1 200 200
Block 0.004 1.6 0.002 0.8 400 400
1
Area density = mines per square meter
2
Linear density = mines per meter

Table 7-8. ADAM/RAAM minefield’s safety zones

Projectile and Range Meteorological + Velocity- Observer-Adjust
Trajectory (km) Error/Transfer Technique Technique
4 500 x 500 500 x 500
7 550 x 550 500 x 500
10 700 x 700 550 x 550
RAAM
12 850 x 850 550 x 550
low angle
14 1,000 x 1,000 650 x 650
16 1,050 x 1,050 650 x 650
17.5 1,200 x 1,200 650 x 650
4 700 x 700 700 x 700
7 750 x 750 700 x 700
10 900 x 900 750 x 750
ADAM
12 1,050 x 1,050 750 x 750
low angle
14 1,200 x 1,200 850 x 850
16 1,250 x 1,250 850 x 850
17.5 1,400 x 1,400 850 x 850
4 750 x 750 700 x 700
7 900 x 900 700 x 700
RAAM or 10 1,050 x 1,050 750 x 750
ADAM 12 1,200 x 1,200 750 x 750
high angle 14 1,400 x 1,400 850 x 850
16 1,500 x 1,500 850 x 850
17.5 1,400 x 1,400 850 x 850

GATOR
The area of a minefield depends on the speed and altitude of the
aircraft. The normal size of a minefield is 650 x 200 meters. Density
depends on the number of canisters that are dropped. The Gator
system is used primarily for interdiction minefields; somewhat lower

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-13

FM 5-34

than normal densities (0.001 mines/meters2) are usually planned.

Each canister (bomblet) contains 72 AT and 22 AP mines. Up to six
canisters may be mounted on each aircraft.

SPECIAL-PURPOSE MUNITIONS
M86 PURSUIT DETERRENT MUNITION (PDM)
The PDM is similar in configuration and functioning to the ADAM,
but must be manually armed (see Figure 7-10).

Safety pin
Arming strap
Arming-strap
ring

Trip wires
Safety clip (deploys
up to 7)

NOTES:
Arming time is 25 seconds.
PDM self-destructs in 4 hours.

Figure 7-10. M86 PDM

M18A1 CLAYMORE
The M18A1 claymore munition (see Figure 7-11) is a fragmentation
munit ion that co ntains 700 steel balls and 682 gr ams of
composition C4 explosive. It weighs 1.6 kilograms and can be
detonated by command (Korea only: or by trip wire).
When employing the M18A1 claymore with other munitions or
mines, separate the munitions by the following minimum
distances:
• 50 meters in front of or behind other M18A1s.
• 3 meters between M18A1s that are placed side by side.
• 10 meters from AT or fragmentation AP munitions.
• 2 meters from blast AP munitions.

7-14 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Detonator well

Molded, slit-type
peep site

Projects steel balls in a

60° horizontal arc.
Casualty radius is 100 m
(maximum height is 2 m).
Safety distances—
• Forward 250 m
• Side and rear 100 m

Plastic matrix containing

steel balls
Scissor-type,
folding legs

Figure 7-11. M18A1

SELECTABLE LIGHTWEIGHT ATTACK MUNITION (SLAM)

The SLAM (see Figure 7-12, page 7-16) is a multipurpose munition
with an antitamper feature.

M93 HORNET
The M93 Hornet (see Figure 7-13, page 7-16) is an AT/antivehicular
off-route munition made of lightweight material (35 pounds) that one
person can carry and employ. The Hornet is a nonrecoverable
munition that is capable of destroying vehicles by using sound and
motion detection methods. It will automatically search, detect,
recognize, and engage moving targets by using top attack at a
standoff distance up to 100 meters from the munition.
Figures 7-14 through 7-18, pages 7-17 through 7-19, show basic
emplacement scenarios for the Hornet.
Munitions placed at ground level should be no closer to obstructions
than the distances shown in Table 7-9, page 7-19.

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-15

FM 5-34

• Bottom attack, side

attack, timed demolition,
and command
detonation
• Weight is 1 kg.
• Penetrates 40-mm steel
• 4, 10, or 24 hours self-
destruct times or 15, 30,
45, or 60 minutes timed
demolition mode.

Figure 7-12. SLAM

• Active battery pack has an

estimated life of 4 hours.
• RCU can arm, reset 50
times, or destroy.
• SD times are 4 hours, 48
hours, 5 days, 15 days, or
30 days.

Figure 7-13. M93 Hornet

7-16 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Enemy movement

100 m

Squad W W W W W W W W W W
No. 1

Squad 50 to
No. 2
W W W W W W W W W 100 m
Safe lane

Conventional minefield
MOPMS

Figure 7-14. Hornet reinforcing a conventional minefield

Enemy movement

100 m

Squad W W W W W W W W W W
No. 1

Squad W W W W W W W W W 50 to
No. 2 100 m

35 m Volcano mine strip

50 m

35 m Volcano mine strip

NOTE: Emplace the Hornets before emplacing the Volcanos.

Figure 7-15. Hornet reinforcing a Volcano minefield

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-17

FM 5-34

Squad No. 1 Squad No. 2

Enemy movement

100 m
W W
W W
W W
W W

W W

W W

W W
W W
W W
W W

NOTE: Arrows indicate direction of

emplacement.

Figure 7-16. Hornet area-disruption obstacle

Enemy movement Heavy track 25 m

All 50 m

Squad
W leader
and
driver
W
50 m

W
W

Initial emplacement
position (located up
W to 10 kilometers from
the mine dump)
W

Figure 7-17. Hornet gauntlet obstacle (one cluster)

7-18 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Enemy movement
Heavy track 25 m
All 50 m

ASSUMPTIONS:
1. The gauntlet consists of nine
1st cluster 250 m W clusters.

010023Sep
750 to 2,000 m 2. Each squad in the platoon

Vehicle path
employs three clusters of five to
six Hornets.
2d cluster 250 m W
3. All Hornets are armed by the
750 to 2,000 m 010023Sep manual mode, from clusters
one through nine.
3d cluster 250 m
W
750 to 2,000 m 010023Sep

2d engr squad 1st 2d

begins arming engr engr
squad squad

Figure 7-18. Hornet gauntlet obstacle (platoon)

Table 7-9. Hornet minimum emplacement distances

Minimum
Maximum Employment
Obstruction Height Distance from
Obstruction
1m 3m
2.4 m 5m
6.5 m 15 m
25 m 25 m

RAPTOR INTELLIGENT COMBAT OUTPOST

Raptor introduces an entirely new concept to the combined-arms
team. A combined system involving the hand emplaced-wide area
munition product improvement plan (HE-WAM PIP) also known as
“Hornet-PIP”, advanced acoustic sensors, electronic gateways for
Hornet coordination, and an overall electronic control station. The
Raptor detects, classifies, and engages heavy and light tracked and
wheeled vehicles (see Figure 7-19, page 7-20). It is capable of being
ordered or programmed to develop coordinated attacks with other
minefields and/or direct and indirect fire weapons. Once activated,

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-19

FM 5-34

the Raptor can be inactivated, allowing freedom of maneuver

through the munitions while still providing near-real-time
intelligence and situational awareness.
A hand-emplaced, top attack system, the Raptor can be used as a
stand-alone tactical obstacle or integrated with other conventional
or situational obstacles. It can communicate with its employing
unit for remote on/off/on programming and reporting of battle-
space int e lligen ce. Intelligence data may includ e targ et
descriptions, numbers, and the direction and rate of movement.
Because a soldier can arm the Hornet-PIP, a planning
consideration should be that the soldier moves to a safe separation
distance (500 meters) within 5 minutes of arming. This prevents
the Hornet-PIP from accidentally engaging the emplacing unit
during obstacle construction.

PIP Hornets
(HE-WAM PIP)

Acoustic
(30 k) overwatch
External communication sensors

Gateway
Control
station

(3 k)

Figure 7-19. PIP Hornet

RECORDING
Use DA Form 1355 to record data on most conventional minefields/
munition fields and DA Form 1355-1-R for hasty protective row or
munition fields (see Figures 7-20 through 7-23, pages 7-21
through 7-24). Figure 7-4, page 7-8, shows an example of a hasty
protective row minefield record.

7-20 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-21
FM 5-34

Figure 7-20. Sample, DA Form 1355 (front) (standard-pattern minefield)

 FM 5-34

7-22 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

Figure 7-21. Sample, DA Form 1355 (inside) (standard-pattern minefield)
 SA
M
PL
E

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-23

FM 5-34

Figure 7-22. Sample DA Form 1355 (front side) for a Hornet minefield/munition field
 FM 5-34

SA
M
PL
E

7-24 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

Figure 7-23. Sample DA Form 1355 (back side) for a Hornet minefield/munition field
 FM 5-34

To facilitate reporting (discussed at the beginning of this chapter)

and recording of scatterable minefields/munition fields, a simple,
uniform procedure is used. This procedure combines the report and
the record into one document (Table 7-10) that is applicable for all
delivery systems. Table 7-10 and Table 7-11, page 7-26, deal with
scatterable minefields.

Table 7-10. Scatterable minefield’s report and record

Line Instructions Example

1 Approving authority CDR, 3AD

2 Target/obstacle number: If the minefield is part of I001C3BSV04X

an obstacle plan, enter the obstacle number. If
the minefield is not part of an obstacle plan or
does not have a number, leave blank or enter
N/A.

3 Type of emplacing system: Enter the type system Ground Volcano

that emplaced the minefield (MOPMS, Volcano).

4 Mine type: Enter AP or AT. If both, enter AP/AT AP/AT

5 Life cycle: Enter the DTG the minefield was 021005ZAUG96 -

emplaced until the last mine self-destructs. 041005ZAUG96

6-14 Aim point/corner points of the minefield: If the MB 17955490

system used to emplace the minefield uses a sin- MB 18604860
gle aim point to deliver the mines, enter that aim MB 18504895
point. If the system has distinct corner points, as MB 17804850
the Volcano does, enter those corner points.

15 Size of safety zone from aim point: If an aim point N/A

is given in line 6, enter the size of the safety zone
from that aim point.

16 Unit emplacing mines and report number: HHC, 307th Engr Bn, 4
Reports should be numbered consecutively. This
would be the fourth minefield that the company
has emplaced.

17 Person completing the report CPT Zimmerman

18 DTG of report 021015ZAUG96

19 Remarks: Any other items that the reporting unit Centerline generally follows
deems important east-west route, Route Blue.

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-25

FM 5-34

Table 7-11. Scatterable minefield warning (SCATMINEWARN) report

Line Message Example

ALPHA Emplacing system Arty

BRAVO AT mines (Yes or No) Yes

CHARLIE AP mines (Yes or No) Yes

DELTA Number of aim points or One

corner points

ECHO Grid coordinates of aim WQ03574598 500-m

points or corner points and
size of safety zone

FOXTROT DTG of life cycle 020615ZAUG96- 061015ZAUG96

In addition to the scatterable minefield/munition field report and

record, the (SCATMINWARN) (see the example in Table 7-11)
notifies effected units that SCATMINEs will be emplaced.

MINEFIELD MARKINGS
MARKING SETS

A hand-emplaced minefield marking set (HEMMS) is normally

used for temporary markings and can mark 70 to 1,000 meters. A
US Number 2 minefield marking set can mark about 400 meters
per set and replaces the HEMMS if a minefield is left in place for
more than 15 days.

MARKING PROCEDURES

A minefield is normally marked to prevent friendly personnel from

accidentally entering it. Figures 7-24 and 7-25 show typical
markings and marked minefield perimeters and lanes. Scatterable
minefields will be marked to the maximum extent possible to
protect friendly troops. The same marking procedures for a
conventional minefield will be used. Table 7-12, page 7-28, lists
marking requirements.

7-26 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Red sign
White letters
3” diameter

30 cm

cm
20

20
cm
Red sign
Yellow stripe (Rear) red sign
Yellow letters

Figure 7-24. Standard marking signs

Waist high

Concertina fencing
used for a minefield

15 m

Waist high
10 - 50 m

Ankle high

Figure 7-25. Minefield marking fence

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-27

FM 5-34

Table 7-12. Scatterable minefield’s marking requirements

Minefield Location Marking

Enemy’s forward area Not marked

Friendly’s forward area Sides and rear marked

Friendly’s rear area All sides marked

US MINES AND FUSES

Figures 7-26 through 7-28, pages 7-29 through 7-35, show and
describe AT and AP mines and firing devices and trip flares. Figure
7-29 and Table 7-13, page 7-36, show characteristics of AP
SCATMINEs. Figure 7-30 and Table 7-14, page 7-37, show
characteristics of AT SCATMINEs.

7-28 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 Munition Packing Arming Procedures Disarming
M14 blast AP mine Carton contains: TO DISARM: Insert
90 mines 1 2 3 safety clip and remove
90 detonators detonator.
6 or 9 wrenches

Dimensions (cm):
Unscrew shipping plug
Length: 20
from bottom of mine. Turn Replace safety clip.
Width: 44 Remove safety clip and
pressure plate to ARMED
Height: 22 check for malfuntioning.
position with arming tool.
Total wt: 21 kg
Wt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1/3 oz. CAUTION: Repeated turning of
4 5
Explosive . . . 1 oz. TETRYL arming dial may cause exces-
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . integral sive wear.
(with Belleville Spring)
Functioning 20 to 35 lb TO BURY: Pressure plate
Penetrate boot and foot should be slightly above ground
Bury mine and remove level.
Screw detonator into safety clip.
detonator well.

Wooden box: Ground level TO DISARM: Reverse

M16A1 bounding AP mines 1 2 3
4 mines per box arming procedures.
4 fuses per box
1 arming wrench
4 trip wires

Dimensions (cm): Remove shipping plug Trip wire installation

Length: 41 and screw in fuse Pressure installation
Width: 28
Wt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25 lb Height: 22 4 5 M16A2 is similar to M16A1/M16,
Projectiles. . . . . . . . . . . steel Total wt: 20 kg but fuse well is not centered on
Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M605 mine.
(Combination)

Functioning: Remove locking safety pin

Pressure. . . . . . 8 to 20 lb Attach trip wires--first to first. The interlocking pins
Pull . . . . . . . . . . 3 to 10 lb anchor, then to pull ring. should fall free. Then
Bounding height . . . .6-1.2 m remove positive safety.
Casualty radius. . . . . . .30 m

Figure 7-26. AP mines (Korea only)

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-29

FM 5-34
 Munition Packing Arming Procedures Disarming
FM 5-34

Wooden box: 2 3 TO DISARM: Reverse

1
M18A1 fragmentation* 6 mines with accesso- arming procedures.
ries AIMING: In aiming the M18A1,
when using the slit-type peep
Dimensions (in): sight, aim the mine at an individ-
Length: 20
TEST CIRCUIT: Mate firing ual’s head when standing 45 m
Width: 11.5 Remove shipping plug-
device, circuit tester, and from the mine. When using the
Height: 9.75 priming adapter, insert
blasting cap. Depress handle. knife edge sight, aim the mine at
Total wt: 33 lb blasting cap, and screw
Light should show in window. an individual’s feet when stand-
ing 50 m from the mine. into either cap well.
Separate test components.

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 lb 4 Direction of aim 5 TO FIRE: Disengage safety bail

Explosive . . . . . . . 1.5 lb C4 and depress handle.
60°
Projectiles. . . . . . . . . . . . 700
(steel balls)
Equipment: Dangerous out
One electric cap, 30-m firing to 250 m
Unroll firing wire and con-
wire per mine
nect directly to firing device
One electric firing device per 50 m 100 m
with safety engaged.
mine
One tester per 6 mines

FIRING POSITION: Minimum

of 16 meters from rear of
mine to fighting position;
friendly troops at side and
rear should be under cover at
a minimum of 100 meters.

* US policy regarding the use and employment of APLs outlined in this FM is subject to the convention on Certain Conventional Weapons and Executive
Orders. Current US policy limits the use of non-self-destructing APLs to (1) defending the US and its allies from armed aggression across the Korean
demilitarized zone and (2) training personnel engaged in demining and countermine operations. The use of the M18A1 claymore in the command-

7-30 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

detonation mode is not restricted under international law or Executive Order.
Figure 7-26. AP mines (Korea only) (continued)
 Munition Packing Arming Procedures Disarming
Individual crate: 1 2 4 TO DISARM: Reverse
M15 heavy AT mine 1 mine with fuse arming proedures.
1 activator

Dimensions (in):
Length: 18
Width: 15.3 Insert fuse.
Height: 7.5 Inspect fuse and
Remove plug and inspect
Total wt: 49 lb remove safety
fuse well.*

Wt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 lb 5 6 TO BURY: Put mine in hole with

Explosive . . . . . . . . . . . 22 lb pressure plate at or slightly
Fuse . . . . . . . . .M603, M624 above ground level.
Secondary fuse wells . . . . .2

Functioning . . . 300 to 400 lb

Replace plug with dial in
SAFE position. Turn dial to ARMED.

M15 AT mine used with Same as above Locking ring TO DISARM: Reverse
1 2 3
M608 fuse arming procedures
except DO NOT replace
pull pin.
Base fuse

Remove plug and inspect

fuse well. Ensure fuse is in
SAFE position. Thread fuse
into mine, HAND TIGHT. Turn dial from SAFE to
Functioning . . . . . 200-350 lb Place mine in hole and ARMED.
for 250-450 milliseconds; resis- Hold fuse to prevent rotat- remove pull pin from
tant to blast-type countermea- ing, turn locking ring down fuse.
sures until it locks against pres-
sure plate.

* Inspect secondary fuze wells for corrosion. Do not fit an MI activator into a corroded fuze well. In training, return a mine with a corroded fuze well to the ammunition supply point as
unserviceable.

Figure 7-27. AT mines

C2, FM 5-34

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-31

 Munition Packing Arming Procedures Disarming
Wooden box: TO DISARM: Reverse
FM 5-34

M21 metallic (killer) AT mine 1 2 3

4 mines arming procedures.
2 wrenches

Dimensions (in):
Length: 22.2
Width: 20.2 Remove closing plug, insert Remove shipping plug from
Remove closure
Height: 16 M120 booster in bottom, and mine and screw in fuse, then
assembly from fuse.
Total wt: 90.8 lb replace closing plug. screw in tilt-rod extension.

Wt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 lb 4 5 For pressure-type mine bury

Explosive . . . . . . . . . .10.5 lb with fuse cap flush with ground
Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . M607 surface. Tilt-rod mines should
Functioning . . . . . . . . 290 lb be seated firmly in snug-fitting
(Pressure or pressure ring or hole. Most effective in tall brush
20 ° deflection of tilt rod) or grass.
Remove safety (pull ring
Bury mine. assembly) and complete
camouflage.

Wooden box: 1 2 3 TO DISARM: Reverse

M19 plastic heavy 4 mines arming positions.
AT mine 4 fuses
1 arming wrench
Remove shipping plug;
Dimensions (in): check position of striker (off-
Length: 16.8 set). Remove safety fork,
Width: 10.8 then turn dial to ARMED
Height: 16 Remove pressure-plate fuse. position. Check position of Screw threaded detonator
Total wt: 71.8 lb striker (center). Turn to SAFE into detonator well.
and replace safety fork.

Wt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 lb 4 5 TO BURY: Put mine in hole with

7-32 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

Explosive . . . . . . . . . . . 21 lb pressure plate at or slightly
Fuse. . . . . . . . M606 integral above ground level.
(with pressure plate)
Secondary fuse wells. . . . . 2
Functioning . . .350 to 500 lb
Place mine in hole, remove
safety fork, and turn dial to Complete camouflage.
ARMED.

Figure 7-27. AT mines (continued)

 Type Arming Procedures Disarming

M5 pressure-release Nonelectric blasting cap Insert 10-gauge wire in interceptor

firing device hole, hold release plate down, and
Crimper A/T mine Thin
Release Safety remove safety pin. Replace safety wire
Heavy
plate pin pin with length of No. 18 wire, wire Heavy
assemble cap, firing device, and
wire
mine.
TO ARM: Remove thin wire
Standard TO DISARM: Insert heavy gauge
base (locking safety) and then heavy
Interceptor hole wire (positive safety) from inter- wire in interceptor hold. Bend wire
Length to prevent dropping out. Proceed
Initiating action: lifting 1.59 ceptor hole. FOLLOW ARMING
cm or removing restraining 10-gauge wire Plywood PROCEDURES CAREFULLY. carefully, as the slightest distur-
weight (5 lb or more) pressure board bance of restraining weight may
detonate mine. Disassemble firing
device and mine.

M49A1 trip flare 1 2 3 1

WARNING: Never look directly

at burning flare.
NOTE: For loose trip-wire initi-
ation, attach trip wire to eye of
safety pin. Attach trip wire to anchor, TO ARM: Remove safety clip. TO DISARM: Insert
then to trigger. Pull trigger to safety clip.
Burning period . . . 55-70 sec vertical position and secure.
Illumination
radius . . . . . . . . . . . 300 m 2

Initiated by taut or loose trip wire.

Attach flare to post or tree
Check both ends of trip
wire and cut near trigger.

Figure 7-28. Firing devices and trip flares

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-33

FM 5-34
 Type Arming Procedures Disarming
FM 5-34

M142 multipurpose Wooden box: PRESSURE: 25 lb or more to func- STEPS:

firing device 56 each tion. 1 Determine mode of operation.
Pressure 1 Check safety pin for ease of 2 Determine what fires the charge
Alternate safety removal and reinsert. (blasting cap, activator, or time fuse).
pin hole Dimensions (in): F
Pressure 2 Secure switch in position with 3 Proceed based on the following
point Length: 17.3 either nails, screws, or wire. table:
Safety
pin Width: 11.78 3 Screw in coupling-base firing
Hole Height: 8.18 device.
Total wt: 53 lb 4 Place a suitable pressure plate in
position to rest on point F.
5 Remove pin with square head,
Switch using wire if necessary.
Hole for the 6 Withdraw safety pin, using wire if
captive tie wire Square-head necessary. If safety pin resists
pivot pin movement, do not withdraw;
Round-head recheck setting.
pivot pin
PULL: 7 lb or more to function.
Coupling body 1 Check safety pin for ease of
assembly removal and reinsert. 4 Destroy in place or notify EOD.
Pull 5 Cut time fuse.
2 Secure switch to a fixed object
with nails, screws, or wire. 6 Insert nail, wire, or safety pin through
3 Screw in coupling-base firing positive safety hole.
device. 7 Insert round head pin (if not in place).
4 Attach trip wire to hole P so that 8 Insert square head pin (if not in
pull is in direction shown. place).
5 Remove pin with square head. 9 Ensure that positive safety pin, round
6 Withdraw safety pin, from a safe head and square head pins are in
P distance, using a wire if neces- place before continuing.
sary. If safety pin resists move- 10Place mine arming dial to SAFE, if
ment, do not withdraw; recheck disarming on mine.
setting. 11 Cut trip wire or release pressure.
12Unscrew coupling base or standard
base.
13Remove firer from charge.
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE BLASTING CAP
FROM BASE

7-34 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

14Restore mechanism to shipping con-
figurations.

Figure 7-28. Firing devices and trip flares (continued)

 Type Arming Procedures Disarming

Tension-release PRESSURE RELEASE: 4 lb or

attachment more to set but not more than 150
lb.
F 1 Check safety pin for ease of
removal and reinsert.
2 Place switch in position and
secure with either nails, screws,
or wire.
Long nails and 3 Screw in coupling-base firing
screws for soft device.
wood Pressure 4. Place an object so that at least 2
release lb force presses down on point F.
5 Remove pin with round head
using a wire if necessary.
6 Withdraw safety pin, using a wire
if necessary. If safety pin resists
movement, do not withdraw.
Recheck setting. REMEMBER —
Real trip wire with REMOVE ROUND FOR RELEASE.
50 ft of wire
TENSION RELEASE:
1 Check safety pin for ease of
Tension S removal and reinsert.
2 Secure switch to fixed object with
nails, screws, or wire.
3 Screw in coupling base firing
device.
4 Fit tension-release device and
loop end of wire over curved
N neck N.
Adjust tension in trip wire until N
lines up with set point S.
5 Remove pin with round head.
6 Withdraw safety pin. If safety pin
resists movement, do not with-
draw, recheck setting.
REMEMBER — REMOVE ROUND
FOR RELEASE

Figure 7-28. Firing devices and trip flares (continued)

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-35

FM 5-34
FM 5-34

Trip-wire
Cover port S&A mechanism
12 cm

Main
charge

6 cm Booster
pellet

Fragmenting
body
Power Trip-wire
supply port

Figure 7-29. AP SCATMINEs

Table 7-13. Characteristics of AP SCATMINEs

Delivery Arming War- SD Explosive Munition Number
Munition DODIC Fuse AHD
System Time head Time Weight Weight of Mines
M67 155-mm D502 45 sec Trip Bounding 20% 4 hr 21 g 540 g 36 per
artillery 2 min wire frag Comp A5 M731
(ADAM) projectile
M72 155-mm D501 45 sec Trip Bounding 20% 48 hr 21 g 540 g 36 per
artillery 2 min wire frag Comp A5 M692
(ADAM) projectile
M74 Flipper K151 45 min Trip Blast frag 20% 5 days 540 g 1.44 kg 5 per
wire 15 Comp B4 sleeve
days
BLU 92/ USAF K291 2 min Trip Blast frag 100 4 hr 540 g 1.44 kg 22 per
B (Gator) K292 wire % 48 hr Comp B4 CBU 89/B
K293 15 dispenser
days
M77 MOPMS K022 2 min Trip Blast frag 0% 4 hr 540 g 1.44 kg 4 per
wire (recy- Comp B4 M131 dis-
cle up penser
to 3
times)
Volcano Ground/ K045 4 min Trip Blast frag 0% 4 hr 540 g 1.44 kg 1 per M87
air wire 48 hr Comp B4 canister
15
days

7-36 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

S&A mechanism
12 cm
Clearing Plate
charge

Main
6 cm charge

Booster
charge Plate

Figure 7-30. AT SCATMINE

Table 7-14. Characteristics of AT SCATMINEs

Delivery Arming SD Explosive Mine Number
Mine DODIC Fuse Warhead AHD
System Time Time Weight Weight of Mines

M73 155-mm D503 45 sec Magnetic M-S plate 20% 48 hr 585 g RDX 1.7 kg 9 per
artillery 2 min M718
(RAAM) projectile
M70 155-mm D509 45 sec Magnetic M-S plate 20% 4 hr 585 g RDX 1.7 kg 9 per
artillery 2 min M741
(RAAM) projectile
M75 Flipper K184 45 min Magnetic M-S plate 20% 5 days 585 g RDX 1.7 kg 5 per
15 days sleeve
BLU 91/ USAF K291 2 min Magnetic M-S plate NA 4 hr 585 g RDX 1.7 kg 72 per
B (Gator) K292 48 hr CBU
K293 15 days 89/B
dispenser
M76 MOPMS K022 2 min Magnetic M-S plate NA 4 hr 585 g RDX 1.7 kg 17 per
(recycle M131
up to 3 dispenser
times)
Volcano Ground/ K045 2 min Magnetic M-S plate NA 4 hr 585 g RDX 1.7 kg 5 per
air 30 sec 48 hr M87
15 days canister;
6 per
M87A1
canister

FOREIGN MINES
Unless directed differently, all foreign mines will be destroyed in
place rather than removed/disarmed.

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-37

FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

Former Soviet Union
TM 60 Plastic
Total weight: 11.4 kg
Weight of explosive: 9.9 kg
Diameter: 300 mm
Fuze: Two available
a. Nonmetallic chemical
b. Mechanical pressure
TMS-B Tar-impregnated cardboard, glass blug over
TMB1 fuze well
TMB2 Diameter: 275 mm
Total weight: 6.9 kg
Weight of explosive: 5.0 kg
Fuze: MV-5K
TM46 Metal
TMN46 Total weight: 8.7 kg
TM41 Weight of explosive: 5.7 kg
Diameter: 300 mm
Fuze: MVM

TM57 Material (metal)

Total weight: 9-12 kg
Diameter: 310 mm
Fuze: Pressure, tilt rod, or pneumatic

LMG Rocket
Total weight: 10 kg
Weight of explosive: 3.2 kg
Fuze: Pull (MUV)
MZD series Wood, field fabricated
Total weight: Variable
Weight of explosive: 0.4 - 4.0 kg
Fuze: Vibration, electric

TMD B Wood
TMD44 Total weight: 7.7 - 10 kg
Weight of explosive: 5 - 6.8 kg
Fuze: Pressure (MV-5)
YAM 5/10 Wood
TMD41 Total weight: 7.7 kg
Weight of explosive: 5.8 kg
Fuze: pull (MUV)
TMK2 Metal
Total weight: 12.5 kg
Fuze: Tilt rod (adjustable)

Figure 7-31. Foreign AT mines

7-38 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

Former Czechoslovakia
PT Mi Ba Plastic
PT Mi Ba 53 Total weight: 7.6 kg
Weight of explosive: 5.6 kg
Diameter: 310 mm
Fuze: Pressure

PT Mi Ba II/III Plastic
Total weight: 9.9 kg
Weight of explosive: 6 kg
Fuze: Pressure

PT Mi K Metal
Total weight: 7.1 kg
Weight of explosive: 5 kg
Fuze: Pressure

PT Mi D/II/III Wood
Total weight: 9 kg+
Weight of explosive: 6.2 kg

Former East Germany

PM 60 Similar to TM60 (Russian)

K1 Plastic
Total weight: 11 kg
Weight of explosive: 7 kg
Fuze: Pressure

Hungary
Shape-charge mine Cardboard and plywood
Total weight: 5.4 kg
Fuze: Pressure

Denmark
M/47-1 Metal
Total weight: 10 kg
Weight of explosive: 6.3 kg
Fuze: Pressure or antidisturbance

M/52 Plastic
Total weight: 10.7 kg
Weight of explosive: 8.3 kg
Fuze: Pressure-chemical

Figure 7-31. Foreign AT mines (continued)

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-39

FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

Model 1951 Has no case, cast TNT
Nonmetallic Total weight: 7 kg
Diameter: 300 mm
Fuze: Pressure chemical 1950 or pressure
friction 1952
Model 1947 Bakelite case
Nonmetallic Total weight: 11 kg
Diameter: 330 mm
Fuze: Pressure chemical 1950 or pressure
friction 1952
Model 1948 Metal
Total weight: 9 kg
Diameter: 310 mm
Fuze: Main and two secondary fuze wells

Italy
CS 42/2 Wood
CS 42/3 Total weight: 6.9 kg
Weight of explosive: 5 kg
Fuze: Pressure

SH-55 Plastic
Total weight: 7.3 kg
Diameter: 265 mm
Fuze: Integral pneumatic pressure

“Saci” 54/7 Plastic case but metal striker detectable

Diameter: 265 mm
Total weight:Two models
a. Light — 6.2 g
b. Heavy — 10.2 kg
Fuze: Three pressure
Japan
Type 63 Nonmetallic
Total weight: 15 kg
Weight of explosive: 11 kg

Netherlands
MIRJAM Employes normal antitank mine, such as
River mine Model 26 (Serial 6)
Total weight: 18 kg
Length: 605 mm

Model 26 Plastic reinforced with glass wool

Undetectable Total weight: 9 kg
Diameter: 300 mm
Fuze: Pressure friction with shear collar
control, two secondary fuze wells for antilift
devices

Figure 7-31. Foreign AT mines (continued)

7-40 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

Model 25 Metal
Total weight: 12.8 kg
Diameter: 309 mm
Fuze: Pressure with two secondary fuze
wells for antihandling devices

T40 Metal
Total weight: 6 kg
Diameter: 280 mm
Fuze: Pressure

Spain
C.E.T.M.E. Nonmetallic
Total weight: 9.9 kg
Weight of explosive: 5.2 kg
Fuze: Chemical or mechanical

Sweden
Model 52 Wood and fabrics
Total weight: 8.9 kg
Weight of explosive: 7.4 kg
Fuze: Pressure

M1 101 Nonmetallic
Total weight: 12.4 kg
Weight of explosive: 11 kg
Fuze: No data

Model 41-47 and 47 Metallic

Weight of explosive: 5 kg
Fuze: Pressure

United Kingdom
L9A1 Nonmetallic
Total weight: 11 kg
Length: 1.2 m

MK7 Metallic
Total weight: 14.7 kg
Weight of explosive: 8.8 kg
Diameter: 330 mm
Fuze: Pressure

L3A1 Plastic with removable detector ring

Total weight: 7.7 kg
Diameter: 266 mm

Figure 7-31. Foreign AT mines (continued)

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-41

FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

L14A1 Off-road
Total weight: 13 kg
Maximum range: 80 m
Height: 330 mm
Length: 260 mm
Fuze: Actuated by break wire across kill zone
Former West Germany
DM 11 Plastic
Total weight: 7.4 kg
Weight of explosive: 7 kg
Diameter: 300 mm
Fuze: DM 46 pressure

DM 39 Plastic
Total weight: 0.50 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.31 kg
Diameter: 118 mm
Fuze: Antilift device with pressure-release
fuze
DM 49 Plastic
Total weight: 0.50 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.20 kg
Diameter: 90 mm
Fuze: Antilift device with pressure-release
fuze
Figure 7-31. Foreign AT mines (continued)

7-42 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

Former Soviet Union
POM 2-2M Cast iron case
Total weight: 1.7 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.75kg
Diameter: 60 mm
Fuze: MUV-2
OZM-3 Steel
OZM-4 Total weight: 4.54 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.75 kg
Diameter: 77 mm
Fuze: MUV or MUV-2

MON 100 Metal

MON 200 Total weight:
MON 100: 5 kg
MON 200: 25 kg
Weight of explosive:
MON 100: 2 kg
MON 200: 12 kg
Diameter:
MON 100: 220 mm
MON 200: 520 mm
Fuze: Electric command or tripwire
PMN Phenolic body with rubber cover
Total weight: 0.60 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.216 kg
Diameter: 100 mm
Fuze: Integral with mine

PMD6 Wood
PMD7 Total weight: 398 gm
Weight of explosive: 200 gm
Fuze: Pull (MUV)

Former Czechoslovakia
PP Mi S6 Concrete case
Total weight: 2.1 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.075 kg
Diameter: 75 mm
Fuze: R01 pull or R08 pressure
PP Mi Sr Steel
Total weight: 3.25 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.325 kg
Diameter: 100 mm
Fuze: R01 pull or R08 pressure

PP Mi ST-46 Cast-iron case

Figure 7-32. Foreign AP mines

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-43

FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

Hungary
Ramp mine Metal
Total weight: 1.4 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.8 kg
Fuze: Pull

M62 Plastic
Total weight: 386 gm
Weight of explosive: 74 gm
Fuze: Pull (MUV)
Bounding Metal case
Total weight: 3.6 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.8 kg
Fuze: Pull

Former East Germany

K-2 Plastic with metal
Total weight: 4 kg
Weight of explosive: 3 kg
Fuze: Pressure

France
Model 1948 Nonmetallic
Total weight: 0.56 kg
Weight of explosive: 170 gm

Model 1951 nonmetallic Plastic

Total weight: 0.85 kg
Diameter: 70 mm
Fuze: Integral pressure friction

Model 1951/55 Metal

bounding Total weight: 4.5 kg
Diameter: 110 mm
Fuze: Model 1952 tilt rod

DV 56 Plastic
Model 1956 Total weight: 0.16 kg
Nonmetallic Fuze: Friction pressure
Diameter: 70 mm

Figure 7-32. Foreign AP mines (continued)

7-44 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

Italy
Minelba Metal
Type A Total weight: 0.17 kg
Diameter: 110 mm
Fuze: Integral pneumatic

Minelba Similar in outer appearance to Type A but is

Type B made of plastic and has no safety pin hole
and no safety device
Diameter: 110 mm

AUS 50/5 Plastic

Total weight: 1.4 kg
Diameter: 125 mm
Fuze: Pressure/pull

Type R Wood
Total weight: 0.5 kg
Fuze: Pressre/pull

Valmara Metallic
Total weight: 3.2 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.54 kg
Fuze: Pressure/pull

Netherlands
Model 22 Plastic
Nonmetallic Total weight: 0.85 kg
Fuze: Integral pressure friction with shear
collar control

Model 15 Plastic
Total weight: 0.6 kg
Fuze: Pressure igniter
Length: 114 mm
Width: 100 mm
Spain
FAMD Plastic
Total weight: 97 gm
Weight of explosive: 48 gm
Fuze: Pressure

Sweden
M49 Cardboard
M49B Total weight: 0.23 kg
Fuze: Pressure

Figure 7-32. Foreign AP mines (continued)

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-45

FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

M48 Fragmentation
Total weight: 2.9 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.23 kg
Fuse: Pull

Model 43 Concrete
Model 43 (T) Total weight: 5.8 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.6 kg
Fuze: Pull

M/43 T Cardboard
Total weight: 0.23 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.14 kg
Fuze: Pressure

M41 Wood
Total weight: 0.35 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.12 kg
Fuze: Pressure pin withdrawal

Switzerland
M3 Nonmetallic
Total weight: 93 gm
Weight of explosive: 68 gm

P59 Plastic
Weight of explosive: 60 gm
Fuze: None

United Kingdom
AP Plastic mine with metal-detector ring
No. 6 (i) Length: 203 mm

AP Small metal mine, actuated by a load of

No. 7 (Dingbat) 3.20 kg
Total weight: 0.11 kg
Diameter: 63 mm

AP Nonmetallic
C3 (Elsie) Small plastic mine with removable detector
ring
Total weight: 0.08 kg
Length: 76 mm

Figure 7-32. Foreign AP mines (continued)

7-46 Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles

 FM 5-34

Mine Description Sketch

Former West Germany
DM 11 Plastic
Total weight: 200 gm
Weight of explosive: 114 gm
Diameter: 80 mm

DM 31 Steel
Total weight: 4 kg
Weight of explosive: 0.53 kg
Diameter: 102 mm
Fuze: DM56

Figure 7-32. Foreign AP mines (continued)

Landmine and Special-Purpose Munition Obstacles 7-47

 Chapter 8
Survivability
WEAPONS FIGHTING POSITIONS
These positions may be hasty or deliberate, depending on the time
and material availability. They may be dug by hand or mechanically,
using a small emplacement excavator (SEE). Table 8-1 shows the
required thicknesses for protection against direct and indirect fires.
In training, support conservation and safety efforts by backfilling the
positions and returning the top soil to the upper layer.

Table 8-1. Material thickness for protection against direct and indirect fires

Material Direct Fire Indirect Fire

(cm)
107- to 120-mm
Small 85-mm 120- to 122-mm 152-mm
HE Shaped 82-mm
Caliber HE Shaped Mortar/Rocket/ Mortar/Rocket/
Charge (RCLR) Mortar
(7.62) charge (RPG7) HE Shell HE Shell
(Sagger)

Concrete 30 76 91 10 13 15
(not reinforc-
ing)

Gravel, 51 61 91 25 46 51
small rocks,
bricks, rub-
ble

Soil, sand 107 198 244 30 51 76

Dry timber 91 229 274 20 30 36

Snow 183 396 None 152 152 152

(tamped)

INDIVIDUAL FIGHTING POSITIONS

Soldiers must construct fighting positions that protect them and
allow them to fire into their assigned sectors. Fighting positions
protect soldiers by providing cover through sturdy construction and
by provid ing con cealment t hrough p ositionin g and p r op er
camouflage. The enemy must not be able to identify a fighting
position until it is too late and he has been effectively engaged. When
possible, soldiers should site positions in nonobvious places, such as

Survivability 8-1
FM 5-34

behind natural cover, and in an easy-to-camouflage location. The

most important step in preparing a fighting position is to make
sure that it cannot be seen. In constructing a fighting position,
soldiers should always
• Dig the position armpit deep.
• Fill the sandbags about 75 percent full.
• Revet excavations in sandy soil.
• Check stabilization of wall bases.
• Inspect and test the position daily, after heavy rain, and after
receiving direct or indirect fires.
• Maintain, repair, and improve positions as required.
• Use proper material, and use it correctly.
NOTE: In sandy soil, soldiers should not drive vehicles
within 6 feet of the position.
SITING TO ENGAGE THE ENEMY
Soldiers must be able to engage the enemy within their assigned
fire sectors. They should be able to fire out to the maximum
effective range of their weapons with maximum grazing fire and
minimal dead space. Soldiers and leaders must be able to identify
the best position locations to meet this criteria. Leaders must also
ensure that fighting positions provide interlocking fires. This
siting process allows the soldiers in the fighting positions to cover
the platoon’s sector and provides a basis for final protective fires
(FPFs).
PREPARING BY STAGES
Leaders must ensure that their soldiers understand when and how
to prepare fighting positions based on the situation. Soldiers
normally prepare hasty fighting positions everytime the platoon
halts (except for short security halts) and when only half of the
platoon digs in while the other half maintains security. They
prepare positions in stages and require a leader to inspect the
position before moving on to the next stage. The example below
explains the stages:
• Stage 1. The leader checks the fields of fire from the prone position
and has a soldier emplace sector stakes (see Figure 8-1).
• Stage 2. The soldiers prepare the retaining walls for the parapets.
There must be at least a one-helmet distance from the edge of the
hole to the beginning of the front, flanks, and rear cover (see
Figure 8-2, page 8-4).
• Stage 3. The soldiers dig the position, throw the dirt forward of
the parapet’s retaining walls, and pack the dirt down hard (see
Figure 8-3, page 8-5).

8-2 Survivability
 FM 5-34

• Stage 4. The soldiers prepare the overhead cover (see Figure 8-4, page
8-5). They should camouflage the position so it blends with the
surrounding terrain. (The position should not be dectable at a
distance of 35 meters.)

Cleared fields
of fire
Secondary
sectors

Primary sector Primary sector

(grazing fire) (grazing fire)

Sector
stakes
Aiming
stake 2 Helmets
Elbow holes
2 M16s

• Sector stakes are emplaced (primary sector).

• Grazing fire log or sandbag are positioned
between the sector stakes.
• The aiming stake, if required, is emplaced to
allow limited visibility engagement of a specific
target.
• Elbow holes are scooped out.
• The outline of position is traced on the ground.
• Fields of fire are cleared (primary and secondary
sectors).
• The leader inspects the position.

Figure 8-1. Stage 1, preparing a fighting position

Table 8-2, page 8-6, and Figures 8-5 through 8-8, pages 8-7 through 8-8,
show details and characteristics of different individual positions. The
AT-4 may be fired from any of these positions; however, a back-blast
area must be cleared before firing.

Survivability 8-3
FM 5-34

Front Wall
Two sandbags high by two M16s long

Flank Wall Flank Wall

Two sandbags Two sandbags
high by one M16 high by one M16
long long
Rear Wall
One sandbag high by one M16 long

• The front wall is two to three sandbags (or logs) high. For
a two-soldier position, it is about two M16s long.
• The flank walls are the same height, but only one M16
long.
• The rear wall is one sandbag high by one M16 long.
• The logs, if used, must be held firmly in place with strong
stakes about 2 inches to 3 inches in diameter and 18
inches long.
• The leader inspects the position.

Figure 8-2. Stage 2, preparing a fighting position

8-4 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Frontal cover

Grenade sumps

Flank cover Flank cover

Storage
area
Hole
Rear cover (armpit
deep)

• The position is dug armpit deep. • Grenade sumps are dug and the
• The parapets are filled in order of floor sloped toward them.
front, flanks, and rear. • Storage areas for the two rucksacks
• The parapets and the entire may also be dug into the rear wall.
position are camouflaged. • The leader inspects the position.

Figure 8-3. Stage 3, preparing a fighting position

Logs
(overhead cover)

• Five to six logs 4 to 6 inches in diameter and two M16s long are placed over
the center of the position.
• Waterproofing (plastic bags, poncho) is placed on top of these logs.
• Six to 8 inches of dirt or sandbags are put on top of the logs.
• The overhead cover and the bottom of the the position are camouflaged.
• The leader inspects the position.

Figure 8-4. Stage 4, preparing a fighting position

Survivability 8-5
 Table 8-2. Characteristics of individual fighting positions
Construction
FM 5-34

Time w/Hand
Direct-Fire
Position Type Tools (man- Indirect-Fire Protection
Protection
hours,
estimate)

8-6 Survivability
Hasty Positions
Crater 0.2 Up to 7.62 mm Better than in the open, no overhead protection
Skirmisher’s trench 0.5 Up to 7.62 mm Better than in the open, no overhead protection
Prone position 1.0 Up to 7.62 mm Better than in the open, no overhead protection
Deliberate Positions
One soldier 3.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft, no
overhead protection
One soldier w/18 in of 8.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft
overhead cover

Two soldiers 6.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft, no

overhead protection
Two soldiers w/18 in of 11.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft
overhead cover

Three soldiers 9.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft, no

overhead protection
Three soldiers w/18 in of 14.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft
overhead cover
NOTES:
1. Positions do not provide protection from indirect-fire blasts or direct hits from indirect fire.
2. Shell sizes are small, 82-mm mortar and 105-mm artillery, and medium, 120-mm mortar and 152-mm
artillery.
 FM 5-34

Two bayonets
or helmets
One M16

48 cm
Body length
One bayonet

Figure 8-5. Hasty prone position

Two bayonets
or helmets

Tw
o M1
6s

On
e M1
6
t
ne ne
Armpit O ayo
deep b

Grenade sump
45° angle

Figure 8-6. Two-soldier fighting position

Survivability 8-7
FM 5-34

Stage 1, top view Stage 2, top view

Fighting position Fighting position

with parapets with overhead
support

Add minimum 18”

overhead cover
Stage 3, top view Stage 4, side view
cut away
Fighting position Fighting position
with roof supports complete with
overhead cover

Figure 8-7. Two-soldier fighting position development

Figure 8-8. Three-soldier T-position

8-8 Survivability
 FM 5-34

CREW-SERVED-WEAPONS FIGHTING POSITIONS

Table 8-3. Characteristics of crew-served-weapons fighting positions

Construction
Time w/Hand
Direct-Fire
Position Type Tools (man- Indirect-Fire Protection
Protection
hours,
estimate)

AT-4, LAW 4.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft,

no overhead protection
Dragon, M47 6.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft,
no overhead protection
Machine gun 7.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft,
no overhead protection
Machine gun w/ 12.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft
18 in of over-
head cover
Dismounted 110 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft,
no overhead protection
TOW 14.0 Up to 12.7 mm Up to medium artillery, no closer than 30 ft,
Mortar no overhead protection
NOTES:
1. Positions do not provide protection from indirect-fire blasts or direct hits from indirect
fire.
2. Shell sizes are small, 82-mm mortar and 105-mm artillery, and medium, 120-mm mortar
and 152-mm artillery.

After being assigned a sector of fire with a final protective line

(FPL) or a principle direction of fire (PDF), the gun crew starts
constructing a fighting position. The crew
• Positions a tripod and marks it so that the weapon will be pointed
in the general direction of the target area.
• Draws a preliminary sketched range card to show the sector’s
limits.
• Outlines the shape of the platform and hole, to include the area
for the frontal cover in the ground (see Figure 8-9).

Figure 8-9. Planning the fighting position

Survivability 8-9
FM 5-34

• Starts digging out the platform.

• Puts the machine gun in place, after digging about 4 to 6 inches,
to cover the primary sector of fire until construction is complete.
When assigned an FPL, the gun crew
• Emplaces the gun by locking the traversing slide to the extreme
left or right of the traversing bar, depending on which side of the
primary sector the FPL is on.
• Aligns the barrel on the FPL by shifting the tripod.
NOTE: The crew does not fill in the direction entry in the
data section of the range card for the FPL.
When assigned a PDF, the gun crew
• Emplaces the gun by locking the traversing slide at the center of
the traversing bar.
• Shifts the tripod and gun until the barrel is aimed at the center of
the sector.
• Checks coverage of the sector limits by traversing the gun fully
left and right.
NOTE: In the data section of the range card, the crew
records the directions and elevation data of the PDF and
the sector limits from the traverse and elevation mecha-
nism (see Figure 8-10).

Top view

Traversing screw

Traversing handwheel

Upper elevating screw and

Elevation reading plate with scale
-50
3 Elevating handwheel
“-50/3” with scale
Traversing bar with scale
Traversing bar slide. Use left edge 3 mils between small lines
to obtain direction readings.

Direction reading

L10 + 0 = L100

Figure 8-10. Traverse and elevation mechanism

8-10 Survivability
 FM 5-34

The crew digging the hole

• Uses the dug-up dirt to build up the coverfirst for frontal cover
and then for flank and rear cover.
• Digs the hole deep enough so that the crew is protected and the
gunner can shoot with comfort (usually about armpit deep) (see
Figure 8-11).

Firing platform

Figure 8-11. Digging the fighting position

• Fixes the tripod legs in place by digging, sandbagging, or staking

them down. Doing so ensures that the gun does not shift during
firing, which would render the range card useless.
• Digs three trench-shaped grenade sumps at various points so that
the crew can kick grenades into them (see Figure 8-12, page 8-12).
• Digs only half a position when a position does not have a secondary
sector of fire (see Figure 8-13, page 8-12).
• Prepares two firing platforms when a position has both a primary
and a secondary sector. The crew prepares overhead cover for a
machine gun’s position the same as a two-man, small-arms fighting
position. Time and material permitting, overhead cover should
extend to cover the firing platforms (see Figure 8-14, page 8-13). If
the crew improperly constructs the overhead cover, it can result in
reduced fields of fire, inability to mount night-vision devices
(NVDs), or reloading problems. Properly constructing the overhead
cover is critical to survival.
When a three-man crew is available for the machine gun, the
ammunition bearer digs a one-man fighting position to the flank of

Survivability 8-11
FM 5-34

Firing platform Firing platform

Grenade sump

Figure 8-12. Digging grenade sumps

Figure 8-13. Half of a position

8-12 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Ammo bearer’s
sector of fire

Secondary
sector
Ammo bearer’s
sector of fire

Primary
sector
Ammo Parapet
bearer
Trench

Figure 8-14. Two firing platforms with overhead cover

the gun position so that he can see and shoot to the oblique. In this
position, he can cover the front of the machine gun’s position (see
Figure 8-15).

Ammo
bearer
Crawl
trench MG
position

Figure 8-15. Ammo bearer covering front

Survivability 8-13
FM 5-34

Figure 8-16 shows a dug-in position for the MK-19.

Parapet
3’ thick all around
1’ wide
Ammunition
storage

Enemy

Gun Platform
Trench
31/2’ wide
2’ wide
31/2’ long
Chest high

Figure 8-16. Dug-in position for an MK19

RANGE CARD
A range card contains a sketch of a sector that a direct-fire-weapon
system is assigned to cover. (See FM 7-8 for a reproducible copy of
DA Form 5517-R.) Information on the card
• Aids in planning and controlling fires.
• Aids the crew in acquiring targets during limited visibility.
• Helps replacement personnel, platoons, or squads move into
position and orient on their sector.
During good visibility, a gunner should not have problems staying
oriented within his sector. During poor visibility, he may not be
able to detect lateral limits. If the gunner does become disoriented
and cannot find or locate reference points or sector limit markers,
he can use the information on the range card to locate these limits.
He should assess the terrain in his sector and update the range
card as necessary.

DETAILS
To prepare a range card, a gunner must know the following
information:

Sectors of Fire
A sector of fire is the part of the battlefield for which a gunner is
responsible. He may be assigned a primary and a secondary sector.

8-14 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Leaders use sectors of fire to ensure that fires are distributed across
the platoon’s area of responsibility.
Leaders assign sectors of fire to cover possible enemy AAs. When
assigning sectors, leaders should overlap them to provide the best use
of overlapping fire and to cover areas that cannot be engaged by a
single-weapon system. Leaders assign left and right limits of a sector
using prominent terrain features or easily recognizable objects (rocks,
telephone poles, fences, emplaced stakes).

Target Reference Points (TRPs)/Reference Points (RPs)

Leaders designate natural or man-made terrain features as RPs. The
gunner uses these points in target acquisition and the range-
determination process during limited visibility. There will also be
predesignated TRPs, which must be useful as such or as indirect-fire
targets.
A commander or platoon leader designates indirect-fire targets used
as TRPs so that target numbers can be assigned. If TRPs are within
the sector of fire, the squad leader points them out and tells the
gunner their designated reference numbers. Normally, a gunner has
at least one TRP but should not have more than four. The range card
should show only pertinent data for reference points and TRPs.

Dead Space
Dead space is any area that cannot be observed or covered by direct-
fire systems within the sector of fire. All dead space within the sector
of fire must be identified to allow the squad and platoon leaders to
plan the use of fires (mortars, artillery) to cover that area. The crew
must walk the EA so that the gunners can detect dead spaces through
the integrated sight units (ISUs).

Maximum Engagement Line (MEL)

The depth of the sector is normally limited to the maximum effective
engagement range of the vehicle’s weapon systems; however, it can be
less if there are objects that prevent the gunner from engaging
targets at the maximum effective engagement range. To assist in
determining the distance to each MEL, the gunner or squad leader
should use a map to make sure that the MELs are shown correctly on
the range card. MEL identification assists in decreasing the
ammunition used on an engagement.

Weapon Reference Point (WRP)

The WRP is an easily recognizable terrain feature on the map. It is
used to assist leaders in plotting a vehicle’s position and to assist
replacement personnel in finding a vehicle’s position.

Survivability 8-15
FM 5-34

PREPARATION PROCEDURES
A gunner prepares two copies of the range card. If alternate and
supplementary firing positions are assigned, the gunner prepares
two copies for those positions. He keeps one copy in the vehicle and
gives the other to the platoon leader for his sketch. To complete a
range card, a gunner should do the following:
Step 1. Draw the weapon symbol in the center of the small circle.
Draw two lines from the position of the vehicle, extending left and
right to show the limits of the sector (see Figure 8-17).

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 8-17. Placement of weapon symbol and left and right limits

Step 2. Determine the value of each circle by finding a terrain

feature that is farthest from the position within the weapon
system’s capability. Determine the distance to the terrain feature;
round off to the next even hundredth, if necessary. Determine the

8-16 Survivability
 FM 5-34

maximum number of circles that will divide evenly into the

distance. The result is the value of each circle. Draw the terrain
feature on the appropriate circle on the range card. Mark the
increment clearly for each circle across the area where DATA
SECTION is written. For example, Figure 8-18 shows a hilltop at
3,145 meters (rounded to 3,200 meters). The 3,200 is divided by 8,
which equals 400, the value of each circle. Figure 8-19, page 8-18,
shows a farmhouse at 2,000 meters on the left limit. The right
limit is noted by the wood line at 2,600 meters.

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 8-18. Circle value

Survivability 8-17
FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 8-19. Terrain features for left and right limits

Step 3. Determine the distance to these features using a map or a

hand-held laser range finder.
Step 4. Draw all TRPs and RPs in the sector. Mark each of these
with a circled number beginning with 1. Figure 8-20 shows the
hilltop as RP 1 and the road junctions as RP 2 and RP 3.
Sometimes, a TRP and an RP are the same point, as RP 2 and RP 3
are in the figure. This occurs when a TRP is used for target
acquisition and range determination. Mark the TRP with the first
designated number in the upper right quadrant and the RP in the
lower left quadrant of the cross. Draw road junctions by
determining the range to the junction, drawing it, and then
drawing the connecting roads from the road junction.

8-18 Survivability
 FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 8-20. Target reference points/reference points

Step 5. Show dead space in an irregular circle with diagonal lines

drawn inside (see Figure 8-21, page 8-20). Any object that prohibits
observation or coverage with direct fire will have the circle and
diagonal lines extend out to the farthest maximum engagement line.
If you can engage the area beyond the dead space, close the circle.
For example, an area of lower elevation will have a closed circle
because you can engage the area beyond it.
Step 6. Draw MELs at the maximum effective engagement range
per weapon, if there is no dead space to limit their range capabilities
(see Figure 8-22, page 8-21). Note how the MEL for HE extends
beyond the dead space in Figure 8-21. This indicates a higher elevation

Survivability 8-19
FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 8-21. Dead space

where HE area suppression is possible. Do not draw MELs

through dead space. The maximum effective ranges for the
Bradley weapon systems are as follows:
— COAX: 900 meters (tracer burnout).
— APDS-T: 1,700 meters (tracer burnout).
— NEI-T/TOW (basic): 3,000 meters (impact).
— TOW 2: 3,750 meters (impact).
The WRP in Figure 8-23, page 8-22, is shown as a line with a
series of arrows extending from a known terrain feature and
pointing in the direction of the Bradley symbol. This feature is
numbered last. The WRP location is given a six-digit grid. When

8-20 Survivability
 FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 8-22. Maximum engagement lines

there is no terrain feature to be designated as the WRP, the

vehicle’s location is shown as an eight-digit grid coordinate in the
remarks block of the range card (see Figure 8-24, page 8-23).
NOTE: When you cannot drawn the WRP precisely on the
card because of vehicle location, draw it to the left or right
nearest the actual direction.
Step 7. Complete the data section as follows (see Figure 8-24):
— Position identification: list either primary, alternate, or
supplementary. You must clearly identify alternate and
supplemental positions.
— Date: show the date and time that you completed the range
card. Because these cards are constantly updated, the date and
time are vital in determining current data.
— Weapon: This block indicates M2 and the vehicle’s bumper
number.

Survivability 8-21
FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 8-23. Weapon reference point

— Each circle equals________meters: write in the distance

between circles.
— Number (No.): start with L and R limts; then list TRPs and
RPs in numerical order.
— Direction deflection: list the direction, in degrees, taken from
a lensatic compass. The most accurate technique is to have
the gunner aim at the terrain feature and the driver
dismount and align himself with the gun barrel and the
terrain feature to measure the azimuth.
— Elevation: show the gun-elevation reading in tens or
hundreds of mils. The smallest increment of measure on the
elevation scale is tens of mils. Any number other than 0 is
preceded by a plus or minus sign to show whether the gun
needs to be elevated or depressed. Ammunition and range
must be indexed to have an accurate elevation reading.

8-22 Survivability
 FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 8-24. Example of a completed range card

— Range: record the distance, in meters, from the vehicle’s

position to L and R limits and TRPs and RPs.
— Ammo: list the types of ammunition used.
— Description: list the name of the object; for example,
farmhouse, wood line, hilltop.
— Remarks: enter the WRP data. As a minimum, WRP data
include a description of what the WRP is, a six-digit or eight-
digit grid coordinate of the WRP, the magnetic azimuth, and
the distance from the WRP to the vehicle’s position.

VEHICLE POSITIONS
Positions may be fighting or protective, hasty or deliberate. See
Table 8-4, page 8-24, for estimated survivability positions for

Survivability 8-23
FM 5-34

maneuver units. See Tables 8-5 through 8-8, pages 8-25 through
8-36, for the number of turret-defilade positions (TDPs) and hull-
defilade positions (HDPs) that can be constructed, based on the
availability of time and assets.

WARNING
Ensure that engineer equipment bowls on scoop loaders,
ACEs, SEEs, scrapers, and so on are periodically emptied.
Never allow them to remain filled overnight, especially during
cold weather.

Table 8-4. Standard survivability estimates for maneuver units

Number of Hull-Down Positions to be
Provided per Battle Position
Description of Recommended Priority
Level
of Survivability Support
Armor Mech Inf Armor Mech Inf
Bn Bn Co Co

1 TOWs -P
Tanks -P
APC (Pit and Co HQ only) - 50% P
TOC -P 80 100 15 15
2 TOWs - P and A
Tanks -P
APC (Pit and Co HQ only) -P
TOC -P 85 175 15 15
3 TOWs - P and A
Tanks - P and A
APC (Pit and Co HQ only) -P
TOC -P
Combat support -P 150 180 30 25
4 TOWs - P and A
Tanks - P and A
APC (all) -P
TOC -P
Combat support -P
Combat train - 50% P 160 190 30 30
5 TOWs - P, A, and S
Tanks, APC (all) - P and A
TOC -P
Combat support -P
Combat train -P 185 295 45 40
6 TOWs, tanks, and APC (all) - P, A, and S
TOC - P and A
Combat support - P and A
Combat train -p 265 330 45 45
NOTES:
1. P = Primary, A = Aternate, S = Supplementary hull-down positions.
2. Numbers are rounded to the nearest 5.
3. Combat support vehicles comprise mortars and ADA.
4. Platoon and Co. HQ only. Allows for four APCs per platoon and two per Co HQ to be dug
in.

8-24 Survivability
 Table 8-5. Dozer team TDP calculations
Real hr Blade Teams Available
avail
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0

1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.5

2 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.8 5.0

3 0.8 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.3 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.8 4.1 4.5 4.9 5.3 5.6 6.0 6.4 6.8 7.1 7.5

4 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0
5 1.3 1.9 2.5 3.1 3.8 4.4 5.0 5.6 6.3 6.9 7.5 8.1 8.8 9.4 10.0 10.6 11.3 11.9 12.5

6 1.5 2.3 3.0 3.8 4.5 5.3 6.0 6.8 7.5 8.3 9.0 9.8 10.5 11.3 12.0 12.8 13.5 14.3 15.0

7 1.8 2.6 3.5 4.4 5.3 6.1 7.0 7.9 8.8 9.6 10.5 11.4 12.3 13.1 14.0 14.9 15.8 16.6 17.5

8 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0

9 2.3 3.4 4.5 5.6 6.8 7.9 9.0 10.1 11.3 12.4 13.5 14.6 15.8 16.9 18.0 19.1 20.3 21.4 22.5

10 2.5 3.8 5.0 6.3 7.5 8.8 10.0 11.3 12.5 13.8 15.0 16.3 17.5 18.8 20.0 21.3 22.5 23.8 25.0

11 2.8 4.1 5.5 6.9 8.3 9.6 11.0 12.4 13.8 15.1 16.5 17.9 19.3 20.6 22.0 23.4 24.8 26.1 27.5

12 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.5 18.0 19.5 21.0 22.5 24.0 25.5 27.0 28.5 30.0

13 3.3 4.9 6.5 8.1 9.8 11.4 13.0 14.6 16.3 17.9 19.5 21.1 22.8 24.4 26.0 27.6 29.3 30.9 32.5

14 3.5 5.3 7.0 8.8 10.5 12.3 14.0 15.8 17.5 19.3 21.0 22.8 24.5 26.3 28.0 29.8 31.5 33.3 35.0

15 3.8 5.6 7.5 9.4 11.3 13.1 15.0 16.9 18.8 20.6 22.5 24.4 26.3 28.1 30.0 31.9 33.8 35.6 37.5

16 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 24.0 26.0 28.0 30.0 32.0 34.0 36.0 38.0 40.0

17 4.3 6.4 8.5 10.6 12.8 14.9 17.0 19.1 21.3 23.4 25.5 27.6 29.8 31.9 34.0 36.1 38.3 40.4 42.5

18 4.5 6.8 9.0 11.3 13.5 15.8 18.0 20.3 22.5 24.8 27.0 29.3 31.5 33.8 36.0 38.3 40.5 42.8 45.0

19 4.8 7.1 9.5 11.9 14.3 16.6 19.0 21.4 23.8 26.1 28.5 30.9 33.3 35.6 38.0 40.4 42.8 45.1 47.5

20 5.0 7.5 10.0 12.5 15.0 17.5 20.0 22.5 25.0 27.5 30.0 32.5 35.0 37.5 40.0 42.5 45.0 47.5 50.0

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

Survivability 8-25
FM 5-34
 Table 8-5. Dozer team TDP calculations (continued)
Real hr Blade Teams Available
avail
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0
FM 5-34

21 5.3 7.9 10.5 13.1 15.8 18.4 21.0 23.6 26.3 28.9 31.5 34.1 36.8 39.4 42.0 44.6 47.3 49.9 52.5

22 5.5 8.3 11.0 13.8 16.5 19.3 22.0 24.8 27.5 30.3 33.0 35.8 38.5 41.3 44.0 46.8 49.5 52.3 55.0
23 5.8 8.6 11.5 14.4 17.3 20.1 23.0 25.9 28.8 31.6 34.5 37.4 40.3 43.1 46.0 48.9 51.8 54.6 57.5

24 6.0 9.0 12.0 15.0 18.0 21.0 24.0 27.0 30.0 33.0 36.0 39.0 42.0 45.0 48.0 51.0 54.0 57.0 60.0

8-26 Survivability
25 6.3 9.4 12.5 15.6 18.8 21.9 25.0 28.1 31.3 34.4 37.5 40.6 43.8 46.9 50.0 53.1 56.3 59.4 62.5
26 6.5 9.8 13.0 16.3 19.5 22.8 26.0 29.3 32.5 35.8 39.0 42.3 45.5 48.8 52.0 55.3 58.5 61.8 65.0

27 6.8 10.1 13.5 16.9 20.3 23.6 27.0 30.4 33.8 37.1 40.5 43.9 47.3 50.6 54.0 57.4 60.8 64.1 67.5

28 7.0 10.5 14.0 17.5 21.0 24.5 28.0 31.5 35.0 38.5 42.0 45.5 49.0 52.5 56.0 59.5 63.0 66.5 70.0

29 7.3 10.9 14.5 18.1 21.8 25.4 29.0 32.6 36.3 39.9 43.5 47.1 50.8 54.4 58.0 61.6 65.3 68.9 72.5

30 7.5 11.3 15.0 18.8 22.5 26.3 30.0 33.8 37.5 41.3 45.0 48.8 52.5 56.3 60.0 63.8 67.5 71.3 75.0

31 7.8 11.6 15.5 19.4 23.3 27.1 31.0 34.9 38.8 42.6 46.5 50.4 54.3 58.1 62.0 65.9 69.8 73.6 77.5

32 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0 32.0 36.0 40.0 44.0 48.0 52.0 56.0 60.0 64.0 68.0 72.0 76.0 80.0

33 8.3 12.4 16.5 20.6 24.8 28.9 33.0 37.1 41.3 45.4 49.5 53.6 57.8 61.9 66.0 70.1 74.3 78.4 82.5

34 8.5 12.8 17.0 21.3 25.5 29.8 34.0 38.3 42.5 46.8 51.0 55.3 59.5 63.8 68.0 72.3 76.5 80.8 85.0

35 8.8 13.1 17.5 21.9 26.3 30.6 35.0 39.4 43.8 48.1 52.5 56.9 61.3 65.6 70.0 74.4 78.8 83.1 87.5

36 9.0 13.5 18.0 22.5 27.0 31.5 36.0 40.5 45.0 49.5 54.0 58.5 63.0 67.5 72.0 76.5 81.0 85.5 90.0

37 9.3 13.9 18.5 23.1 27.8 32.4 37.0 41.6 46.3 50.9 55.5 60.1 64.8 69.4 74.0 78.6 83.3 87.9 92.5

38 9.5 14.3 19.0 23.8 28.5 33.3 38.0 42.8 47.5 52.3 57.0 61.8 66.5 71.3 76.0 80.8 85.5 90.3 95.0

39 9.8 14.6 19.5 24.4 29.3 34.1 39.0 43.9 48.8 53.6 58.5 63.4 68.3 73.1 78.0 82.9 87.8 92.6 97.5

40 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 80.0 85.0 90.0 95.0 100.0

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

 Table 8-5. Dozer team TDP calculations (continued)
Real hr Blade Teams Available
avail
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0

41 10.3 15.4 20.5 25.6 30.8 35.9 41.0 46.1 51.3 56.4 61.5 66.6 71.8 76.9 82.0 87.1 92.3 97.4 102.5

42 10.5 15.8 21.0 26.3 31.5 36.8 42.0 47.3 52.5 57.8 63.0 68.3 73.5 78.8 84.0 89.3 94.5 99.8 105.0

43 10.8 16.1 21.5 26.9 32.3 37.6 43.0 48.4 53.8 59.1 64.5 69.9 75.3 80.6 86.0 91.4 96.8 102.1 107.5
44 11.0 16.5 22.0 27.5 33.0 38.5 44.0 49.5 55.0 60.5 66.0 71.5 77.0 82.5 88.0 93.5 99.0 104.5 110.0

45 11.3 16.9 22.5 28.1 33.8 39.4 45.0 50.6 56.3 61.9 67.5 73.1 78.8 84.4 90.0 95.6 101.3 106.9 112.5

46 11.5 17.3 23.0 28.8 34.5 40.3 46.0 51.8 57.5 63.3 69.0 74.8 80.5 86.3 92.0 97.8 103.5 109.3 115.0

47 11.8 17.6 23.5 29.4 35.3 41.1 47.0 52.9 58.8 64.6 70.5 76.4 82.3 88.1 94.0 99.9 105.8 111.6 117.5

48 12.0 18.0 24.0 30.0 36.0 42.0 48.0 54.0 60.0 66.0 72.0 78.0 84.0 90.0 96.0 102.0 108.0 114.0 120.0

49 12.3 18.4 24.5 30.6 36.8 42.9 49.0 55.1 61.3 67.4 73.5 79.6 85.8 91.9 98.0 104.1 110.3 116.4 122.5

50 12.5 18.8 25.0 31.3 37.5 43.8 50.0 56.3 62.5 68.8 75.0 81.3 87.5 93.8 100.0 106.3 112.5 118.8 125.0

51 12.8 19.1 25.5 31.9 38.3 44.6 51.0 57.4 63.8 70.1 76.5 82.9 89.3 95.6 102.0 108.4 114.8 121.1 127.5

52 13.0 19.5 26.0 32.5 39.0 45.5 52.0 58.5 65.0 71.5 78.0 84.5 91.0 97.5 104.0 110.5 117.0 123.5 130.0

53 13.3 19.9 26.5 33.1 39.8 46.4 53.0 59.6 66.3 72.9 79.5 86.1 92.8 99.4 106.0 112.6 119.3 125.9 132.5

54 13.5 20.3 27.0 33.8 40.5 47.3 54.0 60.8 67.5 74.3 81.0 87.8 94.5 101.3 108.0 114.8 121.5 128.3 135.0

55 13.8 20.6 27.5 34.4 41.3 48.1 55.0 61.9 68.8 75.6 82.5 89.4 96.3 103.1 110.0 116.9 123.8 130.6 137.5

56 14.0 21.0 28.0 35.0 42.0 49.0 56.0 63.0 70.0 77.0 84.0 91.0 98.0 105.0 112.0 119.0 126.0 133.0 140.0

57 14.3 21.4 28.5 35.6 42.8 49.9 57.0 64.1 71.3 78.4 85.5 92.6 99.8 106.9 114.0 121.1 128.3 135.4 142.5

58 14.5 21.8 29.0 36.3 43.5 50.8 58.0 65.3 72.5 79.8 87.0 94.3 101.5 108.8 116.0 123.3 130.5 137.8 145.0

59 14.8 22.1 29.5 36.9 44.3 51.6 59.0 66.4 73.8 81.1 88.5 95.9 103.3 110.6 118.0 125.4 132.8 140.1 147.5

60 15.0 22.5 30.0 37.5 45.0 52.5 60.0 67.5 75.0 82.5 90.0 97.5 105.0 112.5 120.0 127.5 135.0 142.5 150.0

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

Survivability 8-27
FM 5-34
 Table 8-6. Dozer team HDP calculations
Real Blade Teams Available
hrs
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0
FM 5-34

avail
1 0.6 0.9 1.3 1.6 1.9 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.1 3.4 3.8 4.1 4.4 4.7 5.0 5.3 5.6 5.9 6.3

2 1.3 1.9 2.5 3.1 3.8 4.4 5.0 5.6 6.3 6.9 7.5 8.1 8.8 9.4 10.0 10.6 11.3 11.9 12.5
3 1.9 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.6 6.6 7.5 8.4 9.4 10.3 11.3 12.2 13.1 14.1 15.0 15.9 16.9 17.8 18.8

8-28 Survivability
4 2.5 3.8 5.0 6.3 7.5 8.8 10.0 11.3 12.5 13.8 15.0 16.3 17.5 18.8 20.0 21.3 22.5 23.8 25.0

5 3.1 4.7 6.3 7.8 9.4 10.9 12.5 14.1 15.6 17.2 18.8 20.3 21.9 23.4 25.0 26.6 28.1 29.7 31.3
6 3.8 5.6 7.5 9.4 11.3 13.1 15.0 16.9 18.8 20.6 22.5 24.4 26.3 28.1 30.0 31.9 33.8 35.6 37.5

7 4.4 6.6 8.8 10.9 13.1 15.3 17.5 19.7 21.9 24.1 26.3 28.4 30.6 32.8 35.0 37.2 39.4 41.6 43.8

8 5.0 7.5 10.0 12.5 15.0 17.5 20.0 22.5 25.0 27.5 30.0 32.5 35.0 37.5 40.0 42.5 45.0 47.5 50.0

9 5.6 8.4 11.3 14.1 16.9 19.7 22.5 25.3 28.1 30.9 33.8 36.6 39.4 42.2 45.0 47.8 50.6 53.4 56.3

10 6.3 9.4 12.5 15.6 18.8 21.9 25.0 28.1 31.3 34.4 37.5 40.6 43.8 46.9 50.0 53.1 56.3 59.4 62.5

11 6.9 10.3 13.8 17.2 20.6 24.1 27.5 30.9 34.4 37.8 41.3 44.7 48.1 51.6 55.0 58.4 61.9 65.3 68.8

12 7.5 11.3 15.0 18.8 22.5 26.3 30.0 33.8 37.5 41.3 45.0 48.8 52.5 56.3 60.0 63.8 67.5 71.3 75.0

13 8.1 12.2 16.3 20.3 24.4 28.4 32.5 36.6 40.6 44.7 48.8 52.8 56.9 60.9 65.0 69.1 73.1 77.2 81.3

14 8.8 13.1 17.5 21.9 26.3 30.6 35.0 39.4 43.8 48.1 52.5 56.9 61.3 65.6 70.0 74.4 78.8 83.1 87.5

15 9.4 14.1 18.8 23.4 28.1 32.8 37.5 42.2 46.9 51.6 56.3 60.9 65.6 70.3 75.0 79.7 84.4 89.1 93.8

16 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 80.0 85.0 90.0 95.0 100.0

17 10.6 15.9 21.3 26.6 31.9 37.2 42.5 47.8 53.1 58.4 63.8 69.1 74.4 79.7 85.0 90.3 95.6 100.9 106.3

18 11.3 16.9 22.5 28.1 33.8 39.4 45.0 50.6 56.3 61.9 67.5 73.1 78.8 84.4 90.0 95.6 101.3 106.9 112.5

19 11.9 17.8 23.8 29.7 35.6 41.6 47.5 53.4 59.4 65.3 71.3 77.2 83.1 89.1 95.0 100.9 106.9 112.8 118.8

20 12.5 18.8 25.0 31.3 37.5 43.8 50.0 56.3 62.5 68.8 75.0 81.3 87.5 93.8 100.0 106.3 112.5 118.8 125.0

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

 Table 8-6. Dozer team HDP calculations (continued)
Real Blade Teams Available
hrs
avail 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0

21 13.1 19.7 26.3 32.8 39.4 45.9 52.5 59.1 65.6 72.2 78.8 85.3 91.9 98.4 105.0 111.6 118.1 124.7 131.3

22 13.8 20.6 27.5 34.4 41.3 48.1 55.0 61.9 68.8 75.6 82.5 89.4 96.3 103.1 110.0 116.9 123.8 130.6 137.5

23 14.4 21.6 28.8 35.9 43.1 50.3 57.5 64.7 71.9 79.1 86.3 93.4 100.6 107.8 115.0 122.2 129.4 136.6 143.8
24 15.0 22.5 30.0 37.5 45.0 52.5 60.0 67.5 75.0 82.5 90.0 97.5 105.0 112.5 120.0 127.5 135.0 142.5 150.0

25 15.6 23.4 31.3 39.1 46.9 54.7 62.5 70.3 78.1 85.9 93.8 101.6 109.4 117.2 125.0 132.8 140.6 148.4 156.3

26 16.3 24.4 32.5 40.6 48.8 56.9 65.0 73.1 81.3 89.4 97.5 105.6 113.8 121.9 130.0 138.1 146.3 154.4 162.5

27 16.9 25.3 33.8 42.2 50.6 59.1 67.5 75.9 84.4 92.8 101.3 109.7 118.1 126.6 135.0 143.4 151.9 160.3 168.8

28 17.5 26.3 35.0 43.8 52.5 61.3 70.0 78.8 87.5 96.3 105.0 113.8 122.5 131.3 140.0 148.8 157.5 166.3 175.0

29 18.1 27.2 36.3 45.3 54.4 63.4 72.5 81.6 90.6 99.7 108.8 117.8 126.9 135.9 145.0 154.1 163.1 172.2 181.3

30 18.8 28.1 37.5 46.9 56.3 65.6 75.0 84.4 93.8 103.1 112.5 121.9 131.3 140.6 150.0 159.4 168.8 178.1 187.5

31 19.4 29.1 38.8 48.4 58.1 67.8 77.5 87.2 96.9 106.6 116.3 125.9 135.6 145.3 155.0 164.7 174.4 184.1 193.8

32 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 110.0 120.0 130.0 140.0 150.0 160.0 170.0 180.0 190.0 200.0

33 20.6 30.9 41.3 51.6 61.9 72.2 82.5 92.8 103.1 113.4 123.8 134.1 144.4 154.7 165.0 175.3 185.6 195.9 206.3

34 21.3 31.9 42.5 53.1 63.8 74.4 85.0 95.6 106.3 116.9 127.5 138.1 148.8 159.4 170.0 180.6 191.3 201.9 212.5

35 21.9 32.8 43.8 54.7 65.6 76.6 87.5 98.4 109.4 120.3 131.3 142.2 153.1 164.1 175.0 185.9 196.9 207.8 218.8

36 22.5 33.8 45.0 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101.3 112.5 123.8 135.0 146.3 157.5 168.8 180.0 191.3 202.5 213.8 225.0

37 23.1 34.7 46.3 57.8 69.4 80.9 92.5 104.1 115.6 127.2 138.8 150.3 161.9 173.4 185.0 196.6 208.1 219.7 231.3

38 23.8 35.6 47.5 59.4 71.3 83.1 95.0 106.9 118.8 130.6 142.5 154.4 166.3 178.1 190.0 201.9 213.8 225.6 237.5

39 24.4 36.6 48.8 60.9 73.1 85.3 97.5 109.7 121.9 134.1 146.3 158.4 170.6 182.8 195.0 207.2 219.4 231.6 243.8

40 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 137.5 150.0 162.5 175.0 187.5 200.0 212.5 225.0 237.5 250.0

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

Survivability 8-29
FM 5-34
 Table 8-6. Dozer team HDP calculations (continued)
Real Blade Teams Available
hrs
avail 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0
FM 5-34

41 25.6 38.4 51.3 64.1 76.9 89.7 102.5 115.3 128.1 140.9 153.8 166.6 179.4 192.2 205.0 217.8 230.6 243.4 256.3

42 26.3 39.4 52.5 65.6 78.8 91.9 105.0 118.1 131.3 144.4 157.5 170.6 183.8 196.9 210.0 223.1 236.3 249.4 262.5
43 26.9 40.3 53.8 67.2 80.6 94.1 107.5 120.9 134.4 147.8 161.3 174.7 188.1 201.6 215.0 228.4 241.9 255.3 268.8

44 27.5 41.3 55.0 68.8 82.5 96.3 110.0 123.8 137.5 151.3 165.0 178.8 192.5 206.3 220.0 233.8 247.5 261.3 275.0

8-30 Survivability
45 28.1 42.2 56.3 70.3 84.4 98.4 112.5 126.6 140.6 154.7 168.8 182.8 196.9 210.9 225.0 239.1 253.1 267.2 281.3

46 28.8 43.1 57.5 71.9 86.3 100.6 115.0 129.4 143.8 158.1 172.5 186.9 201.3 215.6 230.0 244.4 258.8 273.1 287.5

47 29.4 44.1 58.8 73.4 88.1 102.8 117.5 132.2 146.9 161.6 176.3 190.9 205.6 220.3 235.0 249.7 264.4 279.1 293.8

48 30.0 45.0 60.0 75.0 90.0 105.0 120.0 135.0 150.0 165.0 180.0 195.0 210.0 225.0 240.0 255.0 270.0 285.0 300.0

49 30.6 45.9 61.3 76.6 91.9 107.2 122.5 137.8 153.1 168.4 183.8 199.1 214.4 229.7 245.0 260.3 275.6 290.9 306.3

50 31.3 46.9 62.5 78.1 93.8 109.4 125.0 140.6 156.3 171.9 187.5 203.1 218.8 234.4 250.0 265.6 281.3 296.9 312.5

51 31.9 47.8 63.8 79.7 95.6 111.6 127.5 143.4 159.4 175.3 191.3 207.2 223.1 239.1 255.0 270.9 286.9 302.8 318.8

52 32.5 48.8 65.0 81.3 97.5 113.8 130.0 146.3 162.5 178.8 195.0 211.3 227.5 243.8 260.0 276.3 292.5 308.8 325.0

53 33.1 49.7 66.3 82.8 99.4 115.9 132.5 149.1 165.6 182.2 198.8 215.3 231.9 248.4 265.0 281.6 298.1 314.7 331.3

54 33.8 50.6 67.5 84.4 101.3 118.1 135.0 151.9 168.8 185.6 202.5 219.4 236.3 253.1 270.0 286.9 303.8 320.6 337.5
55 34.4 51.6 68.8 85.9 103.1 120.3 137.5 154.7 171.9 189.1 206.3 223.4 240.6 257.8 275.0 292.2 309.4 326.6 343.8

56 35.0 52.5 70.0 87.5 105.0 122.5 140.0 157.5 175.0 192.5 210.0 227.5 245.0 262.5 280.0 297.5 315.0 332.5 350.0

57 35.6 53.4 71.3 89.1 106.9 124.7 142.5 160.3 178.1 195.9 213.8 231.6 249.4 267.2 285.0 302.8 320.6 338.4 356.3

58 36.3 54.4 72.5 90.6 108.8 126.9 145.0 163.1 181.3 199.4 217.5 235.6 253.8 271.9 290.0 308.1 326.3 344.4 362.5

59 36.9 55.3 73.8 92.2 110.6 129.1 147.5 165.9 184.4 202.8 221.3 239.7 258.1 276.6 295.0 313.4 331.9 350.3 368.8

60 37.5 56.3 75.0 93.8 112.5 131.3 150.0 168.8 187.5 206.3 225.0 243.8 262.5 281.3 300.0 318.8 337.5 356.3 375.0

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

 Table 8-7. ACE/ACE team TDP calculations
Real Blade Teams Available
hrs
avail 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0

1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8

2 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6

3 0.5 0.8 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.9 2.1 2.4 2.7 2.9 3.2 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.6 4.8 5.1 5.4
4 0.7 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.6 3.9 4.3 4.6 5.0 5.4 5.7 6.1 6.4 6.8 7.1

5 0.9 1.3 1.8 2.2 2.7 3.1 3.6 4.0 4.5 4.9 5.4 5.8 6.3 6.7 7.1 7.6 8.0 8.5 8.9

6 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.7 3.2 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.4 5.9 6.4 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.6 9.1 9.6 10.2 10.7

7 1.3 1.9 2.5 3.1 3.8 4.4 5.0 5.6 6.3 6.9 7.5 8.1 8.8 9.4 10.0 10.6 11.3 11.9 12.5

8 1.4 2.1 2.9 3.6 4.3 5.0 5.7 6.4 7.1 7.9 8.6 9.3 10.0 10.7 11.4 12.1 12.9 13.6 14.3

9 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0 4.8 5.6 6.4 7.2 8.0 8.8 9.6 10.4 11.3 12.1 12.9 13.7 14.5 15.3 16.1

10 1.8 2.7 3.6 4.5 5.4 6.3 7.1 8.0 8.9 9.8 10.7 11.6 12.5 13.4 14.3 15.2 16.1 17.0 17.9

11 2.0 2.9 3.9 4.9 5.9 6.9 7.9 8.8 9.8 10.8 11.8 12.8 13.8 14.7 15.7 16.7 17.7 18.7 19.6

12 2.1 3.2 4.3 5.4 6.4 7.5 8.6 9.6 10.7 11.8 12.9 13.9 15.0 16.1 17.1 18.2 19.3 20.4 21.4

13 2.3 3.5 4.6 5.8 7.0 8.1 9.3 10.4 11.6 12.8 13.9 15.1 16.3 17.4 18.6 19.7 20.9 22.1 23.2

14 2.5 3.8 5.0 6.3 7.5 8.8 10.0 11.3 12.5 13.8 15.0 16.3 17.5 18.8 20.0 21.3 22.5 23.8 25.0

15 2.7 4.0 5.4 6.7 8.0 9.4 10.7 12.1 13.4 14.7 16.1 17.4 18.8 20.1 21.4 22.8 24.1 25.4 26.8

16 2.9 4.3 5.7 7.1 8.6 10.0 11.4 12.9 14.3 15.7 17.1 18.6 20.0 21.4 22.9 24.3 25.7 27.1 28.6

17 3.0 4.6 6.1 7.6 9.1 10.6 12.1 13.7 15.2 16.7 18.2 19.7 21.3 22.8 24.3 25.8 27.3 28.8 30.4

18 3.2 4.8 6.4 8.0 9.6 11.3 12.9 14.5 16.1 17.7 19.3 20.9 22.5 24.1 25.7 27.3 28.9 30.5 32.1

19 3.4 5.1 6.8 8.5 10.2 11.9 13.6 15.3 17.0 18.7 20.4 22.1 23.8 25.4 27.1 28.8 30.5 32.2 33.9

20 3.6 5.4 7.1 8.9 10.7 12.5 14.3 16.1 17.9 19.6 21.4 23.2 25.0 26.8 28.6 30.4 32.1 33.9 35.7

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

Survivability 8-31
FM 5-34
 Table 8-7. ACE/ACE team TDP calculations (continued)
Real Blade Teams Available
hrs
avail 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0
FM 5-34

21 3.8 5.6 7.5 9.4 11.3 13.1 15.0 16.9 18.8 20.6 22.5 24.4 26.3 28.1 30.0 31.9 33.8 35.6 37.5

22 3.9 5.9 7.9 9.8 11.8 13.8 15.7 17.7 19.6 21.6 23.6 25.5 27.5 29.5 31.4 33.4 35.4 37.3 39.3

23 4.1 6.2 8.2 10.3 12.3 14.4 16.4 18.5 20.5 22.6 24.6 26.7 28.8 30.8 32.9 34.9 37.0 39.0 41.1
24 4.3 6.4 8.6 10.7 12.9 15.0 17.1 19.3 21.4 23.6 25.7 27.9 30.0 32.1 34.3 36.4 38.6 40.7 42.9

8-32 Survivability
25 4.5 6.7 8.9 11.2 13.4 15.6 17.9 20.1 22.3 24.6 26.8 29.0 31.3 33.5 35.7 37.9 40.2 42.4 44.6

26 4.6 7.0 9.3 11.6 13.9 16.3 18.6 20.9 23.2 25.5 27.9 30.2 32.5 34.8 37.1 39.5 41.8 44.1 46.4
27 4.8 7.2 9.6 12.1 14.5 16.9 19.3 21.7 24.1 26.5 28.9 31.3 33.8 36.2 38.6 41.0 43.4 45.8 48.2

28 5.0 7.5 10.0 12.5 15.0 17.5 20.0 22.5 25.0 27.5 30.0 32.5 35.0 37.5 40.0 42.5 45.0 47.5 50.0

29 5.2 7.8 10.4 12.9 15.5 18.1 20.7 23.3 25.9 28.5 31.1 33.7 36.3 38.8 41.4 44.0 46.6 49.2 51.8

30 5.4 8.0 10.7 13.4 16.1 18.8 21.4 24.1 26.8 29.5 32.1 34.8 37.5 40.2 42.9 45.5 48.2 50.9 53.6

31 5.5 8.3 11.1 13.8 16.6 19.4 22.1 24.9 27.7 30.4 33.2 36.0 38.8 41.5 44.3 47.1 49.8 52.6 55.4

32 5.7 8.6 11.4 14.3 17.1 20.0 22.9 25.7 28.6 31.4 34.3 37.1 40.0 42.9 45.7 48.6 51.4 54.3 57.1

33 5.9 8.8 11.8 14.7 17.7 20.6 23.6 26.5 29.5 32.4 35.4 38.3 41.3 44.2 47.1 50.1 53.0 56.0 58.9

34 6.1 9.1 12.1 15.2 18.2 21.3 24.3 27.3 30.4 33.4 36.4 39.5 42.5 45.5 48.6 51.6 54.6 57.7 60.7

35 6.3 9.4 12.5 15.6 18.8 21.9 25.0 28.1 31.3 34.4 37.5 40.6 43.8 46.9 50.0 53.1 56.3 59.4 62.5

36 6.4 9.6 12.9 16.1 19.3 22.5 25.7 28.9 32.1 35.4 38.6 41.8 45.0 48.2 51.4 54.6 57.9 61.1 64.3

37 6.6 9.9 13.2 16.5 19.8 23.1 26.4 29.7 33.0 36.3 39.6 42.9 46.3 49.6 52.9 56.2 59.5 62.8 66.1

38 6.8 10.2 13.6 17.0 20.4 23.8 27.1 30.5 33.9 37.3 40.7 44.1 47.5 50.9 54.3 57.7 61.1 64.5 67.9

39 7.0 10.4 13.9 17.4 20.9 24.4 27.9 31.3 34.8 38.3 41.8 45.3 48.8 52.2 55.7 59.2 62.7 66.2 69.6

40 7.1 10.7 14.3 17.9 21.4 25.0 28.6 32.1 35.7 39.3 42.9 46.4 50.0 53.6 57.1 60.7 64.3 67.9 71.4

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

 Table 8-7. ACE/ACE team TDP calculations (continued)
Real Blade Teams Available
hrs
avail 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0

41 7.3 11.0 14.6 18.3 22.0 25.6 29.3 32.9 36.6 40.3 43.9 47.6 51.3 54.9 58.6 62.2 65.9 69.6 73.2

42 7.5 11.3 15.0 18.8 22.5 26.3 30.0 33.8 37.5 41.3 45.0 48.8 52.5 56.3 60.0 63.8 67.5 71.3 75.0

43 7.7 11.5 15.4 19.2 23.0 26.9 30.7 34.6 38.4 42.2 46.1 49.9 53.8 57.6 61.4 65.3 69.1 72.9 76.8

44 7.9 11.8 15.7 19.6 23.6 27.5 31.4 35.4 39.3 43.2 47.1 51.1 55.0 58.9 62.9 66.8 70.7 74.6 78.6

45 8.0 12.1 16.1 20.1 24.1 28.1 32.1 36.2 40.2 44.2 48.2 52.2 56.3 60.3 64.3 68.3 72.3 76.3 80.4

46 8.2 12.3 16.4 20.5 24.6 28.8 32.9 37.0 41.1 45.2 49.3 53.4 57.5 61.6 65.7 69.8 73.9 78.0 82.1

47 8.4 12.6 16.8 21.0 25.2 29.4 33.6 37.8 42.0 46.2 50.4 54.6 58.8 62.9 67.1 71.3 75.5 79.7 83.9

48 8.6 12.9 17.1 21.4 25.7 30.0 34.3 38.6 42.9 47.1 51.4 55.7 60.0 64.3 68.6 72.9 77.1 81.4 85.7

49 8.8 13.1 17.5 21.9 26.3 30.6 35.0 39.4 43.8 48.1 52.5 56.9 61.3 65.6 70.0 74.4 78.8 83.1 87.5

50 8.9 13.4 17.9 22.3 26.8 31.3 35.7 40.2 44.6 49.1 53.6 58.0 62.5 67.0 71.4 75.9 80.4 84.8 89.3

51 9.1 13.7 18.2 22.8 27.3 31.9 36.4 41.0 45.5 50.1 54.6 59.2 63.8 68.3 72.9 77.4 82.0 86.5 91.1

52 9.3 13.9 18.6 23.2 27.9 32.5 37.1 41.8 46.4 51.1 55.7 60.4 65.0 69.6 74.3 78.9 83.6 88.2 92.9

53 9.5 14.2 18.9 23.7 28.4 33.1 37.9 42.6 47.3 52.1 56.8 61.5 66.3 71.0 75.7 80.4 85.2 89.9 94.6

54 9.6 14.5 19.3 24.1 28.9 33.8 38.6 43.4 48.2 53.0 57.9 62.7 67.5 72.3 77.1 82.0 86.8 91.6 96.4

55 9.8 14.7 19.6 24.6 29.5 34.4 39.3 44.2 49.1 54.0 58.9 63.8 68.8 73.7 78.6 83.5 88.4 93.3 98.2

56 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 80.0 85.0 90.0 95.0 100.0

57 10.2 15.3 20.4 25.4 30.5 35.6 40.7 45.8 50.9 56.0 61.1 66.2 71.3 76.3 81.4 86.5 91.6 96.7 101.8

58 10.4 15.5 20.7 25.9 31.1 36.3 41.4 46.6 51.8 57.0 62.1 67.3 72.5 77.7 82.9 88.0 93.2 98.4 103.6

59 10.5 15.8 21.1 26.3 31.6 36.9 42.1 47.4 52.7 57.9 63.2 68.5 73.8 79.0 84.3 89.6 94.8 100.1 105.4

60 10.7 16.1 21.4 26.8 32.1 37.5 42.9 48.2 53.6 58.9 64.3 69.6 75.0 80.4 85.7 91.1 96.4 101.8 107.1

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

Survivability 8-33
FM 5-34
 Table 8-8. ACE/ACE team HDP calculations
Real Blade Teams Available
hrs
avail 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0
FM 5-34

1 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.2

2 0.8 1.3 1.7 2.1 2.5 2.9 3.3 3.8 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.4 5.8 6.3 6.7 7.1 7.5 7.9 8.3

3 1.3 1.9 2.5 3.1 3.8 4.4 5.0 5.6 6.3 6.9 7.5 8.1 8.8 9.4 10.0 10.6 11.3 11.9 12.5
4 1.7 2.5 3.3 4.2 5.0 5.8 6.7 7.5 8.3 9.2 10.0 10.8 11.7 12.5 13.3 14.2 15.0 15.8 16.7

8-34 Survivability
5 2.1 3.1 4.2 5.2 6.3 7.3 8.3 9.4 10.4 11.5 12.5 13.5 14.6 15.6 16.7 17.7 18.8 19.8 20.8

6 2.5 3.8 5.0 6.3 7.5 8.8 10.0 11.3 12.5 13.8 15.0 16.3 17.5 18.8 20.0 21.3 22.5 23.8 25.0

7 2.9 4.4 5.8 7.3 8.8 10.2 11.7 13.1 14.6 16.0 17.5 19.0 20.4 21.9 23.3 24.8 26.3 27.7 29.2

8 3.3 5.0 6.7 8.3 10.0 11.7 13.3 15.0 16.7 18.3 20.0 21.7 23.3 25.0 26.7 28.3 30.0 31.7 33.3

9 3.8 5.6 7.5 9.4 11.3 13.1 15.0 16.9 18.8 20.6 22.5 24.4 26.3 28.1 30.0 31.9 33.8 35.6 37.5

10 4.2 6.3 8.3 10.4 12.5 14.6 16.7 18.8 20.8 22.9 25.0 27.1 29.2 31.3 33.3 35.4 37.5 39.6 41.7

11 4.6 6.9 9.2 11.5 13.8 16.0 18.3 20.6 22.9 25.2 27.5 29.8 32.1 34.4 36.7 39.0 41.3 43.5 45.8

12 5.0 7.5 10.0 12.5 15.0 17.5 20.0 22.5 25.0 27.5 30.0 32.5 35.0 37.5 40.0 42.5 45.0 47.5 50.0

13 5.4 8.1 10.8 13.5 16.3 19.0 21.7 24.4 27.1 29.8 32.5 35.2 37.9 40.6 43.3 46.0 48.8 51.5 54.2

14 5.8 8.8 11.7 14.6 17.5 20.4 23.3 26.3 29.2 32.1 35.0 37.9 40.8 43.8 46.7 49.6 52.5 55.4 58.3

15 6.3 9.4 12.5 15.6 18.8 21.9 25.0 28.1 31.3 34.4 37.5 40.6 43.8 46.9 50.0 53.1 56.3 59.4 62.5

16 6.7 10.0 13.3 16.7 20.0 23.3 26.7 30.0 33.3 36.7 40.0 43.3 46.7 50.0 53.3 56.7 60.0 63.3 66.7

17 7.1 10.6 14.2 17.7 21.3 24.8 28.3 31.9 35.4 39.0 42.5 46.0 49.6 53.1 56.7 60.2 63.8 67.3 70.8

18 7.5 11.3 15.0 18.8 22.5 26.3 30.0 33.8 37.5 41.3 45.0 48.8 52.5 56.3 60.0 63.8 67.5 71.3 75.0

19 7.9 11.9 15.8 19.8 23.8 27.7 31.7 35.6 39.6 43.5 47.5 51.5 55.4 59.4 63.3 67.3 71.3 75.2 79.2

20 8.3 12.5 16.7 20.8 25.0 29.2 33.3 37.5 41.7 45.8 50.0 54.2 58.3 62.5 66.7 70.8 75.0 79.2 83.3

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

 Table 8-8. ACE/ACE team HDP calculations (continued)
Real Blade Teams Available
hrs
avail 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0

21 8.8 13.1 17.5 21.9 26.3 30.6 35.0 39.4 43.8 48.1 52.5 56.9 61.3 65.6 70.0 74.4 78.8 83.1 87.5

22 9.2 13.8 18.3 22.9 27.5 32.1 36.7 41.3 45.8 50.4 55.0 59.6 64.2 68.8 73.3 77.9 82.5 87.1 91.7
23 9.6 14.4 19.2 24.0 28.8 33.5 38.3 43.1 47.9 52.7 57.5 62.3 67.1 71.9 76.7 81.5 86.3 91.0 95.8

24 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 65.0 70.0 75.0 80.0 85.0 90.0 95.0 100.0

25 10.4 15.6 20.8 26.0 31.3 36.5 41.7 46.9 52.1 57.3 62.5 67.7 72.9 78.1 83.3 88.5 93.8 99.0 104.2

26 10.8 16.3 21.7 27.1 32.5 37.9 43.3 48.8 54.2 59.6 65.0 70.4 75.8 81.3 86.7 92.1 97.5 102.9 108.3

27 11.3 16.9 22.5 28.1 33.8 39.4 45.0 50.6 56.3 61.9 67.5 73.1 78.8 84.4 90.0 95.6 101.3 106.9 112.5

28 11.7 17.5 23.3 29.2 35.0 40.8 46.7 52.5 58.3 64.2 70.0 75.8 81.7 87.5 93.3 99.2 105.0 110.8 116.7

29 12.1 18.1 24.2 30.2 36.3 42.3 48.3 54.4 60.4 66.5 72.5 78.5 84.6 90.6 96.7 102.7 108.8 114.8 120.8

30 12.5 18.8 25.0 31.3 37.5 43.8 50.0 56.3 62.5 68.8 75.0 81.3 87.5 93.8 100.0 106.3 112.5 118.8 125.0

31 12.9 19.4 25.8 32.3 38.8 45.2 51.7 58.1 64.6 71.0 77.5 84.0 90.4 96.9 103.3 109.8 116.3 122.7 129.2

32 13.3 20.0 26.7 33.3 40.0 46.7 53.3 60.0 66.7 73.3 80.0 86.7 93.3 100.0 106.7 113.3 120.0 126.7 133.3

33 13.8 20.6 27.5 34.4 41.3 48.1 55.0 61.9 68.8 75.6 82.5 89.4 96.3 103.1 110.0 116.9 123.8 130.6 137.5

34 14.2 21.3 28.3 35.4 42.5 49.6 56.7 63.8 70.8 77.9 85.0 92.1 99.2 106.3 113.3 120.4 127.5 134.6 141.7

35 14.6 21.9 29.2 36.5 43.8 51.0 58.3 65.6 72.9 80.2 87.5 94.8 102.1 109.4 116.7 124.0 131.3 138.5 145.8

36 15.0 22.5 30.0 37.5 45.0 52.5 60.0 67.5 75.0 82.5 90.0 97.5 105.0 112.5 120.0 127.5 135.0 142.5 150.0

37 15.4 23.1 30.8 38.5 46.3 54.0 61.7 69.4 77.1 84.8 92.5 100.2 107.9 115.6 123.3 131.0 138.8 146.5 154.2

38 15.8 23.8 31.7 39.6 47.5 55.4 63.3 71.3 79.2 87.1 95.0 102.9 110.8 118.8 126.7 134.6 142.5 150.4 158.3

39 16.3 24.4 32.5 40.6 48.8 56.9 65.0 73.1 81.3 89.4 97.5 105.6 113.8 121.9 130.0 138.1 146.3 154.4 162.5

40 16.7 25.0 33.3 41.7 50.0 58.3 66.7 75.0 83.3 91.7 100.0 108.3 116.7 125.0 133.3 141.7 150.0 158.3 166.7

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

Survivability 8-35
FM 5-34
 Table 8-8. ACE/ACE team HDP calculations (continued)
Real Blade Teams Available
hrs
avail 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0
FM 5-34

41 17.1 25.6 34.2 42.7 51.3 59.8 68.3 76.9 85.4 94.0 102.5 111.0 119.6 128.1 136.7 145.2 153.8 162.3 170.8

42 17.5 26.3 35.0 43.8 52.5 61.3 70.0 78.8 87.5 96.3 105.0 113.8 122.5 131.3 140.0 148.8 157.5 166.3 175.0
43 17.9 26.9 35.8 44.8 53.8 62.7 71.7 80.6 89.6 98.5 107.5 116.5 125.4 134.4 143.3 152.3 161.3 170.2 179.2

44 18.3 27.5 36.7 45.8 55.0 64.2 73.3 82.5 91.7 100.8 110.0 119.2 128.3 137.5 146.7 155.8 165.0 174.2 183.3

8-36 Survivability
45 18.8 28.1 37.5 46.9 56.3 65.6 75.0 84.4 93.8 103.1 112.5 121.9 131.3 140.6 150.0 159.4 168.8 178.1 187.5

46 19.2 28.8 38.3 47.9 57.5 67.1 76.7 86.3 95.8 105.4 115.0 124.6 134.2 143.8 153.3 162.9 172.5 182.1 191.7

47 19.6 29.4 39.2 49.0 58.8 68.5 78.3 88.1 97.9 107.7 117.5 127.3 137.1 146.9 156.7 166.5 176.3 186.0 195.8

48 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 110.0 120.0 130.0 140.0 150.0 160.0 170.0 180.0 190.0 200.0

49 20.4 30.6 40.8 51.0 61.3 71.5 81.7 91.9 102.1 112.3 122.5 132.7 142.9 153.1 163.3 173.5 183.8 194.0 204.2

50 20.8 31.3 41.7 52.1 62.5 72.9 83.3 93.8 104.2 114.6 125.0 135.4 145.8 156.3 166.7 177.1 187.5 197.9 208.3

51 21.3 31.9 42.5 53.1 63.8 74.4 85.0 95.6 106.3 116.9 127.5 138.1 148.8 159.4 170.0 180.6 191.3 201.9 212.5

52 21.7 32.5 43.3 54.2 65.0 75.8 86.7 97.5 108.3 119.2 130.0 140.8 151.7 162.5 173.3 184.2 195.0 205.8 216.7

53 22.1 33.1 44.2 55.2 66.3 77.3 88.3 99.4 110.4 121.5 132.5 143.5 154.6 165.6 176.7 187.7 198.8 209.8 220.8

54 22.5 33.8 45.0 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101.3 112.5 123.8 135.0 146.3 157.5 168.8 180.0 191.3 202.5 213.8 225.0

55 22.9 34.4 45.8 57.3 68.8 80.2 91.7 103.1 114.6 126.0 137.5 149.0 160.4 171.9 183.3 194.8 206.3 217.7 229.2

56 23.3 35.0 46.7 58.3 70.0 81.7 93.3 105.0 116.7 128.3 140.0 151.7 163.3 175.0 186.7 198.3 210.0 221.7 233.3

57 23.8 35.6 47.5 59.4 71.3 83.1 95.0 106.9 118.8 130.6 142.5 154.4 166.3 178.1 190.0 201.9 213.8 225.6 237.5

58 24.2 36.3 48.3 60.4 72.5 84.6 96.7 108.8 120.8 132.9 145.0 157.1 169.2 181.3 193.3 205.4 217.5 229.6 241.7

59 24.6 36.9 49.2 61.5 73.8 86.0 98.3 110.6 122.9 135.2 147.5 159.8 172.1 184.4 196.7 209.0 221.3 233.5 245.8

60 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 137.5 150.0 162.5 175.0 187.5 200.0 212.5 225.0 237.5 250.0

Legend: Ar/Mech Platoon Ar/Mech Company Ar/Mech Battalion

 FM 5-34

HASTY FIGHTING POSITIONS

Figure 8-25 shows hasty fighting positions for combat vehicles.
Remember, berms will not protect vehicles from enemy armor fire.

Length Width Height Time

(l) (w) (h) (hr/min)

M113 series carrier 7 4.5 2.0 0/36

M577 command post vehicle 7 4.5 3.0 0/48
M106 and M125 mortar carrier 7 5.0 2.5 0/42

NOTE: Hasty positions for tanks and IFVs are not

recommended. All dimensions are in meters.

Top view

w
Width at parapet base
2.5 m
Side cut view

d
h l

NOTE: Total depth (h) includes

any parapet height (d).

Figure 8-25. Hasty fighting positions for combat vehicles

MODIFIED FIGHTING POSITIONS

Figures 8-26 and 8-27, pages 8-38 and 8-39, show various modified
fighting positions.

Survivability 8-37
FM 5-34

A B C
Length (ft) Width (ft) Turret Depth (ft)

M2 28 16 10

M1 32 18 9

Top View
A

Slope B Slope

* At a minimum, slope equals 3:1 (about 33°).

* 3-foot clearance around vehicle is required.

Side View

M1
Line of sight
C

M2
Line of sight

Front View

Figure 8-26. Modified, two-tiered hiding position

8-38 Survivability
 FM 5-34

A B C
Length (ft) Width (ft) Hull depth (ft)

M109/M548 109 18 5

Top View
A

Slope B Slope

* At a minimum, slope equals 3:1 (approximately 33°).

* Ramp angle varies with the terrain.
* 3-foot clearance around vehicle is required.

Side View

Front View

Figure 8-27. Modified, two-tiered artillery position

Survivability 8-39
FM 5-34

DELIBERATE FIGHTING POSITIONS

SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
Step 1. Hull defilade
Step 2. Concealed access ramp or route
Step 3. Hide location
Step 4. Turret defilade

Line of sight
2
Hull defilade
Concealed
1 access ramp or
Turret defilade route

4
Hide location
Step 1. Hull defilade 3
Length Width Height Time
(1) (w) (h) (hr/min)

M113 series carrier 7 4.5 2 0/36

M577 command post vehicle 7 4.5 3 0/48
M106 and M125 mortar carrier 7 5 2.5 0/42

Side view
Line of sight
h

Top view l

Slope w Slope

NOTE: Slope equals 3:1 (about 33°). All

dimensions are in meters.

Figure 8-28. Deliberate fighting positions for fighting vehicles

8-40 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Step 2. Concealed access ramp or route

Side view
Line of sight
Cleared access
ramp or route

Top view
Slope

NOTE: Slope equals 3:1 (about 33°). All

dimensions are in meters.

Step 3. Hide location

Side view Line of sight
Hide location

NOTE: Terrain will determine the location of the

hide position (1, 2, or 3). Location should
not expose any part of vehicle to Hide
enemy’s line of sight. location #1
Top view
Hide
Slope location #2

Step 4. Turret defilade Hide location #3

Length Width Height Time
(1) (w) (h) (hr/min)

M1 main battle tank 10 5.5 3 1/30

M60/M48 series battle tank 9.5 5.5 3 1/30
M2 and M3 fighting vehicle 8 5 3 1/12
M113 series carrier 7 4.5 2.5 0/42
M901 improved TOW vehicle 7 4.5 3 0/48
Side view
Line of sight

Top view l

Slope Slope Slope

w

NOTE: Slope equals 3:1 (about 33°). All NOTE: Add 2.9 m to length if tank
dimensions are in meters. plow is attached to M1.

Figure 8-28. Deliberate fighting positions for fighting vehicles (continued)

Survivability 8-41
FM 5-34

PROTECTIVE FIGHTING POSITIONS

Artillery and Parapet
Figure 8-29 shows a parapet position. Table 8-9 shows the
dimensions of field artillery vehicle positions.

0.5 m 4m
Detachment
shelter

2.3 m
Ramp

2.1 m Parapet
0.5 m
0.5 m Ramp
4m
5m
0.5 m

Detachment shelter with overhead

protection
Bearing
of fire

Loose earth covered

with sod Sand bags

Figure 8-29. 105-mm parapet-position construction detail

8-42 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Table 8-9. Dimensions of field artillery vehicle positions

Dimension1 Equipment Minimum

Parapet
Hours3
Vehicle Type 2,4 Thickness Remarks
Length Width Depth (D7 Dozer/
at Base
(m) (m) (m) ACE) (m)
General-support 8 5.1 0.9
rocket launcher
155-mm self-pro- 32 5.4 1.5 *
pelled howitzer
(M109)
175-mm self-pro- 31.5 4.8 1.5 *
pelled gun (M107)
8-in self-propelled 32.4 5 1.5 *
howitzer (M110)
*Length accommodates ammunition supply vehicles.
1
Position dimensions provide an approximate 0.9 m clearance around the vehicle for movement
and maintenance but do not include the ramp(s).
2Total depth includes any parapet height.
3
Production is at a rate of 100 bank cubic yards per 0.75 hour. Divide the construction time by
0.85 for rocky or hard soil, night conditions, or closed hatch operations (ACE). Using natural
terrain features will reduce construction time.
4
All depths are approximate and will need adjustment for surrounding terrain and fields of fire.

Deep-Cut
Figure 8-30 shows a deep-cut position; Table 8-10, page 8-44, shows
the dimensions of deep-cut positions.

Figure 8-30. Deep-cut position

Survivability 8-43
FM 5-34

Table 8-10. Dimensions of typical deep-cut positions

Dimensions1 Equipment
Vehicle Type Hours3 (D7 Remarks
Length (m) Width (m) Depth2,4 (m) Dozer/ACE)

1 1/4-ton truck/ 6 3.9 2.7 0.7 Add 2.7 m to

HMMWV length for
cargo trailer.

2 1/2-ton cargo 8.7 3.9 3 1.1 Add 4.2 m to

truck length for
cargo or
water trailer.

2 1/2-ton shop van 8.4 4.2 3.6 1.3

HEMTT

5-ton cargo 11.4 4.2 3 1.5

5-ton shop van 10.8 4.2 3.6 1.7

10-ton cargo truck 10.2 4.8 3.6 1.9

10-ton tractor w/ 15.9 4.8 3.6 2.9 Dimensions

van semitrailer shown are
for trailer
length of 9.3
m; for other
trailers, add
6.9 m to
actual trailer
length.

1
Position dimensions provide an approximate 0.9 m of clearance around a vehicle for move-
ment and maintenance but do not include ramp(s).
2
Production rate is 100 bank cubic yards per 0.75 hour. Divide the construction time by 0.85
for rocky or hard soil, night conditions, or closed-hatch operations (ACE). Using natural ter-
rain features will reduce construction time.
3Ensure that drainage is provided.
4
See Table 8-11 for maximum slope-cut ratios.
In training, deep cuts cause significant impacts to root systems, natural-drainage patterns,
and training-area foliage. Coordinate with the environmental office regarding deep-cut
employment.

8-44 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Table 8-11. Recommended requirements for slope ratios in cuts and fills

Slopes not Subject to Slopes Subject to

Saturation Saturation
Unified Soil
Classification
Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
System
Height of Slope Height of Slope
Earth Face Ratio Earth Face Ratio

GW, GP, GMd, SW, Not critical 1.5:1 Not critical 2:1
SP, SMd

GMu, GC, SMu, SC, Less than 50 2:1 Less than 50 3:1
ML, MH, CL, CH feet feet

OL, OH, PT Generally not suitable for construction

NOTES:
1. The recommended slopes are valid only in homogeneous soils that have either
an in-place or compacted density equaling or exceeding 95 percent CE55 maxi-
mum dry density. For nonhomogeneous soils, or soils at a lower densities, a
deliberate slope stability analysis is required.
2. Backslopes that cut into loess soil will seek to maintain a near-vertical cleav-
age. Do not apply loading above this cut face. Expect sloughing to occur.
3. Chapter 11 contains more information on the Unified Soil Classification
System (USCS).

TRENCHES, REVETMENTS, BUNKERS, AND SHELTERS

TRENCHES
Construct trenches to connect fighting positions and provide
protection and concealment for personnel moving between positions.
They may be open, with an overhead cover, or a combination (see
Figure 8-31, page 8-46).

REVETMENTS
Retaining Wall
Materials that you can use for a retaining wall are sandbags, sod
blocks (20 x 45 centimeters), lumber, timber, or corrugated metal.
When using sandbags, fill them 3/4 full with one part cement to 10
parts earth. Place a bottom row as a header at about 15 centimeters
below floor level. Alternate rows as header and stretcher (see Figure
8-32, page 8-46). Ensure that the wall slopes forward of the revetted
face at a 1:4 slope ratio. See Figure 8-33, page 8-47, for an anchoring
method.

Survivability 8-45
FM 5-34

Zigzag Trace
15 paces

General line of trace

6 paces

Octagonal Trace
6 paces 16 paces
General line of trace

6 paces

NOTES: 1. Delete the rear berm.

2. Ensure that the front berm
is at least 3 feet at the top.

Figure 8-31. Standard trench traces

Joints broken
A

Elevation B
Stretchers

Headers

Section A-A

Figure 8-32. Sandbag revetment

8-46 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Stakes or holdfasts Maximum distance

are placed here. between posts is 2 m.
D2

D1

D2

D1

H
45 cm

D1 is equal to or greater than H

D2 is equal to H + 0.61 meter

Figure 8-33. Retaining-wall anchoring method

Facing Revetments
You use facing revetments mainly to protect a surface from weather
and damage from occupation. You can use brushwood hurdles
(Figure 8-34), continuous brush, pole and dimensional timbers,

51 cm
1.9 m

Figure 8-34. Brushwood hurdle

Survivability 8-47
FM 5-34

corrugated metal or burlap, and chicken wire for construction

material. To emplace a facing revetment, pickets should be 8
centimeters or larger in diameter and at least 1.75 meters apart.
Drive the pickets into the ground at least 0.5 meter and anchor at
the top as shown in Figure 8-34, page 8-47.

BUNKERS
When designing a bunker, consider its purpose (command post or
fighting position) and the degree of protection desired (small arms,
mortars, bombs) (see Table 8-12). A bunker can be constructed
wholly or partly underground. Prefabricated bunker assemblies
(wall and roof) afford rapid construction and placement flexibility.
When using timber, avoid notching construction timber. Figures 8-35
and 8-36, pages 8-50 and 8-51, show common field bunkers.
SHELTERS
The most effective shelters are cut and cover. Figures 8-37 and 8-38,
pages 8-51 and 8-52, show some typical shelters.

CAMOUFLAGE
The purpose of camouflage is to alter or eliminate recognition
(shape, shadow, color, texture, position, and movement). Materials
for camouflaging can be natural or man-made. Natural materials
include vegetation (growing, cut, or dead), inert substances of the
earth (soil and mud), and debris.
NOTE: In training, avoid obstruction of natural vegeta-
tion by using man-made and/or inert camouflage.
Man-made materials are divided into three groups: hiding and
screening (net sets, wire netting, snow fencing, tarpaulins, and
smoke); garnishing and texturing (gravel, cinders, sawdust, fabric
strips, feather, and Spanish moss); and coloring (paints, oil, and
grease). Table 8-13, page 8-52, shows expedient paints that you
can make in the field.
POSITION DEVELOPMENT STAGES
• Planning. Consider the unit’s mission, access routes, existing
concealment, and area size.
• Occupation. Carefully control traffic to avoid unnecessary
movement and disruption of existing concealment. Mark trails
and paths and avoid vehicle spacing less than 30 meters apart.
D i s p e r s e t h e m a i n c on g e s t e d a r e a s ( k i t c h e n , C P , a n d
maintenance).
• Camouflage maintenance. Inspect the area frequently and
upgrade as needed. Maintain light and noise discipline to include
equipment blackout. Do not create additional paths or trails.
• Evacuation. Leave the area as undisturbed as possible.

8-48 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Table 8-12. Center-to-center spacing for wood-supporting soil cover to

defeat various contact bursts
Span Length (L) (m)

Nominal Depth 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3

Stringer Size of Soil (d)
(in) (m) Center-to-center stringer spacing (H), in cm

82-mm contact bursts

2x4 0.6 7.6 10 10 10 8

0.9 46 30 20 13 8
1.2 46 36 18 10 8
2x6 0.6 10 18 20 20 15
0.9 46 46 41 30 20
1.2 46 46 46 28 18
4x4 0.6 18 25 25 22 18
0.9 46 46 46 30 20
1.2 46 46 46 25 18
4x8 0.5 10 13 18 20 20
0.6 36 46 46 46 46
0.9 46 46 46 46 46

120- and 122-mm contact bursts

4x8 1.2 9 10 13 13 15
1.5 30 30 30 28 25
1.8 46 46 46 41 30
6x6 1.2 14 15 15
1.5 36 36 33 30 25
1.8 46 46 46 41 30
6x8 1.2 14 15 20 23 25
1.5 46 46 46 46 46
8x8 1.2 1.2 19 23 28 33
1.5 1.5 46 46 46 46

152-mm contact bursts

4x8 1.2 9
1.5 15 15 18 18 18
1.8 43 41 36 30 25
2.1 46 46 46 38 28
6x6 1.5 18 20 20 20 18
1.8 46 46 38 30 25
2.1 46 46 46 38 28
6x8 1.2 15
1.5 25 30 30 30 30
1.8 46 46 46 46 43
8x8 1.2 20
1.5 36 38 41 43 41
1.8 46 46 46 46 46
NOTE: The maximum beam spacing listed in the table is 46 cm. This is to preclude
further design for roof material placed over the stringers to hold the earth cover. Use
a maximum of 1-inch wood or plywood over stringers to support the earth cover for
82-mm bursts; use 2-inch wood or plywood for 120-mm, 122-mm, and 152-mm bursts.

Survivability 8-49
FM 5-34

Entrance

Firing port

Camouflage layer
Burster layer
Uncompacted soil layer

65 cm
85 cm

Cut-away 160 cm
(approximately)
section

454 cm
15 cm 242 cm 15 cm
182 cm 15 cm
91 cm
91 cm

151 cm
181 cm
211 cm

Roof outline 15 cm

30 cm of 15- to 18-cm rock

Waterproof layer Dust-proof layer

30 cm of uncompacted soil
Sandbags 5 layers 5- x
30-cm
25 cm boards

60 cm

220 cm Firing port

135 cm

Entrance
90 cm

Figure 8-35. Typical bunker

8-50 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Loose earth
cushion layer Side View 15 cm (burster
layer)
30 cm
15 - 20 cm
30 cm Front View
30 cm
Section
½ depth
Depth of cut of cut

Figure 8-36. Log fighting bunker with overhead cover

5 cm

Camouflage layer

Burster layer 30 cm
Waterproof layer
Cushion layer 30 cm Dustproof
layer
Laminated roof

NOTE:
Thickness: Cushion and burster
Five 5-cm boards layers extend beyond
or seven 2.5-cm edges of shelter a
boards minimum of 1.5 m.

5 cm Camouflage layer
30 cm Burster layer
30 cm Top cushion layer Waterproof
20 cm Distribution layer layer
30 cm Lower cushion layer

Stringer roof Dustproof layer

Figure 8-37. Typical cut-and-cover shelter

Survivability 8-51
FM 5-34

Prefab or field-
constructed roof
Backfill
(sandbags)

Prefab plywood
sections

2. Shape excavation
1. Excavate with and erect burner.
explosives.

4. Construct roof; dig doorway

and drainage ditches.
3. Backfill.

Figure 8-38. Air-transportable prefab shelter

Table 8-13. Expedient paints

Paint Materials Mixing Color Finish
No. 1: local Mix soot with paraffin; add Dark gray Flat, lusterless
earth, GI soap, to 8 gal of water and 1/2-lb
water, soot, par- soap solution; stir in earth.
affin
No. 2: oil, Mix 2 gal of water with 1 Depends on Glossy on metal;
ground clay, gal. oil and 1/4 to 1/2 gal of earth colors otherwise dull
water, gasoline, clay, add earth; thin with
earth gasoline or water.
No. 3: oil, clay, Mix 1 1/2 bars GI soap with Depends on Glossy on metal;
GI soap water, 3 gal of water; add 1 gal of earth colors otherwise dull
earth oil; stir in 1 gal of clay; add
earth for color.
NOTE: You can use canned milk or powdered eggs to increase binding proper-
ties of either issue of field-expedient paints.

8-52 Survivability
 C3, FM 5-34

LIGHTWEIGHT CAMOUFLAGE SCREEN

Estimation
Use Figure 8-39 to determine the number of screen modules you need
to camouflage vehicles and equipment.

A = 2h + w + 5 ft
190 B = 2h + L + 5 ft
180 See Table 14-9, page 14-13, for
170 vehicle dimensions

160
150
140 NOTE: The number
within each area equals
130 the number of modules.

120
A 110
(feet) 100
9
90
8
80 7
70 6
5
60 4
50 3
40
2
30
20 1
s

10
bu
m
ho
R

B (feet) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180

NOTE: This chart is normally reliable for vehicles of regular configuration. Vehicles of
irregular configuration, such as artillery pieces or cranes, may require additional modules.
Formulas A = 2h + w + 5 ft and B = 2h + L + 5 ft have been devised to determine the number of
screen modules required. See FM 20-3 and TM 5-1080-200-13&P for more information.
A = width of screen, in feet w = width of object, in feet
h = height of object, in feet, + 2 B = length of screen, in feet
(for overhead clearance) L = length of object, in feet

The part of the object that falls with a slope of about 50q can be disregarded in determining L or w.
A slope of about 50q gives the maximum camouflage effectiveness.
To determine the number of screen modules, calculate A and B. Find the A value on the module
determination chart, and go across to the B value. Where A and B intersect on the chart is the
number of screen modules required.
Example: A = 2 (8 ft + 2 ft) + 10 ft + 5 ft; B = 2 (8 ft + 2 ft) + 25 ft + 5 ft; A = 35, B = 50. The nearest
size of screen according to the chart is a two-module configuration. Keep in mind that formulas
and charts are guides and that the selection of screens and combinations must be tailored to the
individual situation.

Figure 8-39. Hasty module determination chart

Survivability 8-53
FM 5-34

Emplacement
Assemble modules into one net (see Figure 8-40) and place it over
the vehicle. Keep the screen away from all hot surfaces and
exhaust systems. Ensure that the appropriate blend (color) is
showing. Keep a minimum space of 0.6 meter between the net and
the vehicle. Never drape a screen over the vehicles (see Figure 8-41).
Always use an erection set and anchor net system.

MULTIPLE MODULE SYSTEMS

One Module

9.7 m
12 m
4.8 m

8.4 m 8.4 m 12.6 m

NOTE: You can use diamond and hexagon screens, separated or joined.
Two Modules Three Modules

14.5 m
19.3 m

16.7 m

Four Modules 16.7 m

Five Modules + 1 Diamond

24.2 m

24.2 m

16.7 m

25 m

NOTE: All hexagon- and diamond-shaped nets are

fastened together with quick-release connectors.

Figure 8-40. Lightweight camouflage screens

8-54 Survivability
 FM 5-34

CAUTION: If this space between screen and vehicle is

not maintained, screen will not conceal (min 0.6 m)

Stagger poles to disrupt Lower the canvas flap

straight lines. to hide the shadow.
.6 m

Cover lights with brush and Ensure that the screen

windshield with tarpaulin. Break up recognizable is held taut by stakes.
shadows with brush.

Figure 8-41. Placing net over vehicle

CHECKPOINT CONSTRUCTION
Checkpoints are established to control the movement of personnel
and vehicles across a battlefield, preventing illegal actions or actions
that aid the enemy. Checkpoints are either hasty (temporary, see
Figure 8-42, page 8-56) or deliberate (permanent, see Figures 8-43
and 8-44, pages 8-56 and 8-57). They may also be used to
• Ensure that classified routes carry only authorized traffic.
• Prevent a black-market transport of contraband.
• Prevent enemy sympathizers from supplying the enemy with food,
medicine, ammunition, or other items of military use.
In a hasty checkpoint
• Picket the wire at both ends to prevent run through.
• Ensure that the terrain requires vehicles and dismounted
personnel to pass through the checkpoint.
• Position weapons and personnel to cover the entire checkpoint
adequately.
In a one-way deliberate checkpoint
• Picket the wire at both ends to prevent bull through.
• Replace shicane wire with any passive vehicle barrier such as jersey
barriers or 55-gallon drums filled with earth.

Survivability 8-55
FM 5-34

Use shicane or a concrete “Checkpoint

barrier to reduce vehicle Ahead” sign
speed.

Closed terrain

Inspection area

Closed terrain

“Checkpoint Shicane to reduce

Ahead” sign vehicle speed

Figure 8-42. Typical hasty checkpoint

Use shicane or a Retaining

concrete barrier to Inspection Inspection fence
reduce vehicle speed. Area 1 Area 2

Vehicle and
personnel
holding area

“Checkpoint Active vehicle

Ahead” sign barriers
Personnel
inspection
area

Figure 8-43. Typical one-way deliberate checkpoint

8-56 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Use shicane or a
concrete barrier to Retaining
reduce vehicle Passive vehicle fence
speed. barriers as lane Inspection
separators Area 2

Vehicle and
personnel
holding area Active vehicle
barriers
“Checkpoint
Ahead” sign
Personnel
Inspection inspection area
Area 1

Figure 8-44. Typical two-way deliberate checkpoint

• Use a retaining fence as it prevents the vehicle’s operator and

personnel from escaping. The fence can be four-strand cattle fence,
double lucas, or triple-standard concertina.
• Ensure that dismounted personnel are routed separately to a
personnel-inspection area.
• Route vehicles which have questionable or illegal cargo that was
discovered during inspection through the active vehicle barriers to
a vehicle-holding area for further inspection and proper handling.
• Place weapons and personnel fighting positions so that they provide
adequate coverage of an entire checkpoint.
In a two-way deliberate checkpoint
• Use shicane wire or concrete barriers at both ends to prevent bull
through. Refer to Figure 6-21, page 6-15, for concrete obstacle
placement.
• Ensure that passive vehicle barriers, such as jersey barriers, used
as lane separators provide protection to personnel from small-arms
attack.
• Replace shicane wire with any passive vehicle barrier such as
anchored 55-gallon drums filled with earth or steel post obstacles, if
necessary.
• Use a retaining fence to prevent vehicle operators and personnel
from escaping. The fence can be four-strand cattle fence, shicane,
or triple-standard concertina.

Survivability 8-57
FM 5-34

• Route dismounted personnel separately to a personnel-inspection

area.
• Route vehicles which have questionable or illegal cargo that was
discovered during inspection through the active vehicle barriers
to a vehicle-holding area for further inspection and proper
handling.
• Place weapons and personnel fighting positions so they provide
adequate coverage of an entire checkpoint.

TOWER CONSTRUCTION
Figure 8-45 and Figure 8-46, pages 8-60 and 8-61, show two
different size guard towers.

Open

Barbed wire
Lower portion of ladder
in raised position

Barbed wire

Enclose base of tower w/

concertina barbed wire.
Fasten to corner post.

Side View

Figure 8-45. 11- x 11-foot guard tower

8-58 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Open

Front View

Figure 8-45. 11- x 11-foot guard tower (continued)

Survivability 8-59
FM 5-34

Barbed wire

Ladder in raised
position

1/
2” rope

Front View

Figure 8-46. 12- x 12-foot guard tower

8-60 Survivability
 FM 5-34

Side View

Figure 8-46. 12- x 12-foot guard tower (continued)

Survivability 8-61
 Chapter 9
Demolitions and Modernized Demolition
Initiators (MDI)

SECTION I. DEMOLITIONS

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
• Conduct risk-management operations, completing risk assessments
and identifying all hazards and control measures.
• Do not attempt to conduct a demolitions mission if you are unsure
of demolition procedures; review references or get assistance.
• Do not let inexperienced personnel handle explosives.
• Avoid dividing responsibility for demolition operations.
• Use the minimum number of personnel necessary to accomplish the
demolition mission.
• Take your time when working with explosives; make your actions
deliberate.
• Post guards to prevent access inside the danger radius.
• Maintain control of the blasting machine or initiation source.
• Use the minimum amount of explosives required to accomplish the
mission while keeping sufficient explosives in reserve to handle any
possible misfires.
• Maintain accurate accountability of all explosives and accessories.
Always store blasting caps separately and at a safe distance from
other explosives.
• Ensure that all personnel and equipment are accounted for before
detonating a charge.
• Ensure that you give warnings before initiating demolitions; give
the warning “Fire in the hole!” three times.
• Guard the firing points.
• Assign a competent safety officer for every demolition mission.
• Dual initiate all demolitions, regardless if they are single- or dual-
primed.
• Avoid using deteriorated or damaged explosives.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-1

FM 5-34

• Do not dismantle or alter the contents of any explosive material.

• Avoid mixing live and inert (dummy) explosives.
• Assess the environmental impact of all demolition operations
according to the environmental risk assessment (see Chapter 13).
Table 9-1 lists the minimum safe distance for personnel in the open
when detonating explosives.

Table 9-1. Minimum safe distances for personnel in the open

Safe Distance Safe Distance

Explosives (lb) Explosives (lb)
(m) (m)
27 or less 300 150 534
30 311 175 560
35 327 200 585
40 342 225 609
45 356 250 630
50 369 275 651
60 392 300 670
70 413 325 688
80 431 350 705
90 449 375 722
100 465 400 737
125 500 425 750
500 800
NOTES:
1. For explosives over 500 pounds, use the following formula to calculate the
safe distance:

Safe distance (meters) = 100 × 3 pounds of explosives

2. The minimum safe distance for personnel in a missile-proof shelter is 91.4 m

Induced currents can prematurely detonate explosives. Table 9-2

lists the distances which transmitters with transmitter-induced
currents can detonate explosives.

MISFIRES
Misfires occur for several reasons, most of which are preventable by
using proper procedures. For MDI misfires, see Section II of this
chapter.

NONELECTRIC-MISFIRE CLEARING PROCEDURES

• Delay investigating any detonation problem, after attempting to
fire the demolition, for at least 30 minutes plus the time
remaining on the secondary system. However, tactical conditions
may require an investigation before the 30-minute limit.

9-2 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Table 9-2. Minimum safe distance from transmitter antennas

Average or Peak Transmitter Power* Minimum Distance to Transmitter (m)

(watts)
0 to 29 30
3 to 49 50
5 to 99 110
10 to 249 160
25 to 499 230
50 to 999 305
1,000 to 2,999 480
3,000 to 4,999 610
5,000 to 19,999 915
20,000 to 49,999 1,530
50,000 to 100,000 3,050
*When the transmission is a pulsed or pulsed-continuous-wave type and its pulse width is
less than 10 microseconds, the left-hand column indicates average power. For all other
transmissions, including those with pulse widths greater than 10 microseconds, the left-hand
column also indicates peak power.
NOTE: Do not conduct electric firing within 155 meters of energized power trans-
mission lines. When conducting blasting operations at distances closer than 155
meters to electric power lines, use nonelectric firing systems or de-energize the
power lines.

CAUTION
When transporting electric blasting caps near operating
transmitters or in vehicles (including helicopters) that
have operating transmitters, place the caps in a metal
can. The can’s cover must have a snug fit and lap over
the can’s body to a minimum depth of 1/2 inch (ammo
can). Do not remove any caps from a container near any
operating transmitter unless the hazard is deemed
acceptable.

• Ensure that the soldier who placed the charges investigates and
corrects any problems with the demolition.
• Do the following for above-ground misfires of charges primed with
blasting caps: place a primed, 1-pound charge next to each misfired
charge and detonate the new charge. Each misfired charge or
charge separated from the firing circuit that contains a blasting cap
requires a 1-pound charge for detonation. Do not touch the
scattered charges that contain blasting caps; destroy them in-place.
For the charges that are primed with detonating cord, do not
investigate them until the charges have stopped burning. Wait 30-
minutes if the charge is underground, reprime, and attempt to
detonate the charge. You can collect scattered charges that do not
contain blasting caps and detonate them together.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-3

FM 5-34

• Dig to within 1 foot of a buried charge; place a primed, 2-pound

charge on top or to the side of the charge; and detonate the new
charge.

ELECTRIC-MISFIRE CLEARING PROCEDURES

• Try to fire the charge a second time.
• Use a secondary firing system, when present.
• Check the wire connections, blasting machine, or power-source
terminals.
• Disconnect the blasting machine or power source and test the
blasting circuit. Check the continuity of the firing wire with a
circuit tester.
• Use another blasting machine or power source and attempt to fire
the charge again or change operators.
• Disconnect the blasting machine, when employing only one
electrical initiation system, shunt the wires, and investigate
immediately. When employing more than one electrical initiation
system, wait 30 minutes before inspecting it. However, tactical
conditions may require an investigation before the 30-minute
limit.
• Inspect the entire circuit for wire breaks or short circuits.
• Do not attempt to remove or handle an electric blasting cap if you
suspect it is the problem. Place a primed, 1-pound charge next to
the misfired charge and detonate the new charge.

EXPLOSIVE CHARACTERISTICS
Table 9-3 shows the main characteristics and uses of military
explosives.
WATERPROOFING
You must waterproof M1 dynamite that will be submerged in water
for more than 24 hours. Seal it in plastic or dip it in pitch. Keep
the composition 4 (C4) for underwater use in packages; this
prevents erosion. The adhesive backing on all demolitions will not
stick to surfaces when wet or submerged. Cratering charges will
malfunction if the ammonium nitrate is exposed to moisture.
Semipermanent waterproof sealant is available for use on the
connections between time fuses or detonating cords and nonelectric
blasting caps. Any demolitions should be fired as soon as possible.

9-4 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Table 9-3. Military explosive characteristics

Detonation Relative-
Size, Weight, and
Explosive Use Velocity Effectiveness
Packaging
(fps) Factor

TNT Breaching 23,000 1.00 1 lb: 48/box; 1/2 lb: 96/

box; 1/4 lb: 192/box

Tetrytol Breaching 23,000 1.20 Eight 21/2 lb/sack: 2

sacks/box

C4, M5A1, Cut and 26,000 1.34 M5A1: twenty-four 21/2-

and M112 breach lb blk/box; M112; thirty
11/4-lb blk/box (1 blk 2”x
1” x 10” = 20 cu in,
which may vary,
depending on manufac-
turer data.)

M118 sheet Cutting 24,000 1.14 Four 1/2-lb sheets/pack

explosive with 20 packs/box (one
sheet is 3- x 1/4- x 12-in)

M1 dynamite Quarry/ 20,000 0.092 One hundred 1/2-lb

stump/ditch- sticks/box
ing opera-
tions

Detonating Priming 20,000 to Three 1,000-ft rolls or

cord 24,000 eight 500-ft rolls/box

Crater charge Craters 8,900 0.42 One 40-lb canister/box

M1A2, banga- Wire and 25,600 1.17 Ten 5-ft sections/kit (176
lore breaching lb)

M2A4 15-lb Hole cutting 25,600 1.17 Three 15-lb shaped

shaped charges/box
charge

M3A1, 40-lb Hole cutting 25,600 1.17 One 40-lb shaped

shaped charge/box
charge

PRIMING
You can prime explosives with detonating cord (see Figure 9-1, page
9-6), electrically or nonelectrically. Prime individual explosives
exactly at the rear center of the charge, unless otherwise indicated.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-5

FM 5-34

Uli knot
8 wraps

10” 2”
Cut close

Double
overhand knot

Minimum 6-inch tail

Triple roll knot Uli or double overhand knot

Tape

Electric or nonelectric initiator

Figure 9-1. Priming with detonating cord

9-6 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

FIRING SYSTEMS
Firing systems may be electric or nonelectric. A dual-firing system is
two separate systems that may be initiated by dual electric, dual
nonelectric, or a combination. See Figure 9-2 for details.

Horizontal circuit

Detonating Firing
cord wire
Detonating cord

Electric
ring mains

blasting
cap

Time Fuse
fuse igniter
Primed
charges

Nonelectric
blasting cap

Horizontal and vertical circuit

Vertical
ring mains Charges

Detonating-
cord
crossover

Detonating-
cord Vertical
crossover Charges ring mains
Safety fuse

Figure 9-2. Combination dual-firing system

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-7

FM 5-34

CHARGE CALCULATIONS

Obtain critical
dimensions.

Calculate for
TNT (formula)
or select table
value (C4) or
rule of thumb.

Divide by
package weight
(volume for Use formula
Divide by calculations); method if using
RE factor. round up to explosive other
next whole than C4.
package.

Calculate
number of
charges.

Calculate total
amount of
explosive.

Figure 9-3. Calculation steps for explosives

STEEL-CUTTING CHARGES
Table 9-4 shows the formulas for steel-cutting charges; Table 9-5
lists the C4 requirements for rectangular steel sections.

9-8 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Table 9-4. Steel-cutting formulas

Formula Use

P = 3/8A Cut beams, columns, girders, steel plates, any structural steel sec-
tion, bars that are 2 or more inches thick.

P = D2 Cut high carbon or alloy steel (2 inches or less).

P = TNT, in pounds
A = cross-sectional area of the steel member, in square inches
D = thickness or diameter of section to be cut, in inches

Table 9-5. C4 required to cut rectangular steel sections of given dimensions

Section Weight of C4 (in pounds) Required for Rectangular Steel Sections
Thickness (height or width, in inches)

(in) 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

1/4 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 .09 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.8
3/8 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.6 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.4 2.6
1/2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.6 2.9 3.2 3.4
5/8 0.4 0.6 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.5 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.5 3.9 4.3
3/4 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.8 2.1 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.8 4.3 4.7 5.1
7/8 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.3 1.5 2.1 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 5.9
1 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.3 2.9 3.4 4.0 4.5 5.1 5.6 6.2 6.8
Procedure (round UP to the nearest 1/10 pound when calculating charge sizes):
Measure each rectangular section of the total member separately.
Find the appropriate charge size for the rectangular section from the table. If the section dimension is not
listed, use the next-larger dimension.
Add the individual charges for each section to get the total charge weight.

For rails (cut preferably at crossings, switches, or curves), cut at

alternate rail splices for a distance of 500 feet. Use the following
amounts of explosive:
• One-half pound for rails that are less than 5 inches high.
• One pound for rails that are 5 inches or higher.
• One pound for crossings and switches.
• Two pounds for frogs.
Use the following amounts of explosive for cables, chains, rods and
bars:
• One pound for diameters up to 1 inch.
• Two pounds for diameters over 1 inch and up to 2 inches.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-9

FM 5-34

• P= (3/8)A or a suitable dimensional-type charge for diameters of

2 or more inches.
• One pound if you can bridge or fit a block of explosive snuggly
between the links.
NOTE: Chain and cable rules are for those under tension.
You must cut both sides of chain link.
Figure 9-4 shows emplacing a charge and a sample problem.
Figure 9-5 lists information on special steel-cutting charges.

Placement of charges on steel members

Explosive charge
divided in half,
TNT placed offset minimum Cables Rods
Plastic explosive on one side
on channel thickness of web
of I-beam

Bars

For cutting high-carbon steel parts, alloy steel

articles, or slender steel member, use P(TNT) = D2

Flange

46.5 cm 2.5 cm
Web

1.6 cm Flange
20.3 cm

Flanges Width 20.3 cm (8 in) Charge total

Thickness 1.6 cm (5/8 in) 2 flanges 2 x 1.5 lb = 3 lb
Web = 5.1 lb
Charge From Table 9-5 1.5 lb Total = 8.1 lb

Web Width 43.3 cm (16.8

Use 8.1 lb of C4.
in)
Thickness 2.5 cm (1 in)

Charge From Table 9-5 5.1 lb

Figure 9-4. Steel-cutting charge emplacements

9-10 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Use and
Charge Type Remarks
Dimensions

Beams less than 2 inches thick: Cut flat steel up to 3” 1/2” minimum charge
thick. thickness
Offset flange charge so that one edge
is opposite center of the C-shaped (Plates, beams,
charges. columns) Cut explosive. DO
NOT mold.
Ribbon Beams 2 inches thick Depth: 1/2 thickness of
or more: target Explosive target con-
Offset flange charge Width: 3 times thick- tact must exist over
so that one edge is ness of target entire area.
opposite an edge of Length: Same as length
the C-shaped Darken ribbon charge
charges. of cut desired
lines (see FM 5-250,
page 3-15).
Priming
Detonating-cord primers must
be of equal length.

Detonation at Cut solid bars up to 8” Explosive must be

apex thick (mild steel). cut rather than
molded.
Base = 1/2 See diagram for charge
circumference dimensions. Difficult
Saddle

1” thick
Long axis = circumference

Cut solid bars up to 8” Detonating cord prim-

Short axis = 1/2 circumference and thick (high carbon or ers at apexes must
points of detonation steel alloy). be equal length.

See diagram for charge

dimensions.
Diamond

1” thick

Long axis = circumference

Figure 9-5. Special steel-cutting charges

TIMBER-CUTTING CHARGES
Figure 9-6, page 9-12, shows charge placement, formulas, and
amount of explosive for timber-cutting charges. Whenever possible,
conduct a test shot to determine the exact amount of explosive
required to get the desired effect. Use the values or formulas from
Figure 9-6 for an initial test shot. After analyzing the initial result,
increase or decrease the amount of explosive. When you do not need
full removal, use the ring charges from Figure 9-6. See Figure 9-7,
page 9-13, for stumping operations.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-11

FM 5-34

Internal charges Abatis External charges

2 D
Explosive Fall 2 D
D P = -------
P = ------- 40
D 2 50
D 1.5 m
P = ----------
250
Where “D” is the Fall
Tamping least dimension, in
inches

Packages of C4 Required (1.25-lb Packages) by Timber Diameter (in)

Type of Charge
6 8 10 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36

Internal 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4

External 1 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 11 14 17 20

Abatis — — — — — — — 7 9 11 14 16

NOTES:
1. Packages required are rounded UP to the next whole package.
2. For external timber cutting, the charge should be twice as wide as it is high.
3. For internal charges, drill a 2-inch diameter to a depth of 2D/3 and use two
holes drilled at right angles to each other without intersecting.

Ring charge
A. Quantity

Number of wraps of sheet explosive

1 2 3 4 5

Diameter (inches)
0 10 20 30
Circumference (feet)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Number of wraps of C4
1 2

Location of B. Placement
desired cut

C4 2 wraps
Location of cut to
eliminate stump
Sheet 3 wraps

Figure 9-6. Timber-cutting charges

9-12 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Tamping Tamping

Charge

Charge

Evenly rooted Large roots on

stump side of tree

Detonating
Charge cord
Detonating
cord
Tamping Tamping
Cap Cap

Charge
Lateral-rooted stump
NOTE: Always round UP to the next ½ foot.
Rules of thumb:
1. For dead stumps - 1 pound per foot of diameter Tap-rooted stump
2. For live stumps - 2 pounds per foot of diameter
3. For standing timber - add 50 percent.
4. For lateral-rooted and tap-rooted stumps, the hole and depth equals the
tree’s radius.

Figure 9-7. Stump-blasting charge placement

ABATIS
Figure 9-8, page 9-14, shows an abatis. Consider the following when
constructing one:
• Make the depth a minimum of 75 meters.
• Use trees with a diameter of 60 centimeters and a height of 6
meters.
• Fell the trees at a 45° angle toward the enemy.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-13

FM 5-34

• Use a test shot to determine the actual amount of demolition

needed.
• Calculate the amount of trinitrotoluene (TNT) needed using the
equation below:
P = D2/50
where—
P = TNT required per tree, in pounds.
D = diameter or least dimension of dimensioned timber, in inches.

Figure 9-8. Abatis

BREACHING CHARGES
Figure 9-9 lists the quantity of explosive for reinforced concrete.
Use the conversion factor from the figure to get the quantities for
other materials. The breaching formula is below.
3
P = R KC

where
P = amount of TNT needed, in pounds
R = breaching radius, from Figure 9-10, page 9-16
K = material factor, from Table 9-6, page 9-17
C = tamping factor (see Figure 9-9).

9-14 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Placement Methods and Tamping Factor (C) for

Breaching Charges
Placed in Tamped or Deep Elevated Shallow
center of untamped Earth Ground
stemmed water water placed,
mass tamping
Reinforced- Fill untamped
Concrete
Thickness
R R
(ft) R
R R R R

C = 1.0 C = 1.0 C = 1.0 C = 1.8 C = 2.0 C = 2.0 C = 3.6

Packages of M112 (C4)

2.0 1 5 5 9 10 10 17

2.5 2 9 9 17 18 18 33

3.0 2 13 13 24 26 26 47

3.5 4 21 21 37 41 41 74

4.0 5 31 31 56 62 62 111

4.5 7 44 44 79 88 88 157

5.0 9 48 48 85 95 95 170

5.5 12 63 63 113 126 126 226

6.0 13 82 82 147 163 163 293

6.5 17 104 104 186 207 207 372

7.0 21 111 111 200 222 222 399

7.5 26 137 137 245 273 273 490

8.0 31 166 166 298 331 331 595

Conversion Factor for Table

(Material Factor [K]. Use with Table)

Ordinary masonry, hardpan, shale,

Dense concrete first
Earth ordinary concrete, rock, good timber, and
class masonry
earth construction

0.1 0.5 0.7

Figure 9-9. Breaching-charge calculations

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-15

FM 5-34

To calculate breaching charges, do the following:

1. Determine the type of material in the object you plan to destroy. If in doubt, assume the
material to be of the stronger type; for example, assume concrete to be reinforced unless
you know differently.

2. Measure the thickness of the object.

3. Decide how you will place the charge against the object. Compare your method of place-
ment with the diagrams at the top. If there is any question as to which column to use,
always use the column that will give you the greater amount of C4.

4. Determine the amount of C4 that would be required if the object were made of reinforced
concrete.

5. Determine the approriate conversion factor.

6. Multiply the number of pounds of C4 (see the above columns) by the conversion factor.

Example

You have a timber earth wall that is 2 meters (6.5 feet) thick with an explosive charge (without
tamping) placed at its base. (If this wall was made of reinforced concrete, you would need 465
pounds of C4 to breach it.) The conversion factor is 0.5, so multiply the 465 pounds of C4 by
0.5. The result is that you will need 232.5 pounds of C4 to breach the timber earth wall.

Figure 9-9. Breaching-charge calculations (continued)

Charge Location

Internal
External
On Center Off Center

T T T

R R R

R = 1/2T R = T minus depth R=T

of hole

R = radius
T = thickness of taget

Figure 9-10. Breaching radius

9-16 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Table 9-6. Values of K for breaching charges

Material R (m) K

Earth All values 0.07

Poor masonry, shale, hardpan, good tim- Less than 1.5 0.32
ber, and earth construction 1.5 or more 0.29
Good masonry, concrete block, rock 0.3 or less 0.88
Over 0.3 to less than 0.9 0.48
0.9 to less than 1.5 0.40
1.5 to less than 2.1 0.32
2.1 or more 0.27
Dense concrete, first-class masonry 0.3 or less 1.14
Over 0.3 to less than 0.9 0.62
0.9 to less than 1.5 0.52
1.5 to less than 2.1 0.41
2.1 or more 0.35
Reinforced concrete (concrete only; will 0.3 or less 1.76
not cut reinforcing steel) Over 0.3 to less than 0.9 0.96
0.9 to less than 1.5 0.80
1.5 to less than 2.1 0.63
2.1 or more 0.54

Use the following formula and Table 9-7, page 9-18, to find the
number of charges and thickness:
W
N = --------
2R
where
N = number of charges
W = pier, slab, or wall width, in feet
R = breaching radius, in feet
For R, round up to the next 1/2 foot for external charge and to the next
1
/4 foot for internal charges.
For N, use the following rules:
• Use 1 charge if N is less than 1.25.
• Use 2 charges if N is 1.25 to 2.49.
• Round off to the next whole number if N is 2.5 or more.
For best results, place the charge as a flat, square shape with the flat
side to the target. For breaching of hard surface pavements, use 1
pound of explosive for each 2 inches of surface.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-17

FM 5-34

Table 9-7. Thickness of breaching charge

Amount of Explosive (lb) Charge Thickness (in)

Less than 5 1
5 to less than 40 2
40 to less than 300 4
300 or more 8

NOTE: Thickness of breaching charge is approximate

values when using TNT.

COUNTERFORCE CHARGES
Counterforce charges are pairs of opposing charges used to fracture
small concrete or masonry blocks and columns. They are not
effective against a thickness over 4 feet. Figure 9-11 shows a
counterforce charge. Use the following formula to determine the
amount of explosive for a counterforce charge:

P = 1.5 x T

where
P = amount of plastic explosive, in pounds
T = thickness, in feet (round fractional measurements UP to next
higher 0.5 foot before multiplying). Divide the charge into two
equal parts, place them opposite each other, and detonate
simultaneously.

4 ft 4 ft Charge
Charge Column

Detonating cord

Lengths of cord 6”
must be equal

Figure 9-11. Counterforce charge

9-18 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

BOULDER-BLASTING CHARGES
Figure 9-12 shows and explains a boulder-blasting charge.

Blockholing
Tamping
Detonating cord

Explosives

Snakeholing Tamping Detonating

cord

Explosives

Mud tamping
Mudcapping
Detonating
cord

Explosives

Pounds of Explosive Required

Boulder Diameter
(ft)
Blockholing Snakeholing Mudcapping

3 0.250 0.750 2.000

4 0.375 2.000 3.500

5 0.500 3.000 6.000

Figure 9-12. Boulder blasting

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-19

FM 5-34

CRATERING CHARGES
The three types of craters are hasty, deliberate, and relieved-face
(see Figures 9-13 through 9-15). Emplace craters by digging the
holes by hand, mechanically, or with 15- or 40-pound shaped
charges. Then load the holes with the required amount of
explosive. (Place explosive on top of cratering charges to achieve 10
pounds of explosives per foot of hole.)

8’ ap
prox

5’ 20’
5’
5’
5’ min 5’ 8’ ap
prox

Number of holes:
50 -l
L – 16 b ch
N = ---------------- + 1 arge
5 s

L = length of crater, in feet

Load holes with 10 pounds of explosive
per foot of depth

Figure 9-13. Hasty crater

8’
appr
o x 25’
5’
5’
5’
5’
5’ 8’
7’ 5’
appr
7’ ox
7’ 5’
40 lb
80 lb
7’
80 lb
80 lb 40 lb
Crater approximately
8’ deep 80 lb

Number of holes:
L – 16
N = ---------------- + 1
5
L = length of crater, in feet

Figure 9-14. Deliberate crater

9-20 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

8’
Enemy side Friendly side

4’(max) 5’
40 lb
25° max slope 40° max slope

Instantaneous
electric cap
Enemy row

7’ 7’ 31/2’
8’

7’ 7’ 7’

Friendly row

Detonating-cord ring main

(cover with 6” of earth)

Number of holes:
L – 10 Enemy row = friendly row - 1
Friendly row = ---------------- + 1
7

L = length of crater, in feet

For hard surface, rows should be 12 feet apart.

Figure 9-15. Relieved-face crater

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-21

FM 5-34

BREACHING PROCEDURES

Charge:
500 lb

When time, dig

in or tamp 3m

0.6 m

1.8 m

Figure 9-16. Backfilled log-wall breaching

40-lb charges

30- to 40-lb charges at 2.4-m interval

buried 2/3 obstacle height

Figure 9-17. Log-crib breaching

9-22 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

3m 1.8 m

Board
3m

20 cm
Empty boxes
60 cm

Charge: 454 kg

Joint 2.4 m

3m

0.60.6
m
3m

20 cm

Charge: greater than 454 kg

Figure 9-18. Placement of charges

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-23

FM 5-34

1.5 m

1.2 m
1.5 m
1.2 m

0.9 m
Cube Small dragon’s tooth
Charge: 100 lb Charge: 20 lb

1.2 m 1.5 m

0.9 m 1.5 m

Cylinder Tetrahedron
Charge: 60 lb Charge: 20 lb

NOTE: Satchel charges are used to destroy these obstacles. In computing

the number of satchels required, round UP to the next full 20-lb
satchel.

Figure 9-19. Explosive packs for destroying small concrete obstacles

9-24 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

BRIDGE DEMOLITIONS
When faced with unusual construction methods or materials (for
example, hayricks, which are linear-shaped charges used by host
NATO countries), the responsible engineer should adapt one of the
recommended methods or recategorize the bridge as a miscellaneous
bridge. Use Table 9-8 and Tables 9-9 and 9-10, pages 9-26 and 9-27,
to determine the required clearance to prevent jamming. Use
Figures 9-20 and 9-21, pages 9-28 through 9-38, for attack methods.
The methods of attack shown are for the most common types of
bridges; however, they are not all inclusive.

Table 9-8. Minimum ER values for bottom attack (percent)

H/L 0.0100 0.0200 0.0300 0.0400 0.0500 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0900 0.1000
ER/L 0.0002 0.0008 0.0020 0.0030 0.0050 0.0070 0.0100 0.0130 0.0160 0.0200

H/L 0.1100 0.1200 0.1300 0.1400 0.1500 0.1600 0.1700 0.1800 0.1900 0.2000
ER/L 0.0240 0.0290 0.0340 0.0390 0.0440 0.0500 0.0570 0.0630 0.0700 0.0770

where—
H = beam, truss, and bow depth, in meters (includes the deck)
L = length of span for attack measured from end to end of the longitudinal meme-
bers which support the deck, in meters
ER = required end clearance, in meters

NOTES:
1. Go UP to the next higher value if the result H/L is not on the chart exactly as
calculated. For example, if H/L = 0.076, use the column headed 0.08. Read down
that column to determine ER/L. In this case, ER/L = 0.0130
2. Multiply the ER/L value determined from the chart by L to get ER.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-25

 Table 9-9. Minimum Lc values for top attack (midspan)
FM 5-34

Ratio of Section Removed to Span Length ( L c ⁄ L )

Ls ⁄ L
H⁄L
0.004 0.006 0.008 0.010 0.012 0.014 0.016 0.018 0.020 0.030 0.040 0.050 0.060 0.080 0.100

0.01 0.003 0.003 0.004 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.007 0.009 0.010 0.011 0.013 0.015

0.02 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009 0.010 0.011 0.011 0.012 0.015 0.017 0.019 0.022 0.026 0.030

0.03 0.008 0.009 0.011 0.012 0.014 0.015 0.016 0.017 0.018 0.022 0.026 0.029 0.033 0.039 0.045

0.04 0.011 0.013 0.015 0.016 0.018 0.019 0.021 0.022 0.023 0.029 0.034 0.039 0.043 0.052 0.060

0.05 0.013 0.016 0.018 0.020 0.022 0.024 0.026 0.028 0.029 0.036 0.043 0.049 0.054 0.065 0.075

0.06 0.015 0.019 0.022 0.025 0.027 0.029 0.031 0.033 0.035 0.044 0.051 0.058 0.065 0.078 0.090

0.07 0.018 0.022 0.026 0.029 0.031 0.034 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.051 0.060 0.068 0.076 0.091 0.105

0.08 0.021 0.025 0.029 0.033 0.036 0.039 0.042 0.044 0.047 0.058 0.068 0.078 0.087 0.104 0.120

0.09 0.023 0.028 0.033 0.037 0.040 0.044 0.047 0.050 0.053 0.065 0.077 0.087 0.097 0116 0.135

0.10 0.026 0.032 0.036 0.041 0.045 0.049 0.052 0.055 0.058 0.073 0.085 0.097 0.108 0.129 0.150

0.11 0.028 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.049 0.053 0.057 0.061 0.064 0.080 0.094 0.107 0.119 0.142 0.165

0.12 0.031 0.038 0.044 0.049 0.054 0.058 0.062 0.066 0.070 0.087 0.102 0.116 0.130 0.155 0.180

0.13 0.033 0.041 0.047 0.053 0.058 0.063 0.067 0.072 0.076 0.095 0.111 0.126 0.140 0.168 0.195

0.14 0.036 0.044 0.051 0.057 0.063 0.068 0.073 0.077 0.082 0.102 0.119 0.136 0.151 0.181 0.210

0.15 0.038 0.047 0.054 0.061 0.067 0.073 0.078 0.083 0.088 0.109 0.128 0.145 0.162 0.194 0.225

0.16 0.041 0.050 0.058 0.065 0.072 0.078 0.083 0.088 0.093 0.116 0.136 0.155 0.173 0.207 0.240

0.17 0.043 0.053 0.062 0.069 0.076 0.082 0.088 0.094 0.099 0.124 0.145 0.165 0.184 0.220 0.255

0.18 0.046 0.056 0.065 0.073 0.080 0.087 0.093 0.099 0.105 0.131 0.154 0.175 0.194 0.23 0.270

0.19 0.019 0.060 0.069 0.077 0.085 0.092 0.099 0.105 0.111 0.138 0.162 0.184 0.205 0.246 0.285

9-26 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

0.20 0.051 0.063 0.073 0.081 0.089 0.097 0.104 0.110 0.117 0.145 0.171 0.194 0.216 0.259 0.300
NOTE: If the results of Ls/L or H/L are not on the chart exactly as you calculate, round UP to the next higher value on the chart. For example, if H/L = 0.021, use 0.03; if Ls/L =
0.0142, use 0.016. Intersect the Ls/L and H/L values on the chart to get the value of Lc/L. Multiply the Lc/L value by L to get Lc.
 FM 5-34

Table 9-10. Minimum LC values for arch and portal with pinned-footing
bridge attacks

H 0.040 0.060 0.080 0.100 0.120 0.140 0.160 0.180 0.200

----
L

L 0.003 0.007 0.013 0.020 0.030 0.040 0.053 0.067 0.083

c
-------
L

H 0.220 0.240 0.260 0.280 0.300 0.320 0.340 0.360

----
L

Lc 0.100 0.130 0.150 0.170 0.200 0.230 0.270 0.300

-------
L

where—
H = rise for arch or portal bridges; measure the rise (meters) from the springing or
bottom of the support leg to the deck or top of the arch, whichever is greater.
L = length of span for attack between the centerlines of the bearings, in meters
LC = required length of the span removed, in meters

NOTE: If the result of H/L is not on the chart exactly as calculated, go UP to the
next higher value on the chart. For example, if H/L = 0.089, use the column headed
0.100 to determine LC/L. In the case, LC/L = 0.020. Multiply the LC/L value by L to
get LC; for example, 0.020 x L = LC.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-27

FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category
a b c d e
Top attack: None

1
Through
bridge, 1. Cut at the midspan.
Method I 2. Cut beams, including bottom, flange
in a "V."
3. Do not consider cutting the deck.
Bottom attack: E is greater than ER None

2 Through
bridge,
Method II 1. Cut at the midspan to 0.75h, as
shown.
2. Cut the deck across the full bridge
width.
Angled attack: End
clearance is not
a
Steel consideration.
beam
3 Through
bridge,
Method III 1. Cut between 1/3 span and the mid-
span.
2. Cut the deck across the full bridge
width.
Bottom attack: E is less than ER None
1. Cut at the midspan to 0.75h.
4 Through 2. Cut the deck across the full bridge
bridge, width.
Method IV 3. Attack one abutment or pier to cre-
ate sufficient end clearance.
Top attack: None

5
Through
bridge, 1. Cut at the midspan.
Method V 2. Cut the bridge as shown where the
deck is located well above the beam
bottom.
3. Do not consider cutting the deck.
Figure 9-20. Methods of attack on simply supported bridges

9-28 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e

Deck bridge, Angled attack: 1. Configura-

top support tion is found in
cantilever and
suspended-
span bridges.
6
2. End clear-
1. Cut between 1/3-span and the mid- ance is not a
span. consideration.
2. Cut the deck across the full bridge
width.

Deck bridge, Bottom attack: E is greater than ER None

bottom
support,
Method I
7

Steel 1. Cut at the midspan.

beam 2. Do not consider cutting the deck.

Deck bridge, Bottom attack: E is less than ER None

bottom 1. Cut at midspan.
8 support, 2. Do not consider cutting deck.
Method II 3. Attack one abutment or pier to cre-
ate sufficient end clearance.

Deck bridge, Angled attack: End clearance

bottom is not a consid-
support, eration.
Method III

1. Cut between 1/3-span and the mid-

span.
2. Cut the deck across the full bridge
width.

Figure 9-20. Methods of attack on simply supported bridges (continued)

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-29

FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e

Through Top attack: None

bridge,
Method I

10 1. Cut at the midspan.

2. Cut the top chord twice, vertically (if
necessary), and diagonals and bottom
chord.
3. Remove the wind bracing over the
midspan.
4. Do not consider cutting the deck.

Through Angled attack: None

bridge,
Method II

11 1. Cut between 1/3 span and the mid-

span.
2. Cut top chord, diagonals, and bot-
tom chord in one bay only.
Steel 3. Cut the deck across the full bridge
truss width.

Deck bridge, Bottom attack: 1. Configura-

top support tion is found in
cantilever and
suspended-
span bridges.
12
1. Cut between 1/3 span and the mid- 2. End clear-
span. ance is not a
2. Cut the top chord, diagonals, and consideration.
bottom chord in one bay only.
3. Do not consider cutting the deck.

Deck bridge, Bottom attack: E is greater than ER None

bottom
support,
Method I
13
1. Cut at the midspan.
2. Cut top chord, diagonals, and bot-
tom chord in one bay only.
3. Do not consider cutting the deck.

Figure 9-20. Methods of attack on simply supported bridges (continued)

9-30 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e
Deck Bottom attack: E is less than ER None
bridge, 1. Cut at the midspan.
bottom 2. Cut top chord, diagonals, and bot-
14 support, tom chord in one bay only.
Method II 3. Do not consider cutting the deck.
4. Attack one abutment or pier to cre-
ate sufficient end clearance.
Steel Deck Angled attack: End clearance
truss bridge, is not a consid-
bottom eration.
support,
15 Method III
1. Cut between 1/3 span and the mid-
span.
2. Cut the deck across the full bridge
width.
Through Bottom attack: This method
bridge applies to slab
bridges only.
16
1. Cut at the midspan.
2. Cut the deck across the full bridge
width.
Deck Top attack: 1. Configura-
bridge, top tion is found in
support cantilever and
suspended-
span bridges.
17 Concrete 2. Remove
Cut at the midspan with a concrete-
stripping charge. concrete for Lc
distance to full
width and
depth of
beams.
Deck Bottom attack: E is greater than ER 1. This method
bridge, applies to slab
bottom bridges only.
support,
18 Method I 2. Sufficient
reinforcing bars
Cut at the midspan with hayricks.* are cut to
cause bridge
collapse.
* Hayricks are not in the US Army supply system.

Figure 9-20. Methods of attack on simply supported bridges (continued)

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-31

FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e

Bottom attack: E is less than ER This method

Deck 1. Cut at the midspan with hayricks.* applies to slab
bridge, 2. Attack one abutment or pier to cre- bridges only.
19
bottom ate sufficient end clearance.
support,
Method II
Concrete Top attack: E is less than ER Remove con-
Deck crete for Lc dis-
bridge, tance to full
20 bottom width and
support, depth of
Method III Cut at the midspan with a concrete- beams.
stripping charge.

Normal Top attack: None

21
1. Cut at the midspan.
2. Cut the bow in two places.
3. Cut all hangers between the bow
cuts.
4. Do not consider cutting the deck.
Bow-
string Reinforced Top attack, plus girders: None
beam or
truss

22
1. Cut the truss or beam with the
appropriate method (Serials 1 through
15).
2. Cut the bow in two places, including
the hangers.

* Hayricks are not in the US Army supply system.

Figure 9-20. Methods of attack on simply supported bridges (continued)

9-32 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e
Cantilever Two cuts: 1. Cutting the
anchor span
may require a
two-stage
attack.
1 2. Use a con-
crete-stripping
charge for the
1. Cut the anchor span as closely to first stage.
the pier as practical.
2. Cut the midspan shear joint.
Cantilever One cut: 1. Cutting the
and anchor span
suspended may require a
span two-stage
attack.
2. Use a con-
crete-stripping
charge for the
first stage.
2 Concrete 3. If demoli-
tion of the sus-
pended span
Cut the anchor as closely to the pier as will create the
practical. desired obsta-
cle, regard the
span as simply
supported and
attack accord-
ingly.
Beam or One cut: 1. Cutting
truss with longer spans
short side may require a
span two-stage
attack.
3 2. Use a con-
crete-stripping
1. Cut interior span so y is greater than charge for the
1.25x. first stage.
2. If necessary, cut other interior spans
as in Serial.
Beam or Two or more cuts: 1. Cutting
truss these spans
without may require a
short side two-stage
4 span attack.
2. Use a con-
crete-stripping
Cut the interior span so y is greater charge for the
than 1.25x. first stage.

Figure 9-21. Methods of attack on continuous bridges

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-33

FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e
Portal, fixed Two cuts: 1. Cutting
footing these spans
may require a
two-stage
5 attack.
2. Use a con-
crete-stripping
charge for the
first stage.
Cut the span twice, close to the pier.
Portal, Strip concrete: 1. Remove all
pinned foot- concrete for Lc.
ing 2. A one-stage
attack should
be adequate.
3. When foot-
ing conditions
6 are unknown,
use Serial 5.
4. For Lc, use
Table 9-10,
page 9-27.
Remove concrete from the midspan
over length Lc with a concrete-stripping
charge.
Concrete Arch, open Strip concrete: 1. Applies to
spandrel, arches greater
fixed foot- than 35 meters.
ing, Method I 2. A one-stage
attack should
be adequate.
7 3. For Lc, use
Table 9-10.

Remove the concrete from the midspan

over length Lc with a concrete-stripping
charge.
Arch, open Strip concrete: 1. Applies to
spandrel, arches less
fixed foot- than 35 meters.
ing, Method 2. A one-stage
II attack should
be adequate.
3. For Lc, use
8
Table 9-10.
1. Remove the concrete from the mid-
span over length Lc with a concrete-
stripping charge.
2. Attack springing with hayricks* at the
top face of the arch ring.
* Hayricks are not in the US Army supply system.

Figure 9-21. Methods of attack on continuous bridges (continued)

9-34 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e
Arch, open Four cuts: 1. Alternative
spandrel, to Method II,
fixed foot- applies to
ing, Method arches less
III than 35 meters.
2. Two-stage
attack will prob-
ably be
9 required.
3. Use a con-
crete-stripping
charge for first
stage.

4. For Lc, use

Table 9-10,
page 9-27.
Arch, open Strip concrete: 1. A one-stage
spandrel, attack should
Concrete pinned foot- be adequate.
ing 2. For Lc, use
Table 9-10.
10

Remove concrete from the midspan

over length Lc with a concrete-stripping
charge.
Arch, solid Strip concrete: 1. This applies
spandrel, to arches of
fixed foot- span greater
ing, Method than 35 meters
I only.
2. A one-stage
11
attack should
be adequate.
3. For Lc, use
Remove the concrete from the mid-
Table 9-10.
span over length Lc with a concrete-
stripping charge.

Figure 9-21. Methods of attack on continuous bridges (continued)

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-35

FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e
Arch, solid Strip concrete: 1. Applies to
spandrel, arches less
fixed than 35 meters.
footing, 2. A one-stage
Method II attack should
be adequate.
3. For Lc, use
Charges Table 9-10,
page 9-27.
12
1. Remove concrete from the midspan
over length Lc with a concrete-stripping
charge.
2. Attack both springing points with
concrete-stripping charges:
Concrete a. Against bottom face of arch ring.
b. Against the top face (must
remove the fill beneath the roadway to
access the arch ring).
Arch, solid Strip concrete: 1. A one-stage
sprandral, attack should
pinned be adequate.
footing 2. For Lc, use
Table 9-10.
13

Remove concrete from the midspan

over length Lc with a concrete-stripping
charge.
Cantilever Two cuts: None
Shear joints

14

1. Cut the anchor span as closely to

the pier as practical.
2. Cut the midspan shear joints.
Steel Cantilever One cut: If demolition of
and sus- the suspended
pended span will create
span the desired
obstacle,
15 regard the
span as simply
supported and
attack
accordingly.
Cut anchor span as closely to the pier
as practical.

Figure 9-21. Methods of attack on continuous bridges (continued)

9-36 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e
Beam or One cut: None
truss with
short side
span
16
1. Cut interior span so y is greater than
1.25x.
2. If necessary, cut other interior spans
as in Serial 17.
Beam or Two or more cuts: None
truss with-
out short
17 side span

Cut spans so y is greater than 1.25x.

Portal, fixed Two cuts: None
footing

18 Steel

Cut the span twice, close to the piers.

Portal, Two Cuts: For Lc, use
pinned foot- Table 9-10,
ing page 9-27.

19

Remove section from midspan over

length Lc.

Figure 9-21. Methods of attack on continuous bridges (continued)

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-37

FM 5-34

Sub-
Serial Type Attack Method Remarks
category

a b c d e
Arch, open Four cuts: 1. Angle cuts
spandrel, about 70
fixed footing degrees.
2. For Lc, use
Table 9-10,
20
page 9-27.

Steel Arch, open Two cuts: For Lc, use

spandrel, Table 9-10.
pinned foot-
ing

21

Remove section from the midspan over

length Lc.
Arch, Two cuts: None
Method I

22

1. Cut at haunches.
2. Attack arch ring, spandrel walls, and
Masonry parapet.
Arch, One cut: 1. Use this
Method II method as an
alternate to
Method I, only
when time is
23 insufficient to
Crown
allow attack at
the haunches.
2. For Lc, use
Breach arch ring at the crown. Table 9-10.
* Hayricks are not in the US Army supply system.

Figure 9-21. Methods of attack on continuous bridges (continued)

9-38 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

ABUTMENT AND INTERMEDIATE-SUPPORT DEMOLITIONS

See Figures 9-22 and 9-23 and Figure 9-24, page 9-40. Single-
abutment destruction should be on the friendly side.

NOTE: Only for abutment

less than 5’ thick

5’

5’
5’
5’ 5’

5’
5’

40-lb charges

Figure 9-22. Placement of 5-5-5-40 charge (triple-nickle forty)

External square
charges

External
charges

Internal
charges

Figure 9-23. Pier demolition

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-39

 Legend
N = number of charges; round up to next higher whole number NOTES:
P = amount of TNT needed, in pounds
R = thickness of abutment, in feet 1. Abutment thickness
FM 5-34

C = tamping factor from Figure 9-9, page 9-15 Abutment is measured 5’ below
K = material factor from Table 9-6, page 9-17 road surface.
W = pier, slab, or wall width, in feet
2. Distance between
charges is equal to 2R.
5 ft (1.5 m) or less thick Over 5 ft (1.5 m) thick

20 ft (6 m) or less high Over 20 ft (6 m) high 20 ft (6 m) or less high Over 20 ft (6 m) high

Top = triple-nickel forty

1 2 3 Top = breaching charge 4
W
N = ----- – 1
5 Bottom = breaching charge

Bottom = breaching charge W

N = --------
W 2R
N = -------- For both
2R charges
P = R3KC
P = R3KC
1.5 m
}
1.5 m 1.5 m
1.5 m 1.5 m over depth over
6m 1.5 depth
m or 1.5 m =R 1.5 m
1.5 m or =R 6m
or less less >6m or
Top charge R R >6m
less
same as 1 Top
charge
same as
40-lb charges

9-40 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

3
spaced 5’ apart NOTE: If you cannot
reach R, use C = 2.0.

Figure 9-24. Bridge-abutment demolition

 FM 5-34

DEMOLITION RECONNAISSANCE
Figure 9-25 shows a sample of DA Form 2203-R. To use this form with
reconnaissance procedures, see Chapter 3. Refer to page 4 of DA
Form 2203-R for instructions on completing the Demolition
Reconnaissance Record.

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 9-25. Sample, DA Form 2203-R

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-41

FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 9-25. Sample, DA Form 2203-R (continued)

9-42 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 9-25. Sample, DA Form 2203-R (continued)

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-43

FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 9-25. Sample, DA Form 2203-R (continued)

9-44 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

E
PL
M
SA

Figure 9-25. Sample, DA Form 2203-R (continued)

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-45

FM 5-34

EQUIPMENT/AMMUNITION DESTRUCTION
AMMUNITION
You can destroy caches of weapons and ammunition to prevent
enemy use. The general rule of thumb for destroying ammunition
is to use 1 pound of explosive for every 1 pound of explosive
contained in the ammunition. All ammunition must be removed
from their shipping container and must touch each other to create a
continuous line of explosive.

GUNS
To prepare a gun for demolition, first block the barrel just above
the breach. For small-caliber guns that use combined projectile-
propellant munitions, solidly tamp the first meter of the bore with
earth. Table 9-11 details the charge size required for standard
barrel sizes. Pack the explosive, preferably C4, into the breach,
immediately behind the tamping. Place the plastic explosive in
close contact with the chamber.

Table 9-11. Gun-destruction charge sizes

Barrel Size (mm) Charge Size(lb)

76 10

105 18

120 23

155 38

203 66

Formula for determining amount of explosive:

2
D
P = ----------
636
P = quantity of explosive (any HE), in pounds
D = bore size of the barrel, in millimeters

NOTE: If the actual barrel size is not listed, use the

nearest gun size.

ARMORED FIGHTING VEHICLES (AFVS)

You can destroy armored fighting vehicles using a 25-pound charge
inside the hull. Make sure that all hatches, weapons slits, and
openings are sealed and that the ammunition inside the hull
detonates simultaneously. If it is not possible to enter the vehicle,
place charges under the gun mantle, against the turret ring, and on

9-46 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

the final drive (see Figure 9-26). If explosives are not available,
destroy the AFV by using AT weapons or fire, or destroy the main
gun with its own ammuntion. Insert and seat one round in the
muzzle end and a second charge, complete with propellant charge (if
required), in the breach end of the tube. Use a long lanyard and fire
the gun from a safe distance. Make sure that the firing party is
undercover before firing the gun.

Charge
Charge

Charge
Charge

Figure 9-26. Placing charges on the AFV

WHEELED VEHICLES
Destroy wheeled vehicles by attacking the vital parts with explosives
or even a sledge hammer. If you use explosives, place a 2-pound
charge on the cylinder head, axles, and frame.

EXPEDIENT DEMOLITIONS
Expedient techniques are intended for use only by personnel
experienced in demolitions and demolitions safety. Do not use
expedient techniques to replace standard demolition methods.

CRATERING CHARGE
Cratering charges are used to supplement the 40-pound cratering
charge or as an improvised cratering charge. To make a cratering
charge—
• Use a mixture of ammonium-nitrate fertilizer (at least 331/3 percent
nitrogen) and liquid (diesel fuel, motor oil, or gasoline) at a ratio of
25 pounds of fertilizer to 1 quart of liquid. Mix the fertilizer with
liquid and allow it to soak for an hour.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-47

FM 5-34

• Pour half of the charge weight in a hole, place two 1-pound

primed blocks of explosive, and then pour in the other half of the
charge.
• Place the mixture inside of a sandbag or plastic bag or cardboard
box, for transportation, and then place the entire package in the
hole.
NOTE: Bore holes should receive 10 pounds of explosives
for every foot of depth and must be dual-primed.
SHAPED CHARGE
• Use a container, such as a can, jar, bottle or drinking glass, and
remove both ends (see Figure 9-27). (Some containers come with
built-in cavity liners, such as champagne or cognac bottles, with
the stems removed.)
• Place the plastic explosive inside the container, and mold a cone
in the base of the explosive. If possible, use a cone-shaped liner
made from copper, aluminum foil, or glass. The optimum angle
for the cone is 42 to 45 degrees, but cavity angles between 30 and
60 degrees will work.
• Ensure that the standoff or legs of the container are 11/2 times
the cone’s diameter.
• Detonate the charge from the top dead center of the charge.

Bottle Fuse
C4

Plastic
explosive

Cap
Cone 11/2 diameter

Standoff Cone
distance

Cone Sticks taped to side

diameter as standoff

Figure 9-27. Shaped charge

9-48 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

PLATTER CHARGE
• Get a steel platter, preferably round, that weighs 2 to 5 pounds.
Uniformly pack the explosive to the back of the platter.
• Make sure that the explosive weighs the same as the platter. You
can tape the explosive to the platter.
• Prime the charge at the exact rear center. Cover the blasting cap
with a small quantity of C4 if any part of the cap is exposed.
• Gut an M60 fuse igniter and tape it to the top of the charge as a
sight. You can fabricate legs from sticks to help in aiming the
platter. Make sure that the explosive is on the side of the platter
opposite the target (see Figure 9-28).

Blasting cap (MDI) primed in

center rear of explosive to
initiate device (MDI)
Platter

Weight of explosive = weight of platter Target

Effective range = 35 m for small targets

Suitable container or tape to

hold explosive together

Figure 9-28. Platter charge

GRAPESHOT CHARGE
• For a grapeshot charge (see Figure 9-29, page 9-50), get a container,
projectiles, buffer material, an explosive charge, and detonating
cord.
• Make a large enough hole in the center bottom of the container to
accept the detonating cord.
• Slip the detonating cord branch line through the hole and tie a
double overhand knot.
• Place and tamp the C4 uniformly in the bottom of the container.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-49

FM 5-34

• Place two inches of buffer material (leaves, dirt, cardboard) on top

of the explosive. Place the projectiles (nails, bolts, rocks) on top of
the buffer material and secure the opening of the container using
tape or plastic wrap.
NOTE: The United Nations Convention of Certain Con-
ventional Weapons (CCW) mandates that all fragmentary
munitions produce fragments that are visible by x-ray
(metal, rock).
• Tie the detonating cord branch line to a line or ring main.
• Aim the charge at the center of the target from about 100 feet.

C4 explosive (1/4 weight of shrapnel) Bottom

Nonelectric
blasting cap

Primed in center

Detonating cord
Standard
base

Detonating cord or 2” buffer

M11 MDI shock tube Shrapnel

Figure 9-29. Grapeshot charge

AMMONIUM NITRATE SATCHEL CHARGE

This charge is a mixture of ammonium-nitrate fertilizer with
melted wax instead of oil. The mixing ratio is four pounds of
fertilizer to one pound of wax. To make this charge—
• Melt the wax in a container and stir in the ammonium-nitrate
pellets, making sure that the wax is hot while mixing. Before the
mixture hardens, add a 1/2-pound block of explosive primed with
detonating cord. Ensure that the primed charge is in the center of
the mixture and that there is sufficient detonating cord available
to attach initiation sets.
• Pour the mixture into a container. Add shrapnel material to the
mixture if desired, or attach the shrapnel on the outside of the
container to give a shrapnel effect. Detonate the charge by
attaching intiation sets to the detonating cord coming from the
satchel charge.

9-50 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

BANGALORE TORPEDO
• Separate the packaging material from C4 (M112), and place it in
the concave portion of two U-shaped pickets which are not bent or
damaged.
• Mold the C4 explosive, using a nonsparking tool, into the concave
position that runs the entire length of the U-shaped pickets.
• Place a line of detonating cord, after tamping the C4, on top of the
C4 of one of the pickets, and make a single overhand knot every 6 to
8 inches. Make sure the detonating cord runs several feet past the
U-shaped picket length so that it can be tied into a firing system.
• Place the other U-shaped picket tamped with C4 onto the picket
with the detonating cord previously set in. The C4 explosive from
each picket will be touching, with the detonating cord in the middle.
• Secure the two U-shaped pickets together with tape or wire.

DETONATING-CORD WICK (BOREHOLE METHOD)

Use this method (see Figure 9-30, page 9-52) to enlarge boreholes in
soil. You will get the best results in hard soil.
• Tape together several strands of detonating cord 5 to 6 feet long.
Generally, one strand enlarges the diameter of the hole by about 1
inch. Tape or tie the strands together into a wick for optimum
results.
• Make a hole by driving a steel rod about 2 inches in diameter into
the ground to the depth required. According to the rule of thumb, a
hole 10 inches in diameter requires 10 strands of detonating cord.
• Place the detonating-cord wick into the hole using an inserting rod
or some other field expedient. The strands must extend the full
length of the hole.
• Fire the cord either electrically or nonelectrically. An unlimited
number of wicks can be fired at one time by connecting them with
the detonating-cord ring main or line main. If you place successive
charges in the holes, blow out excess gases and inspect the hole for
excessive heat.

TIME FUSE
Soak length of clean string (1/8-inch diameter) in gasoline and hang to
dry. After drying, store it in a tightly sealed container. Handle it as
little as possible, and test it extensively before use.

GREGORY KNOT (BRANCH-LINE CONNECTION)

The Gregory knot (see Figure 9-31, page 9-52) is a detonating-cord
knot tied at the end of a branch line to connect the branch line to a

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-51

FM 5-34

Stick

Detonating cord

Tape

Figure 9-30. Detonating-cord wick

firing system. The Gregory knot saves time on a target when tied
before arriving at the mission site. This knot does not take the
place of the girth hitch with an extra turn or detonating-cord clips.

Figure 9-31. Gregory knot

9-52 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

SECTION II. MODERN DEMOLITION INITIATORS

MDI FIRING SYSTEMS

The MDI are a family of nonelectric blasting caps and associated
items (see Table 9-12, page 9-54). The snap-together components
simplify initiation systems and some types of explosive priming. The
MDI was developed to effectively replace electric demolition systems.
The MDI system removes the requirement to dual-initiate demolition
systems except when there is a high probability of the system
becoming cut.
Nonelectric priming with MDI is safer and more reliable than the
current nonelectric priming methods. MDI blasting caps are factory-
crimped to precut lengths of shock tube or time-blasting fuse.
Because the caps are sealed units, they are moisture-resistant and
will not misfire in damp conditions. A shock tube may be spliced
using excess shock tube from an M12 or M13 or a precut splicing-tube
splicing kit. Every splice in a shock tube reduces the reliability of the
priming system. Prime military explosives with the MDI the same as
with standard, nonelectric initiation systems. Use only high-strength
MDI blasting caps (M11, M14, M15) to prime explosive charges. M12
and M13 relay-type blasting caps do not have sufficient power to
detonate most explosives. You can use all MDI blasting caps to
initiate a shock tube. Use only the M11, M14, or M15 blasting caps to
initiate detonating cord or military explosives directly.

WARNING
Use care when cutting and splicing the shock tube. When cutting
the shock tube, always tie and overhand knot in the left over
shock tube.

With the introduction of MDI components, there will be two types of

firing systems: a stand-alone firing system and a combination firing
system. Both systems can be emplaced as single- or dual-firing
systems. The choice of which system to use for a particular
demolition mission is left to the experience of the engineer
commander. However, the combination firing system is the preferred
method for reserved demolition targets. See FM 5-250, Chapter 7, for
detailed instructions on both systems.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-53

FM 5-34

Table 9-12. MDI components

Components Description Packaging

M11 High-strength, nonelectric blasting cap, factory 6/pkg, 10
crimped to a 30-ft length of shock tube—used to pkg per box
prime all standard military explosives, including det
cord, or to initiate the shock tube of other MDI blast-
ing caps. A red flag is attached 1 meter from the
cap, and a yellow flag is attached 2meters from the
cap.
M12 Low-strength, nonelectric blasting cap1, factory 8 spools/
crimped to a 500-ft length of shock tube—used as a cardboard
transmission line from an initiator to another relay box, 6
cap or to a high-strength, shock-tube blasting cap boxes/pack-
which initiates military explosives. Can actuate up to ing box
five shock tubes held by the connector.
M13 Low-strength, nonelectric blasting cap1, factory 4 spools/
crimped to a 1,000-ft length of shock tube; used as a cardboard
transmission line from an initiator to another relay box, 6
cap or to a high-strength, shock-tube blasting cap boxes/pack-
which initiates military explosives. Can actuate up to ing box
five shock tubes held by the connector.
M14 High-strength, nonelectric, delay blasting cap, fac- 1/pkg, 60/
tory crimped to a 7 1/2-ft length of time-blasting wooden box
fuse—instead of the usual yellow band every 18 in, a
marker band and the minimum burning time in min-
utes (from the band to the detonator) are marked on
the fuse. Used to detonate all standard military
explosives or initiate shock-tube blasting caps and
detonating cord about 5 minutes after being ignited.
M15 Nonelectric blasting cap, delay2 —consists of two 30/box, 4
blasting caps, factory crimped at each end of a 70-ft boxes/pack-
length of shock tube. One blasting cap is low- ing box
strength to initiate another piece of shock tube, while
the second is high-strength to initiate other explo-
sives. A red flag is attached 1 meter from the high-
strength blasting cap, and a yellow flag is attached 2
meters from the low-strength cap. Used to create
staged detonations, as required for quarrying, ditch-
ing, and cratering operations.
M9 Blasting cap and shock tube holder—clamping
device used to hold the shock tube’s branch lines
secure to a high-strength blasting cap of the M11 or
M14. Can hold up to five shock tubes and one blast-
ing cap. Can also connect a MDI blasting cap to det-
onating cord.
M81 Time-blasting fuse igniter with shock-tube capabil- 5/paper-
ity—M81 and M60 fuse igniters are almost identical board box/
except the plug and screw end cap are colored black pkg, 6 pkg/
on the M81.3 wooden box
NOTE: The M81 has a stronger primer than the M60
1
Does not have enough output to initiate most military explosives.
2
Blasting caps are slightly larger than standard military blasting caps and will
not fit into standard cap wells.
3The M60 fuse igniter will not reliably initiate the shock tube.

9-54 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

STAND-ALONE SYSTEM
The stand-alone firing system is one in which the initiation sets and
transmission and branch lines are constructed using only MDI
components and the explosive charges are primed with MDI blasting
caps. It is important to ensure that the firing system is balanced. All
charges must have the same distance in shock-tube length from the
firing point to the charge. Figure 9-32 shows the single-firing MDI
system; Figure 9-33, page 9-56, shows the dual-firing MDI system;
and Figure 9-34, page 9-56, shows a branch-line array.

M12’s/M13’s
transmission lines

M12/M13/M14

Charges Charges Charges

NOTE: One branch M16’s or M11’s branch
line is in each charge lines to charges

Figure 9-32. MDI single-firing system (single-primed)

The disadvantage of a single-firing system is that if the transmission

line is cut, any charges down line from the cut will not detonate. If
there is a possibility of the transmission lines being cut (for example,
through artillery fires) a second firing system should be added as
shown in Figure 9-33. Note that the charges in this case are now
dual-primed, the transmission line is laid in the opposite direction of
the first transmission line, and the system is a balanced system.

CAUTION
When making multi-shock-tube installations, take care to protect the
shock tubes from the effects of nearby relay caps and charges. The
shrapnel produced by a cap or charge could easily cause a (partial or
complete) misfire. When there are many shock tubes involved in a
shot, place them carefully away from the junction.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-55

FM 5-34

M12’s/M13’s
transmission lines

M12/M13/M14 Charges Charges Charges M16’s or M11’s

branch lines to
charges

NOTE: One branch

line is in each charge

M12’s/M13’s
transmission lines

Figure 9-33. MDI dual-firing system (dual-primed)

M12’s connector with M12’s down line

and 3 M11’s branch lines

To firing point

M11’s branch lines to M9’s Next set of charges

shock-tube holders

M11’s or M16’s
branch lines to
charges

Figure 9-34. M11’s or M16’s branch-line array

Use the stand-alone MDI firing system for all types of demolition
missions, including bridge demolitions. The MDI firing system can
be used to initiate reserved demolition targets. However, under

9-56 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

current internationally agreed upon doctrine, charges cannot be

primed with blasting caps until a change of readiness from state 1
(safe) to state 2 (armed) is ordered. Priming every charge with MDI
blasting caps at this critical moment would take a considerable
amount of time and be unacceptable to the maneuver commander.
Priming charges with detonating cord is the preferred method on
reserved demolition targets.
COMBINATION FIRING SYSTEM
A combination firing system is one which consists of the MDI
initiation set; either a detonating-cord line or ring main; and branch
lines that can be either MDI, detonating cord, or a mix of both.
Figure 9-35 shows a combination firing system.

Firing point of M81’s igniter (at a

safe distance from the target)
M12’s/M13’s transmission
lines
M11’s transmission line

Detonating-cord ring main

J-hook

M11’s or M16’s
branch line
Detonating cord crossovers
and branch lines

M14’s delay initiation

Detonating-cord ring main

Figure 9-35. Combination (MDI and detonating cord) firing system (dual)

Use the combination (MDI and detonating cord) firing system for all
types of demolition missions. It combines the advantages of MDI
components with the simplicity and flexibility of detonating cord.
The combination firing system is the preferred method for reserved

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-57

FM 5-34

demolition targets, underwater operations, and operations where

subsurface-laid charges are used.

WARNING
Do not dispose of used shock tubes by burning them because of
potentially toxic fumes given off from the burning plastic.

SPLICING THE SHOCK TUBE

The MDI are extremely reliable because all of the components are
sealed. Unlike standard nonelectric priming components, they
cannot be easily degraded by moisture. Cutting the shock tube
makes the open ends vulnerable to moisture. Dampening the
explosive film on the inside of the shock tube will stop a detonation
from going beyond such a damp spot. Use care when cutting and
splicing the shock tube. When cutting the shock tube, always tie an
overhand knot in the leftover shock tube. Use splicing to repair a
break in the shock tube of a transmission or branch line (caused,
for example, by shrapnel from artillery fires) or to extend the shock
tube of another MDI blasting cap, but only when necessary. This is
done by using excess shock tube from an M12’s or M13’s shock-tube
blasting cap when the entire length is not needed. Every splice in
the shock tube reduces the reliability of the firing system. Keep the
number of splices in a shock-tube line to as few as practicable.
Unless splicing is absolutely necessary, use of a full, sealed MDI
component is recommended. (Do not splice the shock tube while
conducting water or diving demolition missions).

CAUTION
Taping two cut ends of the shock tube together does not make a
reliable splice.

SAFETY PROCEDURES
When conducting training and missions with MDI, follow the
general safety considerations for demolitions as given in Chapter 6
and AR 385-63.
Bec ause MDI components are delivered fr om the fac tor y
precrimped, they are more reliable and safer to handle and use
than the current standard military blasting caps. During testing of
the MDI components, it was found that the blasting caps would
always function correctly if the shock tube was properly initiated.
Misfires only occurred when the—
• M81 fuse igniter was not properly connected to the shock tube
before initiation.

9-58 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 FM 5-34

• Shock tube was cut by shrapnel during the initiation process.

• Shock tube was incorrectly inserted into the holders on the M12 or
M13 blasting caps or into the M9 holder.
• Shock tube was cut using crimpers.

WARNING
MDI is not authorized for below-ground or internal charges.

When transporting or storing MDI blasting caps, do not mix them

with other explosives. Transporting blasting caps requires special
consideration. The caps must be placed in a suitable container or in a
separate vehicle.

MDI MISFIRE CLEARING PROCEDURES

• In most misfires of the shock-tube blasting caps, which are
nonelectric, apply the standard rules.
• If the primer in the M81 does not fire (the most common problem),
recock the M81 by pushing in on the pull rod to reset the firing pin,
and then actuate the igniter again. If two or three retries result in
a nonfiring, cut the shock tube, replace the igniter with a new one,
and repeat the firing procedure.
• If the M81 fires and blows the shock tube out of its securing
mechanism without it firing, cut about 3 feet from the end of the
shock tube, replace with a new igniter, and repeat the firing
procedure.
• If the M81 appears to have functioned properly but the charge did
not fire, cut a 1-foot section from the shock tube starting 6 inches
from the igniter. Hold the 1-foot piece of shock tube so one end is
over your palm; gently blow through the other end. If a fine powder
comes out from the shock tube, it has not fired. Install a new
igniter on the freshly cut end of the priming shock tube and repeat
the firing procedure. If no fine powder comes out from the shock
tube or the shock tube was heard to fire or its flash was seen, wait
for 30 minutes before moving downrange to check the components
in the firing system.
• After waiting 30 minutes, proceed downrange and check all
components in the firing system. The most likely cause of a misfire
is the incorrect placement of the shock tube in the plastic
connectors of the M12/13s or the M9 holder. If incorrect placement
was the problem, replace the fired section and properly connect and
refire the device.

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI) 9-59

FM 5-34

• If the first component of the firing train did not fail, check out
each succeeding component until you find the one that failed.
Replace the failed or fired relay components back to the initiating
site and refire.
• If the final high-strength blasting cap seems to be the failed
component, replace it if it is easily accessible. However, if it is
used to prime an explosive charge, do not disturb it. Place a new,
primed 1-pound explosive charge next to the misfired charge and
detonate it when it is safe.

9-60 Demolitions and Modernized Demolition Initiators (MDI)

 Chapter 10
Bridging
RIVER-CROSSING OPERATIONS
River-crossing operations can be hasty, deliberate, or retrograde.
Deliberate crossings normally involve using assault-crossing
equipment, rafts, and bridges (see Table 10-1).

Table 10-1. Assault-crossing equipment

Assembly/ Remarks/
Equipment Transportation Capabilities
Propulsion Limitations

Pneumatic, 15- A 2 1/2-ton truck Carries either Inflation time is 5 to Max current velocity
man assault holds 20 12 inf and 3 eng 10 min with pumps. w/paddle is 1.5 MPS
boat deflated boats w/paddles, Speed w/paddles is and w/ OBM, 3.5
(250 lb per 12 inf and 2 eng 1.5 MPS. MPS.
boat); inflated w/OBM, or Speed w/OBM is 4.6 Each boat has 3
boat is an 8-man 3,375 lb of MPS. pumps and 11 pad-
carry. equipment dles.
OBMs - on request
Pneumatic, 3- One man carries Carries 3 sol- Inflation time is 5 min Max current velocity
man recon the boat by diers with equip- with pump. is 1.5 MPS.
boat backpack; total ment or 600 lb Speed with paddles Each boat has 1
weight is 37 lb. of equipment is 1 MPS. pump and 3 paddles.
No provisions for
OBMs
APC A self-pro- Carries 12 sol- Preparation time for Max current velocity
pelled, Class 13 diers with equip- swimming is 10 min. is 1.5 MPS.
vehicle ment It has track propul- D= C xW
sion in the water. 2
Swim speed is 1.6 D = drift (meters)
MPS. C = current (MPS)
Fords up to 1.5 m W = river’s width
(meters)
BIFV A self-pro- Carries 10 sol- Preparation time for Max current velocity
pelled, Class 2A diers with equip- swimming is 18 min. is 0.9 MPS.
vehicle ment D= C xW
1.6
D = drift (meters
C = current (MPS)
W = river’s width
(meters)
AVLB Bridge (weighs A Class 60 vehi- Launched in 2 to 5 Scissors launch
15 tons) is car- cle (one at a min by buttoned-up requires 10-m over-
ried on a time can cross); 2-man crew head clearance.
launcher (modi- measures 19.2 Retrieved from either Max launch slope
fied M48A5 or m and spans end; one soldier Uphill - 2.7 m
M60A1 chassis); 18.3 m using exposed, guide and Downhill - 2.7 m
20-ton crane prepared abut- connect Sideslope - 0.3 m
transfers bridge ments or mea- Needs 9-m bearing Fords 1.2 m
to launcher in 20 sures 17 m for an unprepared
to 30 minutes. using unpre- abutment and 0.5 m
pared abut- for a prepared abut-
ments. ment

Bridging 10-1
FM 5-34

BRIDGING/RAFTING
Boats
The standard boat in use today is the bridge erection boat - shallow
draft (BEB-SD). However, the older 27-foot BEB is still in use. See
Training Circular (TC) 5-210 for more information on this boat.
Table 10-2 shows information about BEBs.

Table 10-2. BEBs

Assembly/ Remarks/
Equipment Transportation Capabilities
Propulsion Limitations

BEB-SD Carried by one 5- Carries a 3-man Launch time from the Draft: normal opns is
ton bridge truck w/ crew and either cradle is 5 22 inches; fully
cradle or one 12 soldiers with minutes, and loaded is 26 inches;
medium-lift heli- equipment or maximum speed is 25 launch from cradle is
copter; boat 4,400 lb of equip- knots. 48 inches
weighs 8,800 lb ment

BEB, 27 feet Carried by one 5- Carries a 3-man Launch time from the Draft is 40 inches
ton bridge truck w/ crew and either 9 cradle is 5
cradle or one 2 1/ soldiers with minutes. Launch time
2-ton truck w/pole equipment or from the 2 1/2-ton
trailer or one 3,000 lb of equip- truck, when using a
medium-lift heli- ment crane or wrecker, is
copter, when 30 minutes. Maximum
procedures are speed is 15 knots.
certified

Improved Float Bridge (Ribbon)

A ribbon bridge’s major components are the interior bay, which
weighs 5,443 kilograms, and the ramp bay, which weighs 5,307
kilograms. For more information, see TM 5-5420-209-12. Table 10-3
lists allocations and Table 10-4 lists launch restrictions.

Table 10-3. Ribbon-bridge allocations (L-series TOE)

Allocation Corps Ribbon Company

Number of bridge platoons 2

Number of interior bays 30

Number of ramp bays 12

Number of BEBs 14

Longest bridge that can be constructed (m) 215

10-2 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Table 10-4. Launch restrictions

Controlled
Restrictions Free Launch High-Bank Launch
Launch

Minimum depth of Ramp bay - 112 76 (30)1 76 (30)1

water required in Interior bay - 921
centimeters
(inches)

Bank’s height 0 to 1.5 0 1.5 to 8.5

restrictions in (0 - 5) (5 - 28)
meters (feet)

Bank’s slope 0 to 30 percent 0 to 20 percent Level ground unless

restrictions the front of the truck
is restrained

NOTE: The launch is based on a 10 percent slope with the transporter backed into
the water. The required water depth for a 30 percent slope with a 5-foot bank
height is 183 centimeters. Interpolate between these values when needed.
1
This is recommended water depth. Launch could technically be conducted in 43
centimeters (17 inches) of water.

Use the following formula to determine the number of ribbon interior

bays you need to construct a ribbon bridge:
The number of interior bays =
gap (meters) – 14
------------------------------------------
6.7
or
gap (feet) – 45
-----------------------------------
22
NOTES:
1. Two ramp bays are required for all ribbon bridges.
2. During daylight hours, a ribbon bridge can be constructed
at the rate of 200 meters (600 feet) per hour and during
nighttime hours, at the rate of 133 meters (437 feet) per
hour.
3. Two hundred vehicles per hour, with 30-meter spacing at
16 kilometers per hour, can cross the bridge.

Bridging 10-3
FM 5-34

• Table 10-5 lists the bridge classification for wheeled and tracked
vehicles.
• Normally, you anchor a ribbon bridge by tying BEBs to the
downstream side of the bridge. Table 10-6 lists the number of
boats you will need.
• Table 10-7, page 10-6, gives the load classifications of ribbon rafts
based on the rafting site, type of rafting being conducted
(longitudinal/conventional), and the current velocity.
• Table 10-8, page 10-7, gives planning factors for the number of
round trips a raft can make based on river width, as well as the
number of centerlines that can be supported.
• Table 10-9, page 10-7, gives unit rafting requirements.

10-4 Bridging
 Table 10-5. Bridge classification

Current Velocity (MPS)

Crossing Type Load Classification
0 to 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.75 2 2.5 2.7 3

Normal Wheeled/tracked 96/75 96/75 96/70 96/70 82/70 65/60 45/45 30/30

Caution Wheeled/tracked 105/85 105/85 100/80 100/80 96/80 75/65 50/50 35/35

Risk Wheeled/tracked 110/100 110/95 105/90 105/90 100/90 82/75 65/65 40/40

Table 10-6. Boat requirements for anchoring a ribbon bridge

Current Velocity (MPS) Number of Boats : Number of Bridge Bays (ratio)

0 to 2.0 1:6

2.0 to 2.6 1:3

2.7 1:2

Over 2.7 Bridge must be anchored using an overhead cable system.

FM 5-34

Bridging 10-5
 Table 10-7. Ribbon-raft design
FM 5-34

Assembly Load
Load
Raft Size Time Space Current Velocity (MPS)
Class
(increase by (m)

10-6 Bridging
50% at
night) 0 to 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.75 2 2.5 2.7 3

3 bays L 45 45 45 40 40 35 30 25
(2 ramps/ 8 min 6.7 C 45 45 35 25 15 10 0 0
1 interior)
4 bays L 70 70 70 60 60 60 55 45
(2 ramps, 12 min 13 C 60 60 60 *55 *40 *30 *15 0
2 interiors)
5 bays L 75 75 75 70 70 70 60 60
(2 ramps/ 15 min 20.1 C 75 70 70 *70 *60 *50 *25 0
3 interiors)
6 bays L (W/T) 96/80 96/80 96/80 96/70 96/70 96/70 70/70 70/70
(2 ramps/ 20 min 26.8 C (W/T) 96/75 96/70 96/70 *70/70 *70/70 *55/55 *30/30 0
4 interiors)
NOTES:
1.When determining raft classification, L refers to the longitudinal rafting
and C refers to conventional rafting.
2.If the current’s velocity in the loading/unloading area is greater than 1.5
MPS (5 fps), then conventional rafting must be used.
3.The roadway width of a ribbon raft is 4.1 meters (13 feet 5 inches).
4.The draft of a fully loaded ribbon raft is 61 centimeters (24 inches).
5.Vehicles should only be loaded on the interior bays. Longitudinal
Conventional
6.Each raft requires a minimum of two BEBs for propulsion.
* Three BEBs are required for conventional rafting of 4, 5, 6 bay rafts in cur-
rent velocities greater than 1.5 MPS (5 fps).
 FM 5-34

Table 10-8. Planning factors for rafting operations, raft’s centerline data

Round
River Width Minutes per Maximum Number of
Trips per
(m) Round Trip Rafts per Centerline
Hour

75 7 1 8

100 8 1 7

125 9 1 6

150 10 2 6

188 11 2 5

225 12 2 5

263 14 3 4

300 16 3 3

NOTES:
1. This table provides approximate crossing times for a ribbon bridge and
an M4T6 raft in current velocities of 0 to 1.5 MPS.
2. All round-trip times include the time required to load and unload the
rafts.
3. Increase crossing times by 50 percent at night.
4. If the river width falls between two values, use the higher value.

Table 10-9. Unit rafting requirements

Raft Trips Required

Units Vehicles
4 Bays 5 Bays 6 Bays

Armored battalion 161 119 101 86

Mechanized battalion 153 112 65 55

FA battalion 165 97 61 52

Engineer battalion 139 77 59 50

ACR 208 171 110 98

NOTE: Assume that current velocities are less than 0.9 MPS and that battalions/
regiments are at 100 percent MTOE strength.

Bridging 10-7
FM 5-34

LONG-TERM ANCHORAGE SYSTEMS

All heavy floating bridges require constructing a long-term
anchorage, to include approach guys, an upstream (primary)
anchorage, and a downstream (secondary) anchorage. See TC 5-210
for details.

Approach Guys
Attach approach guys to one end of the first floating support of all
floating bridges. Secure them to the other end using deadmen,
pickets, or natural holdfasts. Use a minimum of 1/2 inch improved
plough steel (IPS) cable. When installed, the approach guys should
form a 45-degree angle with the bridge.

Upstream Anchorage
An upstream anchorage system holds a bridge in position against a
river’s main current. This system should be based mainly on the
current velocity and the bottom conditions. Table 10-10 contains
information on designing an upstream anchorage system.

Table 10-10. Design of upstream (primary) anchorage systems

Bottom Conditions
Current
Velocity (MPS)
Soft Solid/Rocky

0 to 0.9 Kedge anchors every float upstream Shore guys every 6th float
or shore guys every 6th float upstream
upstream

1.0 to 1.5 Combination of kedge anchors and Overhead cable system

shore guys

1.6 to 3.5 Overhead cable system Overhead cable system

Downstream Anchorage
A downstream anchorage system protects floating bridges from
reverse currents (tides) as well as from storms or severe winds
which might change the direction of river flow. Table 10-11 lists
information on the design of a downstream anchorage system.

Installation.
Table 10-12 contains information on how to install a long-term
anchorage system.

10-8 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Table 10-11. Design of downstream (secondary) anchorage systems

Bottom Conditions
Reverse
Current (MPS)
Soft Solid/Rocky

None expected Kedge anchors every 3d float down- Shore guys every 10th
stream or shore guys every 10th float float downstream
downstream

0 to 0.9 Kedge anchors every float down- Shore guys every 6th float
stream or shore guys every 6th float downstream
downstream

1.0 to 1.5 Combination of kedge anchors and Overhead cable system

shore guys

1.6 to 3.5 Overhead cable system Overhead cable system

Table 10-12. Procedures for installing long-term anchorage systems

System Installation Procedures

Kedge 1. Attach anchors to anchor lines, which must be a minimum of 1-inch

anchor manila rope.
2. Set or lay anchors. The horizontal distance from the anchor to the
float must be at least 10 times the depth of the river.
3. Attach anchor lines to floats.

Shore guy 1. Attach shore guys to floats. Shore guys must be a minimum of 1/2-
inch IPS cable and placed at a 45o angle with the bridge.
2. Ensure that shore guys are above the water; use floating supports if
necessary.
3. Attach shore guys to deadman or holdfasts.
4. Ensure that the current’s velocity does not exceed 0.9 MPS.

Combina- 1. Emplace a kedge-anchor system. Attach anchor lines to every float.

tion 2. Emplace a shore-guy system after installing the kedges. Attach
shore guys to every sixth float.
3. Ensure that the current’s velocity does not exceed 1.5 MPS.

Overhead 1. Design the system.

cable 2. Construct Class 60 towers and install a deadman.
3. Install master cable. Check initial sag.
4. Attach every float to the master cable using bridle lines.
5. Ensure that the current’s velocity does not exceed 3.5 mps.

Bridging 10-9
FM 5-34

Overhead-Cable Design Sequence

To design an overhead-cable anchorage system, you will need to
calculate the information from Table 10-13 in the proper sequence.
The numbers in the table correspond to the steps listed below.

Table 10-13. Data for overhead-design sequence

Cable Data Tower Data Deadman Data

1. The number of master 7. Actual tower height (H) 10. Deadman face (Df) and
cables 8. Tower-waterline dis- thickness (Dt) of largest
2. The diameter of master tance (A) timber
cable(s) (CD) 9. Tower-bridge offset 11. Deadman mean depth
3. The length of the master (O 1 ) IDDmax) to determine
cable(s) (CL) actual mean depth (DD)
4. The number of clips at 12. Deadman length (DL)
each end of the cable 13. Deadman minimum
5. The spacing of cable clips thickness (DL, Dt)
6. Initial sag (S)
14. Tower-to-deadman
distance (C)
15. Tower-to-deadman offset
(O 2 )
16. Bearing-plate
dimensions (x, y, z) for
each deadman

Use Figure 10-1 to determine where to measure for an overhead-

cable anchorage system.

Cable Data
Step 1. Determine the size and number of master cables required.
See Table 10-14, page 10-12, for float bridges.
Step 2. Determine the distance between the towers.

L = 1.1(G) + 100 feet

where
L = distance between towers, in feet
G = width of the wet gap, in feet
Step 3. Determine the length of the master cable.

C L = L + 250 feet

where
CL = length of the master cable, in feet
L = distance between towers, in feet

10-10 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Deadman

Tower

Current L
C

C
O1

O2

Figure 10-1. Measuring for an overhead-cable anchorage system

NOTE: The 250 feet (safety factor) is an approximation based

on the most extreme circumstances (see Table 10-15, page
10-13).
Step 4. Determine the number of cable clips required to secure one
end of the master cable.

Number of clips = ( 3C D ) + 1

where
CD = cable diameter, in inches
Step 5. Determine the spacing of the cable clips.

Clip spacing = 6C D

where
CD = cable diameter, in inches

Bridging 10-11
 Table 10-14. Size and number of master cables (CD) for float bridges
FM 5-34

Bridge- Cable Sizes (in) and Numbers for Specified River Velocities
Wet-Gap
Assembly
Width (G) 1.5 MPS (5 fps) 2.1 MPS (7 fps) 2.7 MPS (9 fps) 3.4 MPS (11 fps)
Type
(ft)

10-12 Bridging
Single Dual Triple Single Dual Triple Single Dual Triple Single Dual Triple

200 Normal 0.500 0.375 0.375 0.625 0.500 0.500 0.750 0.625 0.500 0.875 0.750 0.625
Rein- 0.625 0.500 0.375 0.750 0.625 0.500 0.875 0.750 0.625 1.125 0.875 0.750
forced
400 Normal 0.625 0.500 0.500 0.750 0.625 0.500 1.000 0.875 0.625 1.250 1.000 0.750
Rein- 0.750 0.625 0.500 1.000 0.750 0.625 1.250 1.000 0.750 1.500 1.250 0.875
forced
600 Normal 0.750 0.625 0.500 1.000 0.750 0.625 1.250 1.000 0.750 1.500 1.250 0.875
Rein- 1.000 0.750 0.625 1.125 1.000 0.750 1.500 1.250 0.875 * 1.500 1.125
forced
800 Normal 0.875 0.750 0.625 1.125 0.875 0.750 1.375 1.125 0.875 * 1.500 1.125
Rein- 1.125 0.875 0.750 1.375 1.125 0.875 * 1.375 1.000 * * 1.250
forced
1,000 Normal 1.000 0.875 0.750 1.250 1.000 0.875 1.500 1.375 1.000 * * 1.250
Rein- 1.250 1.000 0.750 1.500 1.250 1.000 * * 1.125 * * 1.750
forced
1,200 Normal 1.125 0.875 0.750 1.375 1.125 0.875 * 1.500 1.125 * * 1.375
Rein- 1.375 1.125 0.875 * 1.375 1.000 * * 1.250 * * *
forced

NOTE: All values are based on IPS cable and a 2 percent initial sag.
* It is unsafe to construct this system.
 Table 10-15. Weight and breaking strengths for common cables (cable capacity)

Cable
0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.125 1.250 1.625 1.500
Diameter

Weight (lb per

0.203 0.400 0.630 0.900 1.230 1.600 2.030 2.500 3.030 3.600
Foot)

Type of Cable Breaking strength (lb)

IPS 10,000 17,000 26,200 37,400 50,800 66,000 83,000 102,000 123,000 145,000

MPS 11,000 18,800 28,800 41,200 56,000 73,000 92,000 113,000 136,000 161,000

Plough steel 12,600 21,600 33,200 47,400 64,400 84,000 106,000 130,000 157,000 185,000

NOTES:
1. The strength varies slightly with the strand construction and the number of strands.
2. The strength varies approximately with the square of the diameter of the cable; for example, a 3/4-inch cable is 4
times as strong as a 3/8-inch cable made of the same materials; see the equation below:
2 2
 3--- +  3--- = 4
 4  8
FM 5-34

Bridging 10-13
FM 5-34

Step 6. Determine the initial sag.

S = 0.02 ( L )

where
S = sag, in feet
L = distance between towers, in feet

Tower Data
Step 7. Determine the tower height (H). Do this calculation for
the near shore (NS) and far shore (FS) since bank heights may be
different.

H R = 3 feet + S – BH

where
HR = required tower height, in feet
S = sag, in feet
BH = bank height, in feet
After determining HR, use Table 10-16, which lists actual tower
heights, and select the smallest possible tower that is greater than
or equal to HR.
NOTE: If the NS and FS towers have different heights,
calculate for each in steps 9 through 16.

Table 10-16. Tower heights

Number of Tower Sections Tower Height (H)

Cap, base, and pivot unit 3 feet 8 1/4 inches

With 1 tower section 14 feet 6 1/4 inches

With 2 tower sections 25 feet 4 1/4 inches

With 3 tower sections 36 feet 2 1/4 inches

With 4 tower sections 47 feet 1/4 inch

With 5 tower sections 57 feet 10 1/4 inches

With 6 tower sections 68 feet 8 1/4 inches

10-14 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Step 8. Determine the distance from each tower to the waterline.

Calculate for the NS and FS.
L–G
A = -------------
2
where
A = distance from each tower to the waterline, in feet
L = distance between towers, in feet
G = gap width, in feet
Step 9. Determine the offset from each tower to the ridge centerline.
Calculate for the NS and FS.

O1 = H + 50 feet (if BH is less than or equal to 15 feet)

or

O 1 = H + BH + 35 inches (if BH is greater than 15 feet)

where
O1 = offset from tower to ridge centerline, in feet
H = actual tower height, in feet
BH = bank height, in feet
Deadman Data
Step 10. Identify the deadman dimensions. Select a deadman from
the available timbers and logs. Generally, you would select the
timber with the largest timber face/log diameter.
Df ________________
Dt ________________
where
Df = largest face of deadman, in feet
Dt = deadman thickness, in feet
Step 11. Determine the mean depth of a deadman. Make sure that
at least 1 foot of undisturbed soil is between the bottom of the
deadman and the groundwater level (GWL). Calculate for the
deepest a deadman can be; calculate for NS and FS.
D
D Dmax = GWL – 1 ft – -----f
2
where
DDmax = maximum depth of deadman, in feet
GWL = groundwater-level depth, in feet
Df = deadman face, in feet

Bridging 10-15
FM 5-34

Compare D Dmax to the minimum depth (3 feet) and maximum

depth (7 feet) to determine the actual mean depth of a deadman
(DD).
Step 12. Determine the length of a deadman. Calculate for NS
and FS.
CC
D L = -------------------- + 1
HP × D f
where
DL = deadman length, in feet
CC = capacity of anchorage cable, in lb/1,000 (see Table 10-17)
HP = required holding power (HP), in lb/sq ft (see Table 10-18)
Df = deadman face, in feet (for log deadman, use log’s diameter)

Table 10-17. Anchorage-cable capacities

Cable Size (inches) (CD)
Cable
Type
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 1/2

IPS 12.6 21.6 33.2 47.4 64.4 84 106 130 157 185
PS 11 18.8 28.8 41.2 56 73 92 113 136 161
MPS 10 17 26.2 37.4 50.8 66 83 102 123 145

Table 10-18. Required HP (lb/sq ft)

Deadman Tower to Deadman Slope (ratio)

Depth (ft) 1:1 1:2 1:3 1:4
(DD)
(45o) (26.5o) (18.5o) (14o)
3 0.95 1.3 1.45 1.5
4 1.75 2.2 2.60 2.7
5 2.80 3.6 4.00 4.1
6 3.80 5.1 5.80 6.0
7 5.10 7.0 8.00 8.4
NOTES:
1. For hardpan or rock, multiply HP by 5.
2. For fine-grained soils with high moisture content, multi-
ply HP by 1/2.
3. For this table, assume loamy soil.

Step 13. Check the minimum thickness of deadman for timber and
logs. Calculate for NS and FS.

D
------L for timber, must be less than or equal to 0
Dt

10-16 Bridging
 FM 5-34

DL
------ for logs, must be less than or equal to 5
d
where
DL = deadman length, in feet
Dt = deadman thickness, in feet
d = log diameter, in feet
Step 14. Determine the tower-to-deadman distance. Calculate for
NS and FS.
H+D
C = -----------------D-
slope
where
C = distance from the tower to the deadman, in feet
H = actual tower height, in feet
DD = mean depth of deadman, in feet
slope = tower-to-deadman slope
Step 15. Determine the tower-to-deadman offset. Calculate for NS
and FS.
O 2 = C ( O2 ft )
where
O2 = tower-to-deadman offset, in feet
C = tower-to-deadman distance, in feet
O2 ft = a factor determined from Table 10-19.

Table 10-19. O2 ft factor

Current Velocity
Assembly
Type
3 fps 5 fps 7 fps 9 fps 11 fps

Normal 0.09 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.19

Reinforced 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.19 0.23

Step 16. Design a bearing plate for each deadman. Given the
deadman face (Df) or log diameter (d) and the size of the master cable
(C D ), use Table 10-20, page 10-18, to determine the length (y),
thickness (x), and face (z) of the deadman bearing plate. The values
in Table 10-20 and Table 10-21, page 10-19, are based on the use of
IPS cable.

Bridging 10-17
FM 5-34

Table 10-20. Flat bearing-plate dimensions

Cable Size (CD) (inches)

Deadman
Face (Df)
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/2

x 7/16 7/8 1 1/4

8 y 4 8 11
z 6 6 6
x 7/16 11/16 1 1 3/8
10 y 4 6 9 12
z 8 8 8 8
x 7/16 9/16 13/16 1 1/8 1 7/16
12 y 4 5 7 10 13
z 10 10 10 10 10
x 7/16 7/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/4 1 9/16 2
14 y 4 4 6 8 11 14 18
z 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
x 7/16 7/16 9/16 13/16 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 11/16 2 1/8
16 y 4 4 5 7 10 12 15 19
z 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
x 7/16 7/16 7/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/4 1 9/16 1 13/16
18 y 4 4 4 6 8 11 14 16
z 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
x 7/16 7/16 7/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 11/16
20 y 4 4 4 6 8 10 12 15
z 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
x 7/16 7/16 7/16 9/16 11/16 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 7/8
24 y 4 4 4 5 6 8 10 12 17
z 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22

Df

x
y

10-18 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Table 10-21. L-shaped flat bearing-plate dimensions

Cable Size (CD) (inches)

Deadman
Face (Df)
3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 1/2

x 1/8 3/16
6
y 4 7
x 1/8 1/8 3/16
8
y 3 5 8
x 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4
10
y 2 4 7 10
x 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4
12
y 2 4 6 8 11
x 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 5/16
14
y 2 3 5 7 9 12 15
x 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8
16
y 2 2 4 6 8 11 14 17
x 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 1/4
18
y 2 2 4 6 7 10 12 15
x 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 3/16 3/8
20
y 2 2 3 5 7 9 11 13 19
x 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4
24
y 2 2 3 4 6 8 9 11 16
x 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8
30
y 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 13
x 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8
36
y 2 2 2 3 4 5 6 8 10

55Df

y Df

Bridging 10-19
FM 5-34

MEDIUM GIRDER BRIDGE (MGB)

See TM 5-5420-212-12 for information on component descriptions,
construction, palletizing, and maintenance procedures for the MGB
and TM 5-5420-212-12-1 for information on the link-reinforcement
set (LRS). The following list of abbreviations are used in the text,
figures, and tables on the MGB:

Abbreviation Meaning
A edge of the gap, far bank (FB)
A’ edge of the gap, near bank (NB)
AA anchor assembly
AA(L) long link of the anchor assembly
AA(S) short link of the anchor assembly
AF antiflutter tackle
AR angle of repose which is marked on-site with A and A’
AR gap distance from A’ to A
BES bridge-erection set
boom marker carrying bar (painted orange) which marks the position of the next
booming/ launching point
BP building pedestal (SS only), baseplate (SS and DS)
BSP bank-seat beam
C distance of the water below the line joining the FRB and the final posi-
tion of the far end of the bridge as marked with the F peg (F) at dis-
tance of end taper panel from the FRB, for maximum deflection (W)
from the FRB (negative), fine for up to 2 end of bridge (E)+12; need a
CRB for 13 through 22 bays.
CG marker carrying bar (painted blue) which marks the center of gravity of the
bridge during construction
CRB capsill roller beam: must be used for 2E +13 through 2E +22 bays DS
bridges w/ or w/o LRS
D deflection of bridge during launch in relation to line joining FRB and F
pegs
DS double-story bridge construction
DU deck unit
E end of the bridge
F final position of the far end of the bridge as marked with the F peg
FRB front roller beam
G distance between the O peg and the baseline
H far-bank height at F peg, relative to the baseline
Ht height
L bridge length
LLN light launching nose
LNCG launching-nose cross girder

10-20 Bridging
C1p10-21-24.fm Page 21 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:28 PM

FM 5-34

Abbreviation Meaning
LNH launching nose, heavy
LR landing roller: used by itself for 4 through 8 bays, SS; used in the LRP
for all other bridge lengths.
LRD long ramp-deck pallet; the last pallet to be used on a bridge site should
be loaded on the push vehicle to maintain a proper counterweight.
LRP landing-roller pedestal (MK 1 for 2E + 1 through 2E + 12 bays DS,
MK2 for 2E + 13 through 2E + 22 bays DS w/ or w/o LRS)
LRS link-reinforcing set
LT light tackle
LZ landing zone
MLC military load classification
N nose-tip height above the baseline
*N1 launching-nose, heavy, one-story high
**N2 launching-nose, heavy, two-stories high
O distance R from the RB (SS), FRB (DS), and CRB (DS w/ or w/o LRS)
as marked with the O peg
PT post-tensioning assembly
R maximum distance to the rear of the bridge during construction
(excluding the push bar and vehicle)
RB roller beam
RRB rear roller beam
SS single-story bridge construction
T height of the home bank end of the bridge in relation to the baseline
V for delaunching purposes, the distance from the FRB or CRB to the
LRP for DS bridges requiring a launching nose
W distance of the end-taper panel from the FRB, for maximum deflection
WL waterline
1LL one long link
1SL one short link
*6N1, 7N1, and SS nose construction: the first number shows the number of heavy
8N1 nose sections used, N1= single nose.
**6N1 + 3N2 DS nose construction: 6N1, same as above; 3N2 means three heavy
nose sections used in the second story; N2 means nose, DS
2+3+ or 8 through number of bays to add: 2 + 3 + means add bays 2 and 3; 8 through 10
10 means add bays 8 through 10.
Boom to movement of the bridge until the panel point given is over the RB (for
SS) or the RRB (for DS)
Launch to movement of the bridge until the panel point given is over the RB,
FRB, or CRB.
3D, 8D, 20D, 27D counterweight codes giving the number of deck units and curbs
+6C, and 37D+6C required
(4pO), (2p4), and examples of the way that the center of gravity is shown
(Bp3)

Bridging 10-21
C1p10-21-24.fm Page 22 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:28 PM

C1, FM 5-34

MGB DESIGN SS, 4 THROUGH 12 BAYS

Step 1. Measure the AR gap: A to A’ = ______meters.
Use Table 10-22, columns a and b, for MLCs 30 through 70 and
Table 10-23, columns a and b, for MLCs 16 through 24.

Table 10-22. Dimensions for SS bridges, 4 through 8 bays

a c d e f
b
AR Gap Number Bridge R Distance Nose
MLC
Ranges (m) of Bays Length (m) (m) Construction

3.7 to 7.1 70* 4 7.9 5.8 LLN only

5.6 to 9.0 70* 5 9.8 6.7 LLN only

7.3 to 10.8 40 6 11.6 7.6 LLN only

9.1 to 12.6 30 7 13.4 9.5 LLN only

11.0 to 14.4 30 8 15.2 11.3 LLN only

*See step 7.

Table 10-23. Dimensions for SS bridges, 9 through 12 bays

a c d e f
b
AR Gap Number Bridge R Distance Nose
MLC
Ranges (m) of Bays Length (m) (m) Construction

12.9 to 16.3 24 9 17.1 10.4 5N1

14.6 to 18.1 20 10 18.9 12.2 5N1

16.5 to 19.9 16 11 20.7 12.2 6N1

18.3 to 21.7 16 12 22.6 14.0 6N1

Step 2. Select the number of bays from column c = ________.

Step 3. Select the bridge length from column d = ________meters.
Step 4. Select the R distance from column e = ________meters.
Step 5. Select the nose construction from column f = ________ (see
Figure 10-2 and Figure 10-3, page 10-24).
Step 6. See Figures 10-4 and 10-5, pages 10-24 and 10-25, for key
construction points, dimensions, and elevations for a push launch
and a jack launch.

10-22 Bridging
C1p10-21-24.fm Page 23 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:28 PM

C1, FM 5-34

F peg
(See note 3)
A peg (near bank)

AR gap

A’ peg (near bank)

x (see notes 1 and 2)

1.66 m 1.66 m Roller-beam
baseplates

2.7 m
(for 4-8 bays)
1.5 m
Building
pedestals
R (for 9-12 bays)

O peg

F peg

H N Baseline O peg
RB
R

NOTES:
1. Push launch:
x = (L + 0.23 m) - (AR gap + 0.4 m)
2. Jack launch:
x = (L - 0.23 m) -(AR gap + 0.4 m)
3. Maximum bearing (each end) 2.1 m
Minimum bearing (each end) 0.4 m
4. Push launches are to be performed only in an actual wartime
bridge operation. They are no longer performed for training or
demonstration.

Figure 10-2. SS MGB site layout (4 through 12 bays)

Bridging 10-23
C1p10-21-24.fm Page 24 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:28 PM

FM 5-34

AR gap
A A’
A peg peg

Prepared 45° AR
abutment x

A AR gap A’
B peg peg

Prepared 45°
x
abutment

A AR gap
A’
C peg peg
45°
Prepared Toe of slope
x
abutment

NOTES:
1. If the actual slope of the bank does not exceed 45o from the horizontal, place
A, A’ peg as shown in A or B.
2. If the actual slope of the bank does exceed 45o from the horizontal, place A,
A’ peg a distance equal to the height of the bank, which is measured from
the toe of slope (see example C above, distance x).
3. The gaps above are shown with one prepared and one unprepared
abutment. The actual sites may be any combination of the examples shown.

Figure 10-3. Measuring AR gap

__ __
0.0 Elev
Elev Elev
F A A’ F’ O
RB

AR gap
(x)
m
(R distance)

Min 0.4 m Min 0.4 m For push launch, RB is positioned

0.23 m behind F’.
Max 2.1 m Max 2.1 m
m m

(Enter actual bearing above)

Figure 10-4. Construction elements for a push launch

10-24 Bridging
 FM 5-34

__ __
0.0 Elev
Elev Elev
F A A’ F’ O
RB

AR gap
(x)
m
(Rdist)

Min 0.4 m Min 0.4 m For jack launch, RB is positioned

0.23 m in front of F’.
Max 2.1 m Max 2.1 m
m m

(Enter actual bearing above)

Figure 10-5. Construction elements for a jack launch

Step 7. Check the slope. For longitudinal slope, ensure that the
difference in elevation between the F’ (use elevation of the RB) and F
peg does not exceed 1/10th of the total bridge length. If it does, you
are going to have to crib up, undertake a major construction project,
or find another site. For a transverse/cross slope, ensure that the
transverse slope on both banks does not exceed 1/10th of the total
bridge width (4 meters) for an MLC of 61 and over.
Step 8. Calculate H (for later comparison against N) (see Figure 10-6).
For a push launch
elev O (L + 0.23 meter)
H = elev F + --------------------------------------------------------- = ______
R dist

H N
Baseline through ground at RB
extended to F and O
T

F A’ F’ O
A
RB Rdist
L

Figure 10-6. Calculating H to compare against N

Bridging 10-25
FM 5-34

For a jack launch

elev O (L - 0.23 meter)
H = elev F + ------------------------------------------------------- = _______
R dist
Step 9. Determine an RB setup and packing, if required. For 4
through 8 bays, choose an RB setup and/or packing, if required, to
give N>H (see Table 10-24). For 9 through 12 bays, choose an RB
setup, an LNCG setting, and/or packing, if required (see Table 10-
25). Use the guidelines below:
• You can get an extra 75 millimeters of clearance by lifting the
nose to take out the pin sag (4 through 8 bays). If you estimate
the levels, you do not have to consider this during the design, but
you must compensate for any errors when calculating the value of
H.
• You can get an extra 0.6 meters of clearance by lifting the nose to
take out the pin sag (for bridges 9 through 12 bays).
• Placing extra packing under the RB will increase the vertical-lift
interval N by three times the thickness of the packing (for
example, if the packing is 75-millimeters thick, N would increase
by 225 millimeters).
• Table 10-25 incorporates an allowance to ensure that the nose
clears the LR when it is placed 230 millimeters in front of the F
peg.
• The height of the RB on the baseplate is only 0.43 meter. The
height of the baseplate and deck unit is 0.69 meter.

Table 10-24. RB setup and packing

g h
Number of Bays N (m) N (m)
BP BP + DU

4 1.30 1.98
5 1.14 1.91
6 1.07 1.83
7 0.76 1.14
8 0.38 1.07
NOTE: Read right from number of bays until N>H.
Then read up to select the RB setup and/or packing, if
required.

Step 10. Calculate the number of truck and trailers needed to haul
bridge components (see Table 10-26).
Truck________Trailer________

10-26 Bridging
C1p10-27-28.fm Page 27 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:46 PM

FM 5-34

Table 10-25. RB setup and packing (LNCG setting)

SS Bridges, 9 Through 12 Bays

LNCG Setting #4 Black LNCG Setting #2 Black LNCG Setting #1 Black

Number
of Bays g h g h g h
BP (m) BP + DU (m) BP (m) BP + DU (m) BP (m) BP + DU (m)
9 -0.76 0.15 0.61 1.37 1.83 2.59
10 -0.99 -0.38 0.38 0.9 1.60 2.21
11 -1.37 -0.84 0.15 0.71 1.83 2.67
12 -2.13 -1.37 -0.46 0.31 1.07 1.83
NOTE: Use an LNCG setting so that N>H and T>G.

Table 10-26. SS pallet loads

Pallet Number of Bays

Type 4 to 5 6 to 7 8 to 9 10 to 12
Erection 1 1 1 1
Bridge 1 2 3 4
Total 2 3 4 5
NOTE: Additional vehicles are required to transport
personnel. Erection pallets may only be partial,
depending on the bridge being built.

Step 11. Determine the manpower and time required to accomplish

the mission (see Table 10-27).

Table 10-27. Manpower and time requirements

a b c d
Manpower and Time 4 to 5 Bays 6 to 8 Bays 9 to 12 Bays

Working party 1+8 1 + 16 1 + 16

Time during daylight (hours) 1/2 3/4 1

Time during darkness 3/4 1 1 1/4

(hours)

PROCEDURE:
Add 20 percent for unskilled personnel.
Add 30 percent for inclement weather.
Add 30 percent for adverse site conditions.
Calculate all timings consecutively.
Exclude any work on approaches.

Bridging 10-27
C1p10-27-28.fm Page 28 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:46 PM

C1, FM 5-34

Step 12. Identify the final bridge design.

• Number of bays_____
• LNCG setting_____
• Setup of roller beam and packing_____
• Bearings: NB_____FB_____
• Total loads: Trucks_____Trailers_____
• Work party_____
• Total time_____: Day_____Night_____

MGB DESIGNDS, 2E + 1 THROUGH 12 BAYS

Step 1. Measure the AR gap: A to A’ = _________meters; see Table
10-28, column a.
Step 2. Select the number of bays from column c = 2E+________.
Step 3. Select the bridge length from column d = ________meters.
Step 4. Select the R distance from column e = ________meters.
Step 5. Select the nose construction from column f = ________.

Table 10-28. Dimensions for DS, 2E + 1 through 12 bays

a c d e f
b
Gap Ranges Number of Bridge R Distance Nose
MLC*
(m) Bays Length (m) (m) Construction

6.4 to 9.0 70 (T) 1 11.0 10.0 2N1

8.2 to 10.8 70 (T) 2 12.8 11.9 3N1

10.0 to 12.6 70 (T) 3 14.6 12.2 3N1

11.9 to 14.5 70 (T) 4 16.5 13.1 3N1

13.7 to 16.3 70 (T) 5 18.3 14.9 4N1

15.5 to 18.4 70 (T) 6 20.1 14.9 4N1

17.3 to 19.9 70 (T) 7 21.9 15.8 4N1

19.2 to 21.8 70 (T) 8 23.8 16.8 5N1

21.0 to 23.6 70 (T) 9 25.6 17.7 5N1

22.8 to 25.4 70 (T) 10 27.4 19.5 5N1

24.7 to 27.3 70 (T) 11 29.3 20.4 6N1

26.5 to 29.1 70 (T) 12 31.1 21.6 6N1

*See step 7. (T) = Tracked

10-28 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Step 6. Calculate the FB and NB bearings as follows (assume the FB

bearing to be 0.6 meter)(see Figure 10-7):

NB = L - AR gap - FB bearing

X = NB bearing - 0.5 meter

L= m 4.6 m
0.5 m minimum

m A A’ m m m
AR gap = m Elev Elev
Elev Elev
F FRB RRB O
C
L
Min 0.6 m X=
m Rdist = m

Max 2.3 m WL
elev = m Min 1.4 m
m NOTE: Bank heights Max 2.3 m
above flowing water or
obstructions in the gap
FB bearing should be a minimum m
of 0.6 m.
NB bearing

Figure 10-7. Constructing NB and FB bearings (DS, 2E + 1 through 12 bays)

Step 7. Check the slope. For longitudinal slope, ensure that the
difference in elevation between the F’ (use elevation of the FRB) and
F peg does not exceed 1/10 of the total bridge length. If it does, you
will either crib it up, undertake a major construction project, or find
another site. For a transverse/cross slope, ensure that the transverse
slope on both banks does not exceed 1/10th of the total bridge width
(4 meters), regardless of the MLC.
Step 8. Calculate H, G, and C (for later comparison against N, T,
and D) (see Figure 10-8, page 10-30).
elev RRB (L - 0.5 meter)
H = elev F + ---------------------------------------------------------- = _______
4.6 meters
elev RRB ( R dist )
G = elev O – -------------------------------------
- = ________
4.6 meters
elev F ( W dist )
C = elev WL – ------------------------------------ = ________
( L – 0.5 meter )

Bridging 10-29
FM 5-34

Wdist

FRB D C
NOTE: The bank height above the F peg
flowing water or obstructions in
the gap should be a minimum of Waterline
0.6 m for all DS MGBs.

O peg

T G H N
RRB FRB Baseline

Rdist

Figure 10-8. Calculating H, G, and C to compare against N, T, and D

Step 9. Identify the LNCG using Table 10-29. If the LNCG is

allowed, see columns h, i, and j.

Table 10-29. Rule 1 for LNCG, 2E + 1 through 12 bays

D: Given LNCG Settings With FRB and RRB in Low Position
2E+ Number
of Bays g h i j
W Distance #6 Yellow #4 Yellow #2 Yellow
1 to 6 - - - -
7 13.1 0.70 0.31 -0.09
8 15.0 0.67 0.25 -0.20
9 16.5 0.64 0.21 -0.30
10 17.6 0.60 0.12 -0.40
11 18.5 0.50 0.04 -0.43
12 19.2 0.46 -0.06 -0.58
PROCEDURE:
• Go to Table 10-30 if D is > C.
• Go to Table 10-30 if D is not > C and water is not flowing.
• Choose another site if D is not > C and the current velocity is 5 mph.
• Do not adjust the LCNG setting if D is not >C and immersion in water is < 0.3 meter and
the current velocity is < 5 MPS. Go to Table 10-31.
• Go to Table 10-31, if both bank heights are > 0.6 meter (depth) from centerline.
• Choose an LNCG setting that ensures that the value of D (from FRB/F line to the point of
maximum deflection) is greater than the depth of C (from FRB/F to WL).

Step 10. Choose the LNCG setting so N>H and T>G; use Table
10-30 (rule 2).
Step 11. Identify N and T using Table 10-31.
Step 12. Identify N using Table 10-32, page 10-32, rule 4A.

10-30 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Table 10-30. Rule 2 for LNCG, 2E + 1 through 12 bays

N: Given LNCG Settings With FRB and RRB in Low
2E+ PositionDS Bridges
Number
of Bays k l m n
#6 Yellow #4 Yellow #2 Yellow Tail Lift
1 1.02 1.48 2.04 0.55
2 0.89 1.53 2.30 0.55
3 0.86 1.50 2.28 0.55
4 0.81 1.45 2.23 0.55
5 0.70 1.52 2.51 0.52
6 0.65 1.48 2.47 0.52
7 0.53 1.36 2.36 0.52
8 0.49 1.48 2.69 0.46
9 0.33 1.35 2.55 0.46
10 0.25 1.28 2.49 0.46
11 0.16 1.23 2.63 0.40
12 -0.20 1.02 2.47 0.40
PROCEDURE:
• Use an LCNG setting so that N>H and T>G.
• Choose an LNCG setting so that N>H; see columns k, l, and m.
• Choose the highest value available if none of the choices meet the cri-
terion. Read right from number of bays, then up to determine the
LNCG number.
• Record N and T: N = _____ T = _____ (column n).
• Record LNCG setting:___ (setting cannot be lower than setting from
rule 1).
• Go to Table 10-31 if N < H.
• Go to Step 14 if N > H.

Table 10-31. Rule 3 for N and T, 2E + 1 through 12 bays

2E+ o p
Number of Bays N T

1 to 4 N = N (Table 10-30) + 0.69 m 1.24

5 to 7 N = N (Table 10-30) + 0.69 m 1.21
8 to 10 N = N (Table 10-30) + 0.69 m 1.15
11 to 12 N = N (Table 10-30) + 0.69 m 1.09
PROCEDURE:
• Raise the FRB and RRB by 0.69 meter. Both roller beams are now
in the highest position.
• Determine N:_______ N = N (Table 10-30) + 0.69 meter.
• Check to see if T>G: T = __________
• Go to step 14 if N>H and T>G; the design is correct.
• Go to Table 10-32, page 10-32, (rule 4A) if N < H.
• Go to Table 10-32 (rule 4B) if T < G.

Bridging 10-31
FM 5-34

Table 10-32. Rules 4A and 4B for N and T, 2E + 1 through 12 bays

Rule 4A Lowering RRB to Increase N Rule 4BLowering FRB to Increase T

q r
2E+
N T
Number of Bays
FRB in High RRB in High

1 to 4 1.75 (1.24 - G) 0.2 (N [Table 10-31] - H)

5 to 7 1.75 (1.21 - G) 0.2 (N [Table 10-31] - H)

8 to 10 1.75 (1.15 - G) 0.2 (N [Table 10-31] - H)

11 to 12 1.75 (1.09 - G) 0.2 (N [Table 10-31] - H)

PROCEDURE:
• Determine N:_____ N = N (Table 10-31, page 10-31) + answer to column q.
• Go to step 14 if N>H.
• Consider another site or additional packing if N<H.

Step 13. Identify T using Table 10-32 (rule 4B). Lower the FRB to
the low position; the RRB will remain in the high position.

T = T (Table 10-31) + answer from Table 10-32 column r. = _______

If T>G, go to step 14.

Step 14. Determine the required truck and trailer loads using
Table 10-33.
Truck______Trailer______

Table 10-33. DS pallet loads, 1 through 12 bays

Pallet Number of Bays

Type 1 to 3 4 to 6 7 to 9 10 to 12

Erection 1 1 1 1

Bridge 4 5 6 7

Total 5 6 7 8

NOTE: Additional vehicles are required to transport

personnel. Erection pallets may only be partial,
depending on the bridge being built.

10-32 Bridging
C1p10-33-34.fm Page 33 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:47 PM

FM 5-34

Step 15. Determine the manpower and time required to accomplish

the mission (see Table 10-34).

Table 10-34. Manpower and time requirements, 1 through 12 bays

a b c d
Manpower and Time 1 to 4 Bays 5 to 8 Bays 9 to 12 Bays

Working party 1 + 24 1 + 24 1 + 24
Time during daylight (hours) 3/4 1 1 1/2
Time during darkness 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
(hours)
PROCEDURE:
• Add 20 percent for unskilled personnel.
• Add 30 percent for inclement weather.
• Add 30 percent for adverse site conditions.
• Calculate all timings consecutively.

Step 16. Identify the final bridge design.

• 2E + _____bays
• LNCG setting_____
• FRB setting _____
• RRB setting_____
• Bearings: NB____FB_____
• Total loads_____: Trucks_____ Trailers_____
• Total time_____: Day _____ Night _____

MGB DESIGNDS, 2E + 13 THROUGH 22 BAYS (W/O LRS)

Step 1. Measure AR gap: A to A’ = _________meters; see Table 10-35
(page 10-34), column a.
Step 2. Select the number of bays from column c = 2E+________.
Step 3. Select bridge length from column d = ________meters.
Step 4. Select R distance from column e = ________meters.
Step 5. Select nose construction from column f = ________.
Step 6. Calculate the FB and NB bearings as follows (assume the FB
bearing to be 0.6 meter)(see Figure 10-9, page 10-34):

NB = L - AR gap - FB bearing

X = NB bearing - 0.5 meter

10-33
C1p10-33-34.fm Page 34 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:47 PM

C1, FM 5-34

Table 10-35. DS dimensions, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS

a c d e f
b
Gap Number of Bridge R Distance Nose
MLC*
Ranges (m) Bays Length (m) (m) Construction

28.3 to 30.9 60(T) 13 32.9 27.7 6N1

30.2 to 32.8 50 14 34.8 29.0 7N1

32.0 to 34.6 40 15 36.6 29.0 7N1

33.8 to 36.4 40 16 38.4 29.6 7N1

35.6 to 38.2 30 17 40.2 29.6 8N1

37.5 to 40.1 30 18 42.1 29.6 8N1

39.3 to 41.9 24 19 43.9 35.1 6N1 + 3N2

41.1 to 43.7 24 20 45.7 38.7 6N1 + 3N2

43.0 to 45.3 20 21 47.6 38.7 6N1 + 3N2

44.8 to 47.4 16 22 49.4 40.5 6N1 + 3N2

*See step 7. (T) = Tracked

L= m 4.6 m

m A A’ 0.0 m m m
Elev AR gap = m Elev Elev
Elev
F CRB F’ FRB RRB O
C
L
X= 9.1 m
Min 0.6 m m Rdist = m

Max 2.3 m WL
elev = m Min 1.4 m

m Max 2.3 m

FB bearing m

NB bearing

Figure 10-9. Constructing NB and FB bearings, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o

LRS

10-34
 FM 5-34

Step 7. Check the slope. For longitudinal slope, ensure that the
difference in elevation between the F’ peg (use the elevation of the
CRB) and the F peg does not exceed 1/10th of the total bridge length.
If it does, you will either crib it up, undertake a major construction
project, or find another bridge site. For a transverse/cross slope,
ensure that the transverse slope on both of the banks does not exceed
1/10th of the total bridge width (4 meters) on both banks, regardless
of the MLC.
Step 8. Calculate H and G (for later comparison against N and T)
(see Figure 10-10):
elev RRB (L - 0.5 meter)
H = elev F + ---------------------------------------------------------- = ________
13.7 meters
elev RRB (R distance)
G = elev O – ---------------------------------------------------- = ________
13.7 meters

O peg

G H N
T
RRB FRB CRB Baseline

Figure 10-10. Calculating H and G to compare against N and T (2E + 13

through 22 bays w/o LRS)

Step 9. Identify the LNCG using Table 10-36, page 10-36, so that
N>H and T>G. The CRB and RRB are in the low position.
Step 10. Identify N and T using Table 10-37, page 10-36. Raise the
CRB and RRB by 0.25 meter. The CRB and RRB are in the high
position.
Step 11. Identify N using Table 10-38, page 10-37, (rule 3A). Lower
the RRB; the CRB is in the high position.

N = N (Rule 2) + answer to column m = ________

If N>H, go to step 13; the design is correct.

Step 12. Identify T using Table 10-38 (rule 3B). Lower the CRB; the
RRB is in the high position.

T = T (rule 2) + answer to column n = _______

If T>G, go to step 13; the design is correct.

Bridging 10-35
FM 5-34

Table 10-36. Rule 1 for LNCG, 2E + 13 through 12 bays w/o LRS

D: Given LNCG Settings With the FRB and RRB in Low Position
2E+ Number
of Bays g h i j
#6 Yellow #4 Yellow #2 Yellow Tail Lift
13 -0.07 1.49 2.68 0.40
14 -0.38 1.00 2.65 0.37
15 -0.49 0.90 2.55 0.34
16 -0.61 0.79 2.43 0.30
17 -0.15 0.75 2.69 0.27
18 -1.33 0.54 2.54 0.21
19 -2.04 -0.19 1.72 0.21
20 -1.93 -0.31 1.61 0.21
21 -2.65 -0.52 1.17 0.18
22 -2.58 -0.68 1.04 0.15
• PROCEDURE:
• Choose an LNCG setting so that N>H and T>G. If none of the choices meet
the criterion, choose the highest setting available.
• Determine the LNCG setting: ______. See columns g, h, and i.
• Record N and T: N=_____ T=_____
• Check to see if T>G. See column j.
• Go to Table 10-37 if N<H and/or T<G. Go to step 13 if N>H, and T>G.
• Choose another site or prepare to dig out under the NB end of the bridge
before launching if T<G.

Table 10-37. Rule 2, identifying N, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS

2E+ Number of N: Raise CRB and RRB by 0.25 meter

Bays k l
13 2.93 0.65
14 2.90 0.62
15 2.80 0.59
16 2.68 0.55
17 2.94 0.52
18 2.79 0.49
19 1.97 0.46
20 1.86 0.46
21 1.42 0.43
22 1.29 0.40
PROCEDURE:
• Raise the CRB and RRB by 0.25 meter. Both are in the high
position.
• Check to see if N>H. See column k.
• Record N______
• Check to see if T>G. See column l.
• Record T:______
• Go to step 13 if N>H and T>G; the design is correct.
• Go to Table 10-38 (rule 3A) if N<H or to rule 3B if T<G.

10-36 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Table 10-38. Rule 3A and 3B for N and T, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS

Rule 3A Lowering RRB to Increase N Rule 3B Lowering CRB to Increase T

2E+ m n
Number of Bays N T

13 1.9 (0.82 - G) 0.2 (2.93 - H)

14 1.9 (0.79 - G) 0.2 (2.90 - H)

15 1.9 (0.76 - G) 0.2 (2.80 - H)

16 1.9 (0.72 - G) 0.2 (2.68 - H)

17 1.9 (0.69 - G) 0.2 (2.94 - H)

18 1.9 (0.66 - G) 0.2 (2.79 - H)

19 1.9 (0.63 - G) 0.2 (1.97 - H)

20 1.9 (0.63 - G) 0.2 (1.86 - H)

21 1.9 (0.60 - G) 0.2 (1.42 - H)

22 1.9 (0.57 - G) 0.2 (1.29 - H)

PROCEDURE:
• Determine N:_______; N = N (rule 2) + answer from column m, this table.
• Go to step 13 if N>H; the design is correct.
• Determine T:__________; T = T(rule 2) + answer from column n, this table.
• Go to step 13 if T>G; the design is correct.

Step 13. Determine the required truck and trailer loads using Table
10-39.
Truck______Trailer______

Table 10-39. DS pallet loads, 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS

Number of Bays
Pallet Type
13 to 15 16 to 18 19 to 21 22

Erection set 1 1 1 1

Bridge 8 9 10 11

Total 9 10 11 12

NOTE: Additional vehicles are required to transport

personnel.

Bridging 10-37
FM 5-34

Step 14. Determine the manpower and time required to

accomplish the mission (see Table 10-40).

Table 10-40. Manpower and time requirements, 13 through 22 bays w/o

LRS

a b c d
Manpower and Time 13 Bays 14 to 18 Bays 19 to 22 Bays

Working party 1 + 24 1 + 24 1 + 24
Time during daylight (hours) 1 1/2 1 3/4 2
Time during darkness (hours) 2 2 3/4 3
PROCEDURE:
• Add 20 percent for unskilled personnel.
• Add 30 percent for inclement weather.
• Add 30 percent for adverse site conditions.
• Calculate all timings consecutively.

Step 15. Identify the final bridge design.

• 2E + _____bays
• LNCG setting_____
• CRB setting _____
• RRB setting_____
• Bearings: NB__ __FB__ ___
• Total loads_____: Trucks_____ Trailers__ ___
• Work party______
• Total time _____: Day _____Night__ ___

MGB DESIGNDS, 2E + 13 THROUGH 22 BAYS (W/LRS)

Step 1. Measure the AR gap: A to A’ = ____meters; see Table 10-41,
column a.
Step 2. Select the number of bays from column c = 2E+________.
Step 3. Select the bridge length from column d = ________meters.
Step 4. Select the R distance from column e = ________meters.
Step 5. Select the nose construction from column f = ________.
Step 6. See Figure 10-11. Calculate the FB and NB bearings
using the following equation; Figure 10-12, page 10-40; and Table
10-42, page 10-40 (assume the FB bearing to be 0.5 meter):

NB bearing = L - AR gap - FB bearing

X = NB bearing - 0.5 meter

10-38 Bridging
C1p10-39-40.fm Page 39 Wednesday, January 31, 2001 9:53 AM

C1, FM 5-34

Table 10-41. Dimensions for DS, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/LRS

a c d e f
b
Gap Ranges Number of Bridge R Distance Nose
MLC*
(m) Bays Length (m) (m) Construction

28.3 to 30.9 70 (T) 13 32.9 27.7 7N1

30.2 to 32.8 70 (T) 14 34.8 29.0 7N1
32.0 to 34.1 70 (T) 15 36.6 29.0 7N1
33.8 to 36.4 70 (T) 16 38.4 29.6 8N1
35.6 to 38.2 70 (T) 17 40.2 29.6 8N1
37.5 to 40.1 70 (T) 18 42.1 29.6 6N1 + 3N2
39.3 to 41.9 70 (T) 19 43.9 35.1 6N1 + 3N2
41.1 to 43.7 70 (T) 20 45.7 38.7 6N1 + 3N2
43.0 to 45.1 70 (T) 21 47.6 38.7 6N1 + 3N2
44.8 to 46.2 70 (T) 22 49.4 40.5 6N1 + 3N2
*See step 7. (T) = Tracked

20°
A’ peg
No good
Old pier

4.5 m
A’ peg 20°
Good

Old pier

Link reinforced bridges

Bank heights above flowing water or obstructions in the gap should be a
minimum of 3.7 m. In addition, there must be no intrusion above a plane inclined
downward in the gap for a distance of 4.6 m from each AR peg.

Figure 10-11. Gap-rule obstructions

Bridging 10-39
C1p10-39-40.fm Page 40 Wednesday, January 31, 2001 9:53 AM

FM 5-34

4.6 m
L= m
0.6 m min

m A A’ 0.0 m m m
AR gap = m
Elev Elev Elev
Elev F
JRB F’ CRB FRB RRB O
C
See A to F in chart L 2.7 m 9.1 m Rdist = m
X= m
for min bearing
WL elev See A to F in
Max 2.3 m m chart for min
bearing
m Max 2.3 m
FB bearing m

NB bearing

Figure 10-12. Constructing NB and FB bearings (DS, 2E + 13 through 22

bays w/ LRS)

Table 10-42. Minimum distances

Number of Bays A to F (m) A’ to F’ (m)
13, 14, 16 through 20 0.6 1.4
15 1.1 1.4
21 1.14 1.4
22 1.6 1.4

Step 7. Check the slope. For the longitudinal slope, ensure that
the difference in elevation between the F (use elevation of CRB)
and F’ pegs does not exceed 1/20th of the total bridge length. If it
does, you will either crib it up, undertake a major construction
project, or find another bridge site. For a transverse/cross slope,
ensure that the transverse slope on both banks does not exceed 1/
20th of the total bridge width (4 meters).
Step 8. Calculate H and G (for later comparison against N and T)
(see Figure 10-13):

elev RRB (L - 0.5 meter)

H = elev F + ---------------------------------------------------------- = ________
13.7 meters

elev RRB (R distance)

G = elev O – ---------------------------------------------------- = ________
13.7 meters

Step 9. Identify the LNCG setting by using Table 10-43

10-40 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Step 7. Check the slope. For longitudinal slope, ensure that the
difference in elevation between the F’ peg (use the elevation of the
CRB) and the F peg does not exceed 1/10th of the total bridge length.
If it does, you will either crib it up, undertake a major construction
project, or find another bridge site. For a transverse/cross slope,
ensure that the transverse slope on both of the banks does not exceed
1/10th of the total bridge width (4 meters) on both banks, regardless
of the MLC.
Step 8. Calculate H and G (for later comparison against N and T)
(see Figure 10-10):
elev RRB (L - 0.5 meter)
H = elev F + ---------------------------------------------------------- = ________
13.7 meters
elev RRB (R distance)
G = elev O – ---------------------------------------------------- = ________
13.7 meters

O peg

G H N
T
RRB FRB CRB Baseline

Figure 10-10. Calculating H and G to compare against N and T (2E + 13

through 22 bays w/o LRS)

Step 9. Identify the LNCG using Table 10-36, page 10-36, so that
N>H and T>G. The CRB and RRB are in the low position.
Step 10. Identify N and T using Table 10-37, page 10-36. Raise the
CRB and RRB by 0.25 meter. The CRB and RRB are in the high
position.
Step 11. Identify N using Table 10-38, page 10-37, (rule 3A). Lower
the RRB; the CRB is in the high position.

N = N (Rule 2) + answer to column m = ________

If N>H, go to step 13; the design is correct.

Step 12. Identify T using Table 10-38 (rule 3B). Lower the CRB; the
RRB is in the high position.

T = T (rule 2) + answer to column n = _______

If T>G, go to step 13; the design is correct.

Bridging 10-35
FM 5-34

Table 10-36. Rule 1 for LNCG, 2E + 13 through 12 bays w/o LRS

D: Given LNCG Settings With the FRB and RRB in Low Position
2E+ Number
of Bays g h i j
#6 Yellow #4 Yellow #2 Yellow Tail Lift
13 -0.07 1.49 2.68 0.40
14 -0.38 1.00 2.65 0.37
15 -0.49 0.90 2.55 0.34
16 -0.61 0.79 2.43 0.30
17 -0.15 0.75 2.69 0.27
18 -1.33 0.54 2.54 0.21
19 -2.04 -0.19 1.72 0.21
20 -1.93 -0.31 1.61 0.21
21 -2.65 -0.52 1.17 0.18
22 -2.58 -0.68 1.04 0.15
• PROCEDURE:
• Choose an LNCG setting so that N>H and T>G. If none of the choices meet
the criterion, choose the highest setting available.
• Determine the LNCG setting: ______. See columns g, h, and i.
• Record N and T: N=_____ T=_____
• Check to see if T>G. See column j.
• Go to Table 10-37 if N<H and/or T<G. Go to step 13 if N>H, and T>G.
• Choose another site or prepare to dig out under the NB end of the bridge
before launching if T<G.

Table 10-37. Rule 2, identifying N, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS

2E+ Number of N: Raise CRB and RRB by 0.25 meter

Bays k l
13 2.93 0.65
14 2.90 0.62
15 2.80 0.59
16 2.68 0.55
17 2.94 0.52
18 2.79 0.49
19 1.97 0.46
20 1.86 0.46
21 1.42 0.43
22 1.29 0.40
PROCEDURE:
• Raise the CRB and RRB by 0.25 meter. Both are in the high
position.
• Check to see if N>H. See column k.
• Record N______
• Check to see if T>G. See column l.
• Record T:______
• Go to step 13 if N>H and T>G; the design is correct.
• Go to Table 10-38 (rule 3A) if N<H or to rule 3B if T<G.

10-36 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Table 10-38. Rule 3A and 3B for N and T, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS

Rule 3A Lowering RRB to Increase N Rule 3B Lowering CRB to Increase T

2E+ m n
Number of Bays N T

13 1.9 (0.82 - G) 0.2 (2.93 - H)

14 1.9 (0.79 - G) 0.2 (2.90 - H)

15 1.9 (0.76 - G) 0.2 (2.80 - H)

16 1.9 (0.72 - G) 0.2 (2.68 - H)

17 1.9 (0.69 - G) 0.2 (2.94 - H)

18 1.9 (0.66 - G) 0.2 (2.79 - H)

19 1.9 (0.63 - G) 0.2 (1.97 - H)

20 1.9 (0.63 - G) 0.2 (1.86 - H)

21 1.9 (0.60 - G) 0.2 (1.42 - H)

22 1.9 (0.57 - G) 0.2 (1.29 - H)

PROCEDURE:
• Determine N:_______; N = N (rule 2) + answer from column m, this table.
• Go to step 13 if N>H; the design is correct.
• Determine T:__________; T = T(rule 2) + answer from column n, this table.
• Go to step 13 if T>G; the design is correct.

Step 13. Determine the required truck and trailer loads using Table
10-39.
Truck______Trailer______

Table 10-39. DS pallet loads, 13 through 22 bays w/o LRS

Number of Bays
Pallet Type
13 to 15 16 to 18 19 to 21 22

Erection set 1 1 1 1

Bridge 8 9 10 11

Total 9 10 11 12

NOTE: Additional vehicles are required to transport

personnel.

Bridging 10-37
FM 5-34

Step 14. Determine the manpower and time required to

accomplish the mission (see Table 10-40).

Table 10-40. Manpower and time requirements, 13 through 22 bays w/o

LRS

a b c d
Manpower and Time 13 Bays 14 to 18 Bays 19 to 22 Bays

Working party 1 + 24 1 + 24 1 + 24
Time during daylight (hours) 1 1/2 1 3/4 2
Time during darkness (hours) 2 2 3/4 3
PROCEDURE:
• Add 20 percent for unskilled personnel.
• Add 30 percent for inclement weather.
• Add 30 percent for adverse site conditions.
• Calculate all timings consecutively.

Step 15. Identify the final bridge design.

• 2E + _____bays
• LNCG setting_____
• CRB setting _____
• RRB setting_____
• Bearings: NB__ __FB__ ___
• Total loads_____: Trucks_____ Trailers__ ___
• Work party______
• Total time _____: Day _____Night__ ___

MGB DESIGNDS, 2E + 13 THROUGH 22 BAYS (W/LRS)

Step 1. Measure the AR gap: A to A’ = ____meters; see Table 10-41,
column a.
Step 2. Select the number of bays from column c = 2E+________.
Step 3. Select the bridge length from column d = ________meters.
Step 4. Select the R distance from column e = ________meters.
Step 5. Select the nose construction from column f = ________.
Step 6. See Figure 10-11. Calculate the FB and NB bearings
using the following equation; Figure 10-12, page 10-40; and Table
10-42, page 10-40 (assume the FB bearing to be 0.5 meter):

NB bearing = L - AR gap - FB bearing

X = NB bearing - 0.5 meter

10-38 Bridging
C1p10-39-40.fm Page 39 Wednesday, January 31, 2001 9:53 AM

C1, FM 5-34

Table 10-41. Dimensions for DS, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/LRS

a c d e f
b
Gap Ranges Number of Bridge R Distance Nose
MLC*
(m) Bays Length (m) (m) Construction

28.3 to 30.9 70 (T) 13 32.9 27.7 7N1

30.2 to 32.8 70 (T) 14 34.8 29.0 7N1
32.0 to 34.1 70 (T) 15 36.6 29.0 7N1
33.8 to 36.4 70 (T) 16 38.4 29.6 8N1
35.6 to 38.2 70 (T) 17 40.2 29.6 8N1
37.5 to 40.1 70 (T) 18 42.1 29.6 6N1 + 3N2
39.3 to 41.9 70 (T) 19 43.9 35.1 6N1 + 3N2
41.1 to 43.7 70 (T) 20 45.7 38.7 6N1 + 3N2
43.0 to 45.1 70 (T) 21 47.6 38.7 6N1 + 3N2
44.8 to 46.2 70 (T) 22 49.4 40.5 6N1 + 3N2
*See step 7. (T) = Tracked

20°
A’ peg
No good
Old pier

4.5 m
A’ peg 20°
Good

Old pier

Link reinforced bridges

Bank heights above flowing water or obstructions in the gap should be a
minimum of 3.7 m. In addition, there must be no intrusion above a plane inclined
downward in the gap for a distance of 4.6 m from each AR peg.

Figure 10-11. Gap-rule obstructions

Bridging 10-39
C1p10-39-40.fm Page 40 Wednesday, January 31, 2001 9:53 AM

FM 5-34

4.6 m
L= m
0.6 m min

m A A’ 0.0 m m m
AR gap = m
Elev Elev Elev
Elev F
JRB F’ CRB FRB RRB O
C
See A to F in chart L 2.7 m 9.1 m Rdist = m
X= m
for min bearing
WL elev See A to F in
Max 2.3 m m chart for min
bearing
m Max 2.3 m
FB bearing m

NB bearing

Figure 10-12. Constructing NB and FB bearings (DS, 2E + 13 through 22

bays w/ LRS)

Table 10-42. Minimum distances

Number of Bays A to F (m) A’ to F’ (m)
13, 14, 16 through 20 0.6 1.4
15 1.1 1.4
21 1.14 1.4
22 1.6 1.4

Step 7. Check the slope. For the longitudinal slope, ensure that
the difference in elevation between the F (use elevation of CRB)
and F’ pegs does not exceed 1/20th of the total bridge length. If it
does, you will either crib it up, undertake a major construction
project, or find another bridge site. For a transverse/cross slope,
ensure that the transverse slope on both banks does not exceed 1/
20th of the total bridge width (4 meters).
Step 8. Calculate H and G (for later comparison against N and T)
(see Figure 10-13):

elev RRB (L - 0.5 meter)

H = elev F + ---------------------------------------------------------- = ________
13.7 meters

elev RRB (R distance)

G = elev O – ---------------------------------------------------- = ________
13.7 meters

Step 9. Identify the LNCG setting by using Table 10-43

10-40 Bridging
 FM 5-34

O peg

H N
T G
RRB FRB CRB
Baseline

Rdist

Figure 10-13. Calculating H and G to compare against N and T (DS, 2E + 13

through 22 bays w/LRS)

Step 9. Identify the LNCG setting by using Table 10-43.

Table 10-43. Rule 1 for LNCG, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/ LRS

N: Nose Lift, Given LNCG Setting With CRB and RRB in High
2E+ Position
Number
of Bays g h i j
#6 Yellow #4 Yellow #2 Yellow Tail Lift

13 0.48 1.87 3.52 0.40

14 0.31 1.72 3.35 0.37

15 0.25 1.64 3.29 0.34

16 -0.62 1.27 3.25 0.30

17 -0.77 1.12 3.10 0.27

18 -1.06 0.80 2.71 0.21

19 -1.46 0.40 2.32 0.21

20 -1.75 0.11 2.03 0.21

21 -2.08 0.05 1.75 0.18

22 -2.44 -0.31 1.40 0.15

PROCEDURE:
• Choose an LNCG setting so that the value of N>H.
• Determine the LNCG setting______. See columns g, h, and i. See column j
for tail lift.
• Record N=_____ and T=_____
• Go to Table 10-44, page 10-42, if N<H.
• Go to step 11 if N>H.
• Choose another site or prepare to dig out under the NB end of the bridge
before launching if T<G.

Bridging 10-41
FM 5-34

Step 10. Identify N using Table 10-44. Place the RRB in the low
position. The CRB is in the high position.

Table 10-44. Rule 2, identifying N, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/ LRS

Lowering RRB to Increase N

(RRB is in low position and CRB is in high position.)

2E+ Number of Bays (k)

13 1.9 (0.82 - G)
14 1.9 (0.79 - G)
15 1.9 (0.76 - G)
16 1.9 (0.72 - G)
17 1.9 (0.69 - G)
18 1.9 (0.66 - G)
19 to 20 1.9 (0.63 - G)
21 1.9 (0.60 - G)
22 1.9 (0.57 - G)
PROCEDURE:
• Determine N:______. N = (Table 10-43, page 10-41) +
answer to column k.
• Go to step 11 if N>H; design is correct.
• Consider another site or crib up if N<H.

Step 11. Determine the required truck and trailer loads using
Table 10-45.
Truck______Trailer ______

Table 10-45. DS pallet loads, 2E + 13 through 22 bays with LRS

Number of Bays
Pallet Type
13 to 15 16 to 18 19 to 21 22

Erection set 1 1 1 1

Bridge 8 9 10 11

Link 2 2 2 2

Total 11 12 13 14

Note: Additional vehicles are required to transport personnel.

10-42 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Step 12. Determine the manpower and time required to accomplish

the mission (see Table 10-46).

Table 10-46. Manpower and time requirements, 2E + 13 through 22 bays w/

LRS
a b c d
Manpower and Time 13 Bays 14 to 18 Bays 19 to 22 Bays
Working party 2 + 32 2 + 32 2 + 32
Time during daylight (hours) 2 2 3/4 3
Time during darkness (hours) 3 4 4 1/2
PROCEDURE:
• Add 20 percent for unskilled personnel.
• Add 30 percent for inclement weather.
• Add 30 percent for adverse site conditions.
• Calculate all timings consecutively.

Step 13. Identify the final bridge design.

• 2E + _____bays
• LNCG setting_____
• CRB setting _____
• RRB setting_____
• Bearings: NB____FB_____
• Total load______: Trucks_____Trailers_____
• Work party______
• Total time _____: Day _____Night _____

BAILEY BRIDGE, TYPE M-2

TRUSS
The Bailey bridge trusses are formed from 10-foot panels and may be
constructed in any configuration (see Table 10-47).

Table 10-47. Truss/story configuration

Truss Story Nomenclature Abbreviation
Single Single Single single SS
Double Single Double single DS
Triple Single Triple single TS
Double Double Double double DD
Triple Double Triple double TD
Double Triple Double triple DT
Triple Triple Triple triple TT

Bridging 10-43
FM 5-34

SITE RECONNAISSANCE
A site reconnaissance must be conducted. The construction area
must provide enough space for equipment layout (see Figure 10-14).
Figure 10-15 shows a roller layout for a triple-truss or multistory
bridge.

15 1
14
13

16
12

Length of nose
11 4.5 m

+15.2 m
2
10

7.6 m
4
8

9.1 m 9.1 m
7
6

3
3
5 5

1. Gap 9. Chess
2. Base plate 10. Ribbands and ribband bolts
3. Sway braces 11. Foot walks
4. Plain roller on template 12. Bracing bolts, clamps, and tools
5. Stringers 13. End posts
6. Ramps 14. Jacks and jack shoes
7. Panels 15. Grillage
8. Transoms 16. Rocking rollers on template

NOTE: Site must be about 47 meters wide.

Figure 10-14. Layout of bridging equipment (on-site)

10-44 Bridging
 3 3
2 2
1 3.8 m 3.8 m 7.6 m

4.5 m
5

2.2 m
10
6 4 4
9 7

FS NS
1. Gap 6. Base plates
2. Safety setback 7. Rocking rollers
3 Roller clearance 8. Placement control line NOTE: Plain and rocking rollers are situated so that
4. Plain rollers 9. FS rocking rollers their tops lie in the same horizontal plane.
5. Construction rollers 10.Base plate

Figure 10-15. Plan and profile views of a roller layout (triple-truss or multistory bridge)
FM 5-34

Bridging 10-45
FM 5-34

BRIDGE DESIGN
Figure 10-16 shows an example of a site profile. Use the steps
below Figure 10-16 to design a bridge.

23.7 m

4.5 m FS
NS 3.6 m
(Compact
sand clay)
(Hard, dry,
consolidated clay)
Design a MLC 60/65 bridge

Figure 10-16. Site profile example

Step 1. Gap as measured during reconnaissance: 79 feet

Step 2. Safety setback:
• Prepared abutment = constant of 3.5 feet FS: 3.5 feet
• Unprepared abutment = 1.5 x bank height NS: 1.5 x 12 = 18
Step 3. Initial roller clearance: always a constant NS and FS: 2.5 feet
of 2.5 feet
Step 4. Initial bridge length: Add steps 1, 2, and Initial length: 103 feet
3. If the value is not a multiple of 10 feet, round
Rounded up: 110 feet
up to the next 10-foot value.
Step 5. Initial truss/story type (see Table 10-48, DD
page 10-51):
Step 6. Initial bridge class (see Table 10-48): The 65/70
classification must meet or exceed the
requirements designated in the mission
statement. The truss/story type selected is always
based on a normal crossing unless the tactical
commander directs otherwise.
Step 7. Selection of grillage:
• Safe soil bearing (see Table 10-49, page 10-53) NS = 5 tons/ft2
• Safe soil pressure (see Table 10-50, page FS = 3 tons/ft2
10-54). If the soil-bearing capacity values
NS = 3.5 tons/ft2
are not in Table 10-50, round down to the
closest listed. Use these values for the FS = 2.5 tons/ft2
grillage.
• Grillage required. NS and FS = Type 1

10-46 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Step 8. Adjusted bridge length: distance required NS = 4.5 feet; FS = 4.5

for new roller clearance (see Table 10-51, page feet
10-55).
• Add steps 1, 2, and the above value from Table 109.5 feet
10-51.
• Round up to next highest 10-foot value if the 110 feet
value is not a multiple of 10 feet.
NOTE: Compare the values in steps 4 and 8.
If they are different, you must redesign the
bridge using steps 9 through 12 below. If the
values are the same, go to step 13.
Step 9. Final truss/story type (see Table 10-48, Try 1 Try 2
page 10-51):
Step 10. Final bridge classification (see Table Try 1 Try 2
10-48):
• Classification must meet or exceed the
requirements designated in the mission
statement.
• The truss/story type selected is always based
on a normal crossing unless the tactical
commander designates otherwise.
Step 11. Final grillage section: Try 1 Try 2
• Safe soil bearing (see Table 10-49, page 10-53). NS
• Safe soil pressure (see Table 10-50, page FS
10-54). If the soil-bearing-capacity values
NS
from above are not in Table 10-50, round
down to the closest one listed. Use these FS
values for grillage required.
• Grillage required.
NS Type Type
FS Type Type
Step 12. Final bridge length: distance required NS
for new roller clearance (see Table 10-51).
FS
• Add steps 1 and 2 to figures from Table 10-51.
• Round up to the next highest 10-foot value if = =
the above value is not a multiple of 10 feet. = =

Bridging 10-47
FM 5-34

For Try 1 compare the rounded-up values in steps 8 and 12. If they are the
same, go to step 13. If they are different, compare the rounded-up values in
steps 4 and 12. If these values are the same, you can make a judgment call.
Repeating the design sequence in the Try 2 column, using the bridge length
from step 12, Try 1, will put you in an endless cycle unless you can reduce
the final bridge length. Regardless, you will have to either overdesign the
final bridge (Try 1 column) or choose a higher number of grillages than
selected in step 7. This choice could reduce the roller clearance on one or
both banks so that the required bridge length/final truss/story may be at the
minimum to do the job. You could choose a higher number of grillages than
allowed (step 11); however, be careful not to exceed the BP and RRT
capacities listed in FM 5-277, Tables 4-2 and 4-3. After making a decision,
go to step 13.
For Try 2 and highercompare the current rounded-up value in step 12 to
the previous Try’s value. If they are the same, go to step 13. If they are
different, repeat the design sequence until the rounded-up values of the
current Try and previous Try match. Then go to step 13.
Step 13. Slope check: The maximum allowable
bank-height difference is 1 to 30. Therefore, the
maximum allowable bank-height difference equals 110
--------- + 3.7 feet > 3 feet
final bridge length
the -------------------------------------------- if 30
30

• The above value > actual bank-height GO/NO GO (circle

difference; the slope is acceptable. one)
• The above value < actual bank height
difference. Choose another site or crib up/
excavate the FS or NS until the bridge slope
is within acceptable limits.
Step 14. Final bridge requirements: Length
Truss/story type
Class
Step 15. Launching nose composition: Use 7 bays, single truss
Figures 10-17 through 10-24, pages 10-55 through
10-62, depending on the truss/story type.
Step 16. Placing the launching nose links:
• The sag (use the same figure as in step 15). 22 inches
• The safety sag (constant of 6 inches).
• The lift required (add above two results). 22 + 6 = 28 inches
• The position of launching nose link (see 30 feet from nose tip
Figure 10-23, page 10-61).

10-48 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Step 17. Rocking-roller requirement: See Table NS = 4 FS = 2

10-52, page 10-63.
Step 18. Plain-roller requirement:
• The SS and DS bridges only have two rollers 12
per row; all others have four rollers per row.
Use Table 10-53, page 10-63, to determine
the number of rows and then multiply.
• Add two more plain rollers to allow for
construction-roller requirement. 2
• Add the above two results. 12 + 2 = 14
Step 19. Jack requirements: See Table 10-54, 4
page 10-63.
NOTE: Only one end of the bridge will be
jacked down at a time.
Step 20. Ramp requirements:
• Slope requirements (check one).
— Final bridge class < 50 = 1 to 10. ( )
— Final bridge class > 50 = 1 to 20. (x)
• Support for end ramp (check one ).
— Final bridge class < 67 = 2 chess. ( )
— Final bridge class > 67 = 4 chess. (x)
• Midspan ramp supports (check one).
— Final bridge class < 44 = not needed. ( )
— Final bridge class > 44 = needed. (x)
• Pedestal supports (check one).
— Not needed. ( )
— Needed. (x)
NOTE: See FM 5-277 for criteria and
drawings. Ramp lengths must be estimated
from the site sketch.
• Support for end transom (check one).
— Final bridge class < 39 = not needed. ( )
— Final bridge class > 39 = needed. (x)
Step 21. Personnel required: See Table 10-55, Total 5/66
page 10-64. (Note the differences between
manpower and crane construction.)

Bridging 10-49
FM 5-34

Step 22. Assembly time: See Table 10-56, page 5 hours

10-65.
NOTE: This time allows for ideal bridge
construction conditions and does not allow
for site preparation or roller layout.

10-50 Bridging
 Table 10-48. Classification of Bailey bridge
Span (feet)
Construction
Rating
Type 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
30 24 20 20 16 12 8
N 30 24
42 36 33 30 24 20 16 12
SS C 37 34 31 29
47 40 36 33 30 24 19 14
R 42 38 35 32 30
75 75 60 50 40 30 20 16 12 8
N 70 65 60 55 45 30
83 77 68 60 50 37 30 23 18 14
DS C 76 73 69 60 50 39 32
88 85 78 66 55 42 34 27 21 17
R 84 79 75 64 55 44 36 30
85 65 50 35 60 20 16 12 8 4
N 80 65 55 40 35
95 74 57 47 38 31 24 18 15 10
TS C 90 75 60 49 41 33
100* 82 64 52 43 35 29 22 17 13
R 90* 82 66 54 45 38 31
80 65 45 65 30 24 16 12 8
N 80 70 55 45 35
86 72 57 47 39 32 25 19 15
DD C 90 76 61 50 42 35
96 80 64 53 44 36 30 24 18
R 90 83 68 56 48 40 33
NOTES:
1. N = Normal C = Caution R = Risk
2. Top number is wheeled-vehicle load class; bottom number is tracked-vehicle class.
3. * indicates limited by roadway width.
FM 5-34

Bridging 10-51
 FM 5-34

Table 10-48. Classification of Bailey bridge (continued)

Construction Span (feet)

Rating
Type

10-52 Bridging
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
90 75 55 45 35 30 20 16 12
N 90* 80 60 55 45 35
100* 83 65 57 47 37 31 24 18
TD C 90* 90* 72 62 51 41 34
100* 91 74 64 54 45 37 29 22
R 90* 90* 80 70 58 48 40 32
70 70 60 55 45 35 30 20 16
N 80 70 60 55 50 45 35
80 80 77 69 57 48 39 32 25
DT C 90* 90* 85 78 64 58 43 36
90 88 85 80 64 55 46 38 31
R 90* 90* 90* 89 74 60 51 43 35
80 70 55 45 35 24
N 75 70 60 55 40
100 80 66 59 48 38
TT C 90* 90* 75 66 52 43
100* 90 77 68 55 46
R 90* 90* 87 77 62 51
NOTES:
1. N = Normal C = Caution R = Risk
2. Top number is wheeled-vehicle load class; bottom number is tracked-vehicle class.
3. * indicates limited by roadway width.
 FM 5-34

Table 10-49. Safe bearing capacity for various soils

Bearing Values (tons per

Soil Description
sq ft)

Hardpan overlying rock 12

Very compact sandy gravel 10

Loose gravel and sandy gravel, compact sand and grav-

elly sand; very compact sand, inorganic silt soils 6

Hard, dry consolidated clay 5

Loose, coarse-to-medium sand; medium-compact fine 4

sand

Compact sand clay 3

Loose, fine sand; medium-compact sand, inorganic silt 2

soils

Firm or stiff clay 1.5

Loose saturated-sand clay soils; medium-soft clay 1

Bridging 10-53
 Table 10-50. Safe soil pressures
Safe Span (feet)
Con- Soil
FM 5-34

struction Pressure
Type (ton per 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
sq ft)

0.5 6,7 5,6,7 5,6,7 4 4 4 4 4

1.0 4 3 3 1 1 1 1 1

10-54 Bridging
SS 2.0 1 1 1 1
2.5
3.5
0.5 6 6 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7
1.0 6,7 5,6,7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
DS 2.0 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3.5 1 1 1 1 1
0.5 6 6 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7
1.0 6,7 5,6,7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
TS 2.0 4 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
2.5 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0.5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 6,7 5,6,7 5,6,7 4 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7
DD 2.0 4 4 3 2 2 4,6,7 2 4,6,7 2
2.5 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
3.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0.5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7
TD 2.0 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7
2.5 4,6,7 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3.5 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
0.5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7
DT 2.0 6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7
2.5 6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7 4,6,7
3.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0.5 6 6 6 6 6
1.0 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7
TT 2.0 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 4,6,7
2.5 6,7 6,7 6,7 6,7 4,6,7
3.5 6,7 6,7 2 2 2
 FM 5-34

Table 10-51. Roller clearance and grillage height

Overall Height Base-Plate Roller
Grillage Type
(in) Height (in) Clearance (ft)
1 6 6 4.5
2 15 6 4.5
3 11 11 3.5
4 17 11 4.5
5 16 16 3.5
6 26 20 3.5
7 13 13 3.5

B
Launching
wt (tons)

(inches)
(feet)
Span

Sag

A
2 bays in nose
30 11.0 3
20’ 25’ 5’
3 bays in nose
40 14.5 4
28’ 35’ 7’
3 bays in nose

50 17.5 5 2’
33’ 45’
4 bays in nose

60 21.0 8 5’
40’ 55’
5 bays in nose

70 25.0 12 7’
48’ 65’
5 bays in nose

80 27.5 15 3’
52’ 75’
6 bays in nose

90 31.5 25 5’
60’ 85’

100 28.5 33
4’
61’ 95’

Single truss Single truss

with decking
A = Distance between the NB and FB rocking rollers
B = Balance point of bridge ready for launching

Figure 10-17. Launching-nose composition for SS bridges

Bridging 10-55
FM 5-34

B
Launching

(inches)
wt (tons)
(feet)
Span

Sag
A

3 bays in nose
50 24.5 4
30’ 45’ 5’
4 bays in nose
60 25.0 7
38’ 55’ 7’
4 bays in nose
70 28.5 9 2’
43’ 65’
5 bays
in nose
80 33.0 14 5’
50’ 75’
6 bays
in nose
90 37.0 20 7’
58’ 85’
6 bays in nose
100 40.5 23 3’
62’ 95’

7 bays in nose
110 45.0 33 70’ 105’
5’

8 bays in nose
120 49.5 45 8’
77’ 115’

8 bays in nose
130 53.0 52 125’ 4’
81’
6 bays
undecked 8 bays in nose
140 47.5 63 3’
82’ 135’

Double truss Double truss Single truss

with decking
A = Distance between the NB and FB rocking rollers
B = Balance point of bridge ready for launching

Figure 10-18. Launching-nose composition for DS bridges

10-56 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Launching
B

(inches)
wt (tons)
(feet)
Span

Sag
A

5 bays in nose
80 43.4 13
47’ 75’ 8’
6 bays in nose
90 42.5 19
56’ 85’ 9’
6 bays in nose
100 46.5 22
61’ 4’
95’
7 bays in nose
110 51.5 30
7’
68’ 105’
7 bays in nose
120 55.5 34
3’
72’ 115’
8 bays in nose
130 60.5 47
6’
79’ 125’
9 bays in
nose
140 65.5 62
86’ 135’ 9’
9 bays in
nose
150 60.5 70
87’ 145’ 8’
9 bays in
nose
160 59.0 77
92’ 155’ 3’
Double truss Single truss
Double truss
with decking

A = Distance between the NB and FB rocking rollers

B = Balance point of bridge ready for launching

Figure 10-19. Launching-nose composition for TS bridges

Bridging 10-57
FM 5-34

Launching B
wt (tons)

(inches)
(feet)
Span

Sag
A

6 bays in nose

100 60.5 17 58’ 95’

7’
7 bays in nose

110 59.0 22 66’ 105’

9’
7 bays in nose

120 63.5 24 4’
71’ 115’
8 bays in nose

130 69.0 31 8’
77’ 125’
9 bays in nose

140 76.0 38 10’

85’ 135’
9 bays in
nose
150 81.5 41 4’
91’ 145’
7 bays undecked 9 bays in
nose
160 75.5 45
4’
91’ 155’
7 bays undecked 10 bays
in nose
170 81.0 57
7’
98’ 165’
12 bays undecked 10 bays
in nose
180 76.0 68
3’
102’ 175’
Double truss Double truss Single truss
with decking

A = Distance between the NB and FB rocking rollers

B = Balance point of bridge ready for launching

Figure 10-20. Launching-nose composition for DD bridges

10-58 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Launching
wt (tons)
B

(inches)
(feet)
Span

Sag
A
6 bays
in nose
110 79.4 17
61’ 4’
105’
7 bays
in nose
120 87.1 22 7’
68’ 115’
8 bays
in nose
130 86.0 29
76’ 125’ 9’
8 bays
in nose
140 93.0 31
81’ 4’
135’
9 bays
in nose
150 100.0 39
88’ 145’ 7’
3 bays undecked 9 bays
160 101.5 42 in nose
91’ 155’ 4’

10 bays undecked 10 bays

170 98.0 53 in nose
97’ 165’ 8’
All bays undecked 10 bays
180 93.5 60 in nose

110’ 175’ 5’
All bays undecked 11 bays
190 91.5 78 in nose
111’ 185’ 4’

Triple truss with Triple truss Double truss Single truss

decking

A = Distance between the NB and FB rocking rollers

B = Balance point of bridge ready for launching

Figure 10-21. Launching-nose composition for TD bridges

Bridging 10-59
FM 5-34

Launching
wt (tons)

(inches)
(feet)
Span

Sag

8 bays
in nose
130 104.2 25
75’ 125’ 10’
8 bays
in nose
140 101.0 27
81’ 4’
135’
9 bays
in nose
150 109.0 34
8’
87’ 145’
10 bays
in nose
160 117.0 42 11’
94’ 155’
3 bays undecked 10 bays
in nose
170 119.0 45 8’
97’ 165’
8 bays undecked 10 bays
in nose
180 118.5 47
4’
101’ 175’
All bays undecked 12 bays
in nose
190 111.0 60 9’
116’ 185’
All bays undecked 12 bays
in nose
200 110.5 72 8’
117’ 195’
All bays undecked 12 bays
in nose
210 112.0 80 5’
120’ 205’

Double truss with decking Double truss Single truss

Figure 10-22. Launching-nose composition for DT bridges

10-60 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Launching
wt (tons)

(inches)
(feet)
Span

Sag
14 bridge bays
10 bays of deck One deck transom per bay
150 126.5 40 10 bays in nose

80’ 155’ 5’
14 bridge bays One deck transom per bay
7 bays of deck
170 112.5 45 11 bays in nose

81’ 165’ 4’
14 bridge bays
7 bays of deck One deck transom per bay
13 bays in nose
180 119.0 50
87’ 175’ 8’

15 bridge bays One deck transom per bay

no deck
14 bays in nose
190 116.0 62
97’ 185’ 8’
14 bridge bays One deck transom per bay
no deck
16 bays in nose
200 115.0 72
100’ 195’ 5’
13 bridge bays One deck transom per bay
no deck
18 bays in nose
210 113.5 80

102’ 205’
3’
Triple truss with Triple truss Double truss Single truss
decking

Figure 10-23. Launching-nose composition for TT bridges

Bridging 10-61
FM 5-34

Launching link Resulting vertical lift

interval from tip Distance of links from leading in tip of launching
of nose (ft) edge of launching nose (ft) nose (in)

40 30 20 10

10 13.5

20 27

30 40.5

40 54

10 and 40 67.5

20 and 40 81

30 and 40 94.5

Figure 10-24. Upturned skeleton launching nose

10-62 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Table 10-52. Rocking-roller requirements

Construction Type Span (ft) NB FB
SS 30 to 100 2 2
DS 50 to 80 2 2
90 to 100 2 2
110 to 140 4 2
TS 80 to 160 4 2
DD 100 to 130 4 2
140 to 180 4 4
TD 110 to 120 4 2
130 to 190 4 4
DT 130 to 210 4 4
TT 160 to 210 4 4

Table 10-53. Plain-roller requirements

Span Construction Type

(ft) SS DS TS DD TD DT TT
30 to 50 1 1
60 to 80 2 2 2
90 3 2 2
100 3 3 2 2
110 to 120 3 3 3 3
130 3 3 3 3 3
140 3 4 4 3 3
150 4 4 4 4
160 4 4 4 4 3
170 4 4 4 3
180 4 5 4 4
190 5 5 4
200 to 210 5 4

Table 10-54. Jack requirements

Construction Number of
Span (ft)
Type Jacks, Each End
SS 30 to 100 2
DS 50 to 140 4
TS 80 to 140 4
150 to 160 6
DD 100 to 120 4
130 to 180 6
TD 110 to 140 6
150 to 190 8
DT 130 6
140 to 180 8
190 to 210 10
TT 160 to 170 10
180 to 210 12

Bridging 10-63
 Table 10-55. Organization of an assembly party
Construction Type
FM 5-34

SS DS TS DD TD DT TT DT TT
Detail
Using Manpower Only Using One Crane*

NCO/EM NCO/EM NCO/EM NCO/EM NCO/EM NCO/EM NCO/EM NCO/EM NCO/EM

10-64 Bridging
Crane /3** /3**
• Truck driver /1 /1
• Crane operator /1 /1
• Hook man /1 /1
Panel 1/14** 1/14** 2/28** 2/32** 3/50** 3/50** 3/68** 3/30** 3/30**
• Carrying /12 /12 /24 /28 /44 /44 /60 /24 /24
• Pin /2 /2 /4 /4 /6 /6 /8 /6 /6
Transom 1/9** 1/10** 1/10** 1/10** 1/10 2/28 2/28** 2/20** 2/20**
• Carrying /8 /8 /8 /8 /8 /24 /24 /16 /16
• Clamp /1 /2 /2 /2 /2 /4 /4 /4 /4
Bracing 1/4** 1/6** 1/8** 1/12** 1/20** 1/32** 1/40** 1/32** 1/38**
• Sway brace /2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /6 /6 /6 /6
• Raker /2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2
• Bracing frame /2 /2 /4 /4 /8 /8 /10 /8
• Chord bolt /4 /8 /10 /14 /10 /14
• Tie plate /2 /4 /4 /4
• Overhead support /6 /6 /4 /4
Decking 1/12** 1/12** 1/12** 1/12** 1/12** 1/12** 1/12** 1/12** 1/12**
• Stringer /8 /8 /8 /8 /8 /8 /8 /8 /8
• Chess and ribband /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4
Total 4/39 4/42 5/58 5/66 6/92 7/122 7/148 7/97 7/103
*Normally a crane is not used for an SS or a DS assembly.
**Represents the total number of noncommissioned officers (NCOs) and enlisted members (EMs) for the particular detail.
 FM 5-34

Table 10-56. Estimated assembly times

Span Construction Type

(ft) SS DS TS DD TD DT TT DT TT

Using 1 Crane
Using Manpower Only (hours)
(hours)

40 1 1/2
60 1 3/4 2
80 2 2 1/2 3
100 2 1/4 3 3 1/2 4 1/2
120 3 1/2 4 5 6 3/4
140 3 3/4 4 1/2 5 3/4 7 1/2 11 3/4 10 1/2
160 5 6 1/4 8 1/2 13 1/4 19 11 3/4 16 1/4
180 7 9 1/2 14 3/4 21 1/4 13 1/4 18 1/4
200 16 1/4 24 14 1/2 20 1/2

NOTES:
1. Add 30 minutes to 4 hours for roller layout, depending on local conditions.
2. Add 30 percent for untrained troops, poor weather, terrain conditions, or enemy
activity.
3. Add 50 percent for blackout conditions.
4. Consider the rough rule of thumb for adverse conditions: TOTAL time is one
bridge bay per hour.

ENGINEER MULTIROLE BRIDGE COMPANY

The engineer multirole bridge company has the capabilities to
perform fixed bridging with the MGB and float bridging with the
ribbon bridge (see Figure 10-25, page 10-66). The company has four
MGB sets with sufficient components for assembling various spans
and load classes of single- and double-story bridges. Under normal
conditions, the sets provide four 31.4-meter or two 49.7-meter Class
60 bridges with reinforcement kits. The company has about 213
meters of Class 75 (tank) and Class 96 (wheel) float bridge or six rafts
of Class 75 (tank) and Class 96 (wheel), based on a 0 to 3 feet per
second velocity. The company’s assignment is to a corps. It is
normally task-organized to a corps engineer battalion or combat
engineer group to support bridging operations.

Bridging 10-65
FM 5-34

5-1-178-184

Co HQ Bridge Support
2-0-19-21 1-0-57-58 1-1-52-54

Equipment Recapitulations

14 - Boat, bridge erect 2 - 40-ton semitrailer 1 - MKT

44 - Bed CGO, demountable PLS 2 - Dozer, D7 2 - LMTV trailer
30 - Bay bridge float, interior 4 - SEE 4 - 3/4-ton trailer
12 - Bay bridge float, ramp 1 - 25-ton crane 2 - 3 1/2-ton trailer
2 - Bridge set supplementary, MGB 2 - 5/4-ton maintenance truck 2 - Water trailer
2 - Bridge set erection fixed, MGB 1 - welding trailer 1 - Lube trailer
4 - Bridge set fixed, aluminum 11 - HMMWV 1 - Shop equip org
2 - Reinforcement set, MGB 4 - LMTV truck 4 - MTV truck
56 - Transporter, HEMTT 2 - HEMTT POL
44 - Trailer, PLS 2 - HEMTT wrecker

Bridge
1-0-57-58

Plt HQ Bridge Support

1-0-3-4 0-0-22-22 0-0-10-10

Equipment Recapitulations

4 -HMMWV
2 -3/4-ton trailer
2 -MTV truck CGO
14 -Boat, bridge erect
30 -Bay bridge float, interior
12 -Bay bridge float, ramp
2 -Bridge set supplementary, MGB
2 -3 1/2-ton trailer
56 -Transporter HEMTT
44 -Bed CGO, demountable PLS
44 -Trailer, PLS
2 -Bridge set erection fixed, MGB
4 -Bridge set fixed, aluminum
2 -Reinforcement set, MGB

Figure 10-25. Engineer multirole bridge company

10-66 Bridging
 FM 5-34

Support platoon

Spt Plt
1-1-45-47

Plt HQ Equip Equip Park Maint

1-0-2-3 0-0-14-14 0-0-14-14 0-0-7-7 0-1-22-23

Equipment Recapitulations
2 - HMMWV 1 - LMTV truck 1 - HMMWV 2 - MTV truck 1 - Lube trailer
1 - 3/4-ton truck 1 - MKT 2 - LET 2 - HMMWV 2 - 5.4-ton maint
1 - Water trailer 2 - 40-ton truck
semi-trailer lb 1 - Shop equip
2 - Dozer, D7 org
4 - SEE 2 - LMTV truck
1 - 25-ton crane cargo
2 - HEMTT POL 2 - HEMTT
wrecker
1 - Welding
trailer
1 - LMTV
trailer cargo

Figure 10-25. Engineer multirole bridge company (continued)

Bridging 10-67
 Chapter 11
Roads and Airfields
SOILS AND GEOLOGY
CHARACTERISTICS
Table 11-1 shows the characteristics of specific soils. Figure 11-1,
page 11-2, outlines the procedure for field identification of soils.
NOTE: This procedure will give a very hasty classification of
soils. Do not use it to support permanent or semipermanent
construction projects.

Table 11-1. Soil characteristics

Airfield Index
Drainage Value as a Value as a Value as Compaction
Symbol Description (frost
Characteristics Subgrade Subbase a Base Equipment
susceptibility)

G Gravels and sands Excellent None to very Good to Good to Fair to Crawler tractor
Gravels with little slight excellent excellent good Rubber-tire roller
or no fines Steel-wheel roller
GM Silty gravels Fair to practically Slight to Good Fair to good Not suit- Rubber-tire roller
Gravel-sand silt impervious medium able Sheepsfoot roller
mixture
GC Clayey gravels Poor to practi- Slight to Good Fair Not suit- Rubber-tire roller
Gravel cally impervious medium able
Sand-clay mixtures
S Sands and gravels Excellent None to very Fair to good Fair to good Not suit- Crawler tractor
Sands with little or slight able Rubber-tire roller
no fines
SM Silty-sands Fair to practically Slight to Fair to good Poor to fair Not suit- Rubber-tire roller
Sand-silt mixtures impervious medium able Sheepsfoot roller
SC Clayey sands Poor to practi- Slight to high Poor to fair Poor Not suit- Rubber-tire roller
Sand-clay mixtures cally impervious able Sheepsfoot roller
M Inorganic silts and Fair to poor Medium to high Poor to fair Not suitable Not suit- Rubber-tire roller
very fine sand able Sheepsfoot roller
Rock flour
Clayey silts with
slight plasticity
CL Inorganic clays, Practically Medium to high Poor to fair Not suitable Not suit- Rubber-tire-roller
low to medium impervious able Sheepsfoot roller
plasticity
Gravely or sandy
clays
CH Inorganic clays of Practically Medium Poor to fair Not suitable Not suit- Sheepsfoot roller
high plasticity impervious able
O Mineral grains con- Poor to practi- Medium to high Poor to very Not suitable Not suit- Rubber-tire roller
taining highly cally impervious poor able Sheepsfoot roller
organic matter
PT Peat and other Fair to poor Slight Not suitable Not suitable Not suit- Compaction not
highly decom- able practical
posed vegetable
matter

Roads and Airfields 11-1

FM 5-34

Odor test O
(4)

(2)Sedimentation test
G
(1) Separate gravel
Compare
sand and
Fines
Sample

gravel (3) S
< 5%
F
> 5 % in e s GM
Compare Determine
and type fines, GC
<5 0% sand and #40 portion
gravel (3) (5-13) SM
SC
F in
>5 e s
0% Determine M
type fines,
#40 portion CL
(5-13) CH

Procedure:
1. Separate the gravel.
a. Remove all particles from the sample that are larger than 1/4-inch diameter (use
a #4 sieve, if available).
b. Estimate the percent of gravel (G) by volume.
2. Conduct a sedimentation test, using either method below, to determine the percent of
sand (S):
a. Mason-jar methodæ
(1) Put about 1 inch of sample in a glass jar.
(2) Place a line on the outside of the jar, using a grease pencil, to indicate the
sample’s depth.
(3) Fill the jar with 5 or 6 inches of clear water. Leave 1 inch of air at the top.
(4) Shake the mixture vigorously for 3 to 4 minutes.
(5) Allow the sample to settle for 30 seconds.
(6) Compare the sediment line to grease-pencil line, estimating the percent set-
tled.
(7) Determine the percent of S and fines (F): S + F = 100 - percent of G
(8) Determine the percent of S:
S = (percent of settled material) x percent of S + F
100
b. Canteen-cup methodæ
(1) Place a sample (less gravel) in a canteen cup and mark the level.
(2) Fill the jar with water and shake vigorously.
(3) Allow the mixture to settle for 30 seconds.
(4) Pour off the water.
(5) Repeat steps 2 and 4 until the water that pours off is clear.
(6) Dry the soil left in the cup (S).
(7) Estimate the percent of S by comparing its level to the first mark you made.
S = 100 - percent of G

Figure 11-1. Field identification of soils

11-2 Roads and Airfields

 FM 5-34

3. Compare the G, S, and F.

a. Percent of G from 1b
b. Percent of S from 2a(8)
c. Percent of the F = 100 - 3a - 3b
4. Conduct an odor test by heating the sample with a match or an open flame. If the
odor becomes musty or foul smelling, that is a strong indication of the presence of
organic material.
5. Conduct a dry-strength test (use a #40 sieve).
a. Form a moist pat 2 inches in diameter by 1/2 inch thick.
b. Dry the pat (low heat).
c. Place the dried pat between your thumb and index finger only and attempt to
break it.
d. Determine the contents using the breakage factors below:
• Easy, contents is silt (M).
• Difficult, contents is low compressible clay (CL).
• Impossible, contents is high compressible clay (CH).
6. Conduct a powder test.
a. Scrape a portion of the broken pat with your thumbnail. Try to flake off any parti-
cles.
b. Determine the contents using the following:
• If the pat powders or flakes, the contents is M.
• If the pat does not powder or flake, the contents is clay (C).
7. Conduct a feel test.
a. Rub a portion of dry soil over a sensitive portion of your skin (inside of wrist).
b. Determine the contents based on the following:
• If your skin feels harsh or is irritated, the contents is M.
• If your skin feels smooth and floury, the contents is C.
8. Conduct a shine test.
a. Use a knife blade or your thumbnail to draw a smooth surface over a pat of slightly
moist soil.
b. Determine the contents based on the following:
• If the surface becomes shiny and lighter in texture, the contents is C.
• If the surface is dull or granular, the contents is M or S.
9. Conduct a thread test.
a. Form a ball of moist soil (marble size).
b. Attempt to roll it into a 1/8 inch-diameter thread (wooden match size).
c. Determine the contents based on the following:
• If you can obtain the thread easily, the contents is C.
• If cannot obtain the thread, the contents is M.
10. Conduct a ribbon test.
a. Form a cylinder of moist soil, about cigar shape and size.
b. Flatten it over your index finger with your thumb; try to form a ribbon that is 8 to 9
inches long, 1/8 to 1/4 inch thick, and 1 inch wide.
c. Determine the contents based on the following:
• If the ribbon is 8 inches or larger, the contents is CH.
• If the ribbon is 3 to 8 inches long, the contents is CL.
• If the ribbon is 0 to 3 inches long, the contents is M.

Figure 11-1. Field identification of soils (continued)

Roads and Airfields 11-3

FM 5-34

11. Conduct a grit or bite test.

a. Place a pinch of sample between your teeth and bite the sample.
b. Determine the contents based on the following:
• If the sample feels gritty, the contents is M.
• If the sample feels floury, the contents is C.
12. Conduct a wet-shaking test.
a. Place a pat of very moist soil (not sticky) in your palm. Close your hand.
b. Shake your hand vigorously. Strike the pat with your other hand.
c. Determine the contents based on the following:
• If water rises to the surface quickly (positive reaction), the contents is M.
• If no water rises (negative reaction), the contents is C.
13. Conduct a hand-washing test.
a. Rub your hands with a portion of the sample.
b. Wash your hands.
c. Determine the contents based on the following:
• If you can wash your hands easily, the contents is M.
• If it is difficult to wash your hands, the contents is C.

NOTE: When classifying soils in the field, if you notice any unusual odors or char-
acteristics to the soil (oil or petroleum) or any unknown substances, notify your
chain of command immediately.
Figure 11-1. Field identification of soils (continued)

MOISTURE CONTENT
To determine whether or not soil is at or near optimum moisture
content (OMC), mold a golf-ball-size sample of soil with your hands.
Squeeze the ball between your thumb and fore finger. If the ball
shatters into several fragments of rather uniform size, the soil is
near or at the OMC. If the soil is difficult to roll into a ball or it
crumbles under very little pressure, the soil is below the OMC.
STABILIZATION

Table 11-2. Recommended initial stabilizing agent (percent of weight)

Soil Type Hydrated Lime Portland Cement Quicklime
GC, GM-GC 2 to 4 2 to 3
CL 5 to 10 3 to 8
CH 3 to 8 3 to 6
GW, SW 3 to 5
GP, GM, SM 5 to 8
GC, SC 5 to 9
SP 7 to 11
CL, ML 8 to 13
CH 9 to 15
MH, OH 10 to 16

11-4 Roads and Airfields

 FM 5-34

Table 11-3. Soil conversion factors

Converted to
Initial Soil
Soil Type
Condition In Place Loose Compacted

In place 1.11 0.95

Sand Loose 0.90 0.86
Compacted 1.05 1.17
In place 1.25 0.90
Loam Loose .080 0.72
Compacted 1.11 1.39
In place 1.43 0.90
Clay Loose 0.70 0.63
Compacted 1.11 1.59
In place 1.50 1.30
Rock (blasted) Loose 0.67 0.87
Compacted 0.77 1.15

ENGINEERING PROPERTIES OF ROCKS

Listed below are the engineering properties of rocks (Figure 11-2,
page 11-6, also shows rock descriptions). Table 11-4, page 11-7, lists
the characteristics of various rocks, in terms of their properties, and
their relative uses as an aggregate, base course, or subbase.
• Toughnessmechanical strength, resistance to crushing or
breaking. Estimate this property by trying to break a rock with a
hammer or by measuring a rock’s resistance to penetration using
impact drills.
• Hardnessresistance to scratching or abrasion. Estimate this
property by trying to scratch the rock with a steel knife or nail. Soft
material will scratch readily; hard materials are difficult or
impossible to scratch.
• Densityweight per unit volume. Estimate this property by
hefting a rock sample and comparing two samples that are close in
equal volume.
• Durabilityresistance to slaking or disintegration due to
alternating cycles of wetting and drying or freezing and thawing.
Estimate this property by observing the effects of weathering on
natural exposures of the rock.
• Chemical stabilityresistance to reaction with alkali materials in
portland cements. Several rock types contain impure forms of silica
(opal and chalcedony) that react with alkalis in cement to form a gel

Roads and Airfields 11-5

FM 5-34

which absorbs water and expands to crack or disintegrate the

hardened concrete. Estimate this potential alkali-aggregate
reaction (in the field only) by identifying the rock and comparing
it to known reactive types or by investigating structures in which
the aggregate has previously been used.
• Crushed shapeform a rock takes on after crushing; bulky
angular fragments provide the best aggregate for construction.
Estimate this property by breaking a sample of the rock into
smaller pieces.
• Surface characterbonding characteristics; excessively smooth,
slick, nonabsorbent aggregate surfaces bond poorly with cement.
Excessively rough, jagged, or absorbent surfaces are undesirable
because they resist compacting and placement and require
excessive cementing material. Visually inspect the rock surface
and feel the surface texture.

Very fine grained; splits along thin cracks Slate

Foliated

Metallic reflection; splits to slabs and flakes to thin semi- Schist

transparent sheets
Contains streaks or bands of light or dark minerals; breaks Gneiss
to bulky angular fragments
Pumice
Glassy Frothy

Light colored; lightweight; easily crushed

Dark colored; cindery Scoria
Light colored; massive; extremely hard Quartz
Dark colored; may have some gas bubbles Obsidian
Very fine grained
Coarse grained

Earthy, clay odor; platy Shale

No acid reaction
May have small pieces of glass; low Tuff
density
Soft

Acid reaction Sugary appearance Marble

Stony

Dull and massive Limestone

Waxy; very hard; weathers to soft white Chert
Hard

Dull; may contain some gas Light colored Felsite

bubbles or visible crystals Dark colored Basalt
Sandy; mostly one Gritty sandpaper feel Sandstone
mineral, quartz Sugary; not gritty Quartzite
Coarse grained
Hard

Mixed minerals; salt-and- Light colored Granite

pepper appearance Dark colored Gabro-diorite
Fragmental; appearance of broken concrete Conglomerate
Fragmental; appearance of broken concrete
Low density Tuff
Soft

Acid reaction Sugary appearance Marble

Shell fragments Limestone

Figure 11-2. Rock identification

11-6 Roads and Airfields

 Table 11-4. Rock characteristics
Use as Aggregates Use as
Chemical Surface Crushed Base
Rock Type Toughness Hardness Durability
Stability Character Shape Concrete Asphalt Course or
Subbase
Granite Good Good Good Excellent Fair to good Good Fair to good Fair to Good
good**
Syenite Good Good
Gabbro diorite Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Good Excellent Excellent Excellent
Diabase basalt Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Fair Excellent Excellent Excellent
Felsite Excellent Good Good Questionable Fair Fair Poor* Fair Fair to good
Conglomerate Poor Poor Poor Variable Good Fair Poor Poor Poor
breccia
Sandstone Variable Variable Variable Good Good Good Poor to fair Poor to fair Fair to good
Shale Poor Poor Poor Questionable Fair to good Poor Poor Poor Poor
Limestone Good Good Fair to good Good Good Good Fair to good Good Good
Dolomite Good Good
Chert Good Excellent Poor Poor Fair Poor Poor* Poor** Poor to fair
Gneiss Good Good Good Excellent Good Good to fair Good Good Good
Schist Good Good Fair Excellent Poor to fair Poor to fair Poor to fair Poor to fair Poor-fair
Slate Good Good Fair to good Excellent Good Poor Poor Poor Poor
Quartzite Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Good to fair Fair Good Fair to Fair to good
good**
Marble Good Fair Good Good Good Good Fair Fair Fair
*Reacts (alkali-aggregate)
**Use antistripping agents.

Roads and Airfields 11-7

FM 5-34
FM 5-34

DRAINAGE
The most common drainage structures are open ditches and
culverts.

RUNOFF ESTIMATE
You can estimate the volume of water that an open channel carries
using the hasty method. Determine the water volume using the
following formula:

( W 1 + W 2 )H
A w = ---------------------------------
-
2
where
Aw = cross-sectional area of storm-water runoff, in square feet
W1 = channel width at the watermark, in feet
W2 = channel width at the bottom, in feet
H = water height, from the bottom of the stream to the
watermark, in feet

W1

N
High watermark

W2

W1 = width of channel at high watermark, in feet

W2 = width of channel at bottom, in feet
H = vertical distance from bottom to high watermark, in feet

( W 1 + W 2 )H
- = area of waterway ( A w )
--------------------------------
2

Size of culvert = area of water

Safety factor = 100%

Figure 11-3. Cross-sectional area of water

11-8 Roads and Airfields

 FM 5-34

Estimate the quantity of runoff water, using Aw (previous formula)

and the velocity of the water in the channel, with the following
formula:
Q = Aw V

where
Q = quantity of the runoff water, in cubic feet per second (cfs)
Aw = cross-section area of the runoff, in square feet
V = velocity of the water, in feet per second (fps)
For information on a more deliberate design method, rational
method, see FM 5-430-00-1.

CULVERTS
To find the required diameter of pipe, use Q (previous formula), the
desired slope for the culvert (between 0.5 and 4 percent), and Table
11-5, page 11-10. If the diameter of the available pipe is different
from what you calculate, you may need more than one pipe. Use the
following formula to determine the number of pipes you need:
Q
NP = --------
QP
where
NP = number of pipes required
Q = quantity of water, in cfs
QP = quantity of water a pipe can handle, in cfs
Design
Use the Aw to compute the culvert-design area (Ades), which is 2Aw.
See Figure 11-4, page 11-11, to determine the maximum allowable
culvert diameter, fill, and cover. Round down to the next available
culvert diameter. Determine the number of pipes using the following
formula:
A des
N = ------------------------
-
pipe area
where—
N = number of pipes
Ades = design area of the culvert, in square feet
Start with the largest available culvert that meets the maximum
diameter requirement. Then go to smaller diameters until you find
the most economical solution.

Roads and Airfields 11-9

FM 5-34

Table 11-5. Determining pipe diameter in relation to Qp

Pipe Diameter (in)

V
S (%) 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 60 72
(fps)
Quantity of water in pipe (QP) (cfs)

0.4 1.30 3.90 8.40 15.00 25.00 37.00 53.00 96.00 160.00
0.5 2.00 1.45 4.35 9.20 16.50 27.50 41.00 58.50 108.00 175.00
0.6 1.60 4.80 10.00 18.00 30.00 45.00 64.00 120.00 190.00
0.7 1.70 5.10 11.00 19.50 32.00 47.50 68.00 125.00 200.00
0.8 1.80 5.40 12.00 21.00 34.00 50.00 72.00 130.00 210.00
0.9 3.00 1.90 5.65 12.50 21.50 35.00 52.00 74.50 135.00 215.00
1.0 2.00 5.90 13.00 22.00 36.00 54.00 77.00 140.00 220.00
1.1 2.10 6.15 13.00 23.00 37.00 55.50 78.50 145.00 225.00
1.2 2.20 6.40 13.00 24.00 38.00 57.00 80.00 150.00 230.00
1.3 2.25 6.50 13.00 24.50 38.50 58.00 81.00 150.00 230.00
1.4 2.30 6.60 14.00 25.00 39.00 59.00 82.00 150.00 230.00
1.5 2.35 6.70 14.00 25.00 39.00 59.00 82.00
1.6 2.40 6.80 14.00 25.00 40.00 59.00 83.00
1.7 4.00 2.45 6.90 14.00 25.00 40.00
1.8 2.50 7.00 14.00 26.00 40.00
1.9 2.50 7.00 14.50 26.00
2.0 2.50 7.00 15.00 26.00
2.1 2.55 7.05 15.00
2.2 2.60 7.10 15.00
5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00
NOTES:
1. The last value in each column is the maximum flow.
2. To use the chart, find the slope percentage and move right (horizontally) until
you intersect the column for the pipe diameter you selected. Find the velocity by
following the shaded or nonshaded area to the heavy bordered area and reading the
value. For example
A 36-inch pipe at 1.3 percent slope has a QP of 38.5 and a V of 4.
A 72-inch pipe at 0.9 percent slope has a QP of 215 and a V of 3.

11-10 Roads and Airfields

 FM 5-34

NOTE:
F = D + C = D + 1/2D = 2/3D
C = 1/2D or 12”, whichever is greater
Cover (C) Example 1:
If F = 39“
Then D = 2/3(39”) = 26”
Fill (F) Thus C = 1/2D = 1/2(26”) = 13”
Since C = 13” (which is greater
Culvert than 12”), use C = 13”
diameter (D) Check F = 13 + 26 = 39”

Invert Example 2:
If: F = 30”
Then: D = F - 12 = 30 -12 = 18”
max culvert diameter

Figure 11-4. Minimum fill and cover

Length

32’
2
3
1 5’ 11
8’

Example:
L = (5’)(2) + 32’ + (8’)(3) = 66’. Add 2’ for outlet, if there is
downstream headwall.
L = 66 + 2 = 68’ per culvert. If 3 culverts are needed, then
order (66’/culvert)(3 culverts).
(1.15 waste factor) = 227.7 or 228’

Figure 11-5. Culvert-length determination

Installation
Use the following criteria, when possible; Figure 11-6, page 11-12; and
Tables 11-6 and 11-7, page 11-13, to install a culvert:
• Place the inlet elevation at or below the ditch bottom.

Roads and Airfields 11-11

FM 5-34

• Extend the culvert 2 feet minimum downstream beyond the fill

slopes, if there is no downstream headwall.
• Use a minimum bedding of 1/10 diameter of the culvert.
• Space multiple culverts a minimum of half the diameter of the
culvert.
• Ensure that the slope is a minimum of 0.5 percent; the desired
slope is 2 to 4 percent.
• Use a headwall upstream.
• Use riprap downstream to control erosion.

Sandbag Culvert
Trough

10 cm
logs Stakes and spreaders spaced 1.8 m, center to center
2.4 m, center to center
Wrap posts together
with wire rope.

76 20 x 25 cm logs
cm
12” 8 cm x 31 cm
x 1.2 m cap
50 cm and sill

Driftpin or spike all 8 cm x 31 cm

8 cm x 31 cm x 8 cm x 31 cm x 46 cm collar
logs together. 1.4 m collar random lengths

Log Culvert Timber Culvert

Figure 11-6. Expedient-culvert examples

11-12 Roads and Airfields

 FM 5-34

Table 11-6. Recommended gauges for nestable corrugated pipe

Waterway Fill
Diameter
Area
(in) Up to 8 Up to 16
(sq ft) 20 Feet 25 Feet 30 Feet 35 Feet 40 Feet
Feet Feet
8 0.35 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
10 0.55 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
12* 0.79 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
15 1.23 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
18* 1.77 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
21 2.41 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
24* 3.14 16 16 16 16 14 14 14
30* 4.91 14 14 14 14 14 12 12
36* 7.07 14 14 14 12 12 12 10
42* 9.62 14 14 12 12 10 10 8
48* 12.57 12 12 12 10 8 8 8
54 15.90 12 12 10 8 8 8 8
60* 19.64 12 10 8 8 8 8 8
66 23.76 ** 10 8 8 8 8
72* 28.27 ** 10 8 8 8 Must be designed
for these fill
78 33.18 ** 8 8 8 heights and others
84 38.49 ** 8 8 8 above 40 feet.
NOTE: Culverts below the heavy line should be strutted during installation.
*Indicates corrugated-metal pipe sizes normally found in the theater of operations (TO)
**Indicates insufficient cover

Table 11-7. Strut spacing using 4- by-4 inch timbers with compression caps

Strut Spacing (ft)

Strut Length
Diameter (in) With fill of 5 With fill of 10 With fill of 20
(in)
to 10 ft to 20 ft to 30 ft
48 37.5 6* 6 6
54 43.6 6* 6 6
60 49.8 6* 6 6
66 56.0 6* 6 6
72 62.2 6* 6 5
*Ensures sufficient cover

OPEN-DITCH DESIGN
• Determine the area of water Aw (see formula in Runoff Estimate,
page 11-8).

Roads and Airfields 11-13

FM 5-34

• Select a site slope ratio based on soil stability (see Table 11-8),
equipment capacity, and safety.

Table 11-8. Recommended requirements for slope ratios in cuts and fills -
homogeneous soils

Slopes Not Subject to

Slopes Subject to Saturation
Saturation
USCS
Classification Maximum Maximum
Maximum Maximum
Height of Height of
Slope Ratio Slope Ratio
Earth Face Earth Face

GW, GP, GMd Not critical 11/2:1 Not critical 2:1

SW, SP, SMd
GMu, GC Less than 50 2:1 Less than 50 3:1
SMu, SC feet feet
ML, MH
CL, CH
OL, OH, Pt Generally not suitable for construction
NOTES:
1. Recommended slopes are valid only in homogeneous soils that have either
an in-place or compacted density equaling or exceeding 95% of CE 55 maxi-
mum dry density. For nonhomogeneous soils, or soils at lower densities, a
deliberate slope stability analysis is required.
2. Back slopes cut into loose soil will seek to maintain a near-vertical cleavage.
Do not apply loading above this cut face. Expect sloughing to occur.

• Determine the cutting depth according to Figure 11-7.

5’ freeboard

WT
6” minimum
Cutting depth

1 1 Water depth
D

Y X

FT 2A w
D = - + 1.5
-------------
X+Y

WT = D ( X + Y )

Figure 11-7. Open ditch

11-14 Roads and Airfields

 FM 5-34

EXPEDIENT AIRFIELD SURFACES

• Calculate the requirements to prepare subgrade, lay membrane,
and lay matting using Table 11-9 and Table 4-7, page 4-27.

Table 11-9. Mat characteristics

M8A1 M8 M18b M19 AM2

Bundle
Volume (cu ft) 24.7 22.7 74 86.7 62
Placing area (sq ft) 269 269 432 534 288
Weight (lb) 2,036 1,960 2,400 2,484 1,980

Number of panels 13/2 13/2 16/4 32/0 11/2

(full/half)

Panel
Dimension (ft) 1.6 x 11.8 1.0 x 11.8 2 x 12 4 x 4.1 2 x 12
Weight (lb) 144 140 120 68 140
Placing area (sq ft) 19.2 19.2 24 16.7 24

• Start placing matting from one corner of the runway with the male
hinges parallel with and toward the centerline. Lay the first strip
along the edge of the roadway. Stagger the second strip so that the
connectors from the first strip are at the center of the second strip’s
panels. You must fully insert the connecting bars (Figure 11-8,
page 11-16).

Minimum Operating Strip (MOS)

The main focus in airfield repair is the MOS, which is 15 by 1,525
meters for fighter aircraft and 26 by 2,134 meters for cargo.

Work Priority
Use the procedure below and Figure 11-9, page 11-16, to construct
MOSs.
• Establish the first MOS (15 by 1,525 meters).
• Use minimal effort to build 7.6-meter-wide access routes.
• Establish a second MOS (15 by 1,525 meters).
• Build more 7.6-meter-wide access routes.
• Lengthen the first MOS to 2,134 meters.
• Lengthen the second MOS to 2,134 meters.
• Widen the first MOS to 27.4 meters.
• Widen the second MOS to 27.4 meters.

Roads and Airfields 11-15

FM 5-34

String line

Sid
y of e or
wa c to
r run ed
f run ne Fe w a ge
do on ma y
En kc le
l oc hi n
rl ap ge
O ve

Str
ip
No
. 1 Connector bar

to r
ec
onn
Ma k c
le
hi n l oc
ap
ge
derl
U n
Str
ip
No
. 2 Connector bar slot Panel No. 2 goes here

M19 mat shown. Others may vary in

dimensions and connections

Figure 11-8. Typical mat and connectors

Main runway

Taxiway

Primary MOS Repaired craters

Secondary MOS Unrepaired craters

Figure 11-9. Constructing an MOS

11-16 Roads and Airfields

 FM 5-34

MEMBRANE AND MAT REPAIR

Membranes
Repair any tears in membranes by cutting an X and lifting the four
flaps back. Place a new piece of membrane under the torn area to
extend at least 30 centimeters beyond the torn area. Apply an
adhesive to the top of the new membrane and the bottom of the old
membrane. Allow the adhesive to become tacky. Fold the flaps back
into position, and let the adhesive set for at least 15 minutes. Roll
the patched area with a wheeled roller or vehicle.

Mats

M8A1
Unlock the end connector bars from the damaged panel; remove the
locking lugs. Move the panel laterally until the hooks are centered on
the slots. Pry the hooks out of the slots, and move the panel to clear
the overlapping ends. Remove the damaged panel. Remove the
locking lugs from the new panel, and orient it to the same position as
the damaged panel. Reverse the removal procedures to install the
new panel.

AM2
• Slide-out method. Slide out the entire run where damage to the
panel is located. Remove the end connector bars. Replace the
damaged panel. Push a new run in until it is 5 to 10 centimeters
from the next panel. Continue the procedure until you have
replaced all the panels. Push the run to its original position.
• Cutting method. Cut the damaged panel and remove the pieces (see
Figure 11-10, page 11-18). Replace the damaged panels with
special repair panel and accessories, if they are available (see
Figure 11-11, page 11-19).

M19
Replace a single mat by first cutting it using a circular saw (see
Figure 11-12, page 11-20). Use a pry-bar to lift the cut pieces. Unbolt
the edges of the damaged panel and replace it (see Figure 11-13, page
11-20).
To repair large areas, create a pyramid (see Figure 11-14, page 11-21).
Remove the maintenance access adapter, and start removing the
panels from the outside in until you reach the damaged area. Replace
the damaged area and panels.

Roads and Airfields 11-17

FM 5-34

Overlap 1 Order of Cuts

Cut No. 1:
3 2 Cut to hit lock bar void.
Depth of saw cut = 1”

Cuts No. 2 through 6:

4
Male Cut completely through the
panel.
Depth of saw cut = 1.6”

Cut No. 7:
Cut in groove between panels
with saw set at 10° bevel to hit
Female void at lock bar.
Depth of saw cut = 12”
6 5

Underlap 7

Figure 11-10. Cutting an AM2 mat

11-18 Roads and Airfields

 Locking bar
Setscrew
Locking-bar connector
Clamp
Socket-head screw
Socket-head cap screw
Locking bar
adjusting hole Connector adapter
Male connector
Adapters
Male-connector adapter Upper
Middle
Lower
D E
F
Dowel pin
Connector adapter
Dowel pin C
B A
Male Locking bar
View A Locking bar Clamp connector
tongue
Adapters
Upper Male-
connector Setscrew
Middle adapter
Lower

View B View C View D

Figure 11-11. AM2, special repair panel

FM 5-34

Roads and Airfields 11-19

FM 5-34

Left side of runway

Female edge
Overlap edge

4
1 3

2
NOTE: Numbers 5
denote saw-cut
sequence Underlap edge
Male edge

Base of saw Saw blade 30° 0.25”

Saw blade
0.81” Base of
saw
1.06” 0.875”
depth of cut
Damaged Damaged
Cut No. 1 panel Cut No. 2
panel Saw-blade guide

Figure 11-12. Cutting an M19 mat

Right side of
runway (ref)
Male edge
Underlap edge

2 A

1
Female edge
Overlap edge

Lock bar setscrew Section 2

(3 places)
Access hole for Overlap Female edge
lock bar (3 places) edge
Access hole for
lock bar (3 places)

Underlap edge
B Lock bar setscrew (3 places)
Overlap edge

Section 1 Underlap edge

Male edge
Access hole for
Lock bar setscrew (3 places) lock bar (3 places)

Figure 11-13. M19, repair-panel replacement

11-20 Roads and Airfields

 FM 5-34

Right edge of runway

Damaged area

Left edge of runway

Figure 11-14. M19, repairing large damaged areas

OTHER REPAIRS
Figure 11-15 and Figures 11-16 and 11-17, page 11-23, show different
emergency repair methods.

Existing pavement Existing pavement

Concrete slab

Gravel leveling course 10-13 cm

Undisturbed subgrade Ballast rock Undisturbed subgrade

Figure 11-15. Precast concrete-slab-crater repair

Roads and Airfields 11-21

FM 5-34

Bolts

20 cm Filled sand-grid
layer #2
Filled sand-grid
layer #1
Existing pavement Existing pavement

Compacted
debris
Layer of impervious
membrane

Figure 11-16. Sand-grid repair method

Normal repair AM2 or Choked-ballast AM2 or

method fiberglass repair method fiberglass
mat mat

4 4

1 10-15 cm
1 46-61 cm

Existing Existing
pavement 2 pavement
3

AM2 or
Cheap-ballast fiberglass
repair method mat 1 = High quality, well-graded crushed stone
2.5 cm
4
2 = Ballast rock ≤ 7.6 cm
1 3 = Debris compacted CBR 3-5
4 = A cover to prevent rocks or debris from
2 Existing flying; it must be bolted down to the old and
pavement new pavement.
3 -- = Layer of impervious membrane

Figure 11-17. Other repair methods

11-22 Roads and Airfields

 FM 5-34

ROAD DESIGN
ELEMENTS OF A HORIZONTAL CURVE
The following are elements of a simple, horizontal curve (see Figure
11-18):
• PC is the point of tangent departure.
• PT is where the curve ends or joins tangent B.
• PI is the intersecting point of two tangents.
• T is the tangent distance from PI to PC or from PI to PT.
• R is the radius of the circle from PC to PT.
• L is the length of the curve.
• I (angle of intersection) is the exterior angle at PI formed by
tangents between A and B.
• E (external distance) is the distance from PI to the midpoint of the
curve.
• C (long chord) is the straight-line distance from PC to PT.
• M (middle ordinate) is the distance from the midpoint of the curve
to the midpoint of the long chord.

PI
I
E
T L T

PC M PT

C B
A

R I R
2

Figure 11-18. Elements of a simple, horizontal curve

Roads and Airfields 11-23

FM 5-34

DEGREE OF CURVATURE (D)

The connecting curve between two tangents may be short and
sharp or long and gentle, depending on the properties of the circle
chosen. Sharpness is defined by the radius of the circle. The
common reference term for defining curve sharpness is D, which is
established as a whole or half degree and may be stated in terms of
either the arc or the chord.

Arc Definition
D is that angle which subtends a 100-foot arc along the curve (see
Fi g ur e 11 -1 9) . T hi s de fi nit i on is u sed by st at e hi g hwa y
departments and the Corps of Engineers in road design.

100.0
O D

Figure 11-19. Arc definition for degree of curvature

Chord Definition
D is the angle which subtends a 100-foot chord on the curve (see
Figure 11-20). This definition results in a slightly larger angle than
the arc method, and it is used by the railroad industry and the
Corps of Engineers in railroad design.

R
100.0

O D

Figure 11-20. Chord definition for degree of curvature

The difference between the arc and chord definitions is very slight
and nearly insignificant (frequently well below 1 percent) for TO
construction. However, because the arc definition is the most
widely used procedure in road design, only its definition will be
used throughout the rest of the chapter.

11-24 Roads and Airfields

 C2, FM 5-34

EQUATIONS FOR THE SIMPLE, HORIZONTAL-CURVE DESIGN

The two methods commonly used to solve horizontal-curve problems
are the 1-d eg re e -cur ve me tho d (se e Figur e 11- 21) and the
trigonometric method. Both methods may be used with the same
degree of accuracy. The 1-degree-curve method requires the functions
of a 1-degree-curve table shown in Appendix F of FM 5-430-00-1/
AFPAM 32-8013, Vol 1.

PI
I
1
90- /2
E
T
90+1/4
1/ 1
4 /4
M 1
/2
1/
4 PT
PC C C
/2 /2

R R

Figure 11-21. Derivation of external distance

Radius of Curvature

R = 5
, 729.58
------------------------
D

Tangent Distance (T)

Use the following equation if Appendix F of FM 5-430-00-1/AFPAM

32-8013, Vol 1 is not available:

I
T = R tan ---
2

or the following equation if Appendix F of FM 5-430-00-1/AFPAM 32-

8013, Vol 1 is available:

T I ° (arc definition)
T = --------
D

Roads and Airfields 11-25

C2, FM 5-34

External Distance (E)

Using the 1-degree curve method (see Figure 11-21, page 11-25),
find E as follows if Appendix F of FM 5-430-00-1/AFPAM 32-8013,
Vol 1 is available:

E 1 ° (arc definition)
E = ---------
D

or the following equation if Appendix F of FM 5-430-00-1/AFPAM

32-8013, Vol 1 is not available:

E = R  tan ---   tan --- 

I I
2  4

Long Chord (C)

C = 2R  sin ---  = 2T  cos --- 

I I
 2  2

Middle Ordinate (M)

Using the 1-degree-curve method (see Figure 11-21), find M as
follows if Appendix F of FM 5-430-00-1/AFPAM 32-8013, Vol 1 is
available:

M 1 ° (arc definition)
M = ----------
-
D

or the following equation if Appendix F of FM 5-430-00-1/AFPAM

32-8013, Vol 1 is not available:

M = R  1 – cos ---  = --- C  tan --- 

I 1 I
 2 2  4

Length of Curve (L)

I
L = ---- × 100
D

11-26 Roads and Airfields

 C2, FM 5-34

The central angle subtended by the entire horizontal curve has sides
that are radii to the PC and PT. Both of these radii are perpendicular
to the tangents that form the intersection angle I. The quadrilateral
formed by the four points of PI (180° - I), PC (90º), O (I), and PT (90º)
must total 360 [(180-I) + 90 + I + 90 = 360]. Thus, the central angle is
equal to the angle of intersection I.

DESIGNING HORIZONTAL CURVES

The engineer designing horizontal curves must know two facts about
the curve from the preliminary survey: the location and station of the
PI and the angle between intersecting tangent lines (I). The curves
can be designed after this information is obtained. The engineer can
use either the 1-degree-curve method or the trigonometric method. The
following steps show the design of horizontal curves using the 1-degree-
curve method:
Step 1. Find D using one of the following methods:
• If the curve is unrestricted—

D = 5,729.58
-----------------------
R

where—
D = degree of curvature
R = the radius of the curve
• If the curve is restricted by the tangent distance—

T1 °
D = -----------------------------
-
T (restricted)
where—
D = degree of curvature
T1º = tangent distance for a 1-degree curve (found in
Appendix F, FM 5-430-00-1/AFPAM 32-8013,
Vol 1, based on the angle of intersection)
T(restricted) = restricted tangent distance for a horizontal curve
• If the curve is restricted by the external distance—

E1 °
D = -----------------------------
-
E (restricted)

Roads and Airfields 11-27

C2, FM 5-34

where—
E1º = external distance for a 1-degree curve (found in
Appendix F, FM 5-430-00-1/AFPAM 32-8013,
Vol 1, based on the angle of intersection)
E(restricted) = restricted external distance for a horizontal
curve
• If both tangent and external distance restrictions exist,
choose the larger of the two Ds that result from the above
equations.
Step 2. Round up D to the next half degree when possible.
Step 3. Determine T.
T1 °
T = --------
-
D

Step 4. Find the stationing of PC.

PC = PI – T

Step 5. Calculate the length of the curve.

L =  ----  100
I
D 

Step 6. Find the stationing of PT.

PT = PC + L

Horizontal-Curve Design Examples

This section describes the horizontal-curve design procedures for
three common situations:
• No terrain restriction which limits T or E.
• Terrain restriction of the tangent distance.
• Terrain restriction of the external distance.
Example:
D with no terrain restriction—Figure 11-22 shows the following
computations:
Given: I = 50º, PI at 14 + 28
Find the station and location of PC and PT for a Class C road.

11-28 Roads and Airfields

 C2, FM 5-34

Solution:
D of 6º is selected as a flat, gentle curve. D = 6º is far below the
maximum allowable of D = 14.5º for Class C roads and is slightly
sharper than the maximum allowable of D = 5.5º for Class B roads.

PI = 14 + 28
I = 50º
T T
PC PT

R R

Figure 11-22. Horizontal curve with no sharpness restriction

Use D = 6º

5,729.58 5,729.58
R = ----------------------- = ----------------------- = 954.93 ′
D 6

50 °
T = R tan  ---  = 954.93′  tan ---------  = 445.29′
I
2 2

I 50
L = ---- × 100 = ------ × 100 = 833.33 ′
D 6

PC = PI – T = ( 14 + 28 ) – ( 445.29 ′ ) = ( 9 + 82.71 )

PT = PC + L = ( 9 + 82.71 ) + ( 833.33 ′ ) = ( 18 + 16.04 )

The PT is one point on the centerline, but it has two station values:
PT “back” and PT “ahead.” The PT station found above is the PT
“back.” This station is the overall distance from the beginning of the
project at station 0+00 to the PT, measured along the centerline of
the road.
PT “ahead” is determined from the equation PT = PI + T. The PT
“ahead” station is needed to verify if adequate distance exists
between the PT and the PC of the next curve. The distance between
adjacent curves is the difference between the PT “ahead” station and
the next PC station.

Roads and Airfields 11-29

 Chapter 12
Rigging
ROPE
This chapter deals with information on rope, knots and attachments,
chains and hooks, slings, and picket holdfasts. Most of the
information is in table or figure format. For more detailed
information on rigging, see FM 5-125.

Table 12-1. Properties of manila and sisal rope

Number 1 Manila Sisal

Nominal Approximate
Circumference
Diameter Weight Breaking Safe Breaking Safe Load
(in)
(in) (lb per ft) Strength Load (lb) Strength (lb)
(lb) FS = 4 (lb) FS = 4

1/4 3/4 0.020 600 150 480 120

3/8 1 1/8 0.040 1,350 325 1,080 260
1/2 1 1/2 0.075 2,650 660 2,120 520
5/8 2 0.133 4,400 1,100 3,520 880
3/4 2 1/4 0.167 5,400 1,350 4,320 1,080
7/8 2 3/4 0.186 7,700 1,920 6,160 1,540
1 3 0.270 9,000 2,250 7,200 1,800
1 1/8 3 1/2 0.360 12,000 3,000 9,600 2,400
1 1/4 3 3/4 0.418 13,500 3,380 10,800 2,700
1 1/2 4 1/2 0.600 18,500 4,620 14,800 3,700
1 3/4 5 1/2 0.895 26,500 6,625 21,200 5,300
2 6 1.080 31,000 7,750 24,800 6,200
2 1/2 7 1/2 1.350 46,500 11,620 37,200 9,300
3 9 2.420 64,000 16,000 51,200 12,800
NOTES:
1. Breaking strengths and safe loads are for new rope that is used under favorable
conditions. As rope ages or deteriorates, reduce safe loads progressively to one-half
of the values given.
2. You can compute the safe-working load using an FS 4, but when the condition of
the rope is doubtful, divide the computed further load by 2.

Rigging 12-1
FM 5-34

Table 12-2. Breaking strength of 6 by 19 standard wire rope

Breaking Strength, in Tons*

Nominal Approximate
Diameter Weight Iron Extra
Traction Plow Improved
(in) (lb per ft) Improved
Steel Steel Plow Steel
Plow Steel

1/4 0.10 1.4 2.6 2.39 2.74

3/8 0.23 2.1 4.0 5.31 6.10 7.55
1/2 0.40 3.6 6.8 9.35 10.70 13.30
5/8 0.63 5.5 10.4 14.50 16.70 20.60
3/4 0.90 7.9 14.8 20.70 23.80 29.40
7/8 1.23 10.6 20.2 28.00 32.20 39.80
1 1.60 13.7 26.0 36.40 4.18 51.70
1 1/8 2.03 17.2 32.7 45.70 52.60 65.00
1 1/4 2.50 21.0 40.6 56.20 64.60 79.90
1 1/2 3.60 29.7 56.6 80.00 92.00 114.00
1 3/4 108.00 124.00 153.00
2 139.00 160.00 198.00
*The maximum allowable working load is the breaking strength divided by the
appropriate FS (Table 12-3).

Table 12-3. Wire-rope FS

Type of Service Minimum FS

Track cables 3.2

Guys 3.5

Miscellaneous hoisting equipment 5.0

Haulage ropes 6.0

Derricks 6.0

Small electric and air hoists 7.0

Slings 8.0

12-2 Rigging
 FM 5-34

KNOTS AND ATTACHMENTS

Table 12-4. Knots

Group Knot Purpose
Overhand For preventing the end of a rope from
untwisting, forming a knob at the end of a
rope, or serving as a part of another knot
Figure eight For forming a larger knot at the end of a rope
Knots at the end of a rope
than would be formed by an overhand knot
Wall For preventing the end of a rope from
untwisting when an enlarged end is not
objectionable
Square For tying two ropes of equal size together so
they will not slip
Single sheet bend For tying together two ropes of unequal size
or tying a rope to an eye
Knots for joining two ropes Double sheet bend For tying together two ropes of equal or
unequal size requiring more holding power
than that of the single sheet bend, tying wet
ropes together, or tying a rope to an eye
Carrick bend For heavy loads and for joining large hawsers
of heavy rope
Bowline For lowering men and material
Double bowline For slinging a man
Running bowline For tying a handline around an object you
cannot safely reach, such as the end of a
limb
Bowline on a bight For the same purpose as a boatswain’s chair;
use it when
•You need more strength than a single
bowline will give.
•You need to form a loop at some point in a
rope other than at the end.
•You do not have access to the end of a
rope.
Knots for making loops
Spanish bowline For use in rescue work or for giving a twofold
grip for lifting a pipe or other round object in a
sling
French bowline For use as a sling to lift an injured man or
when working alone and you need your
hands free
Spier For use when you need a fixed loop, a non-
slip knot, and a quick release
Cat’s paw For fastening an endless sling to a hook, or
making it at the end of a rope to fasten the
rope to a hook
Figure eight with an extra For tightening a rope
turn

Knots for tightening a rope Butterfly For pulling taught a high line, handline, tread
rope for foot bridges or similar installations
Baker bowline For the same purpose as the butterfly knot
and for lashing cargo

Rigging 12-3
FM 5-34

Figure 12-1. Overhand knot

Figure 12-2. Figure-eight knot

12-4 Rigging
 FM 5-34

2
1

3 4

Figure 12-3. Wall knot

1 2 3

Figure 12-4. Single sheet bend

Rigging 12-5
FM 5-34

1 2

Figure 12-5. Double sheet bend

1 2

3 4

Figure 12-6. Carrick bend

12-6 Rigging
 FM 5-34

1 2 3

Figure 12-7. Bowline

1 3
2

Figure 12-8. Double bowline

Rigging 12-7
FM 5-34

2
1

Figure 12-9. Running bowline

2
1

3 4

Figure 12-10. Bowline on a bight

12-8 Rigging
 FM 5-34

1 2

3 4

Figure 12-11. Spanish bowline

1 2

Figure 12-12. French bowline

Rigging 12-9
FM 5-34

1 2

3
4

Figure 12-13. Speir knot

At center of rope

1 2

At end of rope

2
1

Figure 12-14. Cat’s-paw

12-10 Rigging
 FM 5-34

Figure 12-15. Figure eight with an extra turn

1 2

3 4

Figure 12-16. Butterfly knot

Rigging 12-11
 FM 5-34

12-12 Rigging
Pass the
Form a loop. running end
through the
loop.

Pass the running Use a round turn

end under the object and two half hitches.
and through the tie-
down ring. 6
2 5
1

Draw tight.
Draw the bight
through the loop. 7 8
Form a bight
under the loop.

Form a bight with

the running end.

Figure 12-17. Baker bowline

 FM 5-34

Incorrect

Incorrect

Correct

Figure 12-18. Wire-rope clips

Table 12-5. Assembling wire-rope eye-loop connections

Wire-Rope Nominal Spacing Torque to be Applied

Diameter Size of Number of Clips to Nuts of Clips
Clips of Clips (m–kg x
(in) (mm) (in) (in) (mm) (ft–lb)
0.1382)

5/16 7.95 3/8 3 2 50 25 3.5

3/8 9.52 3/8 3 2 1/4 57 25 3.5
7/16 11.11 1/2 4 2 3/4 70 40 5.5
1/2 12.70 1/2 4 3 76 40 5.5
5/8 15.85 5/8 4 3 3/4 95 65 9.0
3/4 19.05 3/4 4 4 1/2 114 100 14.0
7/8 22.22 1 5 5 1/4 133 165 23.0
1 25.40 1 5 6 152 165 23.0
1 1/4 31.75 1 1/4 5 7 1/2 190 250 35.0
1 3/8 34.92 1 1/2 6 8 1/4 210 375 52.0
1 1/2 38.10 1 1/2 6 9 230 375 52.0
1 3/4 44.45 1 3/4 6 10 1/2 267 560 78.0
Note: Clip spacing should be six times the diameter of the wire rope. To assemble
an end-to-end connection, increase the number of clips indicated above by two. Use
the proper torque indicated above on all clips. Reverse the U-bolts at the center of
connection so that they are on the dead end (reduced load) of each wire rope.

Rigging 12-13
FM 5-34

ROPE BRIDGES
ONE-ROPE BRIDGE
Construct a one-rope bridge using a 36 1/2-meter rope; however do
not bridge obstacles that exceed 20 meters with that rope length.
Anchor the rope with an anchor knot (round turn with two half
hitches) on the far side of the obstacle, and tie it off at the near end
with a tightening system.
You can build a one-rope bridge in many ways, depending on the
tactical situation and area you are to cross. (For example, if you
cross a gorge above a treeline, you may have to emplace artificial
anchors.) Regardless, all one-rope bridges require similar elements
for you to emplace safely:
• Two suitable anchors.
• Good loading and unloading platforms.
• One rope about 1-meter high for loading and unloading.
• A tightening system.
• A rope tight enough for ease of crossing.
The technique you use will determine on which side you place the
tightening system and whether you use an anchor knot or a
retrievable bowline (see Figure 12-19).

Figure 12-19. One-rope bridge

12-14 Rigging
 FM 5-34

TWO-ROPE BRIDGE
Construct a two-rope bridge (see Figure 12-20) the same as a one-rope
bridge except use two ropes. Space the ropes about 1 1/2 meters apart
at the anchor points. The two-rope bridge is ideal for a platoon-size
element. This bridge, however, does requires more time and
equipment to construct than the one-rope bridge:
• Two climbing ropes.
• Two snaplinks.
• Seven soldiers for construction.
• One sling rope and two snaplinks for those using the bridge.
NOTE: Construct the top rope using any transport-tightening-
system technique.

Figure 12-20. Two-rope bridge

Rigging 12-15
FM 5-34

CHAINS AND HOOKS

Figure 12-21. Link thickness

Table 12-6. Properties of chains (FS 6)

Approximate SWC (lb)

Weight per
Size*
Linear Foot High-Grade
Common Iron Soft Steel Special Steel
(lb) Iron

1/4 0.8 512 563 619 1,240

3/8 1.7 1,350 1,490 1,650 3,200
1/2 2.5 2,250 2,480 2,630 5,250
5/8 4.3 3,470 3,810 4,230 7,600
3/4 5.8 5,070 5,580 6,000 10,500
7/8 8.0 7,000 7,700 8,250 14,330
1 10.7 9,300 10,230 10,600 18,200
1 1/8 12.5 9,871 10,858 11,944 21,500
1 1/4 16.0 12,186 13,304 14,634 26,300
1 3/8 18.3 14,717 16,188 17,807 32,051
*Size listed is the diameter, in inches, of one side of a link.

12-16 Rigging
 FM 5-34

B Eye

Throat D
Mouth
C A

Slip Hook Grab Hook

Figure 12-22. Types of hooks

Table 12-7. Safe loads on hooks

Diameter of Inside Diameter Width of Length of SWC of

Metal A* (in) of Eye B* (in) Opening C* (in) Hook D* (in) Hooks (lb)

11/16 1/8 1 1/16 4 15/16 1,200

3/4 1 1 1/3 5 13/32 1,400
7/8 1 1/8 1 1/4 6 1/4 2,400
1 1 1/4 1 3/8 6 7/8 3,400
1 1/8 1 3/8 1 1/2 7 5/8 4,200
1 1/4 1 1/2 1 11/16 8 19/32 5,000
1 3/8 1 5/8 1 7/8 9 1/2 6,000
1 1/2 1 3/4 2 1/16 10 11/32 8,000
1 5/8 2 2 1/4 11 21/32 9,400
1 7/8 2 3/8 2 1/2 13 9/32 11,000
2 1/4 2 3/4 3 14 13/16 13,600
2 5/8 3 1/8 3 3/8 16 1/2 17,000
3 3 1/2 4 19 3/4 24,000
*See Figure 12-22.

Rigging 12-17
 SLINGS
FM 5-34

Table 12-8. SWCs for manila-rope slings (standard, three-strand, splice in each end)
Single
Size Double Sling Quadruple Sling

12-18 Rigging
Sling

Circumference Diameter (in) Vertical 60o 45o 30o 60o 45o 30o
(in) Lift (lb) Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle
(lb) (lb) (lb) (lb) (lb) (lb)
3/4 1/4 108 187 153 108 374 306 216
1 1/8 3/8 241 418 341 241 836 683 482
1 1/2 1/2 475 822 672 475 1,645 1,345 950
2 5/8 791 1,370 1,119 791 2,740 2,238 1,585
2 1/4 3/4 970 1,680 1,375 970 3,360 2,750 1,940
2 3/4 7/8 1,382 2,395 1,945 1,382 4,790 3,890 2,764
3 1 1,620 2,805 2,290 1,620 5,610 4,580 3,240
3 1/2 1 1/8 2,160 3,740 3,060 2,160 7,480 6,120 4,320
3 3/4 1 1/4 2,430 4,205 3,437 2,430 8,410 6,875 4,860
4 1/2 1 1/2 3,330 5,770 4,715 3,330 11,540 9,430 6,660
5 1/2 1 3/4 4,770 8,250 6,750 4,770 16,500 13,500 9,540
6 2 5,580 9,670 7,900 5,580 19,340 15,800 11,160
7 1/2 2 1/2 8,366 14,500 11,850 8,366 29,000 23,700 16,732
9 3 11,520 19,950 16,300 11,520 39,900 32,600 23,040
 FM 5-34

Table 12-9. SWCs for chain slings (new wrought-iron chains)

Single
Double Sling Quadruple Sling
Sling
Link Stock
Diameter
(in) 60o Angle 45o Angle 30o Angle 60o Angle 45o Angle
Vertical Lift 30o Angle
(lb) (lb) (lb) (lb) (lb) (lb) (lb)

3/8 2,510 4,350 3,555 2,510 8,700 7,110 5,020

7/16 3,220 5,575 4,560 3,220 11,150 9,120 6,440

1/2 4,180 7,250 5,915 4,180 14,500 11,830 8,360

9/16 5,420 9,375 7,670 5,420 18,750 15,340 10,840

5/8 6,460 11,175 9,150 6,460 22,350 18,300 12,920

3/4 9,160 15,850 12,950 9,160 31,700 25,900 18,320

7/8 13,020 22,550 18,410 13,020 45,100 36,820 26,000

1 17,300 29,900 24,450 17,300 59,800 48,900 34,600

1 1/8 21,550 37,350 30,550 21,550 74,700 61,100 43,100

1 1/4 26,600 46,050 37,600 26,600 92,100 75,200 53,200

1 3/8 32,200 55,750 45,600 32,200 111,500 91,200 64,400

1 1/2 38,300 66,400 54,250 38,300 132,800 108,500 76,600

1 5/8 44,600 77,200 63,050 44,600 154,400 126,100 89,200

1 3/4 51,300 88,750 72,500 51,300 177,500 145,000 102,600

1 7/8 58,700 101,500 83,000 58,700 203,000 166,000 117,400

2 66,200 114,500 93,500 58,700 229,000 187,000 132,400

Rigging 12-19
FM 5-34

Table 12-10. SWCs for wire-rope slings (new IPS wire rope)
Single
Double Sling Quadruple Sling
Link Stock Sling
Diameter
(in) Vertical 60o Angle 45o Angle 30o Angle 60o Angle 45o Angle 30o Angle
Lift (lb) (lb) (lb) (lb) (lb) (lb) (lb)

1/4 1,096 1,899 1,552 1,096 3,798 3,105 2,192

5/16 1,690 2,925 2,390 1,690 5,850 4,780 3,380
3/8 2,460 4,260 3,485 2,460 8,520 6,970 4,920
7/16 3,560 6,170 5,040 3,560 12,340 10,080 7,120
1/2 4,320 7,475 6,105 4,320 14,950 12,210 8,640
9/16 5,460 9,450 7,725 5,460 18,900 15,450 10,920
5/8 6,650 11,500 9,400 6,650 23,000 18,800 13,300
3/4 9,480 16,400 13,400 9,480 32,800 26,800 18,960
7/8 12,900 22,350 18,250 12,900 44,700 36,500 25,800
1 16,800 29,100 23,750 16,800 58,200 47,500 33,600
1 1/8 21,200 36,700 30,000 21,200 73,400 60,000 42,400
1 1/4 26,000 45,000 36,800 26,000 90,000 73,600 52,000
1 3/8 32,000 55,400 45,250 32,000 110,800 90,500 64,000
1 1/2 37,000 64,000 52,340 37,000 128,000 104,700 74,000
1 5/8 41,800 72,400 59,200 41,800 144,800 118,400 83,600
1 3/4 49,800 86,250 70,500 49,800 172,500 141,000 99,600
2 62,300 107,600 88,050 62,300 215,200 176,100 124,600
2 1/4 82,900 143,500 117,400 82,900 287,000 234,800 165,800
2 1/2 101,800 176,250 144,000 101,800 352,500 288,000 203,600
2 3/4 122,500 212,000 173,500 122,500 424,000 347,000 245,000

PICKET HOLDFASTS
You can drive a single picket, steel or wood, into the ground as an
anchor. The holding power depends on the following:
• Diameter and kind of material you use.
• Type of soil.
• Depth and angle in which you drive the picket.
• Angle of the guy line in relation to the ground.
Table 12-11 lists the holding capacities of the various types of
wooden picket holdfasts. Figure 12-23 shows the various picket
holdfasts. Figure 12-24, page 12-22, shows how to prepare a picket
holdfast.

12-20 Rigging
 FM 5-34

Table 12-11. Holding power of wooden picket holdfasts in loamy soil

Holdfasts Pounds

Single picket 700

1-1 picket 1,400

1-1-1 picket 1,800

2-1 picket 2,000

3-2-1 picket 4,000

NOTE:
Wet earth factors
Clay and gravel mixtures - 0.9
Riven clay and sand - 0.5

1,800 lb
700 lb

1-1-1 combination
Single picket

2,000 lb

1,400 lb
2-1 combination

4,000 lb
1-1 combination

3-2-1 combination

Figure 12-23. Picket holdfasts (loamy soil)

Rigging 12-21
FM 5-34

Direction of pull
A. Drive the pickets (steel
or wood) into ground, 2’ (minimum) 3’ to 6’
15° minimum from
vertical.

3’ (minimum) 3’ diameter
(minimum)

4 to 6 turns
B. Lash the pickets
together, starting at the
top of the first picket.
Clove hitch

C. Twist the rope with a

rack stick, then drive
the stick into the
ground.

D. Complete the picket

holdfast.

Figure 12-24. Preparing a picket holdfast

12-22 Rigging
 Chapter 13
Environmental-Risk Management
Each day, commanders make decisions affecting the environment.
These decisions affect resources entrusted to the Army. These
decisions also have serious environmental and legal consequences for
decision makers. The military’s inherent responsibility to the nation
is to protect and preserve its resources—a responsibility that resides
at all levels. Risk management is an effective process to assist in
preserving these resources. Unit leaders identify actions that may
negatively impact the environment and take appropriate steps to
prevent or mitigate damage.

PURPOSE
This chapter shows how to use the risk-management process of
assessing and managing. It concentrates specifically on
environme ntal-related risk; however, these risks would be
incorporated into a company’s overall risk-management plan. When
assessing hazardous risks in operations, a commander and his staff
must look at two types of risk:
• Tactical risk–is concerned with hazards that exist because of the
presence of either an enemy or an adversary. It applies to all levels
of war and across the spectrum of operations.
• Accidental risk–includes all operational-risk considerations other
than tactical risk. It includes risk to friendly forces and the risk
posed to civilians by an operation, as well as the impact of
operations on the environment. Accidental risk can include
activities associated with hazards concerning friendly personnel,
civilians, equipment readiness, and environmental conditions.
Tactical and accident risks may be diametrically opposed. A
commander may choose to accept a high level of environmental-
related accident risk to reduce the overall tactical risk. For example,
he may decide to destroy an enemy’s petroleum storage area to
reduce his overall tactical risk. Figure 13-1, page 13-2, shows the
relationship of environmental hazards to the total risk-management
process.

LEGAL AND REGULATORY RESPONSIBILITIES

Risk management does not convey authority to deliberately disobey
local, state, national, or host nation (HN) laws and regulations. It
does not justify ignoring regulatory restrictions and applicable
standards, nor does it justify bypassing risk controls required by law.

Environmental-Risk Management 13-1

FM 5-34

1
Identify hazards

METT-T Environmental
hazards hazards

Tactical and accident risks

2 4
Assess hazards Implement
controls

3 5
Develop controls Supervise and
Make decisions evaluate

Figure 13-1. Environmental hazard relationship to the risk-management

process

Examples include the provisions applicable to the transportation of

hazardous material (HM) and hazardous waste (HW), the life
safety and fire-protection codes, or the storage of classified material
and physical security.

RISK-MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES
A commander uses the three risk-management principles described
in FM 100-14 to assist him in making environmental-risk
decisions:
• Integrate risk management into mission planning, preparation,
and execution.
• Make risk decisions at the appropriate level in the chain of
command.
• Accept no unnecessary risk.

ENVIRONMENTAL BENEFITS OF RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk management assists a commander in complying with
environmental regulatory and legal requirements and operating
within the higher commander’s intent. Risk management provides
a commander a tool to do the following:

13-2 Environmental-Risk Management

 FM 5-34

• Identify applicable environmental standards, laws, and rules of

engagement (ROE) that affect a mission.
• Identify alternate courses of action (COAs) or alternate standards
that meet the intent of the law and the operational requirements.
• Identify feasible and effective control measures where specific
standards do not exist.
• Ensure better use of limited resources, such as training areas and
ranges.
• Ensure the health and welfare of soldiers and other affected
personnel.
• Minimize or eliminate damage to natural and cultural resources.

THE RISK-MANAGEMENT PROCESS

Risk management is the process of identifying, assessing, and
controlling risk that arises from operational factors and balancing
risk with mission benefits. This description integrates risk
management into the military decision-making process (MDMP). FM
100-14 outlines the risk-management process and provides the
framework for making risk management a routine part of planning,
preparing, and executing operational missions and everyday tasks.
Assessing environmental-related risks is part of the total risk-
management process. The five steps in the risk-management process
are as follows:
Step 1. Identify the environmental hazards.
Step 2. Assess the environmental hazards to determine the risk.
Step 3. Develop the controls and make risk decisions.
Step 4. Implement the controls.
Step 5. Supervise and evaluate.
Knowledge of environmental factors is key to planning and decision-
making. With this knowledge, a commander quantifies risks, detects
problem areas, reduces risk of injury or death, reduces property
damage, and ensures compliance with environmental laws and
regulations. A unit commander should conduct risk assessments
using the risk-management work sheet before conducting any
training, operations, or logistical activities. Figure 13-2, page 13-4,
shows this work sheet with all the blocks filled in. Blocks A through E
contain general information. Steps 1 through 4 in the following
paragraphs explain how to fill in blocks F through J.

Environmental-Risk Management 13-3

FM 5-34

A. Mission or Task B. Date/Time Group C. Date Prepared:

586th Engineer Company (AFB) Begin: 010600RJun XX 22 May XX
End: 061200RJun XX

D. Prepared By: (Rank, Last Name, Duty Position)

1LT Elizabeth Young, XO

E. Task: F. Identify G. H. Develop I. Deter- J. Implement

Hazards: Assess Controls: mine Resid- Controls: ("How
Hazards: ual Risk: To")
Conduct con- Vehicle acci- Moderate 1. Train all drivers on Low (L) TACSOP, para 8(a),
voy opera- dents and (M) proper actions to take OPORD train all driv-
tions to Camp breakdowns during a spill: protect ers before the exer-
Yukon causing fuel themselves, stop the cise. Supply NCO will
and HM spills flow, notify chain of order and issue vehi-
command, and con- cle-spill equipment.
fine the spill. Platoon leaders will
2. Provide vehicle- brief soldiers before
spill equipment the convoy (ARTEP
5-145-32-MTP 05-2-
1030).

Spills during Moderate 1. Train all fuel han- Low (L) TACSOP, para 11(a),
refueling (M) dlers on proper refu- OPORD support pla-
stops eling procedures. toon leader will check
2. Provide spill equip- status of spill equip-
ment. ment and brief all sol-
3. Ensure that only diers, before the
fuel handlers dis- convoy, on refueling
pense fuel. procedures (FM 10-
4. Locate refueling 71, FM 20-400,
sites away from bod- ARTEP 5-145-32-
ies of water and wet- MTP 05-2-1024).
land areas.

Maneuver Moderate 1. Brief all drivers to Low (L) TACSOP, para, 9(a),
damage from (M) stay on primary and OPORD provide all
off-road secondary roads. drivers with strip map
movement 2. Identify all sensitive marking route and
areas and habitats sensitive areas; lead-
along the route. ers account for all
3. Conduct prior-route vehicles at halts
recon. (ARTEP 5-145-32-
MTP 05-2-1030).

K. Determine the overall Mission/Task risk level after controls are implemented (circle one):
LOW (L) MODERATE (M) HIGH (H) EXTREMELY HIGH (E)

Figure 13-2. Sample risk-management work sheet, all blocks filled in

STEP 1. IDENTIFY THE ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS

A commander and his staff identify environmental hazards during
mission analysis (see Figure 13-2, column F). FM 100-14 defines a
hazard as any actual or potential condition that can cause injury,
illness, or death of personnel; damage to or loss of equipment or
property; or mission degradation. Environmental hazards include
all activities that may pollute, create negative noise-related effects,
degrade archeological/cultural resources, or negatively affect

13-4 Environmental-Risk Management

 FM 5-34

threatened or endangered species habitat. Figure 13-3 lists common

environmental hazards identified by environmental media areas.
Element Hazard
Air Equipment exhaust
Convoy dust
Range fires
Open-air burning
Pyrotechnics/smoke pots/smoke grenades
Part-washer emissions
Paint emissions
Air-conditioner/refrigeration CFCs
HM/HW release
Archeological/cultural Maneuvering in sensitive areas
Digging in sensitive areas
Disturbing or removing artifacts
Demolition/munitions effects
HM/HW spills
Sonic booms/prop wash
Noise Low-flying aircraft (helicopters)
Demolition/munitions effects
Nighttime operations
Operations near post/camp boundaries and civilian popu-
lace
Vehicle convoys/maneuvers
Large-scale exercises
Threatened/ Maneuvering in sensitive areas
endangered species Demolition/munitions effects, especially during breeding
seasons
Disturbing individual species or their habitats
HM/HW spills or releases
Poor field sanitation
Improper cutting of vegetation
Damage to coral reefs
Soil (terrain) Over use of maneuver areas
Demolition/munitions effects
Range fires
Poor field sanitation
Poor maneuver-damage control
Erosion
Troop construction effects
Refueling operations
HM/HW spills
Maneuvering in ecologically sensitive areas such as wet-
lands and tundra
Water Refueling operations near water sources
HM/HW spills
Erosion and unchecked drainage
Amphibious/water-crossing operations
Troop construction effects
Poor field sanitation
Washing vehicles at unapproved sites

Figure 13-3. Common environmental hazards

STEP 2. ASSESS THE ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS TO DETERMINE
THE RISK

Risk assessment is a three-stage process used to determine the risk of

potential harm to the environment. A commander considers two
factors, probability and severity. Probability is how often an
environmental hazard is likely to occur. Severity is the effect that a
hazard will have on the environment. Probability and severity are
estimates that require an individual’s judgment and a working

Environmental-Risk Management 13-5

FM 5-34

knowledge of the risk-management process and its terminology.

Figure 13-4 defines the five degrees of probability for a hazard;
Figure 13-5 defines the four degrees of severity.
Frequent (A) Occurs very often, continuously experienced
Single item Occurs very often in service life; expected to occur several times over duration
of a specific mission or operation; always occurs
Fleet or inventory of Occurs continuously during a specific mission or operation or over a service
items life
Individual soldier Occurs very often in career; expected to occur several times during mission or
operation; always occurs
All soldiers exposed Occurs continuously during a specific mission or operation
Likely (B) Occurs several times
Single item Occurs several times in service life; expected to occur during a specific mis-
sion or operation
Fleet or inventory of Occurs at a high rate but experienced intermittently (regular intervals, gener-
items ally often)
Individual soldier Occurs several times in career; expected to occur during a specific mission or
operation
All soldiers exposed Occurs at a high rate but experienced intermittently
Occasional (C) Occurs sporadically
Single item Occurs sometime in service life; may occur about as often as not during a spe-
cific mission or operation
Fleet or inventory of Occurs several times in service life
items
Individual soldier Occurs sometime in career; may occur during a specific mission or operation
but not often
All soldiers exposed Occurs sporadically (irregularly, sparsely, or sometimes)
Seldom (D) Remotely possible; could occur at sometime
Single item Occurs in service life but only remotely possible; not expected to occur during
a specific mission or operation
Fleet or inventory of Occurs as isolated incidents; possible to occur sometime in service life but
items rarely; usually does not occur
Individual soldier Occurs as isolated incident during a career; remotely possible but not
expected to occur during a specific mission or operation
All soldiers exposed Occurs rarely within exposed population as isolated incidents
Unlikely (E) Can assume will not occur, but not impossible
Single item Occurrence not impossible; but may assume will almost never occur in service
life; may assume will not occur during a specific mission or operation
Fleet or inventory of Occurs very rarely (almost never or improbable); incidents may occur over
items service life
Individual soldier Occurrence not impossible but may assume will not occur in career or during a
specific mission or operation
All soldiers exposed Occurs very rarely but not impossible

Figure 13-4. Hazard probability

Stage 1
A commander assesses the probability of each hazard. For each
hazard he identified (see Figure 13-2, page 13-4), he would make
the following determinations:
• Based on experience and the information in Figure 13-4 he
determines that a vehicle accident or breakdown causing a fuel
and/or HM spill would seldom happen.

13-6 Environmental-Risk Management

 FM 5-34

• Based on his judgment and the information in Figure 13-4, he

determines that spills during refueling stops can occasionally be
expected.
• Based on his working knowledge and the information in Figure 13-4,
he determines that maneuver damage from off-road movement
could happen frequently.

Stage 2
A commander assesses the severity of each hazard he identified.
Definitions for the degrees of severity are not absolutes; they are
more conditional and are mission, enemy, terrain, troops, and time
available (METT-T) related. A commander must use his experience,
judgment, lessons learned, and subject-matter experts to help
determine the degrees of severity. Figure 13-5 defines the four
degrees of severity.
Catastrophic (I) Loss of ability to accomplish the mission or mission failure, death or
permanent total disability (accident risk), loss of major or mission-criti-
cal system or equipment, major property (facility) damage, severe
environmental damage, mission-critical security failure, unacceptable
collateral damage
Critical (II) Significantly (severely) degraded mission capability or unit readiness,
permanent partial disability, temporary total disability exceeding 3
months time (accident risk), extensive (major) damage to equipment
or systems, significant damage to property or the environment, secu-
rity failure, significant collateral damage
Marginal (III) Degraded mission capability or unit readiness; minor damage to
equipment or systems, property, or the environment; lost day due to
injury or illness, not exceeding 3 months (accident risk); minor damage
to property or the environment
Negligible (IV) Little or no adverse impact on mission capability, first aid or minor
medical treatment (accident risk), slight equipment or system damage
but fully functional and serviceable, little or no property or environmen-
tal damage

Figure 13-5. Hazard severities

The following are examples of hazard severities:
• Catastrophic–a spill of significant quantity in an unconfined area,
such as a river or other water source, causing widespread pollution/
health hazard to friendly forces and/or civilian personnel, as well as
making cleanup extremely difficult, costly, and long-term. Will
require notifying a higher HQ, public affairs, and outside agencies.
Significant assistance from outside agenc ies is required.
Widespread public concern is expected.
• Critical–a spill of more than 5 gallons or in an unconfined area such
as drainage area, wetlands, rivers, or other water sources causing

Environmental-Risk Management 13-7

FM 5-34

pollution and possible health hazards. Cleanup is difficult and

costly and may require assistance and notification of outside
agencies.
• Marginal–a small spill of less than 5 gallons in an area where the
spill may not be as easily contained making spill cleanup efforts
more difficult. No long-term, widespread environmental, or
health effects are anticipated. Cleanup can be accomplished with
available assets. Unit procedures may require reporting the spill
to a higher HQ.
• Negligible–a small spill of less than 5 gallons in an area where
the spill can be contained and immediately cleaned up using unit
spill kits and available personnel.
From the information in Figure 13-2, page 13-4, a commander
would make the following determinations:
• Based on experience and the information in Figure 13-4, page 13-6,
he determines that a vehicle accident or breakdown causing a
fuel and/or HM spill could be significant and cause major damage
to the environment. The severity would be critical.
• Based on his judgment and the information in Figure 13-4, he
determines that spills during refueling stops could cause minor
damage to the environment. The severity would be marginal.
• Based on his working knowledge and the information in Figure
13-4, he determines that maneuver damage from off-road
movement would cause little or no environmental damage. The
severity would be negligible.
A commander uses the determinations from stage 1 with the
severity caused by an occurrence in stage 2 to determine the overall
risk of each hazard.

Stage 3
First a commander determines the risk level of each hazard. Then,
using the defined degrees of probability and severity from above
and the risk-assessment matrix (see Figure 13-6), he determines
the overall environmental-related risk level.
For the hazards identified in Figure 13-3, page 13-5, a commander
wo uld make t he following det erminat ions an d ent er the
assessments in block G of the risk-management work sheet (see
Figure 13-2, page 13-4).

13-8 Environmental-Risk Management

 FM 5-34

Risk-Assessment Matrix

Probability

Frequent Likely Occasional Seldom Unlikely

Severity
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Catastrophic (I) E E H H M
Critical (II) E H H M L
Marginal (III) H M M L L
Negligible (IV) M L L L L
Risk Categories
Extremely High (E)
Mission failure if hazardous incidents occur during mission; a frequent or likely probability
of catastrophic loss (IA or IB) or frequent probability of critical loss (IIA) occurs.
High (H)
Significantly degraded mission capabilities in terms of required mission standard or not
accomplishing all parts of the mission, not completing the mission to standard (if hazards
occur during mission); occasional to seldom probability of catastrophic loss (IC or ID); a
likely to occasional probability of a critical loss occurring (IIB or IIC) with material and sol-
dier system; frequent probability of marginal (IIIA) losses.
Moderate (M)
Expected degraded mission capabilities in terms of required mission standard; will have
reduced mission capability (if hazards occur during mission); unlikely probability of cata-
strophic loss (IE). The probability of a critical loss occurring is seldom (IID). Marginal
losses occur with a probability of no more often than likely (IIIB or IIIC). Negligible (IVA)
losses are a frequent probability.
Low (L)
Expected losses have little or no impact on accomplishing the mission. The probability of
critical loss is unlikely (IIE), while that of marginal loss is no more often than seldom (IIID
through IIIE).

Figure 13-6. Risk-assessment matrix

• Vehicle accidents and breakdowns causing fuel and/or HM spills
would seldom happen, but if they did, the severity could be critical.
Based on this information and Figure 13-6 (severity row, critical,
and probability column, seldom), he determines the overall
assessment to be moderate.
• Spills during refueling stops will happen occasionally; when they
do, the severity will marginal. Based on this information and
Figure 13-6 (severity row, marginal, and probability column,
occasional), he determines the overall assessment to be moderate.
• Maneuver damage from vehicle off-road movement will happen
frequently. The damage caused by this movement will be negligible.
Based on this information and Figure 13-6 (severity row, negligible,
and probability column, frequent), he determines the overall
assessment to be moderate.

Environmental-Risk Management 13-9

FM 5-34

STEP 3. DEVELOP THE CONTROLS AND MAKE A DECISION

Controls eliminate or reduce the probability or severity of each
hazard, thereby lowering the overall risk. Controls can consist of
one of the categories listed in Figure 13-7, which also lists
examples.

Control Type Environmental-Related Examples

Educational Conducting unit environmental-awareness training

Conducting an environmental briefing before deployment
Performing tasks to environmental standards
Reviewing environmental considerations in AARs
Reading unit’s environmental SOPs and policies
Conducting spill-prevention training
Publishing an environmental annex/appendix to the OPORD/OPLAN
Physical Providing spill-prevention equipment
Establishing a field trash-collection point and procedures
Establishing a field satellite-accumulation site and procedures
Policing field locations
Practicing good field sanitation
Filling in fighting positions
Posting signs and warnings for off-limit areas
Avoidance Maneuvering around historical/cultural sites
Establishing refueling and maintenance areas away from wetlands and
drainage areas
Crossing streams at approved sites
Preventing pollution
Limiting noise in endangered and threatened species habitats
Avoiding refueling over water sources
Curtailing live vegetation use for camouflage

Figure 13-7. Environmental-related controls

Many environmental-risk controls are simply extensions of good
management, housekeeping, operations security (OPSEC), and
leadership practices. Risk-reduction controls can include
conducting rehearsals, changing locations, establishing procedures,
and increasing supervision. Using the information from Figure 13-7,
a commander fills in block H of the risk-management work sheet (see
Figure 13-2, page 13-4).
Once all practicable risk-control measures are in place, some risk
will always remain. Based on the controls that he develops, a
commander reassesses the hazards using the procedures from step
2. Once he determines the residual risk for each hazard, he fills in
block I in the risk-management work sheet (see Figure 13-2). The
residual risk requires his attention. He decides whether or not to
accept the risk. The commander may direct his staff to consider
additional controls or a change in the COA. In the example below,

13-10 Environmental-Risk Management

 FM 5-34

where the risk is low, the commander accepts the risk and proceeds to
implement the controls.

STEP 4. IMPLEMENT THE CONTROLS

Implementing the controls requires informing all subordinates of the
risk-control measures. To do this, a commander defines the controls
by filling in block J of the risk-management work sheet (see Figure
13-2, page 13-4). He states how each control will be implemented and
assigns responsibility for implementing the controls. For example, if
the control measures for a fuel-spill hazard are to ensure that
operators are properly trained to dispense fuel and ensure that
appropriate spill equipment is available, then he must ensure that
these controls are in place before an operation.
A commander must anticipate environmental requirements and
incorporate them as part of his long-, short-, and near-term planning.
The key to success is identifying the who, what, where, when, and
how aspects of each control and entering the information in the work
sheet.

STEP 5. SUPERVISE AND EVALUATE

A commander and his staff continuously monitor controls throughout
an operation to ensure their effectiveness and to modify them as
required. The commander–
• Makes on-the-spot corrections and evaluates individual and
collective performances.
• Holds those in charge accountable.
• Requires that all tasks be performed to applicable environmental
standards.
• Ensures that the AAR process includes an evaluation of
environmental-related hazards, controls, soldiers’ performance, and
leaders’ supervision.
• Ensures that environmental lessons learned are developed for use
in future operations.

SUMMARY
A commander uses risk assessment to estimate the impact of his
unit’s activities on the natural environment. Environmental-related
risk is part of the risk-management process, as detailed in FM 100-
14. Knowledge of environmental factors is key to planning and
decision-making. Risk management does not convey authority to
deliberately disobey local, state, national, or HN laws and
regulations. A commanders uses the risk-management guidelines to
help him co mply with environment al regulatory and legal

Environmental-Risk Management 13-11

FM 5-34

requirements and operate within the higher commander’s intent.

He should complete the risk assessments before conducting any
training, operations, or logistical activities. Risk assessments help
a commander and his staff identify potential environmental
hazards, develop controls, make risk decisions, implement those
controls, and ensure proper supervision and evaluation. Unit staffs
consolidate environmental risks, as well as all other risks, into the
overall unit risk-management plan for an operation.

13-12 Environmental-Risk Management

 Chapter 14
Miscellaneous Field Data
This chapter includes miscellaneous information, mainly figures and
tables, that an engineer may need to do calculations in the field. The
areas addressed include construction material, lumber data,
trigonometric functions and geometric figures, weapons information,
and vehicle classification.

WEIGHT AND GRAVITY

Table 14-1. Specific weights and gravities

Substance Weight (lb per cu ft) Specific Gravity

Aluminum, cast, hammered 165 2.55 to 2.75
Copper, cast, rolled 556 8.80 to 9.00
Iron, cast, pig 450 7.20
Lead 710 11.37
Magnesium alloys 112 1.74 to 1.83
Steel, rolled 490 7.85
Limestone, marble 165 2.50 to 2.80
Sandstone, bluestone 147 2.20 to 2.50
Riprap, limestone 80 to 85
Riprap, sandstone 90
Riprap, shale 105
Glass, common 156 2.40 to 2.60
Hay and straw (bales) 20
Paper 58 0.70 to 1.15
Stone, quarried, piles
•Basalt, granite, gneiss 96
•Greenstone, hornblende 107
•Limestone, marble, quartz 90
•Sandstone 82
•Shale 92
Excavations in water
•Clay 80
•River mud 90
•Sand or gravel 60
•Sand or gravel and clay 65
•Soil or gravel and clay 70
•Stone riprap 65

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-1

FM 5-34

Table 14-1. Specific weights and gravities (continued)

Substance Weight (lb per cu ft) Specific Gravity

Timber, US, seasoned (moisture
content by weight: 15 to 50%)
•Soft wood 25 0.40
•Medium wood 40 0.63
•Hard wood 55 0.87
Asphaltum 81 1.10 to 1.50
Petroleum, gasoline, and diesel 42 0.66 to 0.69
Tar, bituminous 75 1.20
Cement, portland, loose 94
Cement, portland, set 183 2.70 to 3.20
Clay, damp, plastic 110
Clay, dry 63
Earth, dry, loose 76
Earth, dry, packed 96
Earth, moist, loose 78
Earth moist, packed 96
Sand, gravel, dry, loose 90 to 105
Sand, gravel, dry, packed 100 to 120
Sand, gravel, wet 118 to 120
Water, 4oC (max density) 62.428 1.00
Water, ice 56 0.88 to 0.92
Masonry, ashlar
•Granite, syenite, gneiss 165 2.30 to 3.00
•Limestone, marble 160 2.30 to 2.80
•Sandstone, bluestone 140 2.10 to 2.40
Masonry, brick
•Pressed brick 140 2.20 to 2.30
•Common brick 120 1.80 to 2.00
•Soft brick 100 1.50 to 1.70
Masonry, concrete—cement,
stone, sand 144 2.20 to 2.40
Masonry, dry rubble
•Granite, syenite, gneiss 130 1.90 to 2.30
•Limestone, marble 125 1.90 to 2.10
•Sandstone, bluestone 110 1.80 to 1.90
Masonry, mortar, rubble
•Granite, syenite, gneiss 155 2.20 to 2.80
•Limestone, marble 150 2.20 to 2.60
•Sandstone, bluestone 130 2.00 to 2.20

14-2 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
ELECTRICAL WIRE
Convert load to amperes using the following formula:

total wattage required voltage 745.7 x horsepower

amperes = ------------------------------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------------------------
voltages resistance (ohms) voltages

Enter Table 14-2 or 14-3, page 14-4, using computed amperes and
distance to load to obtain wire size. Use this procedure when you
need to furnish power to a specific load such as a motor or a group of
lights. See FM 5-424 for more details.

Table 14-2. Wire sizes for 110-volt single-phase circuits

Load
50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 400 500
(amp)

15 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 3 2 1
12 10 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 3
20 10 8 6 6 4 4 3 2 1 0
12 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 3 2
25 8 6 6 4 4 3 2 1 0 2/0
10 8 8 6 6 4 4 3 2 1
30 6 6 4 4 3 2 1 0 2/0 3/0
10 8 6 6 4 4 3 2 1 0
40 6 4 4 3 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0
8 6 6 4 4 3 2 1 0 2/0
50 4 4 3 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 300
8 6 4 4 3 2 1 0 2/0 3/0
60 4 2 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 350
6 4 4 3 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0
70 4 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 400
6 4 3 2 2 0 2/0 2/0 4/0 250
80 4 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 350 500
6 4 3 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250
90 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 400 500
4 3 2 1 1 2/0 3/0 3/0 250 300
100 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 300 350 500 600
4 3 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 350
NOTE:
Top number = aluminum wire
Bottom number = copper wire

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-3

FM 5-34

Table 14-3. Wire sizes for 220-volt three-phase circuits

Load
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1,000
(amp)

15 12 8 6 4 4 3 2 2 1 1
12 10 8 6 6 4 4 4 3 3
20 10 6 4 4 3 2 1 1 0 0
12 8 6 6 4 4 3 3 2 2
25 8 6 4 3 2 1 0 0 2/0 2/0
10 8 6 4 4 3 2 2 1 1
30 6 4 3 2 1 0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0
10 6 4 4 3 2 2 1 0 0
40 4 4 2 1 0 2/0 3/0 3/0 4/0 4/0
8 6 4 3 2 1 0 0 2/0 2/0
50 4 3 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 250 300
8 4 3 2 1 0 2/0 2/0 3/0 3/0
60 4 2 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 250 300 350
6 4 2 1 0 2/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0
70 4 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 300 350 400
6 3 2 0 2/0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 250
80 4 1 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 400 500
6 3 1 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 250 250
90 2 0 3/0 4/0 250 300 350 400 500 500
4 2 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 4/0 250 300 300
100 2 0 3/0 4/0 300 350 400 500 500 600
4 2 0 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 250 300 350
NOTE:
10 = aluminum wire
12 = copper wire

14-4 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

LUMBER DATA

Table 14-4. Properties of southern pine

Nominal Size Actual Size Dressed
Section Area (sq in) Weight per Foot (lb)
(in) (in)
2x4 1 5/8 x 3 5/8 5.89 1.63
4x4 3 5/8 x 3 5/8 13.14 3.64
2x6 1 5/8 x 5 5/8 9.14 2.53
6x6 5 5/8 x 5 5/8 31.64 8.76
2x8 1 5/8 x 7 1/2 12.19 3.38
4x8 3 5/8 x 7 1/2 27.19 7.55
6x8 5 5/8 x 7 1/2 42.19 11.72
8x8 7 1/2 x 7 1/2 56.25 15.58
2 x 10 1 5/8 x 9 1/2 15.44 4.28
6 x 10 5 5/8 x 9 1/2 53.44 14.84
10 x 10 9 1/2 x 9 1/2 90.25 25.00
2 x 12 1 5/8 x 11 1/2 18.69 5.18
3 x 12 2 5/8 x 11 1/2 30.19 8.39
6 x 12 5 5/8 x 11 1/2 64.69 17.96
8 x 12 7 1/2 x 11 1/2 86.25 23.89
10 x 12 9 1/2 x 13 1/2 109.25 30.26
2 x 14 1 5/8 x 13 1/2 21.94 6.09
3 x 14 2 5/8 x 13 1/2 35.44 9.84
6 x 14 5 5/8 x 13 1/2 75.94 21.09
10 x 14 9 1/2 x 13 1/2 128.25 35.53
14 x 14 13 1/2 x 13 1/2 182.25 50.48
2 x 16 1 5/8 x 15 1/2 25.19 7.00
3 x 16 2 5/8 x 15 1/2 40.69 11.30
8 x 16 7 1/2 x 15 1/2 116. 25 32.20
12 x 16 11 1/2 x 15 1/2 178.25 49.37
14 x 16 13 1/2 x 15 1/2 209.25 57.96
16 x 16 15 1/2 x 15 1/2 240.25 66.55
4 x 18 3 5/8 x 17 1/2 63.44 17.62
8 x 18 7 1/2 x 17 1/2 131.25 36.36
12 x 18 11 1/2 x 17 1/2 201.25 55.75
NOTE: In some species, 5 1/2 inches is the dressed size for nominal 6 x 6 inches
and larger.

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-5

FM 5-34

Table 14-5. Wood-screw diameters

Size (in) DiameterD (in) D2(in2)

1/2No. 4 0.1105 0.0122

3/4No. 8 0.1631 0.0266

1No. 10 0.1894 0.0359

1 1/2No. 12 0.2158 0.0466

2No. 14 0.2421 0.0586

2 1/2No. 16 0.2684 0.0720

3No. 18 0.2947 0.0868

Table 14-6. Nail and spike sizes

Common Finishing Flooring
Length
Size Gauge
(in) No. per Diameter No. No.
D3/2 Gauge Gauge
lb D (in) per lb per lb

3D 1 1/4 14 568 0.0800 0.0226 15 1/2 807

4D 1 1/2 12 1/2 316 0.0985 0.0309 15 584
6D 2 11 1/2 181 0.1130 0.0380 13 309 11 157
8D 2 1/2 10 1/4 106 0.1314 0.0476 12 1/2 189 10 99
10D 3 9 69 0.1483 0.0570 11 1/2 121 9 69
12D 3 1/4 9 63 0.1552 0.0611 11 1/2 113 8 54
16D 3 1/2 8 49 0.1620 0.0652 11 90 7 43
20D 4 6 31 0.1920 0.0841 10 61 6 31
30D 4 1/2 5 24 0.2070 0.0942
40D 5 4 18 0.2253 0.1066
60D 6 2 11 0.2625 0.1347

Spikes

7” 7 5/16” 5/16” 0.1750

8” 8 3/8” 3/8” 0.2295
9” 9 3/8” 3/8” 0.2295
10” 10 3/8” 3/8” 0.2295
12” 12 3/8” 3/8” 0.2295
NOTE: To avoid splitting, nail diameters should not exceed 1/7 the thickness of lumber to be
nailed.

14-6 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

To determine the approximate number of nails you need, use the

following formulas:
D BF
Number of pounds (12D to 60D, framing) = ---- × ---------
6 100
or
D BF
Number of pounds (2D to 12D, sheathing) = ---- × ---------
4 100

where
D = size of desired nail, in pennies
BF = total board feet to be nailed

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-7

 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS AND GEOMETRIC FIGURES
FM 5-34

a2 = c2 - b2 sin A = a/c
B
c b2 = c2 - a2 cos A = b/c
a

A C c2 = a2 + b2 tan A = a/b
b

Right Triangle

To Find
Given

14-8 Miscellaneous Field Data

A B C a b c Area
a, b a b 90° 2 2 ab
tan A = --- tan B = --- a +b -------
b a 2
a, c a a 90° 2 2
sin A = --- cos B = --- c –a a 2 2
c c ---  c – a 
2
A, a 90° - A 90° a cot A a 2
------------- a cot A
sin A ---------------------
2
A, b 90° - A 90° b tan A b 2
--------------- b tan A
cos A ---------------------
2
A, c 90° - A 90° c sin A c cos A 2
c sin 2A
-----------------------
4
Figure 14-1. Trigonometric functions
 a b c a2 = b2 + c2 - 2bc cos A
------------- = ------------- = --------------
sin A sin B sin C
B
a b2 = a2 + c2 - 2ac cos B
c
A C c2 = a2 + b2 - 2ab cos C
b a+b+c
S = ----------------------
2

Right Triangle

To Find
Given
A B C a b c Area

a, b, c
A s (s – a) B s(s – b) C s(s – c) s(s – a)(s – b)(s – c)
cos ---- = -------------------- cos ---- = -------------------- cos ---- = --------------------
2 bc 2 ac 2 ab

a, A, B 180° - (A + B) a sin B a sin C 2

------------------ ------------------ a sin B sin C
sin A sin A ------------------------------------
2 sin A
a, b, A b sin A b sin C
sin B = ------------------ -------------------
a sin B

a, b, c a sin C 2 2 ab sin C
tan B = ----------------------------- a + b – 2ab cos c ----------------------
b – a cos C 2

Figure 14-1. Trigonometric functions (continued)

FM 5-34

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-9

FM 5-34

Table 14-7. Trigonometric functions

Degree Degree
Sine Cosecant Tangent Cotangent Secant Cosine
of Angle of Angle
0 1.000 1.000 90
1 0.017 57.30 0.017 57.29 1.000 1.000 89
2 0.035 28.65 0.035 28.64 1.001 0.999 88
3 0.052 19.11 0.052 19.08 1.001 0.999 87
4 0.070 14.34 0.070 14.30 1.002 0.998 86
5 0.087 11.47 0.087 11.43 1.004 0.996 85
6 0.105 9.567 0.105 9.514 1.006 0.995 84
7 0.122 8.206 0.123 8.144 1.008 0.993 83
8 0.139 7.185 0.141 7.115 1.010 0.990 82
9 0.156 6.392 0.158 6.314 1.012 0.988 81
10 0.174 5.759 0.176 5.671 1.015 0.985 80
11 0.191 5.241 0.194 5.145 1.019 0.982 79
12 0.208 4.810 0.213 4.705 1.022 0.978 78
13 0.225 4.445 0.231 4.331 1.026 0.974 77
14 0.242 4.134 0.249 4.011 1.031 0.970 76
15 0.259 3.864 0.268 3.732 1.035 0.966 75
16 0.276 3.628 0.287 3.487 1.040 0.961 74
17 0.292 3.420 0.306 3.271 1.046 0.956 73
18 0.309 3.236 0.325 3.078 1.051 0.951 72
19 0.326 3.072 0.344 2.904 1.058 0.946 71
20 0.342 2.924 0.364 2.747 1.064 0.940 70
21 0.358 2.790 0.384 2.605 1.071 0.934 69
22 0.375 2.669 0.404 2.475 1.079 0.927 68
23 0.391 2.559 0.424 2.356 1.086 0.921 67
24 0.407 2.459 0.445 2.246 1.095 0.914 66
25 0.423 2.366 0.466 2.145 1.103 0.906 65
26 0.438 2.281 0.488 2.050 1.113 0.899 64
27 0.454 2.203 0.510 1.963 1.122 0.891 63
28 0.469 2.130 0.532 1.881 1.133 0.883 62
29 0.485 2.063 0.554 1.804 1.143 0.875 61
30 0.500 2.000 0.577 1.732 1.155 0.866 60
31 0.515 1.942 0.601 1.664 1.167 0.857 59
32 0.530 1.887 0.625 1.600 1.179 0.848 58
33 0.545 1.836 0.649 1.540 1.192 0.839 57
34 0.559 1.788 0.675 1.483 1.206 0.829 56
35 0.574 1.743 0.700 1.428 1.221 0.819 55
36 0.588 1.701 0.727 1.376 1.236 0.809 54
37 0.602 1.662 0.754 1.327 1.252 0.799 53
38 0.616 1.624 0.781 1.280 1.269 0.788 52
39 0.629 1.589 0.810 1.235 1.287 0.777 51
40 0.643 1.556 0.839 1.192 1.305 0.766 50
41 0.656 1.542 0.869 1.150 1.325 0.755 49
42 0.669 1.494 0.900 1.111 1.346 0.743 48
43 0.682 1.466 0.933 1.072 1.367 0.731 47
44 0.695 1.440 0.966 1.036 1.390 0.719 46
45 0.707 1.414 1.000 1.100 1.414 0.707 45

14-10 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

(1) Any triangle: (4) Segment of circle: L

A = 1/2bh 2 2
c γ a
h π r a r sin a
c sin φ A = ------------- – ------------------
sin γ = --------------- φ β 360 2
a b 2 π ra a = angle
L = ------------- in degrees
(2) Right triangle: 360 L

2 2 Segment
a = c –b (5) Sector of circle:
c cord
2 2 a 2
b = c –a rL πr a
A = ----- = -------------
b 2 360
2 2
c = a +b
A = area r = radius
(3) Circle: r h = height D = diameter
2 b = length of base π = 3.1416
A = πr
c = hypotenuse L = length of arc
2
A = 0.7854 D C = circumference
C = πD V = volume

(6) Regular polygons. The area of any regular polygon (all sides equal, all angles equal) is equal to
the product of the square of the lengths of one side and the factors. Example problem: Area of a
regular octagon having 6-inch sides is 6 x 6 x 4.828 or 173.808 square inches. See factors in table.

(9) Cube: b
Polygon Factors
3
No. of Factor No. of V = b b
Factor
Sides Sides
3 0.433 8 4.828 b
4 1.000 9 6.182 (10) Rectangular parallelepiped:
5 1.720 10 7.694
6 2.598 11 9.366 V = ab b
1 2
7 3.634 12 11.196
a b1
b2

(7) Rectangular parallelogram: (11) Prism or cylinder:

A = ab V = a x area of base
a
a
b

(12) Pyramid or cone: a

b1
(8) Trapezoid: V = (1/3)a x area of base
A = 1/2 a ( b + b ) a
1 2
(13) Sphere:
b2
3
3 πD 4
V = ( 4 § 3 )π r = -----------
6
3
18 ( A = 4 π r )

Figure 14-2. Geometric figures and formulas

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-11

FM 5-34

Table 14-8. Time-distance conversion

Mph Knots FPS Kmph MPS

1 0.87 1.47 1.61 0.45

2 1.74 2.93 3.22 0.894
3 2.61 4.40 4.83 1.34
4 3.47 5.87 6.44 1.79
5 4.34 7.33 8.05 2.24
6 5.21 8.80 9.66 2.68
7 6.08 10.27 11.27 3.13
8 6.95 11.73 12.87 3.58
9 7.82 13.20 14.48 4.02
10 8.68 14.67 16.09 4.47
15 13.03 22.00 24.14 6.71
20 17.37 29.33 32.19 8.94
25 21.71 36.67 40.23 11.18
30 26.05 44.00 48.28 13.41
35 30.39 51.33 56.33 15.64
40 34.74 58.67 64.37 17.88
45 39.08 66.00 72.42 20.12
50 43.42 73.33 80.47 22.35
55 47.76 80.67 88.51 24.59
60 52.10 88.00 96.56 26.82
65 56.45 95.33 104.61 29.06
70 60.79 102.67 112.65 31.29
75 65.13 110.00 120.70 33.53
100 86.84 146.67 160.94 44.70

US EQUIPMENT AND WEAPONS CHARACTERISTICS

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS

14-12 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

Table 14-9. Vehicle dimensions and classification

Max
Height Width Length MLC
Nomenclature Speed
(in) (in) (in) (C)
(mph)
AVLB 200.0 158.0 439.0 59 30
Carrier, cargo 6-ton, M548 116.0 110.0 248 13 43
Carrier, command post, M577A1 106.0 106.0 226.5 13 8
Carrier, mortar: 81 mm, M125A1 86.5 106.0 191.5 13 40
Carrier, mortar: 107 mm, M106A1 86.5 113.0 194 14 40
Carrier, personnel, M113A2 86.5 106.0 191.5 13 40
Cavalry fighting vehicle, M3 118.0 126.0 258 24 45
Crane, boom, 20 ton RT 163.0 128.0 522 30 35
Crane, 25-ton hydraulic, MT-250 118.0 97.0 542 31 45
Dozer, D7 with blade 120.0 137.0 230 28 6.2
Howitzer, 155 mm (SP), M109A3 130.0 143.0 355 28 35
Howitzer, 8 in (SP), M110A2 135.0 140.0 392 29 32
Infantry fighting vehicle, M2 118.0 126.0 258 24 45
Loader, scoop, 2 1/2 C7, w/o roll cage 102.0 102.0 300 20 --
MLRS 108.0 115.0 274 27 36
M992 CATV (FAAS V) 127.0 125.0 269 28 35
Tank, combat 105 mm, M1 118.0 145.0 332 60 45
Tank, combat 105 mm, M48A5 129.5 143.0 325 54 30
Tank, combat, 105 mm, M60A1 129.5 143.0 325 54 30
Tank, combat, 105 mm, M60A2 130.5 143.0 300.5 57 30
Tank, combat, 105 mm, M60A3 130.0 143.0 325 55 30
Trailer, low-bed, 25 ton, M172 67.0 115.0 416 9 --
Trailer, water (400 gal), M149 w/o water 76.5 82.5 83 4 --
Truck, ambulance, M997 101.0 36.0 204.0 4 55
Truck, cargo (HEMTT), M977 108.0 97.0 403 16 55
Truck, cargo, 2 1/2 ton, M35A2 112.0 96.0 278.5 8 56
Truck, cargo, 5 ton, 6 x 6, M54A2 116.0 97.0 315 15 54
Truck, dump, 5 ton, 6 x 6, M930 111.0 98.0 282 17 30
Truck, fuel (2,500 gal), M559 134.0 108.0 391 23 30
Truck, tanker (HEMTT), M978 108.0 97.0 403 15 55
Truck, tractor, 20 ton, M920 144.0 132.0 320 15 --
Truck, wrecker, 5 ton, 6 x 6, M816 114.0 98.0 356 18 52
Truck, wrecker, 10 ton, 4 x 4, M553 134.0 108.0 401 23 30
Vehicle, M9 ACE 110.0 150.0 246 18 30
Vehicle, (light) recovery, M578 130.5 124.0 250 25 37
Vehicle, (med) recovery, M88A1 123.5 135.0 325.5 55 31
NOTE: MLC is for laden cross country or off highway (C).

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-13

FM 5-34

EXPEDIENT VEHICLE CLASSIFICATION

This section implements STANAG 2021.

In an emergency, you can do a temporary vehicle classification

using expedient classification methods. However, you should
reclassify the vehicle using the analytical method (see FM 5-446) or
by referencing FM 5-170 as soon as possible to obtain a permanent
classification number.

Wheeled
You can do an expedient classification for wheeled vehicles by
doing either of the following:
• One: Compare the wheel and axle loadings and spacings of the
unclassified vehicle with those of a classified vehicle of similar
design and then assign a temporary class number.
• Two: Assign a temporary class number using the formulas below:

AT PT N T
W T = ------------------------
-
2,000

where
WT = gross weight of vehicle, in tons
AT = average tire-contact area (hard surface), in square inches
PT = tire pressure, in psi
NT = number of tires
Estimated classification (wheeled vehicles) = 0.85 WT

NOTE: Assume the tire pressure to be 75 psi for 2 1/2-ton

vehicles or larger if no tire gauge is available. For vehi-
cles having unusual load characteristics or odd axle spac-
ings, you will need a more deliberate vehicle-
classification procedure as outlined in STANAG 2021.
Tracked
You can do an expedient classification for tracked vehicles using
the following methods:
• Compare the ground-contact area of the unclassified tracked
vehicle with that of a previously classified vehicle to obtain a
temporary class number.
or

14-14 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

• Assign a temporary class number using the formula below:

temporary class (tracked vehicles) = WT
where
WT = gross weight, in tons; estimate the gross weight by measuring
the total ground-contact area of the tracks (square feet) and equating
this to the gross weight in tons.
Example: An unclassified tracked vehicle has a ground-contact
area of 5,500 square inches. Therefore, the area is about 38.2
square feet. The class of the vehicle is 38.2 or 39, since the ground-
contact area in square feet equals the approximate weight of a
tracked vehicle in tons, which is about equal to the class number.
Nonstandard Combinations
You can obtain the class number of nonstandard combinations of
vehicles as follows:
Combination class = 0.9(A + B), if A + B ≤ 60
or
Combination class = A + B, if A + B > 60
where
A = classification of the first vehicle
B = classification of the second vehicle
Other-Than-Rated Load
You can assign an expedient classification to overloaded or
underloaded vehicles by adding to or subtracting the difference in
loading (in tons) from the normally assigned vehicle classification.
Mark the expedient classification number with a standard vehicle
classificat ion sig n, which ind ic ates t hat it is a temporar y
classification (see Figure 14-3).

8 ton
5 ton

16
19
Normal class + overload = temporary class
16 + 3 = 19

Figure 14-3. Single-vehicle expedient-class overload

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-15

FM 5-34

US WEAPONS

Table 14-10. Ranges of common weapons

Maximum Planning
Weapon
Effective Range Range*

FRIENDLY WEAPON SYSTEMS

M16A2 580 m 400 m
M249 SAW 1,000 m 800 m
M60 1,100 m 1,100 m
M203 Area 350 m 350 m
Point 160 m 160 m
M2, .50 cal Area 1,830 m 1,830 m
Point 1,200 m 1,200 m
MK19 Area 2,200 m 2,200 m
Point 1,600 m 1,600 m
AT4 300 m 300 m
M47 Dragon 1,000 m 800 m
Javelin 2,000 m 2,000 m
M1 Abrams tank 105 mm 2,500 m 2,000 m
120 mm 3,000 m 2,500 m
M2 Bradley ITV 25 mm (APDS) 3,000 m 1,700 m
25 mm (HEI-T) 3,000 m 1,700 m
TOW2 3,750 m 3,750 m
60-mm mortar HE 3,400 m 50 m (min)
WP 4,800 m 50 m (min)
ILLUM 931 m 50 m (min)
81-mm mortar HE 4,595 m 75 m (min)
WP 4,595 m 75 m (min)
ILLUM 3,150 m 75 m (min)
4.2-in mortar HE 6,840 m 770 m (min)
WP 5,650 m 920 m (min)
ILLUM 5,490 m 400 m (min)
SOVIET-STYLE WEAPON SYSTEMS
BMP, 73 mm 800 m 800 m
AT3 missile 3,000 m 3,000 m
AT5 missile 4,000 m 4,000 m
BMP-2 2,000 m 2,000 m
BTR, 14.5 mm 2,000 m 1,000 m
T-72 tank, 125 mm 2,100 m 2,000 m
T-80 tank, 125 mm 2,400 m 2,000 m
T-80 AT8 4,000 m 4,000 m
*The planning range is based on ideal weather conditions during daylight.

14-16 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

Table 14-11. US tanks

M1 M1A1 M60 M60A1 M60A3 M551
Length (m) 7.92 7.92 6.95 6.95 6.95 6.30
Width (m) 3.65 3.66 3.63 3.63 3.63 2.82
Firing height (m) 1.89 1.89 2.10 2.10 2.10
Max speed (kmph) 72.4 66.8 48.3 48.3 48.3 70
Fuel capacity (gal) 503.8 503.8 384.9 375.1 375.1 158
Max range (km) 498 465 500 500 480 600
Fording (m) 1.22 1.22 1.22 1.22 1.22 Amphibious
Gradient (percent) 60 60 60 60 60 60
Vertical obstacle (m) 1.24 1.07 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.84
Primary armament 105 120 105 105 105 152 mm
mm mm mm mm mm
Ammunition capacity-
•Main gun 55 40 57 63 63 30
•12.7 mm 1,000 1,000 900 900 900 1,000
•7.62 mm 11,400 12,400 6,000 6,000 6,000 3,080

Table 14-12. US antiarmor missiles

Guidance Rounds
Missile Prime Mover Weight (lb) Range (m)
Linkage Aboard

Shillelagh M60A2 tank 61.3 (round Infrared 13 3,000 max

only) 800 min

TOW M2 or M3 40 (round Wire 10 3,000 max

only) 65 min
AH-1S atk hel 3,750 max
65 min

Dragon Individual 32 (carry Wire 6 1,000 max

soldier weight) 65 min
25.2 (round
only)

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-17

 FM 5-34

Table 14-13. US field artillery and air-defense weapons

Emplace- Max Rate Ammunition

Rd on Rd on Weight Sustained
Weapon Range (m) ment of Fire Rd
Veh Carrier (lb) Fire Rd/hr
Time (min) (3 min) Types Fuzes
105-mm how, Sit WP, HE, HEAT, Quick, delay,
towed, M102 dep NA 11,500 3,170 2 30 180 CML, illum, smk, VT, time, con-
ICM, APERS, HEP crete, piercing
155-mm how, SCATMINE Quick, delay,
towed, 48 NA 14,600 12,700 3.5 12 60 HE VT
M114A1/A2 WP
155-mm how, 18,100 CML, illum, smk Time, concrete

14-18 Miscellaneous Field Data

SP, M109A1 28 96 24,000 53,940 0.5 12 60 piercing
(RAP)
155-mm how, 18,100 0.5 Nuc
SP, M109A2/ 36 96 24,000 53,940 (RAP) 12 20 ICM
A3 (RAP) RAP
155-mm how, 24,000
towed, M198 48 NA 30,000 15,500 5 12 Variable
(RAP)
8-in how, SP, 22,900 HE, nuc, CML, Quick, delay,
M102A2 2 36 30,000 62,500 2.5 4.5 30 ICM, spot VT, time, con-
(RAP) crete, piercing
Vulcan, 1,200 AD HEI PD
CM741 4,200 4,500 26,000 NA 3,000 NA
Surface
NOTE: Refer to page 1-28, this manual, for additional fire-support munitions information.
 FM 5-34

OPERATIONAL SYMBOLS

Size Indicator Meaning

Installation

Team/crew

Squad

Section

Platoon/detachment

I Company/battery/troop

II Battalion/squadron

III Regiment/group

X Brigade

XX Division

XXX Corps

XXXX Army

XXXXX Army group/front

XXXXXX Region

Figure 14-4. Unit size and installation indicator

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-19

FM 5-34

Airborne Infantry (basic)

Air defense Light infantry

L

Air assault with organic

Maintenance
lift

Mechanized infantry (in

Mechanized or armor
tracked APC)

Armored (tracked IFV)

Medical
reconnaissance or
(basic symbol)
scouts

Law enforcement -
Aviation MP
Army MP

A
Attack helicoptor Mountain infantry

Class IV
Engineer bridge
(petroleum supply)

Class II (clothing, indi-

Reconnaissance cav-
vidual equipment, tent-
alry or scouts (basic or
age, organizational tool
dismounted)
sets)

Nuclear, biological,
Signal (basic symbol)
chemical

Transportation (basic
Engineer (basic)
symbol)

Field artillery
(basic)(towed)

Figure 14-5. Unit identification symbols

14-20 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

Abatis

AT Obstacles

Toward
enemy
AT ditch
Under Complete
construction

AT ditch reinforced with

AT mines

Fixed and prefabricated

AT obstacles, tetrahedrons,
dragon’s teeth, and other similar Movable
obstacles
Movable and prefabricated

Toward
enemy
AT wall

Booby Trap

Bypass

Bypass easy

Bypass difficult

Bypass impossible

Figure 14-6. Obstacle symbols

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-21

FM 5-34

Crossing Sites/Water Crossings

River
Assault crossing area

Bridge or gap

Ferry

Ford/ford easily

Ford with difficulty

Lane

Raft site

Assault crossing area

Ford with difficulty

Example crossing sites

Raft site Ford easily

Float bridge, existing

bridge site, or viaduct

ERP
Engineer Regulating Point 8

Figure 14-6. Obstacle symbols (continued)

14-22 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

General Obstacle

Obstacle belt (controlled by 3d

Brigade, 27th AD) 3/27 AD

Obstacle line

Obstacle zone (controlled by

27th AD) 27 AD

Mines

AP mine

AT mine

AT mine with AHD

Directional mine (arrow shows

effects) “claymore-type mine”

Unspecified mine

Mine cluster

Wide area mine

Figure 14-6. Obstacle symbols (continued)

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-23

FM 5-34

Minefields

Planned minefield (unspecified

mines)

Completed minefield (unspecified

mines)

AP minefield

AT minefield with gap (show effec-

me
Na
tive time and name of gap)
272100Z SEP - 300400Z SEP

AT minefield (line points to center

of mass of minefield)

S
Scatterable minefield (unspecified
mines with self-destruct DTG)
DTG

+S
AP minefield reinforced with scat-
terable and self-destruct date-time-
group
DTG

S
Scatterable minefield (AT mines)
with self-destruct date-time-
group
101200Z

Mined area

Figure 14-6. Obstacle symbols (continued)

14-24 Miscellaneous Field Data

C1p14-25-28.fm Page 25 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:48 PM

C1, FM 5-34

Obstacle Effect

Block

Fix

Turn

Disrupt

Obstacle-free area FREE

23 AD
200900-
272100Z SEP
Obstacle-restricted area

23 AD
200900-
272100Z SEP

Roadblocks, Craters, and Blown Bridges

Planned (usually used to close a

lane through an AT ditch or other
obstacle)

Explosives, state of readiness 1

(safe)

Figure 14-6. Obstacle symbols (continued)

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-25

C1p14-25-28.fm Page 26 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:48 PM

FM 5-34

Roadblock (Continued)

Explosives, state of readiness 2

(armed but passable)

Roadblock complete (executed)

Wire Obstacles

Unspecified

Single fence

Double fence

Double apron fence

Low wire fence

High wire fence

Single concertina

Double-strand concertina

Triple-strand concertina

V
Executed Volcano minefield
200900Z

Figure 14-6. Obstacle symbols (continued)

14-26 Miscellaneous Field Data

C1p14-25-28.fm Page 27 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:48 PM

C1, FM 5-34

Trip Wire

UXO area

Survivability

Earthwork, small trench, or fortifi-

cation (line points to exact location)

Fort

Fortified line

Foxhole, emplacment, or weapon

slit

Strongpoint (company sized; size

indicator faces away from antici-
pated enemy direction; it is equally
fortified on all sides.)

Surface shelter (line points to exact

location)

Underground shelter (line points to

exact location)

Figure 14-6. Obstacle symbols (continued)

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-27

C1p14-25-28.fm Page 28 Friday, January 19, 2001 1:48 PM

FM 5-34

IFV

APC

Cargo or personnel carrier

Train engine/locomotive

ACE

Grizzley (M1 breacher)

AVLB

Hovercraft

AVLM
Trailer-mounted MICLIC

Tractor, full tracked, low speed

(dozer)

Armored carrier with Volcano

Truck-mounted Volcano

Smoke generator

Figure 14-7. Weapon symbols

14-28 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

Light Medium Heavy

Flamethrower
Vehicle

Howitzer

Mortar

Multibarrel rocket launcher

Surface-to-surface missile

Tank (friendly)

Figure 14-7. Weapon symbols (continued)

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-29

C2, FM 5-34

CONVERSION FACTORS

Table 14-14. Conversion factors

Multiply By To Obtain Multiply By To Obtain
Acres 4,046.9 Square meters Kilograms per 9.302 x 10-3 BTU
or 4,047 meter
Atmospheres 14.70 Pounds per sq Kilograms per 9.678 x 10-5 Atmospheres
inch sq meter
Centimeters 0.3937 Inches Kilometers 3281 Feet
Centimeters of 0.01316 Atmospheres Meters 3.2808 Feet
mercury
Cemtimeters of 0.1934 Pounds per sq Miles 1.6093 Kilometers
mercury inch
Cubic feet 7.481 Gallons Miles per hour 1.467 Feet per sec
Cubic meters 264.2 Gallons Millimeters 0.03937 Inches
Degrees (angle) 0.01745 Radians Nautical miles 1.152 Miles
Feet 0.3048 Meters Ounces 28.35 Grams
Feet per min 0.5080 Centimeters Ounces 0.0625 Pounds
per sec
Feet per min 0.01136 Miles per hour Pounds per sq 0.06804 Atmospheres
inch
Feet per sec 1.097 Kilometers per Radians 57.30 Degrees
hour
Gallons 3.785 x 10-3 Cubic meters Square centi- 0.1550 Square inches
meters
Grams 0.03527 Ounces Square feet 0.09290 Square meters
Grams 2.205 x 10-3 Pounds Square meters 10.764 Square feet
Grams-calories 3.968 x 10-3 BTUs Square miles 2.590 Square kilome-
ters
Horsepower 42.44 BTUs per min Temp (degs C) 1 Abs temp (degs
+ 273 C)
Horsepower 745.7 Watts Temp (degs C) 1.8 Temp (degs F)
+ 17.8
Inches 2.540 Centimeters Temp (degs F) 1 Abs temp (degs
+ 460 F)
Inches of water 0.002458 Atmospheres Temp (degs F) 5/9 Temp (degs C)
- 32
Joules 9.486 x 10-4 BTUs Tons (short) 907.2 Kilograms
Kilograms 2.2046 Pounds Tons (short) 2000 Pounds
Kilograms 1.102 x 103 Tons (short) Watts 0.05692 BTUs per min
Kilogram-calo- 3.968 BTUs Weeks 168 Hours
ries
Yards 0.9144 Meters

14-30 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

LEVELS OF RISK MANAGEMENT

RISK-MANAGEMENT PROCESS

1. Identify the hazards.

2. Assess the risk of each hazard
3. Make a risk decision (see Figure 14-9).
— Develop controls to reduce risks.
— Reassess the risk with control measures (see Figure 4-10).
— Make risk decision based on the residual risk (see Figure 14-11, page 14-32).
4. Implement controls to reduce level of risk.
5. Supervise and enforce risks, hazards, and control measures (see Figure 14-12,
page 14-33).

RISK-MANAGEMENT RULES

Rule #1: Integrate protection into planning.

Rule #2: Accept no unnecessary risks.
Rule #3: Make risk decision at the proper level.
Rule #4: Accept risks only if the benefits outweight the potential costs.

Figure 14-8. Risk management

Risk Division Brigade Battalion Company Platoon

Extremely Corps Division Division Brigade Brigade

high

High Corp Division Brigade Brigade Battalion

Moderate Division Brigade BAttalion Battlaion Company

Low Division Brigade Battalion Company Platoon

Once the residual risks have been determined by applying the control measures, the risk decision
must be presented to the proper level of command for final risk decision on mission execution.

References:
AR 385-10
DA Pamphlet 385-1

Figure 14-9. Levels of decision matrix

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-31

FM 5-34

PROBABILITY
FREQUENT LIKELY OCCASIONAL REMOTE UNLIKELY
A B C D E

CATASTROPHIC Extremely
EXTREMELY
high High
HIGH
I HIGH
E
F CRITICAL
High
HIGH Low
LOW
F II
E
C MARGINAL High
HIGH Moderate
MODERATE Low
LOW
T III

NEGLIGIBLE Low
IV
LOW

NOTE: Assess the hazards based on the probability of occurrence

and the overall effect on the operation. Analyze all the effects of all
variables on the operation, including such things as weather and
equipment availability.

Figure 14-10. Risk-assessment matrix

1. SITUATION a. Enemy forces a. Identified hazards

2. MISSION b. Friendly forces b. Attachments and detachments

3. EXECUTION
Commander’s Intent. Includes statement of accepted risks and definition of success
that addresses fratricde and other accidents.
a. Concept of Operations
- Maneuver
- Fires
- Engineer
- Electronic warfare
b. - k. Specific task for subordinate or supporting units. Include one subparagraph
for each attached, supporting or OPCON element such as stinger teams, AVLB, etc.
Address hazards and control measures specific to the team.s
Coordinating instructions. Address hazards and control measures common to all.
Include the authority level for acceptance of risk (high, extremely high).
4. SERVICE SUPPORT
Force Protection
Include hazards and control measures specific to ❋ (SAFETY) is NOT a ❋
service support operations or elements separate annex
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL a. Command b. Signal

Figure 14-11. Steps in risk management

14-32 Miscellaneous Field Data

 FM 5-34

Risk Residual Risk

Hazard Controls Implemented
Assessment Level
Inexperienced mil- High New or inexperienced drivers are: Moderate
itary drivers - Identified by the commander
- Trained and licensed according to
AR 600-55
- Assigned an experienced assistant
driver or senior occupant (Officer/
NCO)
Excessive speed High All speed limits enforced Low
Adverse environ- Moderated If hazardous driving conditions are Low
mental conditions encountered or visibility drops below 50
meters convoy will stop at the nearest
rest area
Soldier fatigue High Rest periods every two hours in a Low
planned rest area
Highway conges- High Convoy movements will scheduled to Low
tion and construc- avoid peak traffic periods
tion zones
Inadequate pro- High All soldiers will wear protective clothing, Low
tective clothing KEVLAR helmets, and hearing protec-
and equipment tion

Figure 14-12. Risk-management work sheet

Miscellaneous Field Data 14-33

 Glossary

°C degree(s) Celsius
°F degree(s) Fahrenheit
1LT first lieutenant
1SG first sergeant
1st first
2nd second

A5 type of explosive (composition A5)

A&O assault and obstacle platoon
AA avenue of approach
AAR after-action review
abs absolute
AC hydrogen cyanide
ACE armored combat earthmover, M9
ACR armored cavalry regiment
act actual
AD air defense
ADA air-defense artillery
ADAM area denial artillery munition
AFB assault float bridge
AFV armored fighting vehicle
AHD antihandling device
alt alternate
alum aluminum
AM ante meridian
amp amphere(s)
ANT antenna
AO area of operations

Glossary-1
FM 5-34

AP antipersonnel
APC armored personnel carrier
APDS armor-piercing discarding sabot
APERS antipersonnel
approx approximately
ar armor
arm armored
ARTEP Army Training and Evaluation Program
arty artillery
ASAP as soon as possible
ASL assistant squad leader
asslt assault
AT antitank
ATACMS Army Tactical Missile System
ATD antitank ditch
atk attack
atom atomic
ATTN attention
AUD audio
AUG August
avail available
AVLB armored vehicle-launched bridge
AVLM armored vehicle-launched MICLIC
AXP ambulance exchange point

B4 type of explosive (composition B4)

B/P be prepared
bde brigade
bdg bridge
BDU battle-dress uniform
BEB-SD bridge-erection boat-shallow draft
BIFV Bradley infantry fighting vehicle
bio biological

2-Glossary
 FM 5-34

blk blocks
BMP amphibious infantry combat vehicle (Soviet threat
vehicle)
bn battalion
bo blackout
BP battle position
bps bits per second
brg bridge
BTR amphibious armored personnel carrier (Soviet threat
vehicle)
BTU British thermal unit(s)

CL centerline

C2 command and control

c-to-c center-to-center
C4 composition 4
cal caliber
CAM chemical agent monitor
CASEVAC casualty evacuation
CATK counterattack
CATV community antenna television
cav cavalry
CBR California bearing ratio
cbt combat
CBU cluster bomb unit
CCIR commander’s critical information requirements
CCP casualty collection point
CDF cumulative distribution function
CDM chemical downwind message
cdr commander
CDS container delivery system
CE compaction effort

Glossary-3
FM 5-34

CEO communication-electronics operation

CEV combat engineer vehicle
cfc chlorofluorocarbon
cfs cubic foot (feet) per second
CG phosgene
cgo cargo
cGyph (cGy) centigray (centigrade per hour)
CHAN channel
chem chemical
CINC commander in chief
CK cyanogen chloride
cl class
CLR clear
cm centimeter(s)
CML chemical
co company
COA course of action
COMSEC communications security
cos cosine
CDS container delivery service
CP command post
CPR cadiopulmonary resuscitation
CPT captain
CPU chemical protective undergarment
CRB change review board
CS combat support
CSS combat service support
CT cipher text
cu cubic
cu ft cubic foot (feet)
CUE setting on a radio
CX phosgene oxime

4-Glossary
 FM 5-34

DA Department of the Army

DC District of Columbia
DD double double (Bailey bridge)
DEC December
dec decontaminate
deg degree
degs C degrees Celcius
degs F degrees Fahrenheit
demo demolition
dep dependent
det detonator/detonating
DGN degrees grid north
diam diameter
dist district
div division
DMG degrees magnetic north
DODIC Department of Defense Identification Code
DPICM dual-purpose, improved conventional munition
DS double single (Bailey bridge)
DT double triple (Bailey bridge)
DTG date-time group
DTN degrees true north

ea each
EA engagement area
ECCM electronic counter-countermeasure
EEI essential elements of information
el elevation
elev elevation
EM enlisted member
EN engineer
eng engineer

Glossary-5
FM 5-34

engr engineer
ENGR engineer
EO Executive Order
EOD explosive ordnance detachment
EPW enemy prisoner of war
eq equipment
equip equipment
ERF electronic remote fill
ERI engineer restructure initiative
ERP engineer regulation point
est estimated

FCTN function
FB far bank
FDC fire-direction center
FEBA forward edge of the battle area
FH frequency hopping
FIST fire-support team
FM frequency modulated
FM field manual
FO forward observer
FPF final protective fire
FPL final protection line
FPOL forward passage of lines
fps foot (feet) per second
frag fragmentation
FRAGO fragmentary order
freq frequency
FS factor of safety
FS far shore
FSE fire-support element
FSO fire-support officer
ft foot (feet)

6-Glossary
 FM 5-34

ft-lb foot (feet) pound

Ft fort

g gram(s)
GA tabun (chemical)
gal gallon(s)
GB sarin (chemical)
GD soman
GEMMS Ground-Emplaced Mine-Marking System
GI government issue
gm gram(s)
GN grid north
GPBTO general-purpose barbed-tape obstacle
GPS Global Positioning System
GWL groundwater level

HA hazard area
HC hydrogen chloride
HD mustard
HDP hull defilade postion
HE high explosive
HEAT high-explosive antitank
HEI high-explosive incendiary
HEI-T high-explosive incendiary tracer
hel helicopter
HEMMS hand-emplaced minefield marking set
HEMTT heavy, expanded, mobility tactical truck
HEP high-explosive plastic
HEP-T high-explosive plastic tracer
HE-WAM hand emplaced-widemarea munition
HHC headquarters and headquarters company
HI high

Glossary-7
FM 5-34

HL mustard lewisite
HM hazardous material
HMMWV high-mobility, multipurpose wheeled vehicle
HN host nation
HN nitrogen mustard
how howitzer
HP holding power
HQ headquarters
hr hour(s)
hvy heavy
HW hazardous waste

ICM improved capability missile

ID identification
ID inside diameter
IDA improved dog-bone assembly
IEDK individual equipment decontamination kit
IFV infantry fighting vehicle
illum illumination
in inche(s)
inf infantry
IOE irregular outer edge
IPB intelligence preparation of the battlefield
IPS improved plough steel
ISU integrated sight unit
ITV improved TOW vehicle

JUN June

kbps kilobits per second

kg kilogram(s)
km kilometer(s)
km/hr kilometer(s) per hour

8-Glossary
 FM 5-34

kmph kilometer(s) per hour

kt kiloton(s)

L left
L lewisite
LAW light antitank weapon
LB local battery
lb pound(s)
LD load
LET light equipment transporter
LMTV light mobile tactical vehicle
LO low
LOC lines of communication
LOGPAC logistics package
LOS line of sight
LP listening post
LRA local reproduction authorized
LRP logistics release point
LRS link-reinforcement set
LTR light tactical raft
lube lubrication

M medium
m meter(s)
M-S Miznay-Scherdin
m/hr meter(s) per hour
maint maintenance
MAN manual
MAR March
max maximum
mc megacycle
MCRP Marine Corps reference publication

Glossary-9
FM 5-34

MDI modernized demolition initiators

MDMP military decision-making process
mech mechanized
MEDEVAC medical evacuation
MEL maximum engagement line
MET management engineer team
METT-T mission, enemy, terrain, troops, and time available
MG machine gun
MGB medium girder bridge
MGN mils grid north
MHz megahertz
MICLIC mine-clearing line charge
MID mechanized infantry division
min minute(s)
min minimum
MKT mobile kitchen trailer
MLG millimeters grid north
MLM millimeters magnetic north
MLRS Multiple-Launch Rocket System
MLT millimeters true north
mm millimeter(s)
MMN mils magnetic north
MN magnetic north
MOPMS Modular-Pack Mine System
MOPP mission-oriented protective posture
MOS minimum operating strip
MOUT military operations on urbanized terrain
MP military police
mph mile(s) per hour
MPS meter(s) per second
MPS modified plough steel
MRD motorized rifle division
MRR motorized rifle regiment

10-Glossary
 FM 5-34

MSR main supply route

MT maneuver target
mt metric ton
mtd mounted
MTN mils true north
MTO message to observer
MTOE modified table of organization and equipment
MTP mission training plan
MTV medium tactical vehicle
mtzd motorized

NA not applicable
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NB near bank
NBC nuclear, biological, chemical
NCO noncommissioned officer
NCOIC noncommissioned officer in charge
NCS National Communications System
NCS network control station
NLT not later than
NM nautical mile
No. number
NP nonpersistent
NS near shore
nuc nuclear
NVD night-vision device

O/O on orders
OB obstruction
obj objective
OBM outboard motor
obs obstacle

Glossary-11
FM 5-34

OCOKA observation covering concealment, obstacles key

terrain
OD outside dose
OEG operational exposure guidance
OIR other intelligence requirements
OMC optimum moisture content
OP observation post
OPCON operational control
OPLAN operation plan
opns operations
OPORD operation order
ops operations
OPSEC operations security
org organization
organ organization
ORP object release point
OT observer target
oz ounce(s)

P persistent
PA power amplification
para paragraph
PD pressure detonating
PDF principle direction of fire
PDM pursuit deterrent munition
PIP product improvement plan
PIR priority intelligence requirement
pkg package
PL phase line
plat platoon.
pls palatized load system
plt platoon
POL petroleum, oils, and lubricants

12-Glossary
 FM 5-34

PS plough steel
psi pound(s) per square inch
PSYOP psychological operations
PT plain text
PTT push-to-talk
PWR power

R right
RAAM remote, antiarmor mine
RAP rocket-assisted projectile
RCLR recoiless rifle
rd round
RDX cyclonite
RE relative effectiveness
recon reconnaissance
REM remote
RF radio frequency
ROE rules of engagement
RP reference point
rt route
RT radio transmitter
RTO radio/telephone operator
RV receive variable
RXMT retransmit

S&T supply and transport

S south
S2 Intelligence Officer (US Army)
S3 Operations and Training Officer (US Army)
S4 Supply Officer (US Army)
SALUTE size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment
SAW squad automatic weapon

Glossary-13
FM 5-34

SC single channel
SCATMINE scatterable mine
SCATMINWARN scatterable minefield warning
SD self-destruct
SDK skin decontamination kit
sec’y security
sec section
sec second(s)
SEE small emplacement excavator
sep separate
SEP September
SIG signal
sin sine
SINCGARS Single-Channel, Ground-to-Air Radio System
sit situation
SITEMP situation template
SL squad leader
SLAM selectable lightweight attack munition
smk smoke
SOEO scheme of engineer operations
SOF special operations forces
SOI signal operations instructions
SOP standing operating procedures
SOSR suppress, obsucre, secure, reduce
sp self-propelled
spot round sent up to help aid in target (spot) acquisitions
spt support
sq square
SQ squelch
sqd squad
sqdn squadron
SS single single (Bailey bridge)
SSN social security number

14-Glossary
 FM 5-34

STANAG standardization agreement

STB super tropical bleach
STBY standby
STO store
susp suspicious
SWC safe working capacity
SYNC synchronize

TACSOP tactical standing operating procedures

tan tangent
TBD to be determined
TC tank commander
TC training circular
TCP tactical command post
TD tank division
TD triple double (Bailey bridge)
TDP turret defilade position
temp temperature
TF transmission factor
TF task force
tgt target
TLP troop-leading procedure
tm team
TM technical manual
TMAS Thermal Mine Acquisition System
TNT trinitrotoluene
TO theater of operations
TOC tactical operations center
TOE table of organization and equipment
TOW tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided missile
TRADOC United States Army Training and Doctrine Command
trk truck

Glossary-15
FM 5-34

TRP target reference point

trp troop
TS triple single (Bailey bridge)
TST test
TT triple triple (Bailey bridge)
TTP tactics, techniques, and procedures

UMCP unit maintenance collection point

unk unknown
US United States
USAES United States Army Engineer School
USAF United States Air Force
USCS Unified Soil Classification System
UTM universe traverse mercator
UW upwind
UXO unexploded ordnance

VDR2 radiac set

veh vehicle
VHF very high frequency
vic vicinity
VOL volume
VS thickened G-agent
VT virtual terminal
VX thickened G-agent

W west
w/ with
w/bo with blackout
w/o without
W/T wheeled/tracked
WASPM wide-area side-penetrator mine, M84
WHSP whisper

16-Glossary
 FM 5-34

WO warning order
WP white phosphorus
WRP weapon reference point
wt weight

X completed/executed obstacle
XO executive officer
Z zulu

Glossary-17
Ref.fm Page 1 Wednesday, April 7, 1999 1:20 PM

References
SOURCES USED
These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication.

International Standardization Agreements

STANAG 2002 NBC (Edition 7). Warning Signs for the Marking of
Contaminated or Dangerous Land Areas, Complete Equipments Supplies
and Stores. 26 November 1980
STANAG 2021 ENGR (Edition 5). Computation of Bridge, Ferry, Raft, and
Vehicle Classifications. 18 September 1990.
STANAG 2036 ENGR (Edition 4). Land Mine Laying, Marking, Recording,
and Reporting Procedures. 2 December 1987.
STANAG 2047 NBC (Edition 6). Emergency Alarms of Hazard or Attack (NBC
and Air Attack Only). 27 March 1985.

Joint and Multiservice Publications

FM 20-400/MCRP 4-21C. Military Environmental Protection. To be published
within six months.
FM 5-430-00-1/AFJPAM 32-8013, Vol I. Planning and Design of Roads,
Airfields, and heliports in the Theater of Operations—Road Design.
26 August 1994.

Army Publications
AR 385-10. The Army Safety Program. 23 May 1988.
AR 385-63. Policies and Procedures for Firing Ammunition for Training,
Target Practice and Combat. 15 October 1983.
AR 600-55. The Army Driver and Operator Standarization Program
(Selection, Training, Testing, and Licensing). 31 December 1993.
ARTEP 5-145-32-MTP. MTP for the Engineer Bridge Company. 19 July 1991.
DA Pam 385-1. Small Unit Safety Officer/NCO Guide. 22 September 1993.
FM 5-36. Route Reconnaissance and Classification. 10 May 1989.
FM 5-125. Rigging Techniques, Procedures, and Applications. 3 October 1995.
FM 5-170. Engineer Reconnaissance. 5 May 1998.

References-1
Ref.fm Page 2 Wednesday, April 7, 1999 1:20 PM

FM 5-34

FM 5-277. M2 Bailey Bridge. 9 May 1986.

FM 5-250. Explosives and Demolitions. 30 July 1998
FM 3-7. NBC Field Handbook. 29 September 1994.
FM 5-424. Theater of Operations Electrical Systems. 25 June 1997.
FM 5-446. Military Nonstandard Fixed Bridging. 3 June 1991.
FM 6-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Observed Fire. 16 July
1991.
FM 7-8. Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad. 22 April 1992.
FM 10-71, Petroleum Tank Vehicle Operations. 12 May 1978.
FM 20-31. Electric Power Generation in the Field. 9 October 1987.
FM 20-32. Mine/Countermine Operations. 29 May 1998.
FM 21-10. Field Hygiene and Sanitation. 22 November 1988.
FM 90-7. Combined Arms Obstacle Integration. 29 September 1994.
FM 90-13-1. Combined Arms Breaching Operations. 28 February 1991.
FM 100-14. Risk Management. 23 April 1998.
FM 101-5. Staff Organization and Operations. 31 May 1997.
TC 5-210. Military Float Bridging Equipment. 27 December 1988.
TC 20-32-3. Foreign Mine Handbook (Balkan States). 15 August 1997.
TM 5-5420-209-12. Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Improved
Float Bridge (Ribbon Bridge) Consisting of: Transporter CONDEC Model
2280 (NSN 5420-00-071-5321) CONDEC Model 2305 (5420-01-173-2020)
PACAR Model 9999 (5420-01-175-6523) Southwest Model RBT (5420-01-
175-6524) Interior Bay CONDEC Model 2282 (5420-00-071-5322)
CONDEC Model 2307 (5420-01-173-2022) Space Model 66981 (5420-01-
175-6526) Ramp Bay CONDEC Model 2281 (5420-497-5276) CONDEC
Model 2306 (5420-01-174-8084) Space Model 6698R (5420-01-175-6525).
15 September 1993.
TM 5-5420-212-12. Maintenance Manual for Medium Girder Bridge (MGB)
(NSN 5420-00-172-3520). 18 April 1985.
TM 5-5420-212-12-1. Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual
Link Reinforcement Set for the Medium Girder Bridge (NSN 5420-01-139-
1503). 5 October 1984.

DOCUMENTS NEEDED
These documents must be available to the intended users of this
publication.

References-2
Ref.fm Page 3 Wednesday, April 7, 1999 1:20 PM

FM 5-34

DA Form 1248. Road Reconnaissance Report. July 1960.

DA Form 1249. Bridge Reconnaissance Report. 1 July 1960.
DA Form 1250. Tunnel Reconnaissance Report. 1 January 1955.
DA Form 1251. Ford Reconnaissance Report. 1 January 1955.
DA Form 1355. Minefield Record. March 1987.
DA Form 1355-1-R. Hasty Protective Row Minefield Record (LRA). October
1997.
DA Form 1711-R. Engineer Reconnaissance Report. May 1985.
DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. 1
February 1974.
DA Form 2203-R. Demolition Reconnaissance Record. June 1998.
DA Form 5517-R. Standard Range Cards (LRA). February 1986.

References-3
 Index

A Claymore, 7-14
abatis, 9-13 communications, 1-54
AP SCATMINEs. See scatterable equipment, 1-57
mines, AP visual signals, 1-68
AP. See minefields, antipersonnel conversion factors, 14-30
AT SCATMINEs. See scatterable CPR. See cardiopulmonary
mines, AT resuscitation procedures
AT. See minefields, antitank
D
B demolitions, 9-1
battle tracking, 5-6 abutment, 9-39
borehole method, 9-51 bridge, 9-25
bridges intermediate-support, 9-39
medium girder, 10-20 reconnaissance, 9-41
rope, 12-14 detonating-cord wick. See borehole
method
C
calculations E
ACE/ACE team HDP, 8-34 electrical wire, 14-3
ACE/ACE team TDP, 8-31 equipment
charge, 9-8 threat, 2-10
dozer team HDP, 8-28 expedient surfaces
dozer team TDP, 8-25 over mud, 4-19
camouflage, 8-48 over sand, 4-24
cardiopulmonary resuscitation explosive characteristics, 9-4
procedures, 1-47
charges F
ammonium nitrate satchel, 9-50 fire team, 1-15
bangalore torpedo, 9-51 fire-support
boulder-blasting, 9-19 equipment, 1-28
breaching, 9-14 procedures and characteristics,
counterforce, 9-18 1-20
cratering, 9-20, 9-47 formulas
platter, 9-49 abatis, 9-12
shaped, 9-48 adjustment for lateral shift, 1-23
steel-cutting, 9-8 antenna length, 1-55
timber-cutting, 9-11 any triangle, 14-11
triple-nickle forty, 9-39 breaching, 9-14
checkpoints, 8-55 number of charges, 9-17
chemical agents, 1-30 bridge-abutment demolition, 9-40
chemical-agent detector kit, 1-40 cables

Index-1
FM 5-34

cable clips, 10-11 ribbon bridge, number of interior

clip spacing, 10-11 bays, 10-3
deadman length, 10-16 right triangle, 14-11
distance between towers, 10-10 road gradient, 3-3
distance from tower to route-classification, 3-2
waterline, 10-15 runoff estimate, 11-8
FB bearings, 10-29 sector of circle, 14-11
H for jack launch, 10-26 segment of circle, 14-11
H for push launch, 10-25 slope computation, 3-3
initial sag, 10-14 sphere, 14-11
length of master cable, 10-10 steel-cutting, 9-9
mean depth of a deadman, stream velocity, 3-23
10-15 supplementary wire, 6-3
minimum thickness of tactical wire, 6-3
deadman, 10-16 temporary class number, 14-14
NB bearings, 10-29 trapezoid, 14-11
tower height, 10-14 trigonometric functions, 14-8
tower offset, 10-15 water source capacity, 3-24
tower-to-deadman distance, fuses, 7-28
10-17
tower-to-deadman offset, G
10-17 Gator. See minefields, scatterable
circle, 14-11
class number of nonstandard
combinations of vehicles, 14-15 H
convert load to amperes, 14-3 haul capacity, Class IV/V, 7-3
counterforce charge, 9-18 Hornet, 7-15
cratering, number of holes, 9-20
cube, 14-11 K
culverts, 11-9 knots, 12-3
external charges, 9-12 Baker bowline, 12-12
internal charges, 9-12 baker bowline, 12-3
minimum safe distance, bowline, 12-3, 12-7
detonating explosives, 9-2 bowline on a bight, 12-3, 12-8
number of mines and minefield butterfly, 12-3, 12-11
rows, 7-2 carrick bend, 12-3, 12-6
number of nails needed, 14-7 cat’s paw, 12-3, 12-10
percent of S, 11-2 double bowline, 12-3, 12-7
percent of slope, 3-22 double sheet bend, 12-3, 12-6
prism or cylinder, 14-11 figure eight, 12-3, 12-4
protective wire, 6-3 figure eight with an extra turn,
pyramid or cone, 14-11 12-3, 12-11
radius-of-curvature, 3-2 French bowline, 12-3, 12-9
range deviation, 1-24 overhand, 12-3, 12-4
rectangular parallelepiped, 14-11 running bowline, 12-3, 12-8
rectangular parallelogram, 14-11 single sheet bend, 12-3, 12-5
regular polygons, 14-11 Spanish bowline, 12-3, 12-9

2-Index
 FM 5-34

Speir knot, 12-10 ADAM/RAAM, 7-12

spier, 12-3 Gator, 7-13
square, 12-3 Modular Pack Mine System,
wall, 12-3, 12-5 7-9
Volcano, 7-11
L scatterable (See also scatterable
lane-marking mines), 7-9
levels, 4-14 mines, 7-28
standard, 4-9 modernized demolition initiators, 9-1
full, 4-12 MOPMS. See minefields, scatterable,
initial, 4-10 Modular Pack Mine System
intermediate, 4-10
North Atlantic Treaty O
Organization (NATO) obstacle, 5-11
Standard Marking, 4-17 C2, 5-4
latrines, 1-52 emplacement authority, 5-4
Lc values classification, 5-4, 5-5
arch and portal bridge attacks, control, 5-6
9-27 obstacle-control measures, 5-6
top attack, 9-26 obstacle-effect graphics, 5-6
lines of communication, 2-1 obstacles, 6-1
LOC. See lines of communication antivehicular, 6-10
antivehicular wire, 6-9
M barbed-wire, 6-3
M18A1. See Claymore cattle fence, 6-7
M86. See pursuit deterrent munition concertina, 6-4
M93. See Hornet hedghogs, 6-12
MDI, 9-53 knife rest, 6-8
firing systems, 9-53 log hurdles, 6-12
MDI firing system (stand-alone), 9-55 post, 6-12
MDI. See modernized demolition tanglefoot, 6-8
initiators tetrahedrons, 6-12
MEDEVAC. See medical evacuation trestle-apron fence, 6-9
medical evacuation, 1-48 wire, 6-1
MGB. See bridges, medium girder obstacle-type abbreviations, 5-11
minefield, 2-4 operational symbols, 14-19
detection and removal, 4-2 operations
minefield markings, 7-26 dismounted, 1-15
minefields squad, 1-15
antipersonnel, 2-4, 2-5 mounted, 1-15
antitank, 2-5 orders, 1-1
conventional, 7-1 combat, 1-1
hasty protective row, 7-8 fragmentary, 1-1
row, 7-1 movement, 1-12
standard-pattern, 7-7 operation, 1-1
scatterable warning, 1-1

Index-3
FM 5-34

overwatch S
bounding, 1-15 safe bearing capacity, 10-53
traveling, 1-15 SCATMINE. See scatterable mines
scatterable mines
P AP, 7-36
patrol characteristics, 7-36
combat, 1-17 AT, 7-37
reconnaissance, 1-17 characteristics, 7-37
PDM. See pursuit deterrent munition emplacement authority, 5-4, 5-5
positions, 8-1 selectable lightweight attack
fighting munition, 7-15
deliberate, 8-40 SINCGARS. See Single-Channel,
hasty, 8-37 Ground-to-Air Radio System
individual, 8-1 Single-Channel, Ground-to-Air Radio
modified, 8-37 System, 1-60
protective, 8-42 SLAM. See selectable lightweight
weapons, 8-1 attack munition
vehicle, 8-23 soil characteristics, 11-1
procedures specific weights and gravities, 14-1
breaching, 9-22
pursuit deterrent munition (M86), T
7-14 task force, 5-2
TF. See task force
R threat, 2-1
ranges of common weapons, 14-16 mid- to high-intensity, 2-3
Raptor, 7-19 offensive operations, 2-11
reconnaissance, 3-5 organization, 2-5
bridge, 3-6 armor and mechanized based,
demolition, 9-41 2-8
engineer, 3-24 infantry based, 2-6
ford, 3-24 time-distance conversion, 14-12
road, 3-5
tunnel, 3-18 V
water-crossing, 3-18 vehicle dimensions and classifications,
risk assessment, environmental, 13-5 14-12
risk management, 14-31
environmental, 13-1
river crossing, 10-1
anchorage systems, 10-8
bridging, 10-2
rafting, 10-2
rocks
engineering properties, 11-5
rope, 12-1
wire, 12-2
route classification, 3-1

4-Index
 FM 5-34
30 August 1999

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

DENNIS J. REIMER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff

Official:

JOEL B. HUDSON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army

DISTRIBUTION:

Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed
in accordance with DA Form 12-11a, Requirements for Engineer Field Data
(Qty rqr block No. 110026).
Combat
Operations

Threat

Reconnaissance

Mobility

Defensive Operations and Obstacle

Integration Framework

Constructed and
Preconstructed Obstacles

Landmine and Special-Purpose

Munition Obstacles

Survivability

Demolitions and Modernized Demolition

Initiators (MDI)

Bridging

Roads and Airfields

Rigging

Environmental-Risk
Management

Miscellaneous Field
Data
PIN: 021493-003